Tina CS 





i =B 257? O36 


or, Bale tate Obie Prt dows 











GIFT OF 
Harold Wheeler 







































Ff Be OLE EMBER SR AEA BERT IP IE OPSEAE 
: =A} _——— SS 


Pe READE ee + Reraeaas 
Yj Se a. 35 
i 4 ? ks os SS eS 
s A, ray » — - s 
ZN 


eT 


» yale 





ct Wid HAW CM wim eee 
on So 


‘ La: 
Af ene ~——— ~ rr - ee yee 
RCL UF ole) ea CBT ET ee) ue 
edie alte AA tetind oe fA! sd" 


tama 


= 
fem Alem 


ervyuserete 


SES 


8 ha 
es Se 















































- 
f 
7 


: 


1Z 
a 
Arn 





") 
J ye . 





i cate 


ru 


reeed 


* 
uJ 








rf? ‘} 


Sreicer's German Series. 


Sharld heeler 


AHNS METHOD 








OF LEARNING THE 


GERMAN LANGUAGE, 


REVISED. cote tes 


BY 


‘GUSTAVUS FISCHER. 


FIRST (PRACTICAL) COURSE. 


FIFTH EDITION. 


NEW YORK. 


HK. Steiger. 


1878, 


Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, by 


f £ a A 
/ {AP ee ; 
+ 

ivi ate 
elitist: 
ad *e e* « -* o* 

i 
E. Sreicger, New Yorx, 


Printer and Electretyper. 


K. Steiger, 
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


GIFT OF 


Wae AX i Wheele A 


PRE EAGE: 


Ahn’s METHOD OF LEARNING THE GERMAN LANGUAGE con- 
sists of a Practical and a Theoretical Course. The former 
contains progressive exercises in both languages, beginning 
with the simplest elementary forms, and in-the natural pro- 
gress of the course gradually expanding with the different forms 
of inflection and the most important parts of Syntax, till the 
student may be considered sufficiently familiar with the lan- 
guage to begin reading German text. The different exercises 
are preceded by special vocabularies and as many rules as the 
student would need to render the exercises without mistakes. 
The First Part of the Practical Course is preliminary, beings 
intended to give the beginner a GENERAL idea of German forms 
and constructions. The Second Part reviews the preliminary 
exercises in a more complete and systematic manner; and the 
Third Part chiefly contains exercises on tenses, moods, re- 
filexive and compound verbs, conjunctions, prepositions and 
syntactical idioms, A general vocabulary, appended to the 
Course, facilitates the rendering of words that have already 
occurred in previous exercises without being repeated in the 
special vocabularies. 

For the gradual acquirement of German handwriting a spe- 
cial, and—we hope—efficient provision has been made at 
the close of the Course, designed to accompany the single ex- 
ercises, but so that the beginner may or may not make use of 
it, the Course itself being in neither case interfered with. 
Pronunciation has been treated in a preliminary chapter. 

The Theoretical Course contains a brief and systematic 
abstract of grammatical rules, to be studied either separately, 
or in connection with the Practical Course. Paradigms have 
been given no more than necessity required, but those given 
are complete. Hither Course will occupy no more than one 


il 968: O05 


— WwW — 


College-Term. In schools a longer time should be devoted to 
the study of each Course. 

The Editor has in the First and Second parts of the Prac- 
tical Course mainly reproduced Ahn’s work as it was originally 
written by him, but the numerous errors and practical incon- 
gruities and inconveniences have been carefully corrected. 
Many sentences in the exercises have been rejected, and others— 
have been introduced whenever it seemed necessary. Many 
new rules have been added, since in the original work no 
account was taken of the method of instruction peculiar to 
our country. The Third Part of the Practical Course, the 
weakest in Ahn’s original Method, has been entirely re-written 
in such a way as Ahn probably would have adopted, had he 
written for this country and at this day. The stock of words 
used, has been greatly enlarged, since the small number of 
words in Ahn’s Method by which he builds up and rebuilds all his 
sentences, are always leading to great practical inconveniences, 
however desirable it may be to confine first beginners to as few 
words as possible. 

With the same view, the whole Theoretical Course, which 
in no wise comes up to the requirement of this country and of 
this time, has been entirely written anew, and only the general 
division of the work into chapters has been retained. In this 
Theoretical Course the grammatical material has been selected 
in accordance with the principle that the student should master 
the leading facts of the language in the directest and plainest 
way possible, in order to arrive by the shortest road at the 
reading of text. Due regard has been always paid to ‘con- 
- versational language’ in the Practical Course, while in the 
Theoretical Course the preparation of the student for ‘reading’ 
has been the main object. 

We deemed it necessary to add a complete index referring 
to both Courses, not doubting that this addition will meet the 
approval of all that shall use the work. 

An absolute or even relative ‘completeness’ cannot be ex- 
pected in a work of this kind. Indeed, no grammar extant 
can be considered ‘complete.’ No grammarian can do more 
than select ‘something’ out of the inexhaustible store of the. 


aS eames 


living language,-discover the secret and silent laws which have 
produced the forms of this ‘something,’ and call a collection 
of such laws ‘a grammar.’ How many details should be thus 
presented, depends on the tact of the grammarian. But to 
the ‘end of language’ no grammarian has yet come, and in 
this sense all grammars are (more or less) incomplete. 
Whether we have been successful in our selections, whether 
or not we have omitted many things that ought to have been 
explained, and explained many things that ought to have been 
omitted, the reader must decide. - Indeed, in this method of. 
‘selection’ consists almost the whole art of a grammarian. In 
the present work many rules will be found which will be in 
vain looked for in other grammars, and many will not be found 
which other grammarians are in the habit of presenting, 
Whatever may be thought of such, deviations from the accus- 
tomed ruts (often regarded as almost sacred with a peculiar 
superstition), we always had our reasons for either the 
omission or the addition, which reasons, although they have 
nowhere been presented, the attentive reader will without 
difficulty discover ‘between the lines’. But we hope that no 
essential law of the language will be missed, and that both the 
teacher and the student will find explicitness in our different 
statements to be commensurate with the lesser or greater 
difficulty of the subject. A glance at any of the different 
chapters, for instance those on adjectives, prepositions, con- 
junctions and the subjunctive mood, will fully bear out these 
remarks. The terminology adopted is the one which is uni- 
versally used in Germany. Nobody will now find fault with 
such expressions as ‘STRONG and WEAK verbs or nouns’. All 
recent German grammarians and lexicographers (we believe 
without a solitary exception) have adopted these terms*, and 





* The expressions stRonG and wEAK in reference to declension and con- 
jugation have been introduced by JacosB Grimm in the first edition of his 
German Grammar (1817). The following ideas have led to the universal 
adoption of these terms. A strona verb has strength enough in its root to 
dispense with the help of auxiliary endings in the imperfect (jlagqen—fclug); 
but the roots of weak verbs have no such power, attaching auxiliary endings 
for that purpose (foben—lobte). A strona Noun or ApsEcTIVE is one which 
forms distinctive endings, so that it may be declined without the help of an 
article, and yet show its case, gender and number (Fijh—Fifes, etc.), while 


Sis 5 WATE Aes 


we consider it greatly reprehensible to substitute for ‘technical 
terms’ expressions made by ourselves for whatever reason; not 
to mention the inconvenience arising from the use, along with 
our grammars, of German dictionaries in which the familiarity — 
of the reader with such terms is presupposed. The owner of 
the worD ought to determine its NAME. Should we not be 
greatly astonished, if in an English grammar, written in 
Germany, owr terms ‘POSSESSIVE CASE, PROGRESSIVE FORM, 
POTENTIAL MOOD, etc.’ were ignored, and replaced by terms 
unintelligible to us? The reading pieces in Ahn’s original 
Method are replaced by other pieces which seemed to us better 
adapted to the wants of the beginner. 

We close with the remark that (except the parts of Ahn’s 
original work mentioned above) no use has been made and no 
authority followed of any existing grammar. We have tried 
to develop the different laws of the language from the material 
which during a close study of German literature for almost a 
quarter of a century, has accumulated under our hands. The 
form and’ wording given to our rules and their methodical 
_ arrangement are the results of our experience, during an almost 
equal period, as a teacher of German in College, in schools of 
both sexes, and as an instructor of private pupils. - We doubt. 
not that errors will be detected, and we shall be grateful to 
have our attention called to them. 





WEAK nouns and adjectives do not distinguish cases or numbers, and. hence 
must have an auxiliary article or other word to show in what case, number 
or gender they are placed (Der gute, de8 gutem, dem gutett, etc.; des Hirten, 
dem Hirtem, etc.). Formerly the strong verbs were improperly called 1rRE- 
GULAR Or OLD verbs, , 


“NEW BRUNSWICK, April 18th, 1871.. 


Gustavus Fischer. 


oy The Pronunciation. 





|. THE ALPHABET. . 
‘ioe German Alphabet is composed of the following 26) letters: 
Printed. Written. Printed > Written. Pri rinte d. 


"7 « Ma i J, Shs" Zyl 
bSLBWsk AAR |s 28 


04. Cc FYLIit Wt t 








There are three softened vowels (Umlaute) : 


tei ZeObnBodi 


(ale) (Le) (Ue) 
_ COMPOUND AND DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 


ch “7b, ck At, st Ye x Ny 


a A$ sch ZY fy Ms, 


t Ji, eZ . 





a eee 


ll. SIMPLE VOWELS. 
. Every vowel is pronounced uniformly in whatever words 
of ne laiguage. ‘iti my: oecur. But every vowel-sound has a 
lOpg and a short, pronunciation. 

“2; : Vowels folioweg, by:two consonants or a double con- 
sonant are generally pronounced short; followed by one con- 
sonant they are generally long. 

3. 1, a long is pronounced almost like a in father: Bater, 
laben, Frage. 

Short a has no exact equivalent in English: %lter, danfen, 
Galle. 

4. ©, e long is pronounced almost like a in care, as the 
first syllables in the words Mebe, geben, Cfel. 

Short ¢ is pronounced like e in end, as: Geld, Fett, and the 
first syllables of denfen and Ende. 

The letter e in final syllables and in inflectional endings has 
generally the English obscure sound, as the two last syllables 
in {ebende, fanfterer, and the final syllables in Vater, Garten, Tage. 
There is no other obscure sound in German but e. 

5. S$, i long is pronounced like English ee (tree), as: Tiger 
Bibel, mir. 

Short i has the sound of 7 in 72J or in: Grrthum, finden, Rind, 
6. ©, 0 long is pronounced like English 0 in hope: Ofen, 
~ oder, Bol, roth. 

Short o has no exact equivalent in English. It keeps a 
middle between English w in sun and o in hope: fommen, Gold, 

jollen. | 
7. WU, u long is pronounced like English o in move: Slut, 
Fug, Bruder, gut. 

Short u sounds like w in full or double oo in : good: Meiund, 
Thurm, Butter, mufte. 

8. 9), ) occurs in modern orthography only in words taken 
from the Greek language, and is pronounced as German t 
would be in its place: Gyftem, Styl. 


, 


tl SOFTENED VOWELS. 


1. 9%, a long is pronounced as German long e (English a in 
care): Sibel, Vater, Bar, ftits (or jtets). 


A a. 


Short & has exactly the sound of German short e: dlter, 
@irten, Malte. — 

2. ©,% long has no equivalent sound in English; it. is 
pronounced as French ew in few: bife, tinen, Githe. 

Short 6 has no equivalent in English; it is pronounced as 
French ew in jeune: finnen, villig, Korner. 

3. IL, it long has no equivalent sound ‘in English; it is pro- 
nounced like French win rue: iiben, miide, Gitte. 

- Short it has no equivalent in English and is pronounced like 

French u in nul: Mtiiller, ftitrmifch, wiinf{cher. 


OBsERVATION.—In order to pronounce § the mouth must be placed in the 
position in which 0 is pronounced; but the vowel e (German) must be sounded. 
To pronounce ii, we sound the letter i (German), having the mouth in the 
position to propounte u (German). 


lV. DOUBLE VOWELS. 


They are: aa, ee, oo. They are sounded like a, e, 0 long: 
Saal, Meer, Nios. Guard against pronouncing the double 
vowels ee and oo like English ee and oo, 


V. DIPHTHONGS. 


They are: ai, au, et, ew, du and the obsolete ay and ey. The 
diphthong ou occurs only in words taken from the French,and | 
is then pronounced like German long u, as: Courage, Tour, 
Youis. ~The diphthongs vi and oy exist in some proper nouns, 
and are pronounced like English oi: Boigenburg, Boym. All 
diphthongs have only a long sound. 

1. i (at) and et are pronounced alike, and sound like 
English 7 in wine: Raifer, Neat, leiden, Wein. 

2. {uu (au) is pronounced like English ow in hens Baum, 
laufen, blau. 

3. @u (en) and au are pronounced alike, and have no exact 
equivalent in English. Their pronunciation comes nearest to 
English o¢ in boil: Freund, Cule, Feuer, Saute, Baume, Grauel 
(Greuel). 


Se Len 


VI. SIGNS OF LENGTHENED VOWELS. 


1. Frequently the length of vowels is marked by certain 
letters, connected with them. These are: 1) the consonant by 
2)the vowel e, 3) the repetition of the same vowel. 

2. The letter as lengthening sign (in which case it, of 
course, is not pronounced) occurs after all the vowels: mablen, 
Sebhler, ihr, wohl, Uhr; Whre, Kihler, Mtiihle. 

8. The letter e as lengthening sign occurs only after i. 
The combination ie is always pronounced like i (German) long: 
regieren, Steg, viel, diefer. — 


Oxss.—But final i¢ in some words taken from foreign languages is pro- 
nounced like English ia in Virginia: Familie, Sulie, Lilie. The same is the 
case in regard to the endings ier of national nouns and ien, as: Spanier, 
Galtier, Wfien. 


4. The doubling of vowels takes place with a, e and 0, but 
not with t, u,or the softened vowels and the diphthongs. 


Oss.—Since very frequently the length of vowels is not indicated at all 
(see the examples above, No. II.), all these lengthening signs are deemed 
superfluous, and modern orthography has a tendency to diminish them, and 
spell words with the simple vowels only. 


Vii. CONSONANTS. 


1. %, 6 is pronounced as in English, but 6 final has-the 
sound of p: ab, Weib. Trieb. 

2. G,c before e, i, y, & and 6 is pronounced like és: Gafar, 
Citrone, Cylinder, Colibat, Ceder. 

Before consonants, the vowels a, 0, u, it, and at the end of 
words it is pronounced like f: Garneval, Cocarde, Creole, Clerus, 
Curie, Citraffier, Pic. 


Oxns.—The letter ¢ is*only used in words taken from foreign languages. 
Many writers have commenced to discard the use of c, if pronounced like f, 
and substitute the letter f for it. Words taken from the Greek should be al- 
ways spelled with f: Rritif, Gofrates. 


8. Gh, &h, in the beginning of words, occurs only in words 
taken from foreign languages,and is generally pronounced like 
k, as: Ghor, Ghrijt, Charafter. But before i it has the German 


nent Miadenoe 


aspirate sound (see below): Ghina, Chirurg. In words taken 
from the French, it is pronounced like sh, when it has this 
pronunciation in French: Chef, Chaujjee, Charlatan. 

In the middle or at the end of the word its pronunciation is 
twofold, depending on the preceding letter. Neither has an 
equivalent in English. It has a guttural sound after a, 0, u, 
au: Dach, machen, Loch, pochen, Buch, fuchen, auch, rauchen. It has 
an aspirate sound after any other letter or diphthong: Blech, 
jtechen, Zeichen, riechen, Licht, michtig, midhte, flichtig, raudern, euch, 
Meidchen, welcher, RbSchen. 

hs or ch is generally pronounced like x (ks): Wachs, fechs, 
Fuchs, Biicdhje. But if 8 or { belongs to an inflectional ending, 
or the ch belongs to a different radical in which the following 8 
or j is not contained, the ch has either the aspirate or guttural 
sound: de8 Buchs (genitive of Buch), hodhft (superlative of hod), 
nachjt (superlative of nahe), wachfamt (from wadjen and fam), nadh- 
jehen (from nach) and febet). 
~ 4. D, d at the end of words is pronounced like ¢: eid, 
Rind, wild, bald. 

5. ©, g at the beginning of a syllable is prenomneed like g 
in good: gehen, grok, Wagen, legen. 

At the end and the middle of syllables the pronunciation is 
not fully settled. After i and te all give it the aspirate pro- 
nunciation of dh: felig, Sieg, fiegte. After n at the end of words 
it has the pronunciation of k: Gejang, lang, Ring. After other 
letters some pronounce it invariably like g in good, while others 
give it the pronunciation of ch, either aspirate or guttural ac- 
cording to the previous letter. Both pronunciations have 
equally good authority: Tag, Weg, legt, tagt, beugt, faugt, Vogt, 
Trug. 

Oxss.—Some pronounce q, if between two vowels, with a sound between 
t) and g (hard). This pronunciation is inelegant and has no good authority, 
In Gegen. Regen, wagen, the g ought to be pronounced exactly as in good. 
_ It is best for beginners to pronounce g in all instances'as g in good, except 
when it is final after n ori. The student is then sure to have always an un- 
objectionable pronunciation. 

If 1g is not final it has the pronunciation of English ng in singer, bringer 
or springer, not as ng in longer, stronger or finger, as: Finger, lange, Menge, 
Siingling, fangen. 


oe {eee 


q in words taken from the French is pronounced, as it would be at the 
same place in that language: hard in Gouverneur, soft in Courage (softer 
_ than sh), 


6. , § at the beginning of words is pronounced like / in 
hill: Haus, hart, heben. In the beginning of syllables not initial, 


the aspiration is less perceptible: Reihe, rauher. In the middle — 


or at the end of syllables § is a sign of lengthening the preced- 
ing vowel, and is not pronounced: Bahn, friih, mebr. 

7. $, j is pronounced like the English consonant y in yet: 
Sahr, Foch, jung. 

8. §,£is pronounced as in English, but is never mute: 
Knie, Knabe. In place of doubling f, the double consonant ¢ is 
used, which is pronounced like & in bake, and always indicates 
that the previous vowel is short: bacen, Stic, Uder, Blic. 

9. ©,j,%. The long is used in the beginning and middle 
of syllables; at the end of syllables the short 8 only is used. 
The capital S and long j are always pronounced like English z 
in zeal; short $ has always the sound of hissing s in hats: 
Sommer, Reije, Haufer, Haus, [o8. | 

jj always has the hissing sound of ss in passing: Waffer, 
wijje, miiffen. This double letter can never stand at the begin- 
ning and at the end of words (except when Roman type is used). 

B has the hissing sound of ss: Fup, Flu, fliegen, grof. If 
Roman type is used, § is generally written ss: Fuss, Fluss, ete. 

Sch, fh is pronounced like sh in shoe: Schatten, Schule, Tiich, 
jehlafen, fchwer, fchreien. 

St, jt, and Gp, fp in the middle an at the end of syllables 
are pronounced as in English, but in the beginning of syllables 
they sound like sht, shp: beft, laften, Wespe, Stein, fpringen, ver- 
ftehen. 

10. bh, th is not neon ouiand like English th, but like simple 
t: That, roth, Wuth, Srrthum. 

11. ¥%, v has the sound of 7 But in iui taken from 
foreign languages, it is pronounced like English v: ater, viel, 
verftehen, vor; but Venus, Vincent. Some pronounce »p like Eng- 
lish v in the word revel. 

12. 8, is pronounced like English v; Welt, Wurzel, wollen. 


. 


Ate | el 


13. 3, 3 sounds like ts, never like English 2: abl, 3ahm, 
zwei, Herz. 

# has the same sound (fs), but is only used after a short 
vowel: Slik, Mugen, fesen. 


; Vill. ACCENTUATION AND SYLLABICATION. 


1. In German as well as in English words, the principal 

accent is placed on the radical syllable. The stress imparted 
‘by the accent, is stronger in German than in English. | 

2. The secondary accent is more frequently applied in 
German than in English. Entirely without accent (obscure) 
are only those prefixes and endings which contain the vowel e. 
Thus the word ar’beitjam has its principal accent on the first 
syllable, and each of the other two syllables has a secondary 
accent. On the other hand the word verlet’zendere has only one 
accent, which is on the second syllable, the first syllable being | 
a prefix, and the third, fourth and fifth syllables inflectional 
endings, all of which are pronounced with the obscure sound. 

38. Compound nouns have their principal accent on the 
radical syllable of the first component, as: Sfitng’lings-WUlter. 
Verbs compounded with prepositions have their principal ac- 
cent generally on the preposition, as: an’fangen. For other 
compound words the rules are more complicated, and should 
be learned by practice. 

4. The syllables of German words are not divided.accord- 
ing to English principles. Except in compound words, no re- 
gard is paid to the derivation of a word. Single consonants in 
the middle of a word belong to the following, not to the pre- 
ceding vowel, and of more than one succeeding consonants the 
first is joined with the preceding and the next, with the following 
vowel. Thus we divide: le-gen, Hau-fer, lie-ben, although the 
consonants g, f, 6 belong in respect to derivation to the first 
syllables. 








PART I. 
zi s 

Singular. i) bin, Tam; 

dit bift, thou art; 

er ift, he is; 

fie ift, she is; 
Plural, wir find, we are; 

ihr jeid, you are; 

fte find, they are. | r 


Gut, good; grof, great, large, big; Flein, little, small; retd), rich; arm, poor; 
jung, young; alt, old; miide, tired; franf, ill, sick. 


Yoh) bin grog. Ou bift Mein. Gr ift alt. Sie ijt gut. Wir 
find jung. Shr feid reich. Sie find arm. Bin id) groR? Bift du 
miide? Sifter frank? ft fie jung? Sind wir reid)? Seid ihr 
arm? Gind fie alt? | 

| aS YO, a 7 be kW 

‘I am finder Thou MG; young® We are yA “They are 
rich. Art thou sick? You are poor. Is she old? Are you 
sick ? Are they Boot? ? Hei is tall I (gro6) Am I ROE, ? 


ld 
ae 
: PY 


, 
e A : 2 i , oy 
os a. " AAAs ok Ant 


" Richt, note gf gh. 
Start, strong; treu, faithful; faut, idle, lazy; fleifig, diligent; bife, wicked, 
naughty; traurig, sad; gliidlic), happy; hoflich, polite. 


Bijt du bije? Yoh bin nicht bife. Gr ift traurig. Wir find nicht 
ftarf. Sind fie tren? Bift du nicht glitcklich? Shr fetd nicht fleipig. 
Sie ift nicht faul. Sit er nicht miide? Wir find uae avin. Sind 
fie nicht Aire eh eae nicht trant. j ee | | } 


\ 


vi ¥ eas « it 
I am not tall. They are idle. She is not ill. We are not 
happy. He is not short (flein). Are you not tired? They are 


a eee 


not rich. Is he not diligent? Thou art not strong. They are 
not happy. He is not polite. Are they not faithful? Is she 
not rich? He is not wicked. | 


5. 
Masculine nouns: der Vater, the father; der Garten, the garden. 
Feminine nouns: die Dtutter, the mother; die Stadt, the town, city. 
Neuter nouns: a8 Rind, the child; da8 Haus, the house. 


Shin, beautiful, fine; fang, long; hod), high; neu, new; und, and; jebr, very. 


Der Vater ijt gut. Die Meutter ift traurig. Oas Kind ijt faul. 

Der Garten ift nicht fehr lang. Die Stadt ijt grok und reid. Oas 

_ Haus ift nicht hoch. Bit der Garten fchin? Gft. der Vater frank? 

Sit das Kind nicht fleigig? ft das Haus neu? Der Vater und die 
Mutter find glitclich. 


Ozs.—All German substantives begin with a capital letter.—When two ~ 
or more substantives follow each other, the article must be repeated before 
each, unless they are all of the same gender.—The article (der, die, Das) is 

_ different for the three genders.—The gender of nouns denoting persons is al- 
most always masculine for males, and feminine for females.—Objects not be- 
ing persons are either masculine, or feminine, or neyter. LAO 

Haan rL- ittce See @ ae , 
Svee | CAAA AL KA. BA ey Y Ne. & 

The house is not new. The mother and (the)* child are 
il. The town is very beautiful. The child is not naughty. 

The father is very old. The house and (the) garden are very 
large. Is the mother not happy? ‘The house is not very old. , 
Is the garden not very fine? The house is very small. 


5% io ./f! P 1. fim Wat 
OUrtw, Raa Kind, at 
Od 42. Bex , = inf -~ 2 fo KA av 
< . “steer Baum, thistree. “— ~ , 


! — Demonstratives: 1 Fem. — dieje rau, this woman. 
fa Neut. diefes Pferd, this horse. 
Der Mann, the man; der Verg, the mountain; die Blume, the flower; das 
enfter, * window; pifen, open; 4itfrieden, gar d, a pleased 
oder, Or. © ty: py ¥ ane dell Reet . Lf 





* A palin “by P hich bas: or grr ‘wotdls are enclosed, means that 
such words are not used in the language from which the translation is made, 
and that they must, be translated. A bracket enclosing a word denotes that 
the word ig employed in the language only from ery) arr translation is - 
made. po words must be omitted in py ig, ; { 

| hel t- ae 


bees | eel eye ery oe 
A 


5 Vm 
Sg. tA? | int a Via_t a t ~OQ if : I be 4 
, se 2 4 





wpe RES TAU 


Diefer Mann ijt jehr arm. Diefes Fenfter ijt fehr hoch. Diefe 
Blume ift fhin. Diefes Pferd ift jung-und ftarf. Git diefe 
Srau gliclich ? Diefer Vater und diefe Miutter find nicht zufrieden. 
Diefer Baum ijt fehr grok. Dieje Frau ijt arm und franf. Diefes 
Kind ift fehr hoje. Diefer Mtann ijt nicht Hoflich. Bift du traurig 
oder Frant? 


8. 


This woman is tired. This mountain is not high. Is this 
child good or naughty? This man is not satisfied. This child is 
not very diligent. Is this garden small or large? Art thou 
not contented? This window is not open. Is this house old or 
new? ‘This tree is very fine. Is this manrich or poor? This 
town is very dull (fangweilig). 


9. 
Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Indefinite article: ein, eine, ein, a; 
ee met, meine, - mem, my; 
He aeneentoys: dein, deine, dein, thy. 


Der Bruder, the brother; die Sdhwefter, the sister; die Feder, the pen; das 
Bud, the book; der Freund, the friend; Sarl, Charles; Luije, Louisa; wo, 
where; bier, here; noch, still, yet; aber, but. 


Mein Bruder ift traurig. Meine Schwefter ift franf Mein 
Buch ijt fdhon. ft dein Garten grok? Git deine Feder gut? ft 
dein Pferd flein? Karl ijt noch ein Kind. Berlin ijt eine Stadt. 
Yuife ijt meine Schwefter. Dein Bruder ift mein Freund. Dein 
VBater ijt nicht hier. Wo ijt mein Sud? Fit mein Buch nicht hier ? 

_ Hit deine Weutter noch franf? Yoh bin noch nicht miide, aber dein | 
Bruder und deine Schwefter find fehr mide. 


10. 


Charles is my brother. This child is my sister. Thou art © 
my friend. Thy garden is very large. Where is thy mother? — 
A friend is faithful.. Is this child thy brother? This horse is 
still young. Where is my pen? Thy penis here. Louisa is : 

Y eaee a child. Thy brother is idle. My friend is very diligent. ; 
F 


Ce ae ae a Oe NS A Fo et et Oe ee ee ad 
Vv 


hed LAA ~ = “y” F 
AA | : Re i ome ate 
1L 
Masc. Fem. Neut. 
unfer, unjere, unfer, our; 
Possessives: + euer, euere, euler, your; 
ihr, . ihre, ifr, their. 


Der Sohn, the son; die Todter, -o daughter; die Shiire, the door; immer, 


always. 


Ops,—The third person plur. of the English possessive (thei), and the 
second person plur. of the personal pronoun (you) are translated by the same 
word ifr. Whether in a given sentence ifr is a possessive or a personal pro- 
noun must be determined by the connection. 

The personal pronouns du and its plural ifr, and the corresponding pos- 
sessive dein and ener are used to address near relatives, intimate friends and 
children. Du and dein refer to one person, ifr and euer to more than one. 

Other persons less intimately connected, are addressed by the third per- 
son plural! of the personal pronoun (Gie) and the same person of the possessive 
(Shr), which are then written with a capital initial: @ie find, you are (lit- 
erally they are); Shr Freund, your friend (literally their friend), It makes here 


no difference whether one person is addressed or more than one. . 


Thus the German ihr (Shr) may have three meanings: you, your, their. 
For a fourth meaning (her) see No. 25. 


Unjer Garten ijt grok. Unjere Miutter ijt franf. Unjer Pferd 


ijt fon. Diefer Mann ift unfer Vater. Cuer Bruder it Hier. 


Karl ift ener Bruder und Luije enere SGechwefter. Cuer Haus ijt 


— grog. Diefer Mann und dieje Frau find fehr traurig; ir Sohn ijt 


immer franf. Rarl und Luife find glitclich; thre Weutter. ijt zufrte- 
den. Y$hr fetid tranvig; ift euer Vater noch frank? Sit Shr Sohn 
fleifig? Sift Hhre Todhter 3ufrieden? Wo ift Fhr Buch? Fhre 
Thiire ift immer offen. Sind Sie mein Freund? CSind Sie nod 
zufrieden ? 

12. 


Our father is good. Our mother is little. Our house is 
great. Thy father is our friend. Your town is beautiful. 
Your garden is large. Your horse is small. Charles and 
Louisa are sad; their mother is sick. This man and this 
woman are happy; their friend is here. Your son is not al- 
ways diligent. Is your child sick? Is Charles not your friend? 


Where is your sister? They are not here; they are sick. You 
are tired, and your sister is sad. Are you not sick? 


es” BD ace 


13. 
Klein, little, small; _— Feiner, smaller; 
alt, old; alter, older; 
grok, great; grifer, greater; 
jung, young; jiinger, younger; 
fleifig, diligent; fleifiger, more diligent. 


Niislich, useful; ungliiclich, unhappy; der Hund, the dog; die Rate, the cat; 
die Sonne, the sun; der Ptond, the moon; als, than, as. 


Oxss.—In forming the comparative of an adjective, the radical vowel qa 
generally changes into d; 0 into 6; and u into ij, All comparatives, without 
exception, are formed by adding er to the positive. 


Mein Bruder ijt alter als ish. Yeh bin jiinger als mein Freund. 
Karl ijt groper als Luife. Diefer Mann ijt grofer als wir. Der 
Hund ijt treuer als die Rake. Das Pferd ijt fchiner und niiglicher 


alg der Hund. Diejes Kind ift fleipiger alg du. Sie find glitcflicjer - 
alg Shr Bruder. Karl ijt ftirfer als ich. Wir find zufriedener als ~ 


ihr. uife tft hoflicher als deine Schwejter. Gyt Ghr Bruder jiinger 
alg Cie? Gr ift alter, aber fleiner als ich und Sie. Gr ift ur 
glitcélicher als Sie, aber Sie find trauriger als er. 


14, 


My brother is more diligent than thou. Thou art not 
younger than he. He is taller and stronger than I. Your son 
is younger than this child. The moon is smaller than the sun. 
Art thou older than I? This dog is finer than this cat. Your 
sister is politer than you. I am more contented than thou. 
You are richer than we. We are more unhappy than you. 
This dog is more useful than your horse. Is your sister older 
than my mother? ; 


LS. 
Gut, good; befjer, better; “ 
hod, high; hiber, higher; 


diejer, diefe, diejes, this, this one; 


Das Gijen, the iron; bas Blei, the lead; der Stahl, the steel; die Erde, the — 


earth; jdwer, heavy; hart, hard; theuer, dear; fo, 80, as; 3u, too, 





a. er 


Oss.—Demonstrative and all other adjective pronouns are placed in the 
gender of the nouns to which they refer. 

As in the second part of a comparison is translated by al; in the first 
part by fo. 


Mein Buch ijt fchiner als jenes, Wreine Feder ijt beffer als diefe. 

Der Stahl ijt hirter als das Gijen.. DOiefer Berg ijt hoher als jener. 

Die Kage ift nicht fo tren als der Hund. Oas Blei ijt nicht fo hart 

- al8 das Gifen. Sit Shr Haus nicht gréper als jenes? Fit das 

2 Blei theurer al8 das Cijen? Der Ptond ijt nicht fo grok als die 

Erde. Diefes Kind ift fleiRiger als jenes. ene Frau ijt drmer als 
dDiefe. Unfer Garten ijt nicht fo lang und fchon als diefer. 


. i 


16. 


«. (The) lead is heavier than (the) iron. This tree is not so 

high as that. “Is this book not better than that? Our garden 
is smalier than this one. i This house is higher than that 
one. (The) iron is more useful than (the) lead. I am not so 
old ashe. (The) lead is not so dear as (the) steel. Our town 
is larger and finer than this one. +-We are not so rich as this 
man, but we are more contented than he. 


17. 
Singular. ich habe, I have; 
du haft, thou hast; 
er, fie hat, he, she has; 
Plural. —_ wir haben, we have; 
ihr habt, Ste haben, you have; 
. fie haben, they have. 
Die ihr, the watch; das Meffer, the knife; Qedht, right; Unrecht, wrong; 
Heinrich, Henry; Ludwig, Lewis; fiir, for; auch, also; warum, why.—I am 
right, lam wrong, ich habe Recht, ich habe Unrecht (not ich bin Recht or Unredt). 


Yeh habe Recht. Ou Haft Unrecht. Gch habe ein Bud. Ou 
 haft eine Feder. Mein Bruder hat eine Uhr. Wir haben ein Haus. 
a/ She Habt ein PBferd. Karl und Lnife haben eine Rake. Haft du 
eine Schwefter? Hat diefer Mann eine Todter? Habt ihr etn 
Rind? Diefe Wbhr ift fiir meine Mutter. Diefe Keder ift fiir Karl. 
Haben Sie noch Yhre Mutter? Warum op du mein Mteffer? Yh 
habe dein ci nicht. 





a 


on A ae 


Charles, hast thou my pen ? Prouisa, hast thou my book? 
Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book=T'hou art right. 
My son is wrong. We have a book anda Feet oh you also 
a horse and a watch? This knife is for Henry: x's this watch 
for thy mother? Has your friend a knife {Charles and Lewis 
have a horse. ~Has your father still a siste er 1X Is this flower 
for my daughter? ‘Are you right or wrong? { Have you my 
pen {I have not your pen. ® 


19. 


Past Participles: gefauft, bought; verfauft, sold; gefunden, found; verlo- 
rent, lost; genommen, taken; gejehen, seen. 


Oss,—In all principal sentences the past participle is detached from the 
auxiliary and placed at the end of the sentence, — Jtoch nicht (not nicht nod), 
not yet. 


Yeh habe mein Buch verloren. Sais du mein Meffer gefunden? 
Soh habe dein Meffer nicht gefunden. Wo ijt meine Feder? Habt 
ihr meine Feder? Wir haben deine Feder nicht. Mein Vater hat 


diefes Pferd gefauft. Wir haben unfer Haus vertauft. Wo hajt du 


meine Uhr gefunden? Warnur haben Gie meine Uhr genommen? — 
Feh habe Fore Mutter und Fhre Schwefter gefehen. Warum hat $hr 


Vater diefes Haus nicht gefauft? Hat dein Bruder meine Feder ge 


nommen ? Gr hat deine Feder nicht genommen. Haben Sie meine 
Ubr noch nicht gefunden ? 


20. 
- Where hast thou found this book? Have you lost your pen? 


Has your father. bought this horse 24 Why have you sold your , 
watch? Why have you not taken my pen? My brother has © 


found thy knife. ++ We have seen thy mother. YI have not yet 
seen this woman. Charles and Lewis have lost their mother; 
they are very sad. 


21. 
Nominative. Accusative. Objective. 
| Der Vater, den Vater, the father; 


diefer Vater, diefen Vater, this father. 


’ 








Der Kinig, the king; der Hut, the hat; der Sto’, the stick, the cane; det 
Brief, the letter; oft, often; fdjon, already. 
Past Participles: gejdhrieben, written; erhalten, received. 


Oss.—The direct object is placed in the accusative case. The accusative 
in the neuter and feminine is the same as the nominative.—lIf the article or 
pronoun belongs to two coordinate nouns of different genders, the article and 
pronoun must be repeated in German before every noun: der Sater und 
die Mtutter, the father and mother. 


Sh habe den Konig gejehen. Haft dou den Brief erhalten? 
Meine Schwefter hat den Brief noch nicht gefdhrieben. Heinrich hat 
_den Sto verloren. Ntein Vater hat diejen Garten und diefes Haus 
gefauft. Wo habt ihr diefen Hund und diefe Rake gefunden? Fh 
habe diejen Mtann fcon oft gefehen. Warum haben Sie diefen Hut 
genomimen? Wir haben diefen Brief gepeinen Hat dein Bruder 
dDiejen Stock berloren ? 


22. 

* We have sold the house and the garden. Have you bought 
this dog and this horse ?x I have seen the man and woman, 
the son. “and daughter. I have not written this letter. Where 
-have you found this book and cane?X Has thy brother bought 
this tree? This letter is for this man. Hast thou lost this 
| hat? AHast thou not taken this book and pen? * Hast thou 
already seen the king? I have not yet seen the king. 


23. 


Nom. ein Garten, Nom. mein Hund, 

: Accus. einen Garten, agarden. = Accus. meinen Hund, my Seg 
Der Vogel, the bird; der Stubhl, the chair; der Tijd), the table; ber Bleiftift, 
_the pencil; der Jadjbar, the neighbor; froh, vergniigt, glad. 


vs Oxss.—The accusative masculine sing. of all adjective pronouns (See No, 
9, 11, 15) is formed by the ending en, Thee of this ending is genally 
dropped in unfer and euer (unfern, euern),—The preposition fiir requires the 
next noun in the accusative, , 


Mein Bruder it fehr froh; er hat einen Vogel. ~Hajt du eter 
Brief erhalten ? Sh habe meinen Hut verloren. Haben Sie meinen 


Hund fon gefehen? Wir haben einen Tijd und Stubt gefauft. 


aN 


Mein Bruder hat deinen Sto genommen. Wo haft di deinen Blei- 
jtift gefauft? Wir haben unjern Vater und unjere Viutter verloren. 
Sch habe Fhren Brief nicht erhalten. Hat dein Bruder unfern Gar- 
ten und unfer Haus fchon gejehen? Unfer Nachbar hat den Konig 
gejehen. Haft du diefen Vogel gefauft oder jenen? 


24. 


a + We have lost our dog. This man has lost a son and a 


daughter. Where have you found my pencil? Have you al- 
ready seen my brother and mother? 4I have bought a hat for 
my sister. Our neighbor has found thy knife and cane. 


~ Where ue: thou bought this table? Thy brother has taken 


my chair. “Have you written a letter? We have found this 
stick and that one. “We have not seen your pen. +I have 
written this letter for my father. 


25. 
Nom. fein, jeine, fein ms ihr, thre, thr 
Accus. a jeine, fein, t his, 18. ihren, ihre, ihr, ae 


Gelefen, read (past participle); gefannt, known; der Onfel, the uncle; die 
Tante, the aunt; der Fingerhut, the thimble; die SGdheere, the scissors; Frau, . 
wife, woman. 


Mein Freund ijt traurig; fein Vater und jeine Vtutter find franf. 
Meine Cante ijt zufrieden; thr Gohn und ihre Cochter find fehr 
fleigig. Heinrich hat feinen Stoc, feine Uhr und fein Meffer ver- 
foren: uije hat ihren Fingerhut, thre Feder und ihr Buch verloren. 
Suer Onfel hat fein Haus und jeinen Garten verfauft. Diefe Frau 
hat ihren Ntann und ihr Rind verloren. Diefe Tochter hat einen 
Brief fiir ihre Witter gefdrieben. Rarl hat feinen Vater nicht ge-' 
fannt. Die Tante hat deinen und meinen Brief gelefen. 

f | 

26. 
* The father has lost his son. The mother has lost her — 
daughter. My uncle has sold his watch. YOur aunt has sold ~ 
her scissors. Henry has found his pencil. Louisa has found — 
her thimble.S Ihave seen this man and his son, this woman 
and her daughter. My mother has lost her pen and her knife, 





7 : “ al - 
: ; far? xs f : 
: Pea (F i 4 & $ eal 
| ws . 
; F 
j J 
1 1 


“My brother has taken his hat. I have seen your aunt; has 
she still her horse ue This man is very sad; he has lost his 
wife. Charles has written a letter for his father. xMy aunt 
has bought this book for her son, 


27. 


Nominative. die Piutter, the mother; diefe Mutter, this mother; 
Genitive. der Dtutter, of the mother; _ diefer Ntutter, of this mother. 


Die Ptagd, the maid-servant; die Kinigin, the queen; die Ytadbarin, the 
(female) neighbor. Past Participles: angefommen, arrived; abgerei{t, departed. 


Die Witter der Konigin ift angefommen. Der Vater der Nach- 
barin ijt abgeretft. ch habe den Garten der Tante gefehen. Haben 
Sie den Bleiftift der Schwefter gefunden? Dieje Frau ijt die Gdwe- 
fter der Machbarin. Diefer Mann ift der Bruder der Wtagd. Das 
Kind diefer Frau ijt immer frank. 


28. 

The hat of the mother is beautiful. The sister of the queen 
is not beautiful. Is the father of the seryant arrived?» Are 
you the brother of the (female) neighbor? I am the sister of 
this woman.» Hast thou taken the chair of the sister? »Have 
you seen the horse of the aunt ? ~ We have known the father 
of this servant. The pencil of this woman is too small. 


29. 
Masc. Nom. der Sater, the father; _ diefer Vater, this father; 
Gen. de3 Baters, of the father; _diefes Baters, of this father; 
Neuter. Nom. da8 Kind, the child; diefes Rind, this child; 


Gen, de8 Kindes, of the child; Diefes Kindes, of this child. 
Der Schuhmader, the shoemaker; der Schneider, the tailor; der Gartner, the 


gardener; der Kaufmann, the merchant; der Arzt, the physician; das Zimmer, 
the room; das Bolf, the people; der Herrfcher, the ruler. 


Oxs.—All masculine and neuter nouns ending in er, el, en take 8 in the 
genitive singular. All other neuter and most of the other masculine nouns, 
not ending in e, take e8 or in the genitive. Feminine nouns are indeclinable 
in the singular. — 


——- Hie Magd des Schneiders ift franf. Der Sohn des Nachbars ijt 
noch fehr jung. Die Blume des Giirtners ift fehr fchin. Der Gar- 


ay oe 


ten de8 Kinigs ijt fehr grok. Der Konig ijt der Herrjder des Volfes. 
Die Frau des WArztes ift immer zufrieden. Yeh habe den Garten des 
Onfels gejehen. Wir haben das Pferd deS Raufmanns gefauft. 
Haft du den Bleiftift des Bruders genommen? Wo ift die Mtagd des 
Sdhuhmachers? Die Thiire des Zimmers ift immer offen. Die 
Tochter diefes Mannes ijt abgereift. Wir haben die Meutter diefes 

Kindes gefaunt. Der Garten diejes Haujes ijt flein. 


30. 


\ This man is the brother of the gardener. This woman is 
the sister of the shoemaker. This child is the son of the tailor. 
The door of the house is not open.~I have seen the son and 
daughter of the physician. We have seen the horse of the 
merchant. ~The servant of the neighbor is the sister of this 
gardener. Why is the door of this room open? “We have 
known the son of this merchant. The dog of the neighbor is 
faithful. \ The mother of this child is arrived. 


31. 
Nom. ein Gater, eine Mutter, ein Rind; 
Gen. eines Vaters, einer Yiutter, eines RKindes. 


Der Regen{dhirm, the umbrella; bas Federmeffer, the penknife; geftern, yester- 
day. 


Oxs.—The pronouns mein, dein, fein, thr, unjer, euer, are declined like ein, 
eine, eit; jener (that) .is declined like biefer. 


Sind Sie der Sohn eines Arztes? Fh bin bet Sohn eines 
RKaufmanns. Haben Sie das Haus meines Nachbars gefauft? Der 
Bruder deines Freundes ijt geftern angefommen. Wo ift der Megen- 
jchirm deines Onfels ? Haft du das Zimmer meiner Schwejter ge- 
jehen? Wir haben den Brief deiner Mtutter gelefen. Mein Ontel 
hat das Haus hres Vaters gefauft. Gd) habe den Stok Hhres 
Bruders verloren. Oer Garten unfers Nachbars ift fehr grof. 
Unjere Mtagd ijt die Gochter eures Gartners. Wo ijt der Regen- 
{chirm unferer Mutter? Karl hat den Fingerhut feiner Schwefter ge- 
nommen. uife hat das Federmeffer ihrer Tante genommen. Die — 
Mutter jenes Kindes ijt franf. Oer Sohn jener Frau hat mein 
Meffer gefunden. 


N AAA OCL" Pe na ae Se Te ee I age a I er er eee eee 


32. 


~ [have found the hat of the child, Are you the servant of 
my uncle? Iam the servant of your tailor. The penknife of 
thy brother is very good.~-The pen of thy sister is not good. 
The house of our aunt islarge. Henry has lost the letter of his 
father. Louisa has found the pen of her brother.~-Is the 
garden of our uncle as fine as this one? (See No. 15.) We 
have found the hat of your neighbor’s son (the hat of the son 
of your neighbor). Lewis has read the letter of his friend. 
Louisa has bought a flower fora child of her sister. 


33. 


Nom. der Bruder, the brother; 
Dat. dem Bruder, to the brother; 


Nom. da8 Buch, the book; die Schwefter, the sister; 
Dat.. dem Buche, to the book; der Schwefter, to the sister. 
SYNOPSIS. 
Nom, der, die, da8, diefer, diefe, dicjes; 
Gen. de8, der, de8, Diejes, Ddiefer, dtefes; 
Dat. dem, der, dem, diefemt, Ddiefer, diefent; 
Ace. den, die, da8, Diejer, diefe, diefes. 


Gebhdrt, belongs. Past Participles: geliehen, lent; geqeben, given; gefdicdt, sent; 
ver|prodjen, promised; gezeigt, shown. Die Freundin, the (female) friend. 

Oss. 1,—The dative singular of nouns ending ‘in er, el, en takes no end- 
ing. The dative singular of nouns that take e8 or 8 in the genitive has the 
ending e, but this ending may be always dropped. 

2. The dative generally precedes the accusative. 

3. The English emphatic form of the verb, formed by the auxiliary to 
do roust always be rendered by the common form in German, without any 
auxiliary: Does he belong (belongs he), gehirt er? He does not belong (he be- 

longs not), er gehirt nicht. 


HDiefes Haus gehirt dem Ontel meines Rachbars. Sener Garten 
gehirt der Tante meines Freundes. F$ch habe dem Vater einen Brief .. . 
gejdricben. Sie hat der Freundin ihrer Schwefter cine Blume gegee “< 
ben. — Karl hat der Sehmefter fein Federmeffer geliehen. Haft du 
dei Urste mein Buch gefchict?  Feh habe diefem inde einen Vogel 
verfproden. Heinrich hat diefer Frau unfern Regenfdirm geliehen. 


Pd 


Luife hat diefem Manne unfern Garten gezeigt. Sch habe meine — 
Seder dem Freunde meines Bruders gegeben. Diefes Buch gehort 


meinent Vater nicht. 
34. 


This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs to — 


the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle and 
aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend (fem.) of 


your brother. My uncle has sent a watch to the son of your — 


neighbor (fem.). Have you given a vhair to this child? Have 


you lent an umbrella to this woman? }Does this garden belong ~ 


to the king? No, it belongs to the sister of the king.4, We 
have sold our horse to the friend of our uncle. ,Does this knife 
belong to this or that servant? 


; ey 35 . 
v . Nom, ein Such, a book; eine Feder, a pen; 


Dat. einem Buje, to abook; — einer Feder, to a pen, 


Der Vetter, der Coufin, the cousin, die Bale, die Coufine, the (female) cousia; 
Amalie, Amelia; die Girtnerin, the (female) gardener or the gardener’s wife. 


x2 a pes eee 5) ein Such meines Vaters; 


a oe ot Hy ee ein Such meiner Miutter. 


SYNOPSIS, 
Nom, ein, eine, ein, meit, mete, mein, unjer, unfere, unfer; 
Gen, eines, einer, ecine8, meines, meiner, meines,  wnjeres, unferer, unjeres; 
Dat, einem, einer, einem, meinem, meiner, meinem, unfjerem, unjerer, unfjerem; 
Acc, einen, eine, ein, meinen, meine, mein, unjeren, wunjere, unjer.* 


Diejer Garten gehirt einem Schuhmacher. Diejes Meejfer gehirt — 


einer Wragd. Yuife hat meinem Bater einen Brief gefchrieben. 
Heinrich hat meiner Yiutter eine Blume gegeben. Gd) habe Hhrem 
Onfel mein Pferd geliehen. Sie haben unferer Tante Fhr Haus 
verfauft. Sarl at feinem Freunde cin Buch gefchictt.- Winalie hat 
“threr Sreundin einen Fingerhut geltehen. Diefer Mann hat eurer 
Nachbarin einen-Vogel gefchict. Haft du meinem Vater diefe Uhr 


1 


4 


4 





j 
i 


gegeben ? Habt ihr unferer VBafe einen VBleiftift geliehen? Cine 


Mtagd meiner Meutter hat ihren Fingerhut verloren. 


* The e of the ending is generally dropped in unferg, unferm, unjern. 





36. 


* J have lent my pen to a friend of my brother’s. Hast thou 
given thy cat to a friend (fem.) of my sister’s ?Weé have given 
the letter to a servant of the physician’s. Have you sent this 
flower to our gardener? This garden belongs to my cousin 
(mase. and fem.).*+This umbrella does not. belong to your 
brother. Does this pen belong to thy brother or to thy sister? 
Has Henry written to his father or to his mother ?+Has Louisa 
written to her uncle or dunt? Have you seen the gardener’s 
wife? I have not seen her, but I have seen her brother. 


37, ! 
Sch jpreche, I speak, or I am speaking, or I do speak; 
wir jprechen; we speak, or we are speaking, or we do speak; 
id) werbde geliebt, I am loved; 
er wird geliebt, he is loved. 


Oss,—The preposition pon, of, from, is followed by the dative: von dem ! 


Pater (of, from the father). | p 
Of is translated by the genitive, if it depends on a substantive: the ~ 
father of the friend, der Vater de8 Freundes. a 


genitive. Verbs governing the genitive will be marked as such: I speak ‘of 

thy father, ich jpreche von deinem Vater. \ 
By governed by a passive verb is translated by pon with the dative: $d 3 

werde von meinem Sohne geliebt, I am loved by my son. 


——- Sch Habe das Buch Des Arztes gefehen. Haben Sie diejes Buch 
von dent Arzte erhalten? Wir haben den Garten unjers Nachbars 
gefauft. Haben Sie diefen Garten von Shrem Nachbar gefauft ? 
Soh habe diefe Uhr von meinem Onfel erhalten. Heinvic) Hat einen 
Brief von feinem Vater und feiner Mutter erhalten. Sch fpreche von 
dem Kinige und der Kinigin. Wir fprechen von Yhrem Bruder und 
Shrer Sad wefter, von dicjent Manne und diefer Frau. Sprechen 
Sie von meinem Better oder meiner Baje? sees wird von feinen 
Bater und es einer Wtutter geliebt. 


Of is translated by von, if it depends on a verb, not governing the + 


38. 


* T have received this horse from my friend. I have bought 
this cat of thy sister. Louisa has received an umbrella from 


tae 


n 


‘her uncle and a watch from her aunt. "I speak of this dog and 
of this cat, of this bird and of this flower. We are speaking 
of your cousin (mase. and fem.). + Amelia is loved by her 
uncle and aunt./\Our (fem.) gardener has received a letter 
from her son and daughter.7Henry is the son of this shoemaker 
and Louisa is the daughter of this tailor. 


39. 


Sihin, beautiful; fdjiner, more » beautiful; der Idonfte, the most beautiful; 
gut, good; befier, better; der befte, the best; 
hod, high; hiber, higher; der hidhfte, the highest. 
Das Thier, the animal; der Liwe, the lion; der Tiger, the tiger; das Metall, 
the metal; da8 Gilber, the silver; da8 Gold, the gold. 


Oss,— The superlative is formed by adding fte or efte, and softening the 
radical vowel, that is changing a into d, o into § and ni into ii. 


Die Rake ift nicht fo ftarf als der Hund. Der Lowe ift ftarfer 
al$ der Tiger.. Der Lowe ift das ftirffte Thier. Mein Nachbar ijt 
reidher al8 Ste; er ift der reichfte Mann der Stadt. DOas Gold ift 
jchwerer als da8 Silber, Das Cifen ijt nithlicher alS das Silber. 
Das Cijen ift das nitblichfte Metall. Lnife ijt fchiner als WMmalie; 
aber Heinrich ijt das fchonfte Kind. Ludwig ift jiinger als du; er ift 
der jiingite Sohn unjers Nachbars. Karl ijt alter als ich; er ift der 
altejte Sohn meines Onfels. Der Hund ift fehr tren. Der Hund 
ijt Das treufte Thier. Diefes Buch ift beffer als jenes. Ou bift der 
befte Freund meines Bruders. Oas Haus diefes Kaufmannes ift das 
hichfte der Stadt. Sie tit die bdfefte Frau der Stadt. 


40. 


Louisa is very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her 
sister, but the most beantifd child is Amelia. This tailor is 


the happiest man in (of the) town. }Henry i is more diligent — 


than Lewis, but Charles is the most diligent son of your friend. 


He is the oldest, but also the most wicked man in town. © 


You are not so poor as my cousin, but the poorest man is my — 
father.’ My chair is too high; this one is higher; but the 


highest chair belongs to my mother. } Your pen is very good; — 


my pen is better; but the best pen is that (die) of my father. 


# 
3 


Al. 
INTERROGATIVE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 
Nom. wer, who? 
Dat. wem, to whom? 
von wem, of whom, from whom? 
Ace. wen, whom? 
_ fiiv wen, for whom ? 
Nom. and Ace. a8, what? 

G8, it; etwas, something, anything; nidt8, nothing, not—anything; Semanbd, 
somebody, anybody; Niemand, nobody, not—anybody; oa, there, 

Oxss.— The personal pronoun of the third person has three genders: er, 
he; fie, she; e8,it. If the English # refers to things, masculine in German, 
itis not translated by e8, but by er; ifit refers to things of feminine gender, 
it is translated by fie; if to neuters by e8: the chair — it is high, dev Stuhl — 
er ift hoch; the flower — itis beautiful, die Slume—|ie ift fdjin; the book — itis 
useful, da8 Budh—e 8 ift niiblich. 


Wer ift da? Es ift der Schneider; c& ijt Heinvidh. Wer ift 
jener Mann? G8 ift der Schuhmacher; e8 ijt der Sohn des Ar3tes. 
Wer hat diejen Brief gefehrieben? Wem gehirt diefer Hund? Gr 
gehort unjerm Yachbar. Wem gehort diefe Uhr? Sie gehirt meiner 
Schwefter. Wenr haben Sie den Hut gegeben? Bon wem haben 
Gie dieje Blume erhalten? Wen haben Sie gefehen? Was haben 
Sie verloren? Goh habe nichts verloren. Haben Sie etwas gefun- 
den? . Wo ijt hr Bruder? Gr ift nicht hier. Sit Gemand da? 
MNiemand ijt da. Hat Femand meine Feder genommen? Niemand 
hat fie genommen. 


42. 


Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is that 
woman? She is the wife of the shoemaker; she is the servant 

of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your knife? To the 
_ son of the gardener. }’To whom has your brother sold his dog? 
_ To the sister of my friend. From whom hast thou received 
this bird? From the father of this woman.,¢ What have you 
bought? I have not bought anything (bought nothing). 
Of whom do youspeak? Iam speaking of your cousin. *Has 
anybody read my letter? Nobody has read your letter. Have 
you seen anything? I have seen your watch. It is here. For 


he a ee 


whom have you sent this chair? It belongs to your father. 
To whom does that pen belong? It belongs to my gardener 
(fem. ). 4" Whom have you sent ?-I have sent my maid-servant. 
Where is my pen? It is not here; it is there. 


= 4 3 + - 
INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 


Nom. weldher, welche, weldje8, which or what; 
Dat. ‘welchemt, welcher, weldjem, to which, to what; 
Acc. welthen, welche, weldje8, which, what (objective case), 
Der Tijchler, the joiner; der Rod, the coat; in, in or into; mit, with; bei, 
with (at the house of). 
Past Participles: gegangen, gone; ausgegangen, gone out; gejprodjen, 
spoken; gemadjt, made, done. 


Oxss.—(1) What is translated by welder etc. only if followed by a noun. 
(2) The prepositions mitand bei govern the dative (mit wemt, with whom etc.). 
(3) The preposition in governs the dative, if it corresponds to im, the accu- 
sative, if it means indo. 


Welcher Tijchler hat diejfen Tijch gemacht? Welche. Magd hat 
diejen Brief gejdrieben? Welchen Hund haben Sie gefauft ? Weldhe 
Uhr Haft du verloren? Welches Haus hat Fhr Vater verfanft ? 
Von welchen BVolfe jprechen Ste? Mit welchem Freunde bijt du 
ausgegangen? Gu welchem Garten hat er den Vogel gefunden? 
Welche Feder hajt du daP- Welcher Frau haft du dein Meefjer gege- 
ben? Wo haben Sie meinen Bruder gefehen? Bet Ghrem Onéel, 
bet $hrer Miutter. Ntit welcher Frau haben Sie geftern gefprochen ? 
Mit der Frau meines Machbars. Wo ijt Hein Bruder? Gr ijt in 
meinem Haufe; er ijt bet meiner iutter; bet demt Gartner. Gr tft 
in Den Garten gegangen. Karl hat feinen Bruder in da8 Zimmer 
gefchictt. Bon went haben Sie diefe Uhr ‘die ? Sch habe fie in 
dem Garten gefunden. 


44, 
* Where is your sister? She is in her garden. With whom 


has she spoken? With her cousin (fem.). Where is your 
cousin? He is with (at the house of) his friend. Is your father 


sate oO Va 


gone out? He is gone out with the physician: Which letter 
have you written? What book have youread? What have 
you found in the garden? Which pen have you taken? What 
house have you bought in (the) town? I have yesterday 
spoken with your brother at the house of your neighbor. From 
what gardener hast thou received this flower? Where have 
you lost your thimble? At the house of my father. With 
whom has (ijt) your brother departed ?4..Which cane have you 
lost? Have you sent the maid-servant into the garden?-I have 
sent the servant into the house of my father.~}~Haks (<¥ft) 
Charles gone into his room ?-What tailor has made this coat? 
My sister has made it for her brother. 


ee nN 
tt ALLE LLL ALLL! LOI 


seteccasessn ars 


45. 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
8 
SO: epi mae anid who or which (that); 
welchemt, welder, welchem 
a dem, der, dem 
ee weldjen, weldje, weldjes 
den, die, dag 
Der Apfel, the apple; die Virne, the pear; der Sdhitler, the scholar, the pupil; 
jemals, ever. 
Past Participles: gegefjen, eaten; gefpeift, dined. _ 


to whom, to which; 


- 


whom, which, that (obj. case). 


Oss.—(1)Relative pronouns are placed in the gender of the preceding 


noun to which they refer (antecedent).—(2) Clauses beginning with a relative 
_ pronoun, require the auxiliaries to be placed at the end, immediately after 


the participles.—(3) In such clauses simple verbs without participles are also 


placed at the end of the clause. 


Wir haben einen Bruder, welcher (der) fehr gro® ijt. Shr habt 
eine Schwefter, welche (die) fehr flein ift. Mtein Sohn hat cin Buch, 
welches (dag) fehr niiglich tft. Oer Garten, welchen (den) dein Onfel 


— gefauft hat, ift fehr fchin. Die Feder, welche mein Vetter gefunden 


hat, ijt fehr gut. Gd habe das Haus gefehen, welches Shr Vater 


gefauft hat. Haben Ste einen Fingerhut gefunden, den meine Schwe- 


fter verloren hat? Haft du den Apfel gegeffen, welche du in dem 
Garten gefunden Haft? Yeh habe die Birne gegefjen, die ich in der 
Stadt gefauft habe. Hier ijt der Mann, weldhem Sie Yhren Brief 
gegeben haben. Hier ift die Frau, welder wir unjern Hund verfauft 


Soe aa 


haben. Hier ift-der WArat, von dem wir fo oft fprecen. Cin MDtann, 
der von einem Freunde geliebt wird, ift reid. Hier ijt mein Machbar, 
bei dem ich geftern gejpetjt habe. Wo ift Yor Freund, mit dem Sie 
geftern gefprocjen haben? Sarl ift der befte Schitler, den ich jemals 
gefannt habe. G8 ift das thenerfte Buch, das ich jemals gefauft 
habe. Das Buch, in welchem du gelefen Haft, tft nicht gut. 


46. 7 

I have a dog which is very little. We have a cat that is 
very fine. My father has bought a horse which is beautiful. 
Your friend who has bought this house, is in (the) town. The 
woman who has made this coat, is very diligent. The child 
that has lost his penknife, is very sad. Where is the man 
| “<\ ewhom I have seen at the house of thy father? The man with | 
* whom (at whose house) we have dined, is departed. Hast 
thou found the man for whom I have bought this watch? Have 
you found the man to whom you have lent your watch 7A Have 
you seen the umbrella which my mother has bought? Hast 
thou found the pear which thy brother has lost? We have 
seen the horse which*your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble 
which you have found? “I have taken the pencil which my 
cousin has bought»< Henry has eaten the apple which his 
brother has received. Have you seen the woman of whom we 
speak?"Have you read the letter which I have written? 
Have you found the boy to whom this penknife belongs? Where 
is the pen with which you have written this letter? --The man 
-with whom you have (find) arrived, is departed¥ Your brother 
is the most diligent man that I have ever seen. . The highest 








house that is in this city, belongs to my father. gE ied 





AT. 
CORRELATIVES. 

— Derjentige, der (welder) 

Mase, br elder k | he who 
ejentge, die (welche) : 

Fem. - bie, ea le bi as she who the one that 

§ dasjenige, das (rweldjes) : 

Neuter (1) Dag, rweldjes (dag) that which 





Dasjenige, was : 
Neuter cap das, was that which (what). 
was 


—_— SY — 


Derjeige, den, the one whom (which); derjetige (der), mit dem, the one with 
whom; der (dte, da8) meine’ Gruders, that (the one) of my brother. 

Oss, — (1) The English that which, if it may be replaced by the one that, 
must be rendered by the masculine derjenige, der etc,, if it refers to things 
masculine in German. Referring to things feminine, it must be translated 
by the feminine Diejenige, die etc.: that (the letter) which we have written, derje- 
-nige (ber Grief), den wir gefdrieben haben.—(2) The second form of the neuter At 
(da8jenige, was; das, was; or was alone) is used, if the English that which may 
be replaced by what, and not by the one that, so that it refers to things ‘‘in 
general’’: That which (what) you have said, is true, da8, was (dasjenige, was or 
was alone) Gie gefagt haben, ift wahr. 


Derjenige (der), welcher (der) zufrieden iff, ijt reich. DOiefer Fine 
gerhut ijt beffer als der meiner Schwefter. Dieje Uhr ijt einer als 
Die deines Bruders. Diefes Haus ift fchiner als das unfers Mach- 
bars. Sch habe meinen Hut verloren und den meines Vetters. Wir 
haben deine Feder gefunden und die deines Freundes. Heinrich hat 
mein Zimmer gejehen und das meines Onfels. Haft du meinen 
Stock genonmmien oder den meines Bruders? Oas ift nicht deine * 
Blume, da8 ift die meiner Mtutter. Haben Sie mein Meffjer oder 
das de8 Gartners? Sprecher Sie von meinem Sohne oder von dem 
des Arztes? Das Pferd, welches wir gefauft haben, tft jiinger, als 
das Fhres Vaters. Meine Miutter ift nicht diejentge, die diefen Hut 
gefauft hat. Diefer Brief ift micht der, den ich gefdhricben habe. ~ 
Diefe Uhr ift die, welche ich gefunden habe. Was ich gelejfen habe, 
ijt fehr traurig. Der, mit dem ich gefprochen habe, ift mei Freund. 
Das, was du meinem Vater verfprocen Haft, ift noch nicht ange- 
fomimen.  DOiefes Pferd ijt theurer, als dasjenige, welches wir ge- 
fauft haben. Diefer Stahl ift nicht Harter, als der, den dein Vater 
gejchictt Hat. Diefe Uhr ijt nicht beffer als dte, welche ich deiner 
Schwefter geliehen habe. 


~ 


a a 
{fr f Le , es 48. 


Da He who is rich, is not always contented. Are you (a woman) 
the one that has taken this umbrella? She who has written 
this letter, is not in this town. y My brother is not the one to 
whom this watch belongs. ‘That horse is not that which we 
have bought. }Fhis pencil is not that which I have found. 
This table is the one which your joiner has made. This flower 


| 


| e, but is generally like the nominative; those of females in e take n. 


rs 
ad 





gdh MMT oe 


is that which your sister has sent This steel is harder than 
that which your father has sent. That which you have 
written, is sad. “ What your father has sent is here. That 
which we have read of your brother is very sad. The 
room of my neighbor is larger and higher than that of my 
friend. This umbrella is finer than that which we have bought. 
Have you taken my pen or that of my sister? This is not your 
pencil; it is that of my brother.4I speak of my book and of 
that of your friend. Louisa has lost her thimble and that of 
her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my cousin. 
My watch is better than that of my cousin (fem.). I have 
received your letter and that of your brother. He whom you 
have sent, has shown this letter to my father. ¥ My son is not 
the one for whom you have made that coate- This man is the 


one of whom we have gin iiug « Nercue steel is harder than that 
of thy friend. | 


49, 
Nom, Heinrich, Henry; Luije, Louisa; Deutihland, Germany; 
an f Henry; g.; f Louisa; | 
Gen. Heinrichs Spm de Vuifens 1 pee Deutfcdhlands, of Germany; 
Dat. Heinrich, to Henry; uijen, to Louisa; Deutidhland, to Germany; 
Acc. Heinrich, Henry; Luife or Luifen,Louisa; Deutidhland, Germany. 
Wilhelm, William; Spanien, Spain; Kiln, Cologne; 
Yohann, John; Stalien, Italy; Sriiffel, Brussels; - 
Gmilie, Emily; Preufen, Prussia; yon, Lyons; 
Sohanne, Jane; Rugland, Russia; Hauptftadt, capital; 
Srantreid, France; Wien, Vienna; RKaijer, emperor; 
geht, goes; wobhnt, lives; heiftt, is called. 


Wie heift dein Vetter ? what is your cousin’s name? whatis your cousin called ? 
Der Hut Heinrichs or Heinridhs Hut, the hat of Henry, Henry’s hat. 


Ons .—(1) Proper names of all descriptions take 8, never e8, in the geni- 
tive; those of females in e take n8, — The dative of proper names never takes 


(2) Proper names may be declined with the definite article, especially 


_ | in the dative without a preceding preposition (bem Seinvich, to Henry). If so 


declined they do not take any ending (de8 Heinrich, der Life). 
(3) Instead of the genitive of proper names denoting places, the prepo- 


sition pon with the dative is more frequent: der KRinig von Preugen, the king 
_ of Prussia (rarely: der Kinig Preufens). 


i I Saas 


(4) The English preposition to or for before names of places if depending 
on verbs of motion, is translated by nad) with the dative. At before names 
of places is translated by in with the dative. — Names of countries and cities 


are of neuter gender. 


Mein Bruder Hheifkt Heinrich und meine Schwejter heikt Luife. 
Der Vater Wilhelms ijt angefonmmen. Die Miutter Luifens ijt abge- 
reift. Gudwigs Onfel ijt jehr reich. Cmiliens Hut ijt fehr [din. 
Haben Sie diefen Hund von Heinvid) oder von Ferdinand erhalten ? 
Amalie hat dem Fohann ihre Feder geliehen. Karl hat der Emilie 
eine Blume gegeben. . Gehirt diejer Garten dem Ludwig oder der 
Karoline? Wo ijt Wilhelm? Er ift mit Karl und Fofeph ausge- 
gangen. Wobhnt Fhr Onfel in Briifjel oder in Paris? Geht Ihr 
Petter nad) Wien oder nach VBerlin? Git Paris grifer als Lyon? 
Sit Shr Freund von Kiln oder von Berlin? Wie heift dein Yach- 
bar? Gr heift Gampfon. Wie heikt die Hauptftadt von Frank 
reidh? + Wer ijt Konig von Preuken? Wie heift die Konigin von 
England? Berlin ijt die grépte Stadt (city) vom Deutfcjland. 
Petersburg ift die Hauptitadt des Kaijers von Rugland. Oer Kinig 
von Spanien ijt etn Sohn Victor Emanuels. Haft du Emilien meine 
Uhr geliehen ? . Sch habe eine Blume von Zinalien erhalten. 


50. 


4+ My cousin’s name is John. The daughter of our gardener 
(fem.) is called Jane. Art thou Charles’s or Ferdinand’s 
brother? Where are Henry and Lewis? ‘They are in John’s 
room; they are gone out with William. -Have you lent your 
pen to Henry? Who has given this flower to Louisa? We 
have received a letter of Lewis; he is at Cologne. ‘The sister 
of Charles is very small. 4Caroline’s hat is too large. My 
uncle lives in Vienna, and my cousin John in Paris. My friend 
Reiley goes to Berlin; his brother William is arrived from 
Holmdel. Have you seen John and Jane?My garden is 
larger than that of Emily. Louisa has (ijt) gone out with 
Jane.-+Henry has (ift) departed for Brussels with his friend 
Joseph. What is your son’s name? What is the capital of 
Italy called? *Who is the king of Spain ?.. Victor Emanuel is 
the father of the king of Spain. 


PART I. 





51. ' 


Plural. Nom. die Tifche, the tables; 
Gen. dev Tifche, of the tables; 
Dat. den Tijchen, to the tables; 
Ace. die Sijcde, the tables. 
Nom. Die Stadt Berlin (not von Berlin or Berling), the city of Berlin; 
Gen, der Stadt Verlin, of the city of Berlin etc. 


Oxs.—Most of the nouns that form their genitive in e8, and many fem- — 


inine nouns of one syllable, take the ending e for the plural, The radical 
vowels a, 0, 1 and qu of such nouns are changed in ae plural into G, b, ii, 
au, The dative plural of all words ends in n, 


Die Freunde meines Vaters find angefommen. Oie Sihne unfers 
Nachbars jind fehr fleifig. DOte Stiihle, welche wir gefauft haben, 
find jehr jin. Haben Sie die Stadte Wien und Berlin gefehen ? 


Karl hat die Hiite Wilhelms und Ferdinands gefunden. Nein Vater. 


hat die Briefe Fhres Onkels nidjt erhalten. Die Pferde find mith. 
licher als die Dunde. Die Neaigde eures Nachbars find fehr fleifig. 
Die Aerzte in diefer Stadt find fehr reich. Wem haben Sie die 
Stide meines Bruders gegeben? Die Hauptitidte der Kinige von 
Gachjen (Saxony) und Baiern (Bavaria). find febr fdhin. Diefer 
Garten gehirt den Gohnen meines Nadhbars. / 


52. 


x Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. The 
friends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the horses of our 
uncle William? The cities of Cologne and Strasbourg (Gtraf- 
burg) belong to the king of Prussia. Where are the hats of 
my sister Emily? JI have given your umbrella to the maid- 
servants. * Your brother is gone out with the sons of our 
neighbor (fem.).# I speak of Henry’s and William’s friends. 


<¢ To whom have you sold the trees of my brother? 


‘ 
i i i — 


53. 
Der Zahu, the tooth; der Ming, the ring; 
der Fuf, the foot; die Gans, the goose; 
die Hand, the hand; wd der Thurm, the tower, steeple; 
der Schuh, the shoe; warm, warm; falt, cold; 


der Strumpf, the stocking; _weif, white. 
Past Participles ; gebradht, brought; gewobnt, resided; erobert, conquered, 


Plural (of all genders), 
Nom. diefe, these; jee, those; weldje, which (what) or who; 
Gen. -diejer, of these; jener,of those; weldjer, of which (what), of whom; 
Dat. diejen, to these; * jenen,tothose; tweldjen, to which (what), to whom; 
Acc. Ddieje, these; jene, those; tweldje, which (what), whom. 


Oss. 1,—The plurals of the possessives are meine, feine, ihre (her), unjere, 
eure, ijve (their), Shre (your), being for all genders alike. They all are de- 
clined like the plural Ddiefe. All pronominal adjectives are placed in the 
plural, if their governing nouns are of this number: her shoes, ihre Gdhuhe; 
our friends, unjere Freunde; their tables, ihre Tifde; your tables, Shre Tijdhe 
(eure Tifche). 

2, The relative welder is placed in the plural (iweldje, etc.) if the an- 
tecedent (No. 45, Obs.1) is in that number: die Tijde, welche Sie getauft 
haben, the tables which (that) you have bought. 


; Deine Fahne find jehr wetk. Wreine Fitfe find fehr falt. <Hhre 
Hinde find wari. Hat der Schuhmader meine Schuhe gebracht ? 
Wer hat meine Stritmpfe genommen? Wo haben Sie dieje Ganfe 
gefauft? Haben Ste meine Baume fdon gefehen? Bon welden 
-— DBaumen fpreden Sie (do you speak)? Von den Baumen, welche 
id) von dent Gartner der Kinigin gefauft habe. Unjere Freunde find 
{chon abgereift. Wer hat dieje Briefe gefdhrieben? Mltein Vater hat 
feine Pferde und Hunde verfauft. Wein Nachbar hat Briefe von 
feinen Sodhnen erhalten, welche in Berlin find. Hat Femand meine 
Ringe gefunden? NMiemand hat deine Ringe gefehen. Rarl wird von 
— feinen Freunden geliebt. | 


° 


’ . 


54. " s é oy 


“4 Charles and Henry have lost their canes. The shoemaker 
_has not made your shoes. Where have you bought these 
tables and chairs? From whom have you received these pen- 
cils? My feet are very small. My sister has lost her thimbles. 


I have received these letters from my friends. \ These steeples 


- 


q& 
ae $0 cue 


are higher than those. These animals are very fine. These 
servants are very lazy. *Have you already seen our hats and 
our rings? Your hands are very white. I have found these 
rings in my uncle’s garden. ~ What steeples of Paris have you © 
. seen from those mountains?x.Of what cities do you speak? 
~ I am speaking of the cities which the king of Prussia has con- | 
7 quered in France. My sons to, whom you have sold your 
horses, are departed for pert cities in which we have > 


resided, are Berlin, Vienna, and Cologne. 
55. | 
Sing. Nom. aller, alle, alles, all. 
Plur. ‘* alle; Gen. aller; Dat. allen; Acc. alle. : 
hearted: Das Kind, the child; — das Dorf, the village; | 
das Buch, the book; _ da8 Blatt, the leaf; 
. das Haus, the house; ~ da8 Loch, the hole; > 
» das Volf, the people; ~da8 Hubn, the chicken; 
 « bas Glas, the glass; _- da8 Bild, the picture; e 
~ das Band, the ribbon; ~ da8 Ralb, the calf; 
= pas Land, the country; —pder Wurm, the worm; 
— das RKleid, the dress; ~ Der Wald, the forest; 


= das Schlok,* the castle; ™ der Ptann, the man, the husband. 


Oxs,—All these nouns are exceptions from the general rule, and form : 
their plurals by adding er, softening the radical vowel, Substantives ending 
in thum follow the same rule, as: $rrthum, Jrrthiimer (mistake), The 
dative plur. adds n. : 


Diefe Hiaujer find hoher als jene. Sene Bander find jchdner | 
alS diefe. Deine Biicher find niiblicher als die Bitcher Luifens. . 
Dieje Mtutter hat ihre Kinder verloren. Der Konig hat feine | 
Shliffer verfauft. Bon wem haben Ste diefe Glafer erhalten? — 
Wer hat diefe Kleider gemacht? Diefer Mtann tit jehr alt; er hat 
alle jeine Rahne verloren. Dieje Vilfer find nicht glitclich. Heinrich 
und Wilhelin haben alle ihre Biicher verloren. Alle eure Briefe find 
angefommen. Der Vater ift mit allen feinen Rindern abgereift. 
Diefe Déorfer find jehr fein. Bon weldjen Diorfern fprechen Sie? 
Haben Sie den Kindern de3 Nachbars einen Bogel gegeben? Wer 
hat alle dDiefe Licher in meinen Tijch gemacht? 


* Final fi, if an ending is added to it, changes into {f, whenever the vowel 
preceding it is short, 














56. 


* where are your children? My children are gone out. 
Who has bought all these ribbons? Henrietta has lost all her 
books. We have seen all your houses.“ Have you also seen 
the castles of the king? This tree has lost all its leaves. My 
neighbor has sold all his chickens. I have found this book in 
all countries and cities which I have seen. ~Charles has written 
letters to all his friends. I have the pictures of all my children. 

© The men who haye dined with your friend, have (find) already 

- departed. «I have spoken with these men of the books which 
you have written. 


bY. 
Der Stiefel, the boot; die Gabel, the fork; 
der Spiegel, the mirror; der Schnabel, the beak; 
Der Loffel, the spoon; das Mtidcdhen, the girl; 
die Nadel, the needle, pin; | der Stalidiner, the Italian. 


Gie wohnen, they live; fie gehéren, they belong, 


Ops.——_(1) Masculine. and neuter nouns in er, el, et add no endings in @ : 


nominative, genitive and accusative plural, but those in er and el add, as 
usual, n in the dative, and some of them, as Gruber, Vater, Sdnabel,  — 
Bogel, Garten, Apfel, soften their radical vowels._-(2) Feminine nouns in er- | 
and ef add 1 in every case of the plural, except die Mtiitter and die Tédhter, 
which take 1 in the dative only. 


— Die Schneider und Sdhuhmacher in diefer Stadt find alle reich. 
Diefe Englinder jind jebhr fletRig. Wteine Britder find alle fran. 
Haben Sie meine Schmeftern gefehen? Wo haben Sie diefe Lojfel, 
Mieffer und Gabeln getauft? Die Fenfter Fhres immers find: offen. 
Wir haben diefe Vdgel in den Wiildern gefunden. Die Tiger find fehr 
ftarf. Diefe ‘Madchen find fehr glitclich. Sind meine Tidjter aus. 
‘Hegaugen? Sind meine Zimmer nicht fehr fin? Hat ihre Tante 
alle dieje Spiegel gefauft? Wer hat die Biicher und Federn diefes 
Miadchens genommen? Wem gehiren diefe Garten und Hiufer? — 
Nnife und Henriette haben ihre Nadel verloren. Der Schuhmacher 
Hat Shre Schrhe und Stiefel nod) nicht gebradht. ene Netanner find 
Staliiner, Diefe Garten gehiren meinen Briidern. Gch habe in 
Diejen Zinunern gewohnt. 


ee 7 eon 


58. . 
+The shoemaker has brought your shoes and boots. The 
houses of this village are all very fine. Bring us (Sringen Sie 
ung) the spoons, forks, and knives. Where have you bought 
these needles? Your brothers and sisters are arrived.-~Our: 
mothers have seen the gardens of the king." My sons have 
bought the mirrors of my neighbor. Horses are bigger than 
tigers. + These Italians live in the city of Berlin.» The beaks 
of those birds are long. 


59. 
ins (ein) one; fiinfzehn, fifteen; 
zwei, two; fechzehn, sixteen; 
drei, three; fiebzehn, seventeen; 
vier, four; adtzehu, eighteen; 
fiinf, five; neunzehu, nineteen; 
feds, six; zvanzig, twenty; 
fieben, seven; die MAufgabe, the lesson, exercise; 
act, eight; *pas Sahr, the year; 
nett, nine; die Wore, the week; 
zen, ten; *der Ptonat, the month (pl. e); 
elf, eleven; | *per Sag, the day; 
z1wolf, twelve; die Stunde, the hour; 
dreizehn, thirteen; der Knabe, the boy; 
vierzehu, fourteen; jeit, since, ago (governs the dative). 


Ops. — (1) Substantives of whatever gender, ending in e, (excepta 
few neuters) take nm in all cases of the plural, and never soften their 
radical vowels.—(2) The English there is is rendered by e8 ift, and there are by 
e8 find, if there has no local meaning, and is merely expletive. If e8 ift, e8 find, 
do not begin the sentence and are preceded by words other than conjunctions, — 
the pronoun e8 is omitted—(3) The form ein$ (one) is only used in numeration, — 
or when one refers toa neuter noun mentioned before. Else it takes the form — 
ein, eine, eit, and is declined exactly like the indefinite article, 


{ | 
A Ju unferm Haufe find vierzehn Zimmer. Jn diefem Zimmer 
find zwei Tifeche und gwolf Stithle. Unjer Nachbar hat fiinf Kinder: 

drei Sohne und zwei Fichter. Wir haben vier Rake und drei 
Hunde. Gu eurem Garten find fiinfzehn Baume. Das Gahr hat 
zwilf Monate; der Monat hat vier Wochen; die Worhe hat He ss 

Tage. Yh habe von meinem Vater fechs Aepfely und acdht Birten — 


* Masculine and neuter nouns, not ending in e, which do not soften the 
radical vowel, are marked with an asterisk. : 

+ If the softened vowel is a capital, the softening is generally indicated 
ms an e, added to it. 


: 
| | 





a Oe 


erhalten. Mein Onkel hat meiner Schwefter ein Federmefjer und 
— gwanzig Federn gegeben. Haft du fdon alle deine Aufgaben gemacht ? 
Yohann hat noch nicht feine Wufgaben gemadht. Haben Sie noch nicht 
gejpeift? Sch habe [jon] feit dret Stunden gefpeift. ft Shr 
Vater noch nicht angefommen? Cr ift [fdon] feit swet Tagen ange- 
fommen. Mein Onfel hat feit act Tagen nichts gegeffen. Mein 
Bruder ift neun GYahre alt, aber meine Schwefter ijt noch nicht fieben 
— Sabre alt. 
Bee 60. 
og My father has three houses and two gardens. This man has 
five boys and four daughters. My friend has seven sisters. We 
have received six letters. In this town there are twenty shoe- 
makers. My cousins (fem.) have bought two cats. +My cousin 
is seventeen years and two months old. My mother has bought 
six knives, twelve forks, and eighteen spoons. Our joiner has 
made three tables and ten chairs. +We have received this 
week fifteen chickens and three calves, William has eaten five 
apples and four pears.+ Henry arrived (is arrived) three days 
ago. My uncle departed (is departed) a year ago.+ Charles 
and Ferdinand have made six exercises. There are two holes 
in this door.+~In this town there is one physician. The gardener 
has given three flowers to my children. I have seen one of 
your sisters.+ This house belongs to one of my friends. 


if 61. 
*Das Brot, thebread _ Brot, bread, some bread, any bread; 
das Fleifd), the meat; %leijd), meat, some meat, any meat; 
Die Aepfel, the apples; Aepfel, apples, some apples, any apples, 
Der Wein, the wine; die Rirjde, the cherry; 
bas Bier, the beer; die Pflaume, the plum; 
 *pa8 Wafer, the water; die Tinte, the ink; 

das Gemiije, the vegetables; die Suppe, the soup; 
der Zucfer, the sugar; | man findet, one finds, they find; 
der Kaffee, the coffee; getrunfen, drunk (participle); 
geben Sie mir, give me; er madjt, he makes; 


wollen Sie? will you [have], do you want? gefalligft, if you please. 
~ $c) habe Brot und Fleifch gegeffen. Wir haben Kirfchen und 


Pflaumen getauft. Mein Bruder hat Wein getrunfen und ihr habt 
Bier und Waffer getrimfer. Der Sdhuhmacher macht Sedhuhe und 


Lie, HOR ae 


Stiefel. Der Tifchler macht Tijche und Stithle. Mtan findet bei 
diefemt Kaufmann Biicher, Federn, Tinte und Bleiftifte. Geben Sie ~ 
mir Suppe und Gemiife. Hier ift Wein und Wajjer, und da ijt 
Raffee und Niileh. Haben Sie auch Zucer? Wir haben Meeffer und 
Gabeln, Taffen und Glajer gefauft. Oer Gartner hat Luijen Kirjden 
und Blumen gegeben. Haben Sie jcehon Kaffee getrunfen? Wan 
findet in jenent Hauje Spiegel, Regenjdhirme, Bander, Fingerbiite 
und Yadelu. Weeine Freundin hat von ihrem Onfel Birnen und 
Pflaumen erhalten. Wir haben Ldwen, Tiger, KRaken und Hunde 
gejehen. Sn diejer Stadt find Schneider und Schubmacher, welche 
jehr reich find. Wollen Sie Suppe oder-Gemiije? Geben Sie mir 
gefallight Fleifch und Brot. 


62. 


+ Will you [have] some wine or some beer, some milk or some 
water? Give me, if you please, some soup, vegetables, meat, 
and bread. AWVhere does one find (finds one) ink and pens? 
Have you children ?x Has your father bought trees or flowers? 
My brother has books and friends. “Here is coffee and sugar. 
_ My neighbor has birds, dogs, and horses. »We are speaking of 
towns and villages, of houses and gardens. What have you 
done?~4 We have done our lessons; we have written letters. 
We have eaten apples and plums, and we have drunk some 
wine and beer.~Do you want these spoons or those? Have 
you sold any wine to my brothers? Julave you peta any 
cherries of my brothers? - 


63. 
Wenig, little, few; das Obft, die Frucht, the fruit; 
viel, much; viele, many; das Geld, the money; 
genug, enough; der Pfeffer, the pepper; 
mehr, more; das Sal, the salt; 
werttger, less, fewer; der Senf, the mustard; 
wie? how? . der Mtenjd), man (pl. die Dtenjdjen). 


Oss.—(1) There is and there are are often translated by e8 gibt (literally: 
it gives), instead of e$ ijt and e8 find, both for singular and plural nouns, 
Both expressions differ only slightly, The noun, following e8 gibt, is placed — 
in the accusative, and the pronoun e8 in this connection can never be omit- 
ted. — (2) Wenig, weniger, viel may be left undeclined in most instances; 


Did th i ie hy 





eet, BS 


but mehr is never declined. (3) The English man is rendered either Dtann 
or Ytenjdj. The word Ptann is confined to the adult male sex, while Ptenjd) 
means a human being in general. 


Heinrich hat viel Geld; er hat mehr Geld alsich. Geben Sie mir 
ein wenig Fleijch. Goh Habe genug Brot. Ou Haft zu viel Salz 


“und Pfeffer. Wir haben weniger Obft als ihr. Luife hat weniger 


Hedern als Henriette. Karl hat mehr Wufgaben gemacht als Yudwig. 
Hajt du fo viel Geld als mein Bruder? E8 gibt wenig Netenfchen, 
welche zufricden jind. Geben Sie Henvietten nicht zu viel Senf! 
Mein Bruder hat zu viel Wein getrunfen. Diefer Mtann hat viele 
Blumen. Wie viele Hunde hat Shr Vater? Es gibt diefes Fahr 
wenig Rirfdhen, aber viel Pflaumen. Melein Freund hat diefe Woche 
mehr Briefe erhalten als ich. Hat dein Vater fo viele Biicher als 


‘mein Onfel? Geben Sie mir gefalligit cin wenig Tinte. Wollen 


Sie noc) (any) mehr? Goh habe genug. Gibt e8 nicht viel Gemitfe 
in Diefent Yande? — 


64. 


> There is much fruit this year. Our gardener has many 
trees and flowers. * Will you have a little meat or some’ 
vegetables? Have you mustard enough?+I1 have salt and 
pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money; he is very rich. 
Give a little; wine to this woman. + This man has few friends, 
but he has many dogs and cats. There are many birds in this 
forest.4~ How many physicians are there in your town? Have 
you as many apples and pears as we? +We have not so many 
as you, but we have more plums and cherries than you. Charles 
has fewer friends than Henry.t-This tree has fewer leaves than 
that one. There are (find) too many chairs in this room. Is 
(gibt) there more than one physician in this town? ..How few 


‘men are there that are contented ! 


65. 


Das Stiid, the piece; *pda8 Dubend, the dozen; 
die Flajdhe, the bottle; der Korb, the basket; 
die Laffe, the cup; die Leinwand, the linen; 





7 Jittle is translated by fein, if it is opposed to great or large; but by 
Wenig, if opposed to much. 


OL ee 


*pa8 fund, the pound; bas Tafdentuch, the pocket-handkerchief; , 
die Elle, the yard, ell; *der Handjdjuh, the glove; 


*pas Paar, the pair; das oth, the (half) ounce; 
—> der Zoll, the inch; der Rife, the cheese; 
das Hembd, the shirt; der Gchinfen, the ham. 


die Halsbinde, the cravat; 


\ ,  Oss.—The words $fund, Loth, Baar, Dubend, Fuk, Boll and some other 
masculine and neuter nouns, when used as units of measurement, weight and 
computation are not declined. The preposition of, following any noun denot- 
ing measure, etc, is not expressed in German. 


Meine Mtutter hat der Henriette dret Baar Handfdhube, jechs 
Paar Striimpfe, zwet Oubend Hemden und einen Korb Rirfdhen gee 
fchictt. a diefem Roffer find zehn Cllen Leimmand, vier Tafchen- 
tiicher und feds Halsbinden. NVtein Bruder hat zwei Paar Schuhe 
und ein Paar Stiefel gefauft. Wir haben dem Freunde unfers 

_ Onfels zwanzig Pfund Zucfer und 3zehn Flajcdhen Wein gefdhickt. 
Geben Sie mir cin Stite Kafe, eine Flajche Bier und cin wenig Senf. 
eh Habe ein Glas Wein getrunfen and ein Sti Schinfen gegeffen. 
Wir haben bet unferer Freundin eine Tajfe Kaffee getrunfen. Geben 
Sie mir ein Glas Waffer und ein Stité Zucker. Meine Schwejter 
hat zwei Bfund Kirjdhen und ein Pfund Pflaumen gefauft. Wir 
haben ein Ougend Stithle bet dem Tifchler unfers Onfels gefauft. 
Sd Habe von dem Gartner einen Korh Bhamen erhalten, Diefes 
Haus ijt gwanzig Fup hod). ie 


~. | 66. a F 
* The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa and two 
pair of boots for William. We have drunk two glasses of wine ~ 
and three glasses of beer. » Give me a bottle of water and a 
little meat and bread. Will you have a piece of ham or cheese? 

+My aunt has bought a dozen of cravats, two dozen of shirts, — 
and ten pair of gloves and stockings. How many shirts have | 
you? +I have three dozen.+ This linen is very fine; how many 
yards have you bought? Ihave bought twenty yards. That 
(da8) is not enough for ten shirts. +My uncle has given to. 

Henry a penknife, twenty pens, two cravats, and a pair of | 

‘gloves. »Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six ounces 

| 


of coffee, and two yards of ribbon. \ Will you have a cup of 


| 
“4 


att gy 





Wort) td 


coffee or a glass of wine? Give me, if you please, a glass 
of watery My brother is six feet three inches high. 3 
67 —f 

Seder, jede, jedes, every, each; die Kugel, the bullet; 

fclecht, bad; 3 die Freundin, the (female) friend; 

hiibjc), pretty; der Lehrer, the teacher; 

‘todt, dead; ber Weg, the way, the road; 

beriihmt, resided: : der Englander, the Englishman; 

weije, wise; das Leben, the life; 

golden, golden, gold (adj,); *da8 Sdhidfal, the fate; 

filbern, silver (adj.); da8 Madchen, the girl; 

fur3, short, brief; das ift, that is. 


Ops. 1,—Predicative adjectives take no endings of declension: der 
Ptann ift gut. 

2. Adjectives not predicative (that is connected with a noun expressed 
or understood) must take certain endings of declension either according to the 
WEAK or according to the srrone scheme of declension. 

8, The srrone scheme of declension is the one by which the definite ar- 
ticle and the determinatives (bdiejer, jener, jeder, weldjer) are declined, It 
consists of the endings er, e, e8, emt, ent. 

4, The weak scheme consists of the endings e and en only: e igh the 
nominative sing. of all genders and the accusative sing. feminine and neuter; 

en for all the other cases. 
_ §. The weak declension is used whenever any adjective is preceded by 
the definite article, or by a determinative (diefer, etc.), 





Nom. Sing. der (diefer) gute Diann; das (diejes) gute Kind; 
Gen. ‘* Dde8 (diefes) guten Mtannes, etc. . 
Nom. Plur. die guten Pinner, etc. 


Fedes Haus hat ein Oach. Gede Kugel macht ein Loch. Gr hat 
jeden Freund verloren. Yu jeder Stadt gibt e8 einen Wrzt. [Der] 
gute Heinrich tft franf. [Die] Meine Gophie ijt fehr hiibfd. Das 
arme Kind hat feine Miutter verloren. Das ift der Hichfte Baum in 
—unjerm Garten. ifette tft die fletpigfte vont unfern Mtaigden. Diez 
fer reiche Englander wohnt bei meinem Onfel. Wo haben Sie diefe 
—goldene Nadel gefunden? Wem gehirt diejes grofe Haus und jener 
— fchine Garten? Heinrich ijt mit [dem] fleinen Karl ausgegangen. 
Bir haben gejtern bet der guten Emilie Kirfren gegeffen. Wer 
 Wobhnt in diefem fchinen Sdhlofjfe? Wie heift diefe fchine Blume ? 


ti + Of after superlatives may be expressed by the genitive or the preposi- 
on volt. 





Wo haben Sie diefern fehlecdhten Wein und diefes fehlechte Brot gefauft? 

— Der Lowe und der Tiger find die ftirfften Chiere. Dag find die glitc: 
—™ Lichjten Tage meines Lebens. Geben Sie diefem arimen Manne ein 
wenig Wein! Der Vater diefes fleinen Miidchens ift todt. Oas ift 

das Schictfal jedes groRen Vtannes. DOie fchinen Dorfer jenes Landes 

find berithmt. Gr hat meinem Freunde die beften Zimmer in feinent 
Haufe gegeben. Die Sohne der weifeften Vater find oft dumm (dull). - 


ah | 
: 


68. ; 
Not every king is great and wise. Every year has twelve 
months, and every week seven days. We have seen books and | 
pictures in each room. * The diligent scholar is loved by every 
teacher. The new house of my brother is sold. I have read 
the long letter of your friend. He has spoken of the sad fate 
of this young man. The father of (the) little Henry is dead. 
The daughter of this old woman is sick.* Give this tlower to 
my young friend (male and female), Which hat have you” 
taken ?x-I have taken my white hat. Which watch and which 
ring have you sold? We have sold the silver watch and the 
gold ring * The short roads are not always the best.* Are 
there any lions and tigers in the cold countries of the earth ? 
The dresses of these young girls are too long. *{he fates of the | 
greatest men are often sad.”. I have resided in the best houses : 


ay 


of the city. | a 

| | 69. ; 
Pos Kein, feine, fein, no (adj.); fein Freund, no friend; ; 
ene these are, das (Dies find); the business, da8 Gefchajt. | 





Oss. 1,—If adjectives are preceded by the nominative sing. or the neuter 
accusative sing. of ein, fein or of any possessive (mein, dein, unjer, etc.), 
they are declined after the srrone declension, and take the endings of Diefer, 
dieje, diejeS: mein guter Vater, unfjer gutes Kind. ; 

2. If adjectives are preceded by any other case of ein, fein, mein, etc., 
they are declined after the weak declension: meine$ guten Vaters, etc, 









Unfer Gartner ijt ein guter Mann. Cure Garinerin ijt eine gu 
Frau. . Emilie ijt ein fehr gutes Kind. Wir haben einen guten Bate 
und eine gute Mtutter. Heinrid) hat ein fines Pferd und ei 


# Adjectives whose nouns are understood, must be translated as if th 
nouns were expressed, ; : 








eae A as 


fejonten Hund. Cuife hat grofe Zihne, aber eine fleine Hand und 
einen fleinen Fug. Serdinand ift mit meinent jiingeren Bruder ausge- 
gangen. Henriette ijt mit meiner alteren Schwefter abgereijt. Geben 
Sie diejes Brot einem armen Kinde! DOiefes Federmeffer gehirt 
einem jungen Meanne, der bet unferm Nacdhbar wohnt. Ludwig ijt der 
Sohn eines reichen Kaufmanns. Wir haben feinen guten Wein und 
fein gutes Srot. Wer hat meine filberne Uhr und meinen Foldenen 
Ring genommen? Wir haben unjerm beften Freund verloren. Cure 

Fleinen Kinder find fehr gut. G8 gibt diefes Gabhr feine guten Rive 
fen. Mein Onfel hat feine fchonjten Pferde verfauft. Bijt du mit 
deinen neuen Stiefeln.zufrieden?- Haft du fdon von unjern guten 
Pflaumen gegefjen? Gch habe ein bejjeres Pferd und einen griperen 
Hund, alg Sie. Marl ijt ein hithfcherer Rnabe als Heinrich. 


70. 
+ Charles is a good boy. Emilf isa pretty girl. That is a 
happy mother. That isa very good wine. Where is my little 
Henry, my good Louisa? We have avery rich uncle. William 
has an old father} Tron‘s a useful metal+~The dog is asfaith- ) 
ful/animal. I have ‘Yeceived a new umbrella anda gold watch, 
My neighbor has done much business (plural in German) this 
year. Give this bottle of wine to a poor man or to a,/poor 
woman. I have no friend in this town.4Have you no good 
pens for this child?*;Our best friends are dead. This joiner 
makes no good (chairs. 3 hese are the tables and books of our 
youngest children, A horse is a more useful animal than a dog. 
* Thou hast written a isa letter than I. 


Tl. 
Bortrefflich, excellent; ™ der Fleif, the diligence; 
roth, red; * Die Statue, the statue; 
= Nliebenswiirdig, amiable; \da8 Vergniigen, the pleasure; 
der Wtarmor, the marble; das ‘Papier, the paper; 
die Gefahr, the danger; \ gevettet (past part,), saved. 


_ Oss.—If the adjective i is not preceded by an article or any other deter- 
“Minative word, it i is inflected after the srrone declension. 


Hier ift guter Schinken, gute Suppe und gutes Brod. Haben 
Sie gutes Papier und. gute Tinte? Wir haben feflechten Wein und 
ypites Wajfer getrunfen, Unfer Gartner hat vortrefflicjes Objt. 


9? 


Sg tie | 


Unfere Magd hat guten Senf, aber fehlechten Pfeffer gefauft. CGduard 


Hat gute Freunde und nitbliche Bitcher. MWeein Onfel hat fine Gir 
ten und grofe Haufjer. Cuer Nachbar hat treue Hunde. Fohann, 


geben Sie mir ein Glas Waffer! Wollen Sie faltes oder warmes — 


Wafer? Meine Schwefter hat ein Paar hitbfdhe Handfcube gefauft. 


Paris und London find fchine Stidte. Heinrid) hat ein Paar neue : 
Schuhe'erhalten. Liebe Schwefter! Fah habe deinen Brief mit grofem — 
Vergniigen gelefen. Karl hat feine Aufgabe mit rother Tinte ge- 


jchrieben. 
72. 


* Have you any good mustard? We have good bread and 


good meat. Your gardener has very fine flowers. These 
children have fine dresses. »We have faithful friends, amiable 
brothers, and useful books. Give me some better cheese and 
better bread. At (bet) this merchant’s one finds pretty gloves, 
fine penknives, and good pens. Iron and silver are very use- 
ful metals. »You have always excellent wine. My brother is 
not gone out, he has too much business (plur.). Henry has 


bought good paper and good ink. 4We speak of good coffee, — 


of excellent fruit, and new dresses. You have done your 


lesson with great diligence. ‘Poor friend, how little money — 
have you made!. This statue is made of white marble. »He has — 


saved the life of his friend with great danger. 


: ib PY 
rue 13. 
Der, die, das erfte, the first; 4 der, die, Das Lette, the last; 
der, Die, Das giveite, the second; unartig, naughty; 
Der, die, Das dritte, the third; ~ der Cherl, the part; 
der, die, da8 vierte, the fourth; ber Band, the volume; 


der, die, das gwangigfte, the twentieth; nur, only; die Kaffe, the class. — 


Der wievielfte? what day of the month? what (in order) ?* 
der erfte Sanuar, the first of January; 
ber Ntonat Mai, the month of May, 


Oxs.—(1) The ordinals from 2 to 20 add te to the cardinals; from twenty 
upwards they add fte. They decline wxak, if preceded by the definite article. 
(2) Names of the months and the days of the week are masculine. 





* Tf an ordinal numeral is expected in the answer. 














Peak? eae 


Der junge Vtann ijt fehr fleifig; er ift der erfte in der Rlaffe. 
Rarl ift der zweite; Heinrich ift der dritte; Gohann ijt der vierte; [der] 
fleine Wilhelm ijt der fiinfte; Paul ift der fedjste; Franz (Francis) 
ift der achte; Guftav ijt der neunte; [derjunartige Couard ijt der elfte 
und [der] faule Ludwig der lebte. Bwei ijt der fiinfte Theil von zehn. 
Hinf ijt der vierte Theil von gwanzig. Cin Tag ift der fiebente 
Theil einer Worhe.. Oem wievielften haben wir (is it) heute? Wir 

haben heute den dreizehnten oder den vierzehnten. Sift e8 nicht der 
swanzigite? Mtein Vater ijt den dritten Meat abgereift, und den zehn- 
ten Dezember angefommen. Haben Ste den erften und gweiten 
Band? $ch habe nur den erften.. 


74. 


-+ Louisa is the first in the class; Pauline is the second; (the) 

little Josephine is the third; Emily is the fifth; (the) pretty Sophy 
(Sophie) isthe ninth; Jane is the fifteenth; (the) naughty Caro- 
line is the last, Three is the sixth part of eighteen. A week is 
the fourth part of a month; and a month is the twelfth part 
of a year. What day of the month is it (have we)? It is to- 
day the eleventh or the twelfth. We (are) departed on the 
second of May and arrived on the sixteenth. Which volume 
have you taken? Have you taken the third and the fourth? 

. I have only taken the third. 


15. 
Der, (die, bas) meine, ) der etc. deine, 
Der, (die, Das) meinige, ¢ mine; der etc, Ddeinige, > thine 
meter, meine, mteines, deiner, e, es, 


der feine, etc., his; der ihre, etc., hers; der unfere, unfrige, etc,, ours; 
Der eure, etc., (Shee, Shrige), yours; der ihre, etc., theirs. 


; Sdjwer, difficult (hard), heavy; leicjt, easy (not difficult), light (not heavy); 
der (Das) Loh (sing.), the wages (plur.). 


Ops,—(1) Mine, thine, etc., if used predicatively (after bin, bift, ift, find) 
are rendered by mein, dein, etc., without article and ending: Das Haus 
ift mein, die Hauer find mein, the house is mine, the houses are mine,— 
(2) Der meine, meinige; der deine, etc., are used, if a noun, previously men- 
tioned is understood: Dein Haus ift grifer, als das meine (meinige) or als 
meines, These expressions are also used predicatively, but with peculiar 


nae? eee 


meanings (which may be orally indicated by the teacher).— (3) Der meine, 
der meinige, etc, decline weak: Gen. de8 meinen (meinigen); Plur. die meinen 
‘ (meinigen), etc. Meiner, deiner, etc., decline STRONG; Gen. meines; Date 
meinem; Plur, meine, 


Diefes Buch ijt mein. Diefe Federn find nicht dein, Diefe Ubr ijt 
unfer. Dein Vater ijt groger als der meinige. Meine tutter tft fletner 
alS die deine. Unjer Buch ift nitblicher als das Shrige. Deein 
Sohn ijt nit fo alt als der deinige. Cuer Pferd ijt jiinger als das 
unfjere. Unfere Biicher jind nitglicher als die eurigen. Mein Vater 
hat feine Uhr verloren; Heinrich hat auch die feinige verloren. Weeine 
Schwefter hat die ihre verfauft. Mtein Vater hat deinen Brief und 
den meinen gelefen. Wteine Tante hat ihren Garten und den unfrigen 
verfauft. Hat dein Bruder meinen Sto oder feinen genonmmen ? 
Hat Luife meinen Fingerhut oder ihren gefunden? Deine WAufgaben 
find Leichter als die meinigen. Dieje Baume find hoher als die 
unferen. Yn unferer Stadt find mehr erzte als in eurer. Karls 
Bild ift gut; aber deined (deins) ijt vortrefflich. WMrein Bruder ift 
groper, alS deiner. Unjere Wufgabe ijt jchwerer als eure. Gr hat 
meinem Bruder mehr Mepfel gegeben, alg deinem. Wir geben untferer 
Mage hoheren Lohn, als ihr der eurigen. 


76. 


This basket is mine; these gloves are ours. The city is 
ours. My thimble is as fine as yours. Your umbrella is not 
so large as mine. My son is more diligent than thine. My 
friend has sold his house and mine. My. sister has eaten, 
her apple and thine. {Has Louisa taken my pen or hers; my 
pencil or hers? Henry has read my books and yours. Your. 
_ sisters are younger than ours. We speak of our friend and of 
yours,4-Is my room smaller than thine? I have promised a 
book to your son and to mine, to your daughter and to mine. 
I speak of my tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to my 
uncle and to yours. What wages are higher, yours or mine ? 
Are your last lessons harder or easier than ours? Are thy 
bullets heavier or lighter than his? Emily’s room is prettier 
than mine, but mine is larger than hers." Are the wages of 
the Englishman higher than thine or those of the Italian? 





TT. . 
- Singular. Plural, 
Nom. er, he; fie, she; e8, it; fie, they; 
Acc. ibn, him; fie, her; e8, it; fte, them. 


Sa, yes; nein, no (answering particle), 
. fe For the use of the gender see No. 41. 


Haben Sie meinen Stok? Fa, ich habe ihn. Haben Sie meine 
Uhr? Nein, ih habe fie nicht. Haben Sie mein Meffer? Sch habe 
e8 nicht. Haben Sie meine Schuhe ? a; ich habe fie. Wo tft mein 
Hund? Gch habe ihn nicht gefehen. Wer hat meine Feder genommen ? — 
Hein Bruder hat fie genommen. Wo hajt du diefes Tafdhentuch ge- 
funden? Yeh habe e8 in Hhrem Zimmer gefunden. Dieje Vogel 
find jehr fhin. Bon wem haft du fie erhalten? Deine Schwefjter 
ijt jebhr fleifig; meine Mtutter liebt jie fehr. Haben Sie meinen 
Oheim gefannt? Yeh habe ihn nicht gefannt. Dies ift ein niisliches 
Buch; haben Sie e8 {chon gelejen? Wo ijt mein Fingerhut? Gh 
Habe ihn Shrer Schmefter gegeben; jie hat ihn verloren. Hat Femand 
“meine Gabel genommen? Rarl hat fie genommen. Wem hat der 
Gartner alle diefe Glumen gefdhidt? Cr hat fie Fhrer’ Mutter ge- 
johict. Haben Sie diefe Ubr fiir Ghren Bruder gefauft? Nein, icf 
Habe fie nicht fiir ihn gefauft. Haben Sie eine fiir Fhre Schwejter 
eit? Nein, ich habe fetnte on a fte gefauft. 






78. i 
e Has the tailor brought my coat? Yes, he has brought it. 
Hast thou already done thy lesson? I have not yet done it. 

“Have you seen my new room?+No, I have not yet seen it, 

Where hast thou bought these pretty rings? I have bought them 
in- Paris. I have received a letter from my aunt, have you 

read it ?#Have you already seen the king? <I. have not yet 
seen him. You have a good pen; give it to my sister. Where 

| are your gloves? I have lent them to your aunt. Where is 

your umbrella? Give it to this child..+My aunt is dead; did 

you know her? What books have you there? Have you read 

them? Where is thy dog? My father has sold it. Have you 

‘Teceived any letters for your father? No, I have received no 
letters for him.“Have you bought these books for your mother ? 

Xo, I have not bought het for her. 


coe GEAR ee 


: 79. 

Perfect Tense: ith bin gewejen, I have been; 
du bift gewejen, thou hast been; 
er ift getvejen, he has been; 
wir find gewejen, we have been; 
ihr jetd gewejen, you have been; 
fte find gewefen, they have been, 


Der Herr, the gentleman; der Morgen, the morning; 
das Fraulein, the (unmarried).lady; ein halber, etne halbe, ein halbes, 
die Dame, the lady (married or half a, one half of; 
unmarried); Koviertel, quarter, (one) fourth of; 
zujammen, together; eimmal, once; 
heute, to-day; * 3retmal, twice; _ 
gliidlic), happy, successful; dreimal, three times: 
lange (adv. of time), long, a long _ viermal, four times; 
time; niemals, nie, never 


Oss.—(1) The nouns Herr, Frau, Fraulein are used as titles and ad- 
dresses (Mr., Sir, Madam, Mrs., Miss), Mr. and Sir are translated by Herr; 
Mrs. by §rau;Madam by the French Ytadame, if a married lady is addressed. 
In the address of an unmarried lady Frdulein is used. Miss is translated by 
Fraulein. — (2) If Herr is used before the names of persons spoken of, it is de- 
clined with or without the article; in the plural the article must always be 
used, and mostly in the genitive singular.— (3) Herr takes in all cases of the 
singular n, and in all cases of the plural en.— (4) The words Herr, Frau, 
Fraulein are used idiomatically, if relatives or friends of the person addressed 
are spoken of without mentioning their names: Shr Herr Freund (your friend); 
Shr Herr Vater, Bruder, Sohn; Shre Frau Ntutter; Shr Fraulein Schwefter. 

(5) Of after fractions is generally not translated, the following noun, if 
the numerator of the fraction is more than one, being placed in the plural: 
Drei viertel Ellen (but dret viertel PBfund. See No. 65). : 





Wer ijt hier gewejfen? Herr Wtoll ijt hier gewefen; er hat biefes. 
Buch gebracht., Bijt du bet dem Schuhmadher gewefen? Goh bint 
heute bet Fhrem Schuhmacher gewefen; er hat Hhre Stiefel fron ge 
macht. Wo feid ihr diefen Mtorgen gewefen? Wir find bet unjerm 
@reunde Karl gewefen, welcher fehr fran€ tft. Diefer Herr ijt dret 
Sabre in Wien gewejen, und jeine Briider find jehr lange in Ronftanz 
tinopel gewefen. Du biftnicht fleifig gewefen, du Haft deine Wufgaber 
nod) nicht gemacht. Gd) bin geftern bet Frau Réoder gewwefen; fie if 
eine fehr liebenswitrdige, Dame. Bit Fraulein Gmilie oft in diefer 
Stadt gewejen? Sie ijt fchon dretmal Hier gewefen. Haben 












cme IT ee 


Herrn Scholl gefannt? Yd) habe ihn in Verlin gefannt; wir find oft 
— gufjammen ausgegangen. Wie lange find Sie in Madrid gewefen ? 


Yh bin nur ein halbes ahr da gewefen, aber ich bin drei viertel 
Yahre in Paris, und ein viertel Fahr in Wien gewefen. Haben Sie 
die Herren Nollet chon gefehen? Ya, Madame, ic) habe fie geftern 
dei einem meiner Freunde gefeher. Git meine Mutter hier gewefer ? 


Mein, [mein] Fraulein; ich habe Fhre Frau Mutter nicht gefehen; 


aber Shr Herr Vater und Shr Herr Bruder find diefen Morgen ein- 
mal hier gewejen. ue 
80. 


+ Has [there] been anybody in my room “Yes, your son has 
ee 


n there. \Has the tailor been here? “No, he has not 
yet been here. “Hast thou been at the joiner’s ? \=No, I have 
not yet been there. “We have many flowers; we have been in 
the garden of Mr. Nollet.f4 Have you also been at Mr. Moll’s? 
My brother has never been more contented than to-day; he 
has received from his uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a 
dozen pocket-handkerchiefs. How long have you been in 
Paris?}We have been there six months. These gentlemen 
have done much business (plur.); they have been very success- 


ful. Are Messrs. N. already departed for Cologne? +They are 


departed this morning with their uncle; I have seen them at 
Mrs. Sicard’s.) Has Miss Louisa been here to-day? No, Madam, 


your sister has not been here; I have seen her three quarters 


of an hour ago at your brother’s [house]. Give me half a yard 


of (vom) this linen. Have you ever known my father ?+ Yes, 
_ I have seen him three or four times at your sister’s. 


81. 
Imperfect Tense: id) war, I was; 
du wart, thou wast; 
er war, he was; 
wir waren, we were; 
ihr waret, you were; 
fie waren, they were. 


Ehemals, formerly; die Gphule, the school; alg, when. 


Ops.—When a clause begins with ql, when, the verb is placed at the end 


of the clause. 


a ee 


Wo wart du diefen Morgen? Joh war bet meinem Vetter, welder 


i 


: 


von Franffurt angefommen ift. Mein Vruder und ich waren bet deis 
nem Vater. Fhre Tante war jchon abgereijt. Herr Mtoll war ehe- 


mals jehr reich; er hat feit zehn Sahren viel verloren. Waren Sie 
noch nicht bet Herrn Mtably? Yoh bin geftern da gewefen, aber er 
war ausgegangen. Wie alt war Fhr Herr Bruder, als er in Kiln 


| 


: 


war? Gr war neungeht oder swanzig Gahre alt. Wir waren nicht 
zujammen; er war in Koln und ich war in Ditffeldorf. Meine 
Schweftern waren lange in Britffel bet Herrn Mollet. Warum find- 
Sie geftern nicht gefomimen? Yeh war geftern franf. . Waren diefe 


Herren immer fo reich? Haben Sie immer fo viele Freunde gehabt ? 
Warjt du diefen Morgen in [der] Schule? Gch bin heute nicht in [der] 
Schule gewejen. Goh war tn [der] Stadt, als Sie geftern bet metnem 
Vater waren. 
82. 

* Iwas formerly much happier; I was young and strong. 
Wast thou always as contented as to-day? My father was 
formerly very rich. My sisters were very ill yesterday. . How 
old were you when you were in France? I was fifteen years 
and six months old. *Was my room open when I was in school ? 
No, but the windows were open. This girl was much prettier 
when she was young. John and William were always your 
friends. Were you not at my brother’s when you were in 
town? {I have known your father when you were still a child. 


83. 
Imperfect Tense: id) hatte, 1 had; ~ 
du hatteft, thou hadst; 
er hatte, he had; 
wir hatten, we had; 


ihr hattet, you had; 
fie hatten, they had. 
Die Sitern, the parents; jebt, now; 
der eine, the one; der andere, the other. 


Oss.—Gin and ander, when not followed by a noun, decline weak or 
STRONG, according to the rules for ordinary adjectives, 


Du hattejt geftern einen neuen Hut; Haft duthn verloren? Der 
Hut, den ich geftern hatte, gehirt meinem Gruder. Ghr hattet viele 


a 


Sreunde, als ihr noch jung waret; warum habt ihr jest fo wenige ? 
Wir haben mehr Freunde als ihr. Mein Onfel hat alle Pferde, die 
er ehemals hatte, verfauft. $ch hatte gwet Schweftern; die eine war 
in Wien, die andere.in Berlin; haft du fie gefannt? Bch habe die- 
jenige gefannt, die in Berlin war; hatte fie nicht zwei Tidhter ? 
Hatten. Sie nicht vier Haujer in der Stadt? Sie haben Recht; aber 
- th habe zwei von diefen Daujern verfauft; ich hatte in dem einen ge- 
wohnt, und mein Bruder in dem andern 


84. 

+ I had formerly little money; but I am now richer than you. 
You were (had inGerman. See No.17) wrong, my dear friend; 
but your brothers were right. Nobody had any money for my 
brother when he was in Cologne. Did you have (had you) your 
lessons when you were yesterdayin school? No, I was sick; but 
my brother had all hislessons.. Hadst thou still thy parents when 
thou wast in Boston? Where had you your books when you 
were in the house of your sister ?.}~My brother had them in his 
room. We had few friends when we were in Berlin, but we 
had many when we were in Cologne. Where are the little - 
dogs which Miss Emily had when she was at your mother’s? 
She has sold thé one, and the other is dead. How many 
servants had you when you were in France? What had you 
in your hands when you were in your room?+I had a piece 
of sugar in the one hand, and two little bullets in the other. 


Whee 
Nom. ich, I; du, thou; ._ er, he; -  fte, she; e8, it; 
Dat. mir,tome; odir,tothee; ihm, tohim; ihr,toher; ihm, to it. 
Infinitives: faufen, to buy; thun,t to do; 
verfaufert, to sell; maden,t to make, to a 
geben, to give; lefen, to read; 
leihen, to lend; jehen, to see; 
, {dretben, to write. 
Wadhfam, watchful; die Zeit, the time; 
Luft haben, tohave a mind; ~ die Giite, the kindness. 


*per Thaler, the dollar; 
Sq) fann, I can; du fannft, thou canst; er fann, hecan; wir finnen, we 
can; thr tonnt, you can; fie fonnen, they can. Jnfin.: fénnen, to be able. 





+ Mtacjen and thun are thus distinguished in German: thun isto act for 
any purpose; machen, to act for the production of a work, 


Oxs.—(1) All German infinitives end in 1 (mostly in en).— (2) English 
infinitives with to must generally be rendered by German infinitives with 31. | 
If the English infinitives lose their sign to, the German corresponding infini- 
tive is generally employed without ju: id faun lejen, I can read ; ich habe 3u 
thun, Z have to do.— (3) The German infinitive is placed last in the ordinary 
sentence, but so that it precedes the past participle, if there is one. 

(4) The English objective case (me, thee, him, etc.) must be translated 
by the German dative, if we may supply the preposition to: Give me (to me) 
your pen, geben Gie mir Shre Feder.— (5) Personal pronouns in the accusa- 
tive or dative (without prepositions), must generally be placed before the 
accusative or dative of substantives, and before all other adjuncts of the verb. 


RKannft du mir diefes Buch leihen? Sch fann dir diejes Bud 
nicht Leihen; e8 gehirt meinem Vetter Heinrich. Wer fann diejen 
Brief lefen? Joh fann ihn lefen; er ijt jehr gut gefdrieben. Wir 
fonnen diefen Morgen nidt fhreiben. Warum fonnt ihr nicht fchrei- 
ben? Wir haben feine Tinte. RKinnen Sie meinem Bruder Fhre Uhr 
leihen? Sch taunihm meine Uhr nicht Leihen, id) habe fie dem Herm S. 
verfauft. Haben Sie meiner Schwefter eine Feder gegeben? Fh habe 
ihr feine Feder gegeben. Haben Sie Luft, diefen Hund zu faufen? Gh 
habe feine tuft, ihn 3u faufen; er ijt nicht wadhjam. Hat Shr Bruder 
Heute nichts zu thun? Gr Hat dret Briefe zu jdhretben. Wir haber 
noch giwei Wufgaben gu machen. Gd) hatte geftern das Bergniigen, 
he Fraulein Schwefter gu fehen. Haben Sie Zeit, diefen Brief zu 
lejen ? $ch habe jest feine Beit, ihn zulejen. RKonnen Sie mir einen 
Regenfhirm geben? Ye) fann hnen feinen geben, ich Habe mur 
einen. Shr Herr Bruder hat die Gitte, mir dem feinigen 3u leihen. 
Sind Sie geftern bet meiner Cante gewefen? Nein, ih war geftern 
nicht bet ihr; ich hatte gu viele Gejchafte. 


| 

















86. 


“Can you do that exercise? Yes, I can (do it); but my 
brother cannot (can it not do). Will you (Wollen Sie) lend me 
your penknife? Icannot lend thee my penknife; my sister has 
taken it Have you given a pen to my cousin? Yes, I have 
given him one. Hast thou sold thy dog to my sister? I have 
not sold: her my dog. Canst thou not lend me twenty dollars? ? 
I cannot do it to-day. We can read this book. These gentl 
men cannot write their letters; they have no paper. Has 


4 +X. > 


— §] Sines 


thou a mind to buy a pair of boots? Has your brother a mind 
to sell his ring? Had you the kindness to give a glass of water 
to this poor man? My friend had the pleasure to see his 
parents.+I had no time to read all these letters. My father 
had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou seen it? 
I have not yet seen it-+Have you been with Ferdinand to-day? 
I have been with him this morning. 


87. 
Nom. wir, we; ihr (Sie), you; fie, they; 
Da. ung, to us; euc) (Shue), to you; ijnen, to them. - 
gehen, to go; fein, to be; 
fonmmen, to come; wenn, if; 
trinfen, to drink; untwohl, unwell; man, one; 
effer, to eat; das Ungliid, the misfortune; 
haber, to have; das Paar, the pair, the couple. 


id) will, I will; du willft, thou wilt; -er twill, he will; wir wollen, we will; 
ibr wollt, you will; fie wollen, they will. Jnf.: wollen, to be willing. 


Oss.—Clauses introduced by wert require the verb to be placed last in 
the clause; the same as in relative sentences (No. 45). 


Willft du mit mir gehen? Yeh fann nicht mit dir gehen, ich habe 
feine Zeit. Yeh will dir ein fchones Buch leihen, wenn du fleigig bift. 
Kann dein Bruder heute nicht fommen? Cr hat feine Luft zu fommen; 
erijtunwohl. Wir wollen jest unfere Wufgaben machen. Wollen 
Sie ein Glas Wein trinfen? Mein, aber ich will ein SCtite Fleifch 
oder Miife effen. Wollen Sie ein wenig Senf und Salz? Rénnen 
Sie uns diejen Band leihen? Gh foun Fhnen diefen Band nicht 
feihen, mein Bruder will ihn haben. Mtan fann nicht ungliicflicher 
fein, als diefer junge Wtann; er hat feine Eltern und feine Briider und 
Schweftern verloren. Wer will diefen Apfel? FYeh will ihn haben. 
Was wollt ihr jest thin? Wir wollen ein Paar Briefe fdhreiben. 
S$ch will euch einen Korb Kirjchen geben, wenn ihr fleifig fein wollt. 
Wollen Sie die Gitte haben, mir eine Nadel zu geber? Gch habe jest 
_feine, ic) fonn Shnen feine geben. Haben Sie Zeit, mit ung gut 
gehen? Sch habe feine Beit, mit $hnen gu geben. 


i 88. 
T What hast thou to do? Ihave nothing todo. Wilt thou 
tead this book? Yes, I will read it. How is (Yas madjt) thy 


ee a oa 


brother? He is unwell, he cannot come.+> Where can one buy 
these fine penknives? One can buy them at our neighbor’s. 
Will you give us a little ink? Can your sister lend us her pen- 
knife ?4-What do these gentlemen want (what will these etc.)? 
These ladies will buy an umbrella. One cannot be more un- 
happy than I [am], one cannot have more misfortune than I. 
Give us something to drink. +#What will you [have]? } Will you 
have wine or water? Have I not lent youmy cane? No, you 
have not lent it to me. Where are your brothers? I have sold 
them my dog. +Ihese men are very rich; all these houses be- 
long to them. 


: 89. 
: to me; ‘ to. thee; 
Singular. Dat, mitt, | to myself; dir, | to thyself; 
ihm, ote ibm, to him, to her, to it; 
fich, t o himself, to herself, to itself, to one’s self. 


thee; / . 

Acc, mich, } myself bid), st shell , 
{ ihu, fie, e8, him, her, it; 

1 fic, himself, herself, itself, one’s self. 








to us; to you; 
Sa beesl sett 1 to ourselves; - end), 1 to yaitnalvae 
ifnen, to them (Shnen, to you); 
1 fich, to themselves, (to yourselves, to ae 
us; 
Acc. ung, } ourselves: end, a y eaesed: | 
1 be them (Sie, you); . 
id), themselves, (yourselves, yourself). : 
Infinitives. Past Participles. an 
y, foben, to praise; gelobt, praised; 
‘{chlagen, to beat, to strike; gejdlagen, beaten, struck; : 
* wajden, to wash; gewafden, washed; 
verlesen, to hurt; verlest, hurt; : 
fpielen, to play; gefpielt, played; r 
\ erlauben (with dat.), to permit, to allow; erlaubt, permitted, allowed; 
¥ vertheidigen, to defend; ? vertheidigt, defended; 
‘bejdjulbdigen, to accuse; 7 bejchuldigt, accused; 
¥ entiduldigen, to excuse; ent{djuldigt, excused; 
"handel, to act; gehandelt, acted; 
p-retten, to save; gerettet, saved; 
{predjen, to speak, to talk; geiprodjen, spoken, talked; 
{djneiden, to cut; gejdjnitten, cut; 
fey to expose; ausgefest, exposed; 


in Adht nehimen (with Acc.), to take care of; in UAdt genommen, taken care of. 





i ie 


Der Advocat, the lawyer; ba8 Gefdjid, the ability; der Muth, the courage; die 


‘ Seife, the soap; "ber Staub, the dust; die Wrmee, the army; der Verdacdht; the 


suspicion; * vorfidtig, cautious; unvorfidjtig, incautious; “angenehm, pleasant; 
unangenehm, unpleasant; fo, thus; da (conjunction), since; weil, because. 


Oss—(1) Geil and da (since) require the following verb to be at the end 
of the clause (No. 45).—(2) Adjectives are generally preceded by their qualify- 
ing words or adjuncts: © ift mir angenehm,-it is pleasant to me. 


Der Leber Hat dis gelobt, weil du fletfig gewefen bift. Dein 


Bruder ijt ein bifer Knabe; er hat mich geftern gefdhlagen. Haft du 
dic) {chon gewafchen? Jd habe mic) nod) nicht gemwafdjen; aber 
Heinrich hat fich jdjon feit einer Stunde gewafcen. Sch habe mich 


Heute mit einem Meffer verlebt. Karl hat fic) auch gefdynitten; er 


hat mit feinem Federmeffer gefpielt. Wollen Sie uns erlauben, in 
Ghrem Garten zu fptelen? Goh will e8 euch erlauben, wenn ihr die 
Blumen iw °Acht nehmen wollt. Warum feid ihr heute nicht ausge- 
gangen? Wir wollen uns in Acht nehmen, weil wir fran€ gewefen find. 
Gs ijt leicht, fich in Acht 3n nehmen, wenn man vorfichtig ijt. Diefer 


—Adpocat hat dich mit grogem Gefchice vertheidigt. Ou Haft Unredht, 
Dich 3 vertheidigen, da dich nod) Niemand befdhuldigt hat. Cs it 


Unredt, fid) gu vertheidigen, wenn man nidjt befduldigt ijt. Sie 


Tnnen fic) nicht entfchuldigen, {meine] Herren; Niemand far fic 


entjdrldigen, der fo gehandelt hat. Gs fann Yhnen nicht fchwer fein, 
theurer Freund, fich gu entichuldigen, da Cie .villig (perfectly) 
Recht haben. CEs ijt meiner Schwefter fehr unangenehm, fich in diefer 
Gefahr zu fehen. | 

90. 


+ It is very pleasant to me, to hear you speak thus. It is 
easy for (to) you to accuse me if I cannot defend myself. Hast 
thou hurt thyself, when thou wast in my room? I have not 
hurt myself, but William has hurt himself with his fork." How 
can you permit yourself'to hurt the trees in my garden? Thou 
art right to take care of thyself, since thou hast been sick. 
These boys have struck me to-day; but thy brother has de- 
fended me with great courage.) William’s father has beaten 
us, because we have played in his garden. Children, I cannot 
praise you to-day, because you have not done your lessons. (My) 
gentlemen, you have not been wise; to excuse one’s self if one 


je EE ae 


is not accused, is incautious. Charles had cut himself when he 
was in your garden. Will you give me some soap and water ? 
I will wash myself, and clean myself of the dust. Why have 
you not been in school, children? >We have already excused 
ourselves with (bei) the teacher. Our army is lost, it cannot 
save itself. These men have exposed themselves to a great 
danger .~You have exposed yourselves to(a)grave (jdhwer) sus- 
picion, since you have taken what does not belong to you. : 
91. aie : 


SGagen (past part. gejagt), to say, to einen Bejuch machen, to pay a visit; 



















tell; joldjer, foldje, joldjes (strong declen- — 
jchicfen, to send; sion), such; | | 
glauben (past. part. sabi); to be- feinbdlic, hostile; : 
lieve; dort, there (at that place); | 
wiffen, to know; die Betannt| daft, acquaintance; | 
“ verfpredjen, to promise; der Feind, the enemy; ; 
* fiirdjten (past. part, ‘dkapc ost to be daft, that (conjunction); 
afraid; Wiles, was, all that, everything that; 


*fid) weigern (past. part. geweigert), to Nicdts, was, nothing thak? 
refuse) ; | 

Inf. miiffen: id) mug, I must; du muft, thou must; er mug, he must; twit — 

miifjen, we must; ifr miift, you must; fte miiffen, they must. 


I have been in New York for a year, id) bin [jdon] feit einem Sahr 
in New York. 


Oxzs,—(1) Clauses, introduced by da require the verb to be at the end of 
the clause (No. 45).— (2) The indefinite pronoun man is only used in the 
nominative, and is translated by one, by the indefinite people or by they: Mtan 
muf fagen, one (they) must say. Often man may be rendered by an English 
passive construction: man glaubt, i is believed.—(3) The accusative of personal 
pronouns generally precedes the dative, 





Kinnen Sie mir fagen, wo Herr Mtoll wohnt? Fah fann [es] 
Yhnen nicht fagen. Wollen Sie mir dieje Feder leihen? Yoh fann 
fie Fhnen nicht leihen, fie gehort mir nicht. Lyd) mup heute dem 
Hraulein S. einen Bejuch machen; fie ijt geftern mit threr Miutter an- 
gefommen. Dtugt du fchon gehen? Wo find meine Schuhe? Hat 
der Schuhmacher fie noch nicht gebradjt? Nein, er will fie dir in etner 
Stunde fchicten. Wie fannjt du [es] wijfen? Gr hat [es] mir ge- 
fagt. Dein Bruder muR tod) feine Aufgaben machen. Wir miiffen 


oa FE saan 


Wiles thun, was unfern Eltern und Lehrern angenehin ift. Shr mitt 
meinen Getter bejuchen; er ift fett dret Wodhen franf. Heinrich und 
Wilhelm miifjen viele Biicher haben. Ntan muK nicht ausgeben, 
wenn man franf ijt. Mtan muR fich nicht vertheidigen, wenn man 
nicht bejchuldigt ijt. Sie miiffen nicht Wes glauben, was man Yhnen 
fagt. Sie miiffen fich nicht folder Gefahr ausfegen. Mtan glaubt, 
Daf die Preupen die feindliche Armee gejdlagen haben. NWtan fagt, 
dak der Feind fich nicht linger vertheidigen fann. Wtan glaubt nicht, 
Dak du dies Buch gefdhrieben Haft. Sie miifjen fic) in Acht nehinen, 
wernt Sie in meinen Garten gehen wollen. Ste miiffen wifjen, dak 
Shr Freund Karl fich geiweigert Hat, mir jene Biicher zu fchicten. 
Warum haft du dich geweigert, nad) Wien zu gehen? Yd) habe mid) 
nicht geweigert, nad) Wien gu gehen; aber ic) muff fiirdjten, dak id 
dort feine Gejchafte machen fann. Wir haben uns geweigert, dir unfer 
Haus zu verfaufen, weil es fiir dic) zu grop ijt. Wir find fdjon feit 
vier Wochen in der Stadt, aber Yiemand hat uns einen Befud) ge- 
- macht. 
: 92. Baw A pee TE 
= My friend had the kindness to send me a, basket of cherries. 
You have not yet sent me my book. Who has taken my pen? 
I cannot tell (it) thee. This penknife belongs to my brother; 
thou must give it to him. Charles will not lend me his um- 
brella. -Why will he not lend it to thee? One must not pay 
_ visits if one is unwell. One must promise nothing that one 
cannot do. One must never praise one’s self. +I can promise 
you a great pleasure if you will make the acquaintance of my 
friend; you must pay him a visit. I cannot believe (it) that 
_ you have such suspicion.|, It is said that you have been for 
two yearsin this country. It has been said that you have Tes shee 
_ fused to pay a visit to your sick brother We have not refused 
to write this letter, but we must be cautious in this affair (Ge- 
jchaft). Must we not be afraid that our friends have lost all 
(that) they have? We will do nothing that can be unpleasant 
to you, but you must have the kindness to do what you have 
promised to us. 





PART IL 





93. 


Present Indicative. Sing. 1. it) {obe, I praise, I am praising, I do praise; 
2. (du Lobeft),* du Lobft, thou praisest, etc.; 
3. (er lobet), er lobt, he praises; 
Plural. 1. wir loben, we abi 
2. (ihr lobet), ihr lobt, you praise; . 
3. fie loben, they praise. 


Imperative. Sing. tobe (du), praise (thou) ; 
Plural, tobt (ihr), praise (you); 
' {oben Gie, praise (you) [for polite conversation]. 


Finden, to find; , * wiinfchen, to wish, to desire; 
* fuchen (with acc,), to seek, to look for; arbetten, to work, to labor; 

wobhnen, to dwell, reside, live; das Such, the cloth; 

bringen, to bring; die Strafe, the street; 

bedauern, to regret, to pity; Der Buchhandler, the bookseller; 
~ banen, to build; Sedermanu, every body; 

reiten, to ride; fcharf, sharp; 

tadelu, to censure, to blame; ganz, whole, 


Oxss.—1. The e in the endings of the 2d and 3d pers. sing. and 2d plural 


is always used if the infinitive ends in den or ten (finden, arbeiten). In verbs — 


with infinitives in elm and ern (tadeln, bedauern) the e of the sending is dropped 
in all persons, except the lst pers. sing. 


2. The demonstrative pronoun that, used without a noun, and referring to ~ 


something mentioned before, or pointed at, is rendered by the neuter da8 or® 


dieS (instead of Ddiefes). 
3. Mixed fractions are placed wholly before the following noun: Boo. 


und eine viertel Nteile, two miles and a quarter. 


Was fuchen Sie? Hoh fuche meine Feder. Mein Bruder fucht 
fetnen Bleiftift.. Wir fuchen unfern Hund. Diefe Kinder fucen } 
ihre Bitcher. Wo faufen Sie Fhr Papier? Wir faufen unjer Papier | 





* The forms enclosed in parentheses are obsolete.. 


— wT eee Se a ee ee 








age eo 


bet dem Buchhandler. Joh finde meinen Stok nicht. Wer hat 
meinen Stod genommen? Jc) glaube, daf Shr Bruder ihn gee 
nomen hat. Yeh liebe diefen Rnaben nicht; er ift immer unartig. 
Du liebft deinen Lehrer. Gott liebt die guten Menjdhen. Gute Rin: 
der lieben ihre Gltern. ft es wahr, dak Shr Onfel fein Haus ver- 
fouft? Wie theuer verfaufen Sie die (a) Elle von diefem Tuche? 
Sch verfaufe die (a) Clle diejes Tuches zu (at) vier Chalern. DOas 
ijt jehr theuer. Findeft du nicht, Heinrich, dag das fehr theuer tft? 
ya, ich finde e8 fehr theuer. Wir verfaufen aber viel von diefem 
Tuche. GFedermann findet e8 fchin. Schiclen Sie mir dret und ete 
halbe Glle! Wiffen Sie, wo ich wohne? Ga, Sie wohnen in der 
RKarlsitrage. Yoh muK wiinfdhen, dag Sie fich ein wenig in Wht 
nehiten. Warum tadelt thr eure Freunde? Gch fiirdte, da ihr nie 
Semand fobt. Mtein Freund Karl arbeitet den ganzen Tag; ev ift 
eit fehr fleipiger Runabe. Bringe mir meinen Sto, Wilhelm; ich 
will ausgehen. Leihen Sie mir gefalligit Shr Federmeffer! Hier 
Haft du e8, aber fchneide dich nicht; e8 ijt fcharf. : 


94. 


What are you doing? [am reading the book which your 
brother has lent. me..-You read too much. Why do you not 
write? I have already~written three letters. My cousins 
never write. You-always-blame—your cousins; you must-not 
blame them. What art-thoudoing? tJam-doing-my exercise: 
4- What. is thy sister doing?! She is working. Can you tell me 
where Mr. N. lives? He lives in (the) William street. Dost 
thou live with (bei) thy uncle? No, I do not live with 
him. We regret that thy father is sick. Do you know, that 
your uncle is building a new house? ‘Where is your little 
brother? I believe that he is playing in the garden. I 
am afraid that thou playest too much, my son; thou must play 
less and work more. Has your brother found my watch? ~He 
finds all (that) he seeks. I can not excuse you if you are 
acting thus, Write’ this letter for me, if you please. Tell my 
brother that ae must go to Vienna with thee. Do not excuse 
thyself! I believe what thou sayest tome. My father wishes 
that thou ridest to the village, and buyest there ten pounds of 


- @ 


Pee, Teens 


sugar and twenty yards of linen. How much coffee have you 
bought? Three pounds and three quarters. 


95. 
Imperfect Indicative. id \obte, I praised, I did praise, was praising; 
bu Lobteft, thou praisedst, etc.; | 


er [obte, he praised; 

wir lobten, we praised; 

ihr lobtet, you praised; 

fie fobten, they praised. 
Befucher, to visit; antivorten, (with dat.), to answer; 
verjudjen, to attempt, to try, to en- fenden, to send; 
tidten, to kill; [deavor; fennen*, to know; 
beabfichtigen, to intend; fernen, to learn; 
verlafjen, to quit, to leave; begleiten, to accompany; 
fic) begeben, to proceed, to betake amiifiren, to amuse; 

one’s self; der Verjuch, the attempt; 

denfen, to think; der Tod, the death; 
fich bejdhaftigen, to occupy one’s self; die Whfidjt, the intention, design; 
brennen, to burn; \ die Verftirfung, the reinforcement; 
reden, to speak; die Reije, the journey; | 
bemerfen, to perceive; die UAnfunft, the arrival; | 
hinreichen, to be sufficient; das Geld, the money; 
helfen, (with dat.), to help; die Wohnung, the residence; 
ausfiihren, to accomplish; der Vote, the messenger; 
erwarten, to expect; das Wetter, the weather; 
anzeigen, to announce; : wahrend, ** while. 


Ops,—1. The imperfect ending is ete in regular verbs ending in dent, 
ten, guen and dynen (id) redete, arbeitete, e8 regnete), except fenden and twen- 
den, which generally form jandte, wandte, 

2. The imperfects of bringen and denfen are bradhte and dadhte; of brennen, 
brannte; fennen, fannte; nennen, nannte; rennen, rannte. 

3. Wollen forms regularly wollte; finnen makes fonnte, and miiffen, 
mufte, both without softening the vowel. Sch wollte is translated by J was 
willing, “I intended, I was going to, I wished; icy wollte wiht, [ was unwilling, 
I did not choose; ich mufgte, [was obliged to; ich founte, I could. 

4. If conjunctions that throw the verb to the end of the clause(daf, als, 
wert, da, weil, wahrend etc.) precede their principal sentences, the verb of 
the latter is placed before its subject: 

td gebhe, wenn er fommt, I go if he comes, 
wenn er font, gehe id, if he comes, I go. 


, 


‘ 
‘ 
; 
; 













* Rennen (to know) means ‘to have an acquaintance with somebody or 
something’; wiffen, (to know) means ‘to have a knowledge of something.’ 
** Wabhrend requires the verb to be at the end of the clause. . 


ane Oe 


5. In this instance (Obs. 4) the principal sentence is often preceded by 
the adverb fo, which in that position cannot be expressed in English: Qenn er 
fommt, fo gee id). 


6. Feminine nouns consisting of more than one syllable, except those 
in funft and nif, take en in all cases of the plural, without softening the 
radical vowel, For feminine nouns in el and er see p. 33. 


Yoh war in dem Garten, als dein Bruder uns befuchte. Ws Booth 
Abraham Lincoln tddtete, war ic) in Deutjdland. Gch wiinfdte 
Deinen Bruder in Wien zu fehen, da ich ihn in Berlin nicht fehen 
founte. ~Da id) alles Geld verloren hatte, hig, jute id) meine Uhr 
zu verfaufen. Da id) Paris verlaffen mute, fo wollte id) mich nach 
Rodin begeben. Wir madhten feinen Verfud) nach der Stadt zu gehen, 
‘weil e$ den ganzen Lag reqnete. Weil Miemand fiir deinen Brue 
Der redete, fo verfuchten wir [es], thn gut vertheidigen. Wir f{pielten 
in Dem Garten, wihrend dein Bruder in feinem Zimmer arbeitete. 
Wrihrend wir bei dir fpetften, brannte unjer Haus. WLS wir dich nicht 
im Hanje bemerften, Dachten wir, daw di dich im Garten bejchaftigteft. 
Wenn du dich weigerft, uns deine Wb fichten zu jagen, fo fonnen wir 
Dir nicht helfen. Dag dein Bruder in unjerer Stadt wohnte, fonnte 
ich nicht wiffen. 
96) 
I did not attempt to proceed to Paris since my money was 
not sufficient for the journey We did not expect the arrival 
of thy brother, since it rained the whole day. Since my 
brother refused to help me, I could not accomplish my designs. 
Since my friends were afraid to come to (311) us, we were 
Obliged to visit them. We were expecting the artival of your 
brother, when a messenger brought us your letter that 
announced his death. We could not yesterday come to town, 
because the weather was bad. Just (Gerade) because he was 
wrong, I did not answer him. ¥ Why did you not send your 
- son, if you could notcome totown? If you thought so of him, 
you did not know the man. My brother was learning his 
fesson while I accompanied Charles into the garden. & While 


Our house was burning, I amused myself with my friend 
. 4 egal Henry did not choose to come, I could not 


. 
ee a 


know. Since Mr. Davis was going to sell the house in which 
I lived, I was obliged to look for another residence. When 
we perceived the designs of the enemy, we sent reinforcements | 
into the village. 


97. | 


Future Indicative. id) werbde loben, I shall or will praise; 1 am going to praise; 
; du wirft foben, thou wilt praise; 
er wird loben, he will praise; 
wir werden lobe, we shall praise; 
ihr werdet oben, you will praise; 
fie werden oben, they will praise. 


“a 


ie 


Adht Cage, a week; der Diener, the man-servant; | 

vierzehu Tage, a fortnight; mitnebmen, to take along; . 

bis*, till, until; in gwei bis dret Ta- anfommen, to arrive; ‘ 
gen, in two or three days; abreijen, to depart; 

nod) einmal,-once more; hiren, to hear; 

wieder, again; regnen, to rain; j 

morgen, to-morrow; dauern, to last; 

miglich, possible . bleiben, to remain; 

der Krieg, the war; - erjudjen, to request; | 

die Ungelegenheit, the affair; * perlieren, to lose. : 















Ops,—(1) The rurure is formed by the verb twerbden as auxiliary, and 
the infinitive of the verb without 3u, This infinitive in simple sentences — 
must be placed at the end of the clause. The verb werden, not followed by 
an infinitive, denotes to become: fie werden Freunde, they become friends, — 
(2) Shall in the 2. and 3. pers, sing. and plur. is translated by the verb follen, 
which is irregular in the pres. indicative sing.: id) foll, du. jollft, er foll. - 
Shall in questions is translated by follem even in the first person: shall I come, : 
joll id) fommen? — (3) If Zwill etc. means to be willing, to intend, it should be 
translated by ich sia — (4) The interrogative adverb when is translated by 
wart. 


Joh werde diefer Abend das Vergniigen haben, meinen Onkel gu 
jehen. ch werde dir diefen hitbjdhen Ring geben, wenn du fleipig 
fein wirft. Heinrich wird mir heute ein Paar fchine Handfchube faue 
fen. Deine Schwefter wird zufrieden fein, wenn fie ihre Wufgabe gee 





* Sis, if it is used as a conjunction has the verb at the end of the ¢ 


So giles 


macht hat. Wenn wir in N. fein werden, werden wir viel Vergniigen 
haben. Wann werden Sie mich befuchen? Gd) glaube, dag wir Sie 
morgen befuchen werden. Meine VBritder werden heute oder morgen 
aud) fommen. C8 wird meinem Vater fehr viel Vergniigen machen 
(give), fie noch einmal gu fehen. Wann werden Sie Hhrem Freunde 
Karl fchretben? Gch werde ihm in acht bis vierzehn Lagen {chreiben. 
Wollen Sie die Gitte haben, mir das Buch gu fchicten, welches Sie 
mir verjprodjen haben? Sch werde e8 Shnen heute fdhicten, Fraulem. 
Mein Diener wird es Fhnen bringen. Fhr Freund fcheint (seems) 
arm ju werden. Goll ich Jhnen jest helfen, oder foll ich im Garten 
arbeiten, big Sie fertig (done) fein werden? Da du dich morgen 
nach Wien begeben wirft, fo erjuche ic) dich, meinen Sohn mitzuneh- 
men. Bleiben Sie in Berlin, bis ic) dort anfommen werde ? 


98. 


- Will you go with us? I do not believe that my.father will 
allow (it to) me. * Has the shoemaker brought my boots?,No, 
he will bring them to you this evening. What shall we do tow? 
We will go to town together (together to town). Will you 
have the kindness to lend me your horse? I shall lend it to you 
with much pleasure. We shall play to-day in the garden of 
our uncle; he will allow us. This man is becoming rich. I 
hear that thou art going to depart for Germany; wilt thou not 
take along thy children? Mr. Nollet has (is) arrived who 
desires to speak with you. Tell him that I will not see him. 
My father will arrive here in [a] short time; will you visit him? 
Excuse me, I must depart in three or four hours. It ‘will not 
be possible for (to) me to see him. Since the war will last ionger 
than we expected, it will be better if we remain in the country. _ 
Will you accompany us if we gototown? If your friend is 
losing so much money, he will soon become poor. What will 
your father say, if he hears that you are going to leave the 
ountry? I shall not write you again till I shall come (till I 
come) to Vienna. Will the weather be good or bad to-morrow? 
I believe that it is going to rain to-morrow. Shall I try it once 
more? Do not try it till you have spoken again with me. Do 
you know that our friend William is going to leave our town? 



















——— 


: oD coe 


When is he going to depart? I believe that he will depart in 
five or six days. Ifthou wilt (twillft) bring me pen, ink, and | 
paper, I shall try to write that letter for you. 


99. 


Present Subjunctive. Sing. ic) lobe, I praise (praised etc.); 

du lobeft, thou praise (praisedst etc.); 

er lobe, he praise (praised etc.). 

Plur. wiv loben, ihr fobet, fie foben. 

Imperfect Subjunctive. ich lobte etc. (like imperfect indicative), 
Perfect Indicative. ic) habe (du Haft, er hat etc.) gelobt, I have praised. 4 
Perfect Subjunctive. dh habe (du habeft, er babe, wir spi ihr habet, fte has 

ben) gelobt. ; 
Perfect Infinitive. gelobt haben, gelobt 31 haben, to have praised. 
Pluperfect Indicative. ic hatte (du hatteft etc.) gelobt, I had praised. 
Pluperfect Subjunctive, ich hatte (du hatteft etc.) gelobt. 


















Ops.—1l. The present subjunctive generally does not. drop the e.in the 
endings, The third person sing. is always like the first. 
2. ‘The first persons subjunct. present of finnen, wollen, mitffen are: id 
féune, ich wolle, ic) miiffe, and are conjugated like the subjunctive of id 
lobe. Haben, to have, makes the pres, subj.: ic) habe, du habeft, er habe, wir 
haben, ihr habet, fte haben. Gein, to be, has the pres. subj.: ich fei, du feieft, 
er fei, tir fete, ihr feiet, fte feien. e | 
3. The imperfect subjunctives of finnen, wollen, miifjen are: id tonnte, 
(could), wollte, miigte. Haben, fein, bringen, denfen soften in the -imperf. 
subjunct, the a of their imperfect indicatives: ic) wire (I were), id) dadhte, i 
bridte. Senden, wenden, brennen, fennen, nennen, rennen form their imperf. 
subjunct, regularly, restoring the e of the infinitives: id) fendete, wendete, 
brennte, fennte, nennte, rennte. 
4. The perfect indic. of haben and fein are: id) habe gehabt, I have he A; 
id) bin gewefen, I have been; perfect subjunctive: ich habe (du habeft etc.) ge: 
habt; ich fet (du feieft etc.) getwejen; pluperfect indicative: ic) hatte gehabt, 
had had; ic) war gewejen, 1 had been; pluperfect subjunctive: id) hatte ge: 
habt; ic) wire gewejen. 
5. In clauses introduced by })af the subjunctive is under certain ci 
cumstances more generallv used-than the indicative. This is the case if th 
clause introduced by daf is dependent on a verb of HEARING, THINKING, I 
LIEVING OF SAYING, in the IMPERFECT Or PLUPERFECT tense: 
I believe that he comes, id) glaube, daf er fo mmt; but: . 
I believed that he came (was coming), ith glaubte, da er fo mmte. 1 
Such verbs as require the verbs in the following clause to be in the sul 
junctive are: denfen, iiberzeugt fein, hiren, glauben, wabnen, fitvdten, jager 
antworten, {chreiben, and the like. =. 


ss GF = 


6. In clauses introduced by that, the English past tense is translated 
either by the PRESENT Or IMPERFECT subjunctive, and the English pluperfect 
either by the PEREECT Or PLUPERFECT subjunctive: 

They believed that he learned, fie glaubten, da er L[erne (or [ernte). 

They said that he had learned, fie fagten, Daf er gelernt habe (or hatte), 
But the use of the present and perfect subjunctives must be avoided, when its 
forms would not be distinguishable from the indicative: id glaubte, dag fie 
fernten (not fernen); ich glaubte, dai fie gelernt hatten (not haben). 

7. In all these constructions the conjunction dag may be omitted, and 
the verb (subjunctive) of the clause takes its place immediately after the 
subject : id) glaubte, er fet in der Stadt, I believed he was in the city. 

8. The same usage of the subjunctive takes place in clauses introduced 
by ob (whether, if), after the imperfect or pluperfect of verbs of asking 
(fragen) or doubting (3meifeln): ich fragte ihn, ob er franf fei (or ware), I 
asked him whether (if) he was sick. 


{@ Ifthe clause introduced by da depends on verbs in the PRESENT or 
FUTURE, the subjunctive is more rarely used than the indicative, 













Wahnen, to suppose (wrongly); unjuldffig, inadmissible; 

permuthen, to presume; .  vidhttg, correct; 

erfliren, to declare; unvidtig, incorrect; 

annehmen, to accept; tiglich, daily; 

behaupten, to state, to assert; die Zufubr, supply, provision; 

bemerfen, to remark; der Vor{chlag, the proposition; 
- fcheinen, to seem; die Anficht, the view; 

ee to ask (a question); die Sutter, the butter; 

verjidjern, to assure; das Gi (pl. Gier), the egg; 

borbereiten (past part, vorbereitet), to die Wahrheit, the truth; 

prepare; die Gefellfdaft, the company; 

feugnen, to deny; bie Sdladjt, the battle; 

sweifeln, to doubt; _ er General, the general; 

zahlen, to pay; *der Cinwohner, the inhabitant; 


liberzeugt, convinced; | ob, whether, if. 


Feh glaubte, da er fptele. Yoh glaubte, daR fie fpielten. Goh 
wahnte, da du franf feieft. Gch wabhnte, du feieft franf. Wir ver- 
mutheten, daf{ du deine Aufgaben lernteft. DOie Feinde dachten, da 
“wir feine Zufuhren hatten. Meine Freunde fiirchteten, ich fet todt. 
Gr war iiberzeugt, dak ic) mich nach Berlin begeben hitte. Dein 
Sreund erflirte, dak er deinen Vorfrjlag nidjt annefmen finne. 
Dieje Minner hatten behauptet, dak du in Kiln wohnteft. Bah be- 
tte daG diefe Anficht unvichtig gu fein fdjeine. Cr verficerte mir, 


sae 


da er immer diefe Wbficht gehabt habe. Der Lehrer dachte, dak wir 
ung nicht vorbereitet Hatten. Wteine Freunde jchrieben mir, fie brace — 
ten tiglid) Butter und Cier nach der Stadt. Wilhelm leugnete, dak — 
er jemals die Whficht gehabt hatte, fein Haus zu verfaufen. Dein — 
Vater fragte mich, ob ich jemals in Wien gewefen fet. Gch zweirfelte, — 
ob diefer Mtann dir die Wahrheit fage. | 


100. ; 
My brother thought that thou wast ‘working; but I was 
é 
; 


ne ces A De 





afraid that thou wast playing. He supposed [wrongly] that I~ 
was wrong. He often told me (told me often) that he had — 
-never had such a suspicion. We presumed, Henry was in your — 
company. Were you not convinced that we could not lose 
that battle? The general declared ‘that these propositions — 
were inadmissible. He stated that the English were sending — 
provisions, and that the inhabitants were bringing them to the 
city. _How could you say that I was living in France? Did I 
not always say that your views were correct? He remarked 
that he knew me, and [that] your suspicion could not be correct. 
My brother asked me whether I had ever had such designs? - 
Henry answered me that he was not prepared to declare his 
views; he doubted if we could pay that money. I supposed 
you were accompanying your brother. I was afraid you were 
dead, since I had heard that you had not been in town for a 
month. . 


101. 


Future Subjunctive. th werbde foben, du werbdeft loben, er - tere (oben, rir 
werden Loben, thr werdet oben, fie werden loben. 
Conditional, ich wiirde loben, I should or would praise; 
du wiirdeft loben, thou wouldst praise; 
er wiirde foben, he would praise; 
wir wiirden [oben, we should praise; 
ihr twiirdet foben, you would praise; 
fie wiirden loben, they would praise. 















; 





Oss.—1, Ifaclause, introduced by if, is dependent on a verb in the 
potential mood with should, would, could, might, the clause is call 
HYPOTHETICAL, and requires in German the supsunctive of the rmperrecr f 
the English past tense, and the sussunorive of the PpLuperrecr for the 








apart © 


ae OF so 


English pluperfect. The conditional should not be used in clauses intro- 
duced by wenn (if): Z should praise you, if you were here, id) wiirde Sie lobent, 
wenn Sie hier waren; I should praise you, if you worked (would work), id 
wiirde Sie foben, wenn Sie arbeitetem (not arbeiten wiirden): J should’ 
praise you, if you had worked, id) wiirde Sie loben, wenn Sie gearbeitet Hatten, 

2. Im the principal sentence of the hypothetical period the English 
potential with should or would is rendered either by the German conditional, 
or by the subjunctive of the imperfect (pluperfect): Sd witrbde jufrieden 
fein (or id) ware zufrieden), wenn fie angefommen wiren, I should be pleased 
if they had arrived. Gie hitten ihn gelobt, wenn Sie hier gewefen waren, 


you would have praised him if you had been here. 


3. The English potential with could or might in the principal sentence is 
generally rendered by the subjunctive of the imperfect (or pluperfect, see 
p. 108.) of the modal auxiliary finnen (ich fonnte) with the infinitive of the 
verb: Gr finunte dies thun, wenn er hier wire, he could (might) do this 
if he were here. 


4." The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary miiffen (ic) miifte) 
in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods is generally rendered by 
‘I ought to’ or ‘I should be obliged to’ or by similar circumlocutions: Ste 
mii Kiem dies wiffen, wenn Sie aufmertfam twiren, you ought to know this if 
you were attentive. $d) miiffte meinen Plan aufgeben, wenn died der Fall 
wire, I should be obliged to give up my plan if this were the case. 

5. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary migen (ich midte, 
see p. 108.) in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods, generally cor- 


‘responds to ‘J should wish to’ or ‘like to’: Sch modhte ihn fehen, wenn es mogltd) 


ware, J should wish (would like) to see him if it were possible, 


_ 6. In all these instances (No. 2—5.) the conditional clause is frequently 
understood: Sas wiirden Sie thun? what would you do? 

_ 4%. The English potential with should or would in clauses introduced by 
THAT (Daf), is expressed either by the subjunctive of the future, or by the 
conditional (especially with a plural verb). But after verbs of wIsHING, 
would is expressed by midjte, or by the imperfect shbjunctive of the main 
verb: Sch hoffte, da ev fommen werde.(or wiirde), I hoped that he would 
come. Gr glaubte, daf fie bleiben wiirden (not werden), he believed that 


they would remain. Sh wiinjdjte, da fte fommen mi dten (or timen), I 


wished that they would come. 


8. In clauses introduced by rat, could generally corresponds to finnte, 


and might to michte: Er dachte, da fte nit fommen finnten, he thought 


‘that they could not come, Gr fiirdtete, dah fie fommen mi h ten, he was 
_ afraid that they might come. 


Ubfdjneiden, to cut off;  wablen, to choose, elect; 


erreiden, to reach; befolgen (part. befolgt), to follow; 
‘Gndern (part. gednbdert), to change; reijen, to travel; 
ats, to return; fich guviictziehen, to retreat; 


aide © ER as 


erridjten, to establish; der Stath, the advice; 

beftdtigen, to confirm; - der Viirger, the citizen; 

bauen, to build; bie Regierung, the government; 
offen, to hope; . das Poftamt, the post-office; 

si iy to continue; gern, gladly, willingly; 

der Rhein, the Rhine; fpat, late; 

der Grafident, the President; bald, soon; 

der Bejdluk, the resolution; gejund, healthy; 

der Gefallen, the favor; fparjam, economical. 


Der General fiirdtete, daB die Feinde feine Zufuhren abfchneiden | 
wiirden. Wir fiirdteten, dag du-3u fpat fommen modhtejt. Dein - 
Vetter wiinjdte, daB du dich nach Wien begeben mochteft. Die Cine 
wohner hofften, dak die Feinde die Stadt nicht erreichen fonnten. Gch 
glaubte nicht, Dak dein Bruder feine Wnjicht Gndern werde. “Wir ver= 
mutheten, dak Karl feine Aufgaben nicht haben witrde. Sch dachte 
du werdeft bald juriidfehren. ch wiirde gliicflider fein, wenn ich 
Viiher und Freunde hatte. Gd) wiirde mehr Vergniigen haben, wenn 
meine Sdweftern hier waren. Ou witrdeft nicht fo reich fein, wenn 
du nicht fo viele Gefdhafte gemacht hatteft. Wenn Heinrich Geld 
hatte, wiirde er diefe Meeffer faufen. Sch wiirde deinen Bruder be- 
fuchen, wenn ich Beit hatte. Wir wiirden dich nicht tadeln, wenn dit 
fleigiger gemwefen wareft. Dein Onfel fagte mir, du wiirdejt morgen 
nicht fommen. Weldhen von diefen Stdclen wiirdeft du wahlen? 
Wem wiirdet ihr eure Blumen geben? Was witrdeft du fagen,; wenn | 
ic) mein PBferd verfaufte? Sch wiirde dir erlauben gu fpielen, wenn 
du deine Wufgaben gemacht hattejt. Wenn dw Beit gu Lejen hatteft, 
wiirde ic) dir ein nitbliches Buch Lethen. Sch witrde gern mit dir 
gehen, wenn mein Lehrer eS erlaubte; ich mug heute [noch] drei Briefe 
{chreiben. ch brachte dir gern deine Biicher, wenn ich fie hatte. 
Dein Vater wire jest reich, wenn er meinen Vorfdhlag befolgt hatte. 
Ou Hattejt Recht, wenn wir in Frankreich waren. Yeh jdictte dir 
meinen Diener, wenn er nicht ausgegangen wire. Wenn wir in 
Deutfchland wohnten, fo hiatteft du nicht fo viel Geld verloren. Wenn 
dit dich in Wcht gerrommen Hatteft, fo warft du jest nicht franf. Deine 
Sreunde fonnten dir nicht fo viel Geld geben, wenn fie nicht reid) 
waren. Goh modhte nad) Deutfdhland reijen, wenn ich mehr Geld 
hatte. Ou fonnteft dein Gefchaft fortjeken, wenn du vorfichtiger 
wareft. Gr finnte gefund fein, wenn er einen Arjzt gehabt hatte, 










oe 


Shr miiftet reicher fein, wer ihr fparfam gewefen wiiret. Wenn 
du meinem Nachbar nicht Geld gegeben hattest, miigte er fein Haus 
verfaufen. Wenn wir zwei Stimmen (votes) mehr gehabt Hatten, . 
fo hatte dein Vater Recht gehabt. 


102. 


We thought that the enemy (pl.) would retreat to the 
Rhine. Charles did not doubt that you would return in five or 
six days. The inhabitants wished that the government would 
establish a new post-office. All citizens expected that the 
President would confirm these resolutions. We were afraid 
that you might choose the wrong (unredjt) way. Louisa would 
be much. (fehr) pleased if she had these flowers. Henry would 
not have so many friends if he were not so kind (gut) and 
diligent. We should not yet have (be) arrived if we had not 
received a letter from your father. We should not have sold 
our house if my father had done more business (pl.). The 
teacher would blame thee if thou hadst not done thy exercises. 
Ishould not believe it if thou hadst not seen it. If I had money 
I should buy a pound of cherries. If you would tell me where 
Mr. N. lives, I would give you two dollars. Would you be- 
lieve that I had done this? Would you do me this favor if I 
allowed you to amuse yourself this evening? I would do it 
willingly if l had time. You might be rich now if you: had been 
more cautious in your affairs. Thou mightest live now in a 
palace (GchloR) if thou hadst followed my advice. If weshould 
receive reinforcements, we could beat the enemy. They could 
not have defended (verthetdigt) themselves if my brother had 
not helped (gebolfen) them. If they had (were) departed 
yesterday, they ought to be here now (now here). If you had 
followed your [own] advice; you would be obliged now to leave 
the country. I should like to build this house for you if you 
_ would (were willing to) pay more money. We should like to 
follow thy advice, if it were possible. [Use the imperfect in- 
stead of conditional in the following in I should 
bring you your pictures to-morrow if they were done (fertig). 
They would have sent your money a week ago if they had had 
it, If you had arrived later, you would not have found us in 


<i» ae 


town. If I were not sick, I should visit you. If thou hadst_ 
changed thy resolutions, thou wouldst not have lost thy 
money. Thou wouldst be lost now if I had not saved (gerettet) 
thee. If you had had less money, you would have been more 
economical. 


103. : 
Wusgehen, to go out. . 


ich gebe aus, I go out; | 
du gebft aus, thou goest out; . 
er geht aus, he goes out; 
wir gehen aus, we go out; 












iby geht aus, you go out; 
fie gehen aus, they go out. a ; 
aufmaden, to open; fich anfleiden, to dress (one’s self); 
gumadjen, to shut; aufftehen, to rise (from bed or a fall, 
giriidjdicen, to send back; etc.); - 
Unterrid)t nehmen, to take lessons; —auffgeHen, to rise (from the sun, moon, 
anflopfen, to knock (at a door); etc.); | 
aufwaden, to awake; untergehen, to set (of the sun, etc.); : 
ftudiven, to study; porziehen, to prefer; 
abjdjreiben, to copy; die Machridt, the news; 
mittheilen, to communicate; die Gewohnheit, the habit; 
anziehen, to put on; die Rommode, the chest of drawers; 
erfranfen, to fall sick; die Meife, the journey; | 
auffiren, to cease; die Sache, the thing; 
anfangen, to begin, tocommence; .__ die Untwifjenheit, the ignorance; 
geftehen, to confess; . fhwar;, black; 
einfehert (eine Gade), to be aware (of friih, early. 
a thing); 7 a 
; 


Oxss.—1. Verbs having for prefixes syllables that do not occur as words by 
themselves, are called INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. Such prefixes are be, 
ge, ent (emp), er, ver, 3er. Most other prefixes of verbs are PARTICLES (espe- 
cially prepositions) which also occur as separate words. Verbs compound 
with these are called SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. The most usual of these 
particles are: ab, an, auf, aus, bei, mit, nach, vor, gu, zuriic, ein, fort, and th 
compound particles with her and hin (hervor, herauf, etc.). 

2. The prefixes of the. separable compound verbs are detached from the 
simple verb in the PRESENT, IMPERFECT and IMPERATIVE, if they stand in or- 
dinary (see Oss. 4) sentences. The detached prefixes are removed to the e 
of the clause: er get qte miv den Lod feines Setters an, he announced to m 
the death of his cousin. 


mt : 


in EQ a 


3. Ifseparable compound verbs are construed with rinrmiftives (with 
zu), the detached prefix is often placed before the infinitive and its adjuncts: 
Wir fangen heute an, da8 Bud) zu lejen (or: Wir fangen heute das Sud 
gu lefen an), we begin to-day to read the book. 

4, If the separable compound verbs occur in clauses that require the 
verb to be at the end (No. 45; 95, Oss, 4), the prefixed particles are not de- 
tached, but keep their connection with the simpie verb, the same as in the 
infinitive: Die Kuaben, die zu lejen an fangen, the boys that begin to read; 
wenn die Knaben 3u lejet anfangen, if the boys begin to read, etc. 
| 5. The prepositions durch, iiber, um and unter are in some compounds 
SEPARABLE, and in others INSEPARABLE: id) unterneh me, I undertake; but: 
die Sonne geht unter, the sun sets.f 


Yeh gehe heute nicht aus; da8 Wetter ijt gu fchlecht. Wenn das 
Wetter {hiner ware, witrden wir gernausgehen. Heinrich, du madft 
nie die Shitre zu. Rannjt du diefe Rommode aufmachen? Gch mache 
mein Zimmer 3u, wenn ich ausgehe. Yoh {chicte Shnen das Buch 
guriicf, welches Sie mir geliehen haben. Mtein Vetter. fchictte mir 
geftern den Stock zuriicf, den ich thm geliehen hatte. Gchreibft du 
alle diefe Briefe ab? Sch muK Ghnen etwas mittheilen. Was wollen 
Gie mir mittheilen? Yeh theile Ghnen eine angenefhme Nachricht mit. 
Welches Mleid ziehft dir heute an? Yoh ziehe mein fchwarzed Kleid 
an, und meine Schwefter wird thr weifes Kieid anziehen. Meine 
MNachbarn fangen heute an, thre Gachen 3u verfaufen. Dein Freund 
febte gefterm jetne Meije fort. Wahrend er feine Reife fortfeste, er- 
~ franfte er. Wann horen Sie auf, Unterricht gu nehmen? Wenn ich 
jebst aufhirte, wiirde ich nicht fehr viel wiffen. Wann geht die Sonne 
im Wtonat Wtar; (March) auf? Wenn die Sonne friih aufgebt, 
geht fie {pat unter. Wann ftehen Sie auf? 


- (104. 


Do you not rise yet? No, I am unwell; I shall not rise 
to-day. You always rise very late; that is a bad habit. Shut 
the door, if you please. Open the window. Your brother al- 
_ ways opens the door and the windows. Do you not go out to- 
day? I shall not go out to-day. My brother goes out twice 
every day (every day twice). Ishall send you back your 
umbrella to-morrow. Send me also back the cane which I 


as 
oF 





+ If such verbs are inseparable, they are marked with an asterisk. 


aes 


have lent you. 


What is my son doing? He copies the letters 
which you have written this morning. If my uncle arrives, 
I shall communicate to him the good news. 


0 — 


; 
: 
‘ 
1 


Do not com: 


municate him anything. Put on thy new dress. I announced yes- 


terday to my children that you would visit us to-day. 
you begin again to take lessons? Because I am aware of my 
Are you aware that I was right? No, I am not 

My children begin to study early, and cease (to 

Which garden do you prefer, mine or that of my 
brother?. I must confess that I prefer that of your. brother. 
When my servant knocked [at the door] I awoke, dressed my- 
self and perceived that I had slept (gefdjlafen) too long. My 
brother departed from Vienna while I was preparing my 
Why do you not prepare your lessons, children? 


ignorance. 
, aware of it. 
study] late. 


journey. 


Bauen, to build; 

beirathen, to marry; 

fiihren, to conduct; 

pliindern, to plunder; 

zerftdren, to destroy; 

suhdren, to listen; 

anerfennen, to acknowledge; 
heifen, to cure, to heal; 

fich befjern, to improve (one’s self) 
Dictiren, to dictate; 

vergrofern, to increase, to enlarge; 
verfchinern, to embellish; 
bejchiefen, to bombard; 
verwunden, to wound; ~ 

voriegen, to submit (place before); 
ablehnen, to decline; 

ausverfaufen, to sell out; 
franzofijd), French; 

unbegriindet, unfounded; 
amerifanijd, American; 


Oxns.—1. The PAST PARTICIPLE of verbs that make their ‘imperfects it 
te or ete is formed by prefixing the syllable ge (augment) and adding 1e 
ending t or et to the infinitive, after its ending (en orm) has been droppec 
Verbs in den and ten take et: loben — gelobt; audern — gednbdert; reden — 
Those verbs that change e intoa in the imperfect (No. 95.) ke 
that vowel in the participle (jendet — gejandt; denfen — gedadjt, etc.). 


geredet. 


105. 


~ der Graf, the count; 


*per Erfolg, the success; 


~ der Held, the hero; 


Why do 

















faft, almost; 

griedrid), Frederick; 
Oefterreich, Austria; 

der Gejandte, the ambassador; 


der Fiirft, the prince; 
der Feldherr, the commander; 


der Soldat, the soldier; 


der Senat, the senate; 

die AWufmerffamfeit, the attention; 
die Republif, the republic; 

die Wunde, the wound; 

die Zahl, the number; 

die Vedingung, the condition; 

der Frieden, the peace; 

der Gebiilfe, the assistant; 

der Vorrath, the stock. 

der Franzofe, the Frenchman. 


eee PY ae: 


2. Verbs with the ending iret (ieren), and the inseparable compound 
verbs do not take an augment (ftudiven, ftudirt; erlauben — erlaubt), Separable 
compounds insert the augment between, the prefix and the simple verb (auf-. 
horen — aufgehirt). Some compound verbs consist of a separable prefix 
followed by an inseparable one. These take no augment: vorbereiten — vor- 
bereitet. 7 

+g. About hundred and seventy verbs and their compounds form their 
past participles by the ending en, refusing the ending te of the imperfect (fehen 
— —gefeben; fallen — gefallen). These verbs are called srrone verss, and their 
conjugation stronG consuGation; all the others (with participles in et) are 
called weak verss, and their conjugation weak OonJuGATION, See p. 90. 

4, Nouns form their genitives in e8 (8) oren(it), The former are of the 
stronG, the latter of the weak prciEnsion, Nouns of the weak declension 
take en (or nif the nom. ends in e, ef or er) in all cases except nom, sing., and 
never soften their radical vowels in the plural, To the weak declension be- 
long the masculines in e (fnabe, Bote, Preufe, etc.), and some other, 
especially foreign nouns which have dropped their former ending e (Graf, 
Pirft, Herr, Menfch, Held, Soldat, Prafident, etc). 


—«s Mein Bruder hat ein neues Haus in der Friedricdhsftrage gebaut. 
Der franzojifdhe General hat den Grafen Bismard nach der Stadt 
Berfailles begleitet. Wan fagt, daf der General XN. die Todhter eines 
Hranjzojen geheirathet habe. Wenn ihr den Fiirjten erwartet hittet, 
fo hatte er euch in fein SchloR gefithrt. Halt du dem Feldherrn den 
Crfolg der Sechlacht angezeigt? Die Soldaten haben die Stadt 
gepliindert und jerjtirt. Wenn ihr diefen Helden gefannt hiattet, 

wiirdet thr wiljen, daR diejer Verdacht unbegriindet ijt. Der Senat 
hat der Botfchaft des Prajidenten mit groper WAufmerfjamfecit guge- 
hort. Der Prajident hat die franjzofijde Republié anerfannt, und 
Dem amerifanifden Gefandten erlaubt, in Paris 3u bleiben. Wein 

Hreund hat drei Gahre in Berlin ftudirt. Wie-haben Sie fich in der 

Gefellfchaft diejes Herrvn amit firt ? | 
106. see 


What physician has cured the wound of that soldier? 
Frederick has improved very [much] in the last three months. 
Do you know the boy ? ,.Have you ever seen (the) Count Bis- 
marck? Do you know the eonditions of (the) peace which the 

Prussians have dictated? We had expected the physician, 
but he has sent his assistant. The Emperor Napoleon has 
enlarged and embellished the city of Paris very [much]. Have 


ee er 


the Prussians not yet commenced (strong verb) to bombard : 


the city? They have killed or wounded a great number of 
French soldiers. One has almost ceased to speak of this affair. 
There are few men that have not acknowledged this. The 
ambassadors of England and Austria have submitted to the 
King of Prussia other conditions, but it is said that the king has 
declined them. “We have almost sold out our whole stock, but 
our friends have advised (anzeigen) us that they have shipped 
(abjenden) another supply. 


107. 
Der Neffe, the nephew; beiwobhnen (with dat.), to be present at; 
das Landgut, the country-seat; anwenden, to employ; 
der Bediente, the (man) servant; *jiberrajchert, to surprise; 
die Vorlefung, the lecture; verdienen, to deserve; 
die Entjduldigung, the excuse; abbolen (with accus.), to call for; 
der Koffer, the trunk; brauchen, to need (a, v.); 
der Gafthof, the hotel; aufridjtig, upright, sincere: 
der Fort\chritt, the progress; gefallig, obliging; 
die Krone, the crown; gehirig, proper; 
bie Strafe, the punishment, penalty; geniigend, sufficient; 
feben, to live (be alive); nicht blof, nicht nur, not only. 


Ops.—1, In sEPARABLE compound verbs, the preposition 3 as sign of the 
infinitive is incorporated in the verb and placed immediately after the prefix — 


(anfangen — at 3 i angen). 

2. In order to, before an infinitive, is rendered by the prepositions um --- 
zit: in order to praise, unt 3ufoben. Jim is placed before all adjuncts of the in- 
finitive if there are any: um morgen nad) Jt. 3u gehen, in order to go to N. to- 
morrow. | | 


opened by an adjunct of the verb (objects, adverbs or prepositions): Um 3u 
leben, mitjfen wtr arbeiten, in order to live we must work. tit Freunden 
bin id) ftreng, with friends I am strict. 


4, German adjectives in their crude forms. (without endings) are used 


aS ADVERBS, corresponding to English adverbs in ly: Gie haben richtig geur- 
theilt, you have judged correctly. 


5 Ifthe conjunction but stands after a negative phrase which it corrects, 
it is translated by fondern, not by aber: Dies ift nid t weif, jondern 


ichwar;, this is not white but black. 


3. If aphrase with unt — 3u opens the sentence, the verb of the latter : 
must be placed before the subject. The same is the case if any sentence is — 


ee 








i RE cs 


6. The possesstve case of nouns may generally be rendered by the Ger- 
man genitive preceding its noun. In this instance the governing noun, as in 
English, loses its article (the article or other determinative words, if there are 
any, always belonging to the possessive case): the boy’s father, De8 Rnaben 
Bater; the teacher’s book, de8 Lehrers Bud. 


Yeh fomme, um dir 3u fager, da ich morgen nach meines Neffen 
Landgute abreije. Sch habe meinen Beodienten gefdhicdt, um mir ein 
Pfund Zucter zu faufen. Wir leben nicht, um 3u effen, fondern wir 
efjert, nt zu Leben. Umi gliicdlic) 3u fein, mug man jufrieden fein... 
Um Freunde zu haben, mug man nit bloR aufridtig, jondern aud) 
gefallig fein. Goh habe nicht Zeit auszugehen. Haben Sie die Giite, 
Diefe gwet Briefe abzujdreiben. Wollen Sie fo gut fein die Thitre 
aufzumacden? MWeines Nachbars Sohn hat zwei Pferde 3u verfaufen. 
Git e3 noch nicht Zeit aufzuftehen? Goh habe das BVergniigen ge- 
Habt, deiner Schwefter Vorlefung beizuwohnen. Haben Sie Geld, 
um DdDiejen Ming zu faufen? Hat dein Vater dir diefes Geld gegeben, 

um 8 fo jdlecht anguwenden? Des Fiirjten Tod hat mich fehr un- 
angenehim itberrajdt. DOeiner Schwefter Freundin hat nicht unvor- 
fichtig, fonder fehr weife gehandelt. Jch bin nicht hier, um eure 
Cnifchuldigungen anjuhsren, fondern um die Strafe, die ihr verdient 

~ Habt, 3 dictiren. 

re 


J 108. 


My brother has six letters to copy. Have the kindness to 
send me back my book. It is time to depart. Which dress do 
you wish to put on? Allow me to open the window, it isso 
warm. Excuse me, it is not warm, but cold. You have the 
bad habit to rise too late; you must not rise late, but as early 
as youcan. A soldier has (is) arrived in order to take along 
the general’s children. I have sent a servant to the hotel in 
order to call for my sister’s trunk. In order to make progress 
(plur. in German), we must not play, but diligently work. We 
need more money in order to continue this business properly. 
In order to prepare [yourself] sufficiently, you will need not 
one but three hours. The Emperor Napoleon has declared war 
to the King of Prussia in order not to lose his crown. 


ic SES. Pcs 
109. 


Present Infinitive Passive: gelobt werden (gelobt 3u werden), to be praised. : 


Present Indicative Passive : ich werbde gelobt, I am praised; 
du wirft gelobt, thou art praised; 
er wird gelobt, he is praised; 
“wir werden gelobt, we are praised; 
iby werdet gelobt, you are praised; 
fie werden gelobt, they are praised. 
Passive Form with fein: ich bin gelobt, I am praised; 
du bift gelobt, thou art praised ete. 


Oss.—1. The present passive is easily distinguished from the future — 
active, the auxiliary werden in the latter being connected with the infini- 


tive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb, 
2. The passive with werden is the ordinary form of the German passive, 


denoting the actual happening or continuing of the action expressed by the © 
verb: die Feinde werden verfolgt, the enemy are pursued (are being pursued), — 


‘The form of the passive with fein denotes a staTE, RESULTING from the action 
expressed by the verb: da8 Haus ift verfauft, the house is sold (is a sold one), 


denoting the result of the act of selling, while: ba8 Haus wird verfanft 
denotes the actual going on of the sale (the house is being sold, for instance by — 


an auctioneer). If the action itself and its result are not distinguished, both 
forms may be used with equal propriety: die Stadt wird (or ift) belagert, the 


city is besieged. If for the English ordinary passive we use or may use the © 
progressive form of the passive, the German passive takes the auxiliary” 


werden. 


3. The passive agent (doer of the action) is generally indicated by pon 
with the dative (sometimes by dDurd)): die Stadt wird v o n den Truppen bela - 


gert, the city is besieged by the troops. 


4, The conjunction when is translated by wenn (not by als), if it de- 


notes whenever, or if the verb stands in the present, perfect or future tenses. 


SYNOPSIS. 
wann ? in questions, direct or indirect; 


wenn, if denoting whenever or if the verb is in present, perfect or 


when future; 


alg, if the verb is in the imperfect or pluperfect, and does not 


denote whenever. 


if went, denoting contingency if conditional clauses; 
ob, if denoting whether after verbs of asking or doubting. 


Anftellen, io appoint; befesen, to occupy; 
angretfen (part. angegriffen), to attack; beneiden, to envy; 
ausriiften, to endow; beleidigen, to insult; 
anfitllen, to fill; bliihen, to flourish; 
achten, to esteem; ernten, to harvest; 


belohnen, to reward; _ erheben (p. erhoben), to collect; 


a 


pa 





—" 





erftaunert (v. a.), to astonish; 

erfreuen, to delight; 

-gebrauchen, to use; 
gelingen, to succeed 
hafjen, to hate; 

“tieben, to love; 

 planiven, to grade; 
pflaftern, to pave; 
raichen, to avenge; 
repariren, to repair; 
faien, to sow; 
ftrafen; to punish; 

tiiufchen, to deceive; 
*umgeben, (strong v.) 
Fumringen 
*iiberhiufen, to overwhelm; 
*itberzeugen, to convince; 
verlaffen (strong), to leave, quit, desert; 

chlieRen (p.verfdhloffen), to lock; 

derjorgen, to supply; 

 *pollenden, to finish; 

die Whgabe, the tax; 

die Anlage, the talent; 

der WUntrag, the application; 

Die WArbeit, the work, labor; 

Die Art, the kind; 

_da8 Dampfboot, the steamboat; 

_ der Cijenbahnjzug, the railroad-train; 

~ die Erbitterung, the animosity; 


to surround; 


75 


der Fall, the case; 

das Feld (pl. Felder), the field; 
der Friihling, the spring; 

der Gegner, the adversary; 

das Getreide, the grain; 

der Handel, the trade; 

der Herbft, the autumn; 

der Raufer, the purchaser; 

der Laden, the shop; 

das Landhans, the villa; 

die Lebensimittel, (pl.) the victuals; 
das Lehrbuch, the text-book; 

der Plan, the plan; 

der Pole, the Pole; | 

die Regelmapigkeit, the regularity; 


——ws 


- der Ruffe, the Russian; 


der Gommer, the summer; 

der UWhrmacher, the watchmaker; 
das Verdienft, the merit; 

der Weingarten, the vineyard; 
gefchict, able; 

fruchtbar, fertile; 

reidlid), abundant; 

jonderbar, odd; 

unwifjend, ignorant; 


jogleic), presently, directly, immed- 


iately ; 
itberall, everywhere. 


Yoh werde von meinem Vater gelobt, wertn ich fleifig bin. Ou 
wirjt von deinem Lehrer getadelt, weil du immer faul bift. Der ge- 
{dhicdte Mann wird gelobt und der unwiffende getadelt. Welche Kna- 
ben werden belohut und welche werden geftraft? Diejenigen, welche 
fleiRig jind, werden belohnt und die, welche faul find, geftraft. Wir 
Werden von unfern Eltern geliebt; ihr werdet von den enrigen geta- 
‘Delt. Meine Briider werden von Yedermann geachtet. Wir werden 
bon unjern Feinden gehakt. Die Whgaben werden jest mit der gripe 

ten Regelmapigfeit erhoben. Der Krieg wird mit grofer Erbit- 
ferung fortgejest. Wenn ifr von euern Feinden beleidigt werbdet, 
Miipt ihr end) nicht rachen. Wir haber unfer Haus verlaffen, 
“Weil eS jebt reparirt wird. Wenn da8 Getreide gefaet wird, ift es 
Srithling; wenn ¢8 geerntet wird, ift ¢8 Sommer oder Herbft. Bye 


a es ike 


“lig AS oe 


die Thiir verfhloffen? Ge) bin exftaunt, dak Sie eine Sache (cause) 
vertheidigen, die nicht vertheidigt werden fann. Unfere Arbeit ijt 
vollendet; wir hoffen, dag du fie loben wirft. Es fcjeint, dak diefes 
DOorf von feinen Cunwohnern verlaffen ijt. Sein Zimmer ift mit — 
den jonderbarften Sachen angefiillt. Gr tidtete feinen Gegner, um — 
nicht von ihm getddtet zu werden. Unjere Stadt ijt (wird) von den 
fruchtbarjten Feldern umgeben. Ou fannft nicht in die Stadt fom- 

mei, Da fie bom den Feinden befewt ijt (or wird). 4 


110. 


I am envied by my friends, but thy merits are acknowled-, : 
ged by all. The king is deceived by his servants*. ‘The 
President is daily overwhelmed by applications of every © 
kind. We are overwhelmed with work (plur. in German) 
which has been in our hands for a year. These books are no 
more read. What text-books are used in your school? Are 
the Poles loved or hated by the Russians? Is your work 
finished? It is not yet finished, but it shall (follen) be finished — 
presently. Iam surprised that your father should have given — 
(transl. has given) this permission. Are you not convinced — 
that these plans will succeed? The inhabitants say that they — 
are abundantly supplied with victuals. How is the city of New 
York supplied with victuals? The railroad-trains and steam- 
boats convey (bringen) them daily to the city. My watch is — 
now repaired; the watchmaker has sent it back tome. My 
watch is now (being) repaired by the watchmaker. Is thy 
wound not healed yet? The streets of our city are now being 
graded and paved. When the shops are filled with purchasers, © 
(the) trade is flourishing. If that work cannot be continued’ 
by you, it must be finished by your brother. You are deserted — 
by your friends because they are always insulted by you. © 
We are delighted that your diligence is now better rewarded 
than** it was formerly the case. Since you are occupiedt 


ee 













* Bediente isa menial servant; Diener comprises all kinds of servants, 

A servant of God, en Kne ht Gottes, Otherwise Kunedt is used of the lowest 
kinds of servants, 3 
** M18, than, ‘throws the following verb to the end of the clause. aa 

t Zo occupy is rendered by bejeger, _ it means to take possession: but by 
bejdhaftigen, if it refers to work, ‘ 


with too many engagements (Arbeit), we shall appoint another 
assistant. My brother is expected by his friends while he is 
expecting them. Our soldiers were obliged to attack the 
enemy (plur.) in order not to be attacked by them. This man 
is endowed with the highest talents. The city is everywhere 
surrounded with villas and vineyards. 


111. 


Imperfect Indicative Passive: ich vourde* gelobt, I was praised; 
- du wurdeft gelobt, thou wast. praised; 
er rwurde gelobt, he was praised; 
wir wurden gelobt, we were praised; 
ihr wurdet gelobt, you were praised; 
fie wurden gelobt, they were praised. 


Present Subjunctive Passive: ich werde (du werdeft, er werde etc.) gelobt. 
Tinperfect Subjunetive Passive: ich wiirde (du wiirdeft, er mwiirde etc.) gelobt. 


Oss.—1. The ‘cvertoet indicative passive is formed by the auxiliary 
wurde, the imperfect of the verb werden, to become, whose subjunctive is wiirde. 
The imperfect subjunctive passive is easily distinguished from the active 
conditional, the auxiliary tiirde in the latter being construed with the. 
infinitive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb. 

- 2. Instead of the ordinary passive with werden in these tenses and 
moods, a passive with {eim is used under the same circumstances as in the 
present indicative (No. 109, Obs, 2): Jmperfect Indicative: ic) war geliebt, I was 
loved; Present Subjunctive: id) fet geliebt (generally translated by the past 
tense); Jmperfect Subjunctive: ic) wire geliebt. Der Laden war gefdjlofjen, the 
shop was closed, if it means that the shop was a closed one, as a result of its 
having been closed before, But: der aden wurde gefdloffen, if the act of 
closing is described (the shop was-heing closed), If the action itself and its 
resulting state are not imps. ryt we generally use the auxiliary wurde 
in the imperfect. 

3. The use of the subjunctive passive is the same as that of the cor- 
responding active tenses (No. 99. 101.) 


Abhauen (strong verb), to cut down; bebdecfen, to cover; 


abtragen (strong), to pull down; bedrohen, to threaten; 
anreden, to address; . behandeln, to treat; 
aufhalten (strong), todelay; — belaftiqen, to molest; 


bedauern, to ner berichten, to report; 





_ * Tn higher syls the form id) ward is used instead of ic wurde, in the 
singular. 


befiegett, to defeat; 

berwundern, to admire; 

einladen (strong), to invite; 
entdecen, to discover; 

ernabren, to support; 

ertveijen (part. ertwiefem), to prove; 
fortraumen, to remove; 

qualen, to torment; 

{chlieBer (part. geidloffen), to close; 
ftiren, to disturb; 

troften, to console; 

*unterridten, to instruct; 
verlaumbden, to slander; 
vermiethen, to rent; 

verjehen (strong), to provide; 
verurtheilen, to condemn; 
verwalten, to administer; 

wieder aufbauen, to rebuild; 


der Advocat (weak decl,), the lawyer; 


der WAngriff, the attack; 

das Wuge, the eye; 

der Wngeflagte, the accused; 

der Bahnhof, the railroad station; 
der Bettler, the beggar; 

die Velagerung, the siege; 

der Cigenthiimer, the owner; 

das Cinfommen, the income; 


Sn welchemt Sahre und von wem wurde Wmerifa entdectt ? 
war der Mann, von dent du heute in der Hamiltonftrage angeredet 
wurdeft? Als ich nach Wier reifte, wurde ich iiberall yon Bettlern 
Wihrend du vont deinen Freunden bewundert wurdeft, 
Sh war erjtaunt, da 
Die Haujer diejfer Stadt — 


belajtigt. 


wurden wir von unfern Feinden verliumbet. 
wir nod) nits von dir gehort Hatten. 
waren damals mit Schindeln bededt; jest findet man dort nur Sehies— 
Mein Freund zeigte mir an, dak feine Wunde nod) nicht — 
geheilt fei; er fiigte hingu, dag er von feinem Wundarzte fehr (viel) 

Meine Briider in Berlin theilten mir mit, daf fie 
fat tiglic) von deinen Freunden eingeladen wiirden.- Wenn id) vo 
meinen Feinden gehaft wiirde, fo wiirde ich fie nicht haffen, jondern 
Wenn id) von meinen Freunden verlafjen wire, fnnte id 
Yah wiirde fehr froh fein, wen dief 


ferdacher. 


gequalt werde. 


lieben. | 
mid) nicht leicht tréften. 


se — 


Ddie Cinnafhme, the revenue;: 
der Galt, the guest; 

der Gefangene, the prisoner; 
das Hindernif, the obstacle; 
die Ranonade, the cannonade; 
die Leute (pl.), the individuals; 
der Mtarjd), the march; 

die Partet, the party; 

dev Rauber, the robber; 

der Ridter, the judge; 

das Schieferdach, the slate-roof; 
die Sdhindel, the shingle; 

das Sdjiff, the ship; 

die Schuld, the guilt, the debt; 
Der Seerdiuber, the pirate; 

die Sprache, the language; 

das Verbrechen, the crime; 

der Wundarzt, the surgeon; 
betractlic), considerable; 
deutich, German; 

dunfel, dark; 

froh, glad; 

leer, empty; 

prichtig, magnificent; 


~ fdredlid, terrible; 


dort, there; 
nidt etnmal, not even. 

















Wer 


es RN cate 


Hinderniffe fortgeriumt witrden. Wls diefer Brief gefdhrieber wurde, 
waren die Augen, die ihn fLefen follten (were to), fcjyon gefchloffen. 
Per Angeflagte wurde von den Richtern verurtheilt, weil das Vers 
_ brechen erwiefen war, und feine Schuld nicht bez weifelt* werden fonnte. 


112. 


The Russians were defeated by the English in the battle 
of (bet) Inkerman. The city was threatened with a siege, but 
the threat was treated with contempt by the inhabitants**. 
The city was threatened with ‘a siege [ever] since the third 
of March. In what year wast thou sent to Germany by thy 


friends? The prisoners were defended by able lawyers. 
In what battle were you wounded? When I departed from 


the city, I was accompanied by my friends to the railroad 
station. I was astonished when I heard that my friend 
_ Charles was not invited. When we were sailing (reitfen) 

to Europe, our ship was pursued by a pirate. While you 
were instructed by Mr. Reiley, I was studying Ahn’s 
Grammar of the German Language. We were obliged 
to quit our house because it was repaired. At that time all 
hotels of the city were filled with guests, but now they are 
empty. When it was dark, a terrible cannonade was opened 
(erdffnen) by the enemy. Was thy wound healed or not when 
thou wast returning to the city? It was not healed then, but 
it was treated by the surgeon. The general reported that his 
march was being delayed by attacks of the enemy. My friend 
declared that he was abundantly provided with money. He 
‘said that he was daily molested by individuals: who were 
disturbing him in his work. If my debts were paid (bezahlen), 
- my income would be sufficient to support me. I would regret 

very much if these beautiful trees were cut down. Were your 
streets at that time in good condition (der Stand)? No, they 
were not even paved; but they are being paved now. If your 





* in the passive to dowbt must be translated by begtveifeln, not by 


srweifeln. 
*® All those adjuncts of the verb which complete its idea, must be 


placed after the passive agent. ( 


— 8 — 


house were rented, your revenues would increase (themselves) 
considerably. Would we pay fewer taxes, if our city were 
[being] administered by your party? If you were attacked 
by robbers, would you defend yourself or not? The house 
was pulled down by the owner in order to be rebuilt more 
magnificently. 


113. 


Perfect Indicative Passive: it bin gelobt worden, I have been praised; 
du bift gelobt worden, thou hast been praised; 
er ift gelobt worden, he has been praised; | 
wir find gelobt worden, we have been praised; 
ihr jeid gelobt worden, you have been praised; 
fie find gelobt worden, they have been praised. 


Perfect Subjunctive Passive: id) fei gelobt worden, du jeift (ex fet, wir jeien, etc.) 
. ~- gelobt worden. 


Pluperfect Indicat. Passive: id) war gelobt worden, I had been praised; * 
du warft gelobt worden, thou hadst been praised; 
er war celobt worden, he had been praised; 
wir waren gelobt worden, we had been praised; 
ihr waret gelobt worden, you had been praised; 
fie waren gelobt worden, they had been praised, 


Pluperfect Subjunct. Passive: id) wodre gelobt worden, du wareft (er wire, etc.) 
gelobt worden. 





1 





Oss,—1. The perfect and pluperfect. passive are formed by the perfect — 


(ich bin worden) and the pluperfect @ch war worden) of werden} (to become), 
in connection with the past participle of the verb. 


2. The rules No. 99, Oss. 5 and 6, as to the use of the subjunctive and 
its tense after verbs of BELIEVING, sTATING, etc., are applicable tothe PAsstvE 


voice, the same as to the active: er glaubte, daf ic) in der Schladht pers 
wundet worden jei oder ware, he believed that I had been wounded 


in battle. 


3. The PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE is often used in hypothetical periods 


with the force of the English porent1aL with should (would) have (or eee 
would have been in the passive): See No, 101, Ons. 2: id) hdtte ihn gefeh ett; 





= 


+ The verb werden, if not an auxiliary, jakeh the augment in the pavtla 
ciple: ich bin g e worden, I have become; ich war ge worden, I had become, 


wae 22 we 
I should have seen him; er wire von mir gejehen worden, he would have 
been seen by me. 

4, In ordinary sentences the pmrrxcr is frequently used in German,when 
in English only the simple past Tense would be proper: id) bin geftern in 
ber Stadt gewefen, I was yesterday in town. 


5, The conjunction after is translated by the German conjunction nadj- 
dem, and the conjunction before by ehe, bevor. All these require the verb to 
be placed at the end of the clause: nadjdemid ifn gehirt hatte, after 
Thad heard him; naddemer getodtet worden war,7f after he had 
been killed; ehe (bevor) er angefangen hatte, before he had commenced, 


Musfiihren, to execute; 
benadhrichtigen, to inform; 
befeitiqen, to remove; 
corrigiren, to correct; 
entlafjen (strong v.), to dismiss; 
entmuthigen, to discourage; 
pflegen, to nurse; 
“proteftiven, to protest; 
*iiberjenden, to send over; 


*iibertragen (strong), to confer (upon); 


perhaften, to arrest; 
-verlangen, to demand; 
perrathen (strong), to betray; 
-borfaden (strong), to summon; 
wWarnen, to warn; 
_ Mndreas, Andrew; 
der Wuftrag, the order; 
‘die Sank, the bank; 


© 
die Biirgidaft, the bail, ( to give 
bail, Biirg\dhaft leiften); 
die Entidhddiguing(sing.), the damages; 
das Feuer, the fire} 
der Kluger, the plaintiff; 
die Mtiihe, the trouble; 
der GrozefR, the law-suit; 
die Priafidentidhaft, the presidency; 
der Rathgeber, the adviser; 
die Stelle, the place; 
der Telegraph (weak d,),the telegraph; 
die Wahl, the election; 
der Werhfel, the note (bill ofexchange); 
der Xollbeamte, the custom-house 
officer; 
atlantijd, Atlantic; 
vergeblich, in vain; 
grwetfelhaft, doubtful, 


Sh bin von meinem Lehrer geftraft worden, weil ich diefe Mufga- 


ben abgefchrieben habe. 


Ort Hift von deinent Onfel belohut worden, 


— Weil du feine Uhr gefunden Haft. Heinrich ijt fiir feine Mtiihe nicht 
_ delohut worden. Diefe Nachricht ijt uns von Herrn Noll mitgetheilt 
Worden. Gon wer ift diefe Aufgabe corrigirt worden? Es ift mir 
- gejagt worden, da} Sie einen Bedienten fuchen. Diefe Nachricht ift 
ung durd) (by) den atlantifden Telegraphen itherfandt worden. 
Diefes Geld ift mir gezahlt worden, nachdem ich e8 zweimal vergeblicdy 
berlangt hatte. Nachdem der Prafident Lincoln getddtet worden war, 





_+ In such passive constructions the participle worden is sometimes 
omitted: nadjdem er getidtet war. 


a ee 


wurde die Prajidentfdhaft Undreas Yohnfon itbertragen. Wer pflegte — 
euch, alg ifr in der Schladht verwundet worden wart? Rarl bee 
hauptete, dak diefe Nachricht ihm von feinen Freunden noc) nicht mit. — 
getheilt worden fei. Unfere Plaine founten nicht ausgefithrt werden, — 
nachdem fie unjern Gegnern verrathen worden waren. Wieine Freunde 

glaubten, daR ich in der Schladht getddtet worden fet. Die Feinde ver- 

mutheten, dak wir durd) (by) unfere Miederlage entmuthigt worden 
waren. Warum antwortet thr, ehe ihr von eurem Lehrer gefragt 
worden feid? Die Feinde flohen (fled), bevor [noch] das Feuer von — 
un erdffnet (opened) worden war. Wenn du meinen Math befolgt 
hitteft, warjt du nicht von deinem Gegner bei (at) der Wahl bee 
fiegt worden. Diefer Vorfdlag ware von mir nicht angenommen. 
(accepted) worden, wenn id) nicht von meinen Rathgebern getiufdt 


{ 


worden ware. 


114. 


I have been informed that you have opened (eréffnet) a — 
school in the city of New York. This debt has never been — 
paid. Almost all custom-house officers have been dismissed by — 
the President. Your note has been protested by the bank. 
After your cousin had been arrested, I was summoned by the — 
judge in order to give bail for him. We continued our journey — 
after these obstacles had been removed. William paid me a 
visit, before I had been informed that he was here. Before 
your orders had been executed, we heard that (the) war had — 


been declared. Your brother stated in his letter that he had 
lost his law-suit and was condemned to pay damages to the 


plaintiff. It is doubtful whether I would have found bail, if 1 
had been arrested. If I had been in your place, I should not_ 
have been defeated by my adversary. If you had had better 
advisers, you would have been warned by them. . 








se ln 


115. 
{ic freuen, to rejoice, to be glad. 


id) frene mid), I rejoice, Iam glad; ich habe mich gefreut, I have rejoiced; 
I have been glad, etc.; 


du freuft dich, thou art glad, etc.; du Haft did) gefreut, 

er freut fich, er hat fich gefreut, 

wiv freuen ung, . wir haben uns gefreut, 
.ibr freut euch, thy habt euch gefreut, 
fie freuen ftd. bee fie haben fich. gefreut. 


Ozss.—l. A great number of German REFLEXIVE VERBS (construed with a 
reflexive pronoun) correspond to English NEUTER Or PASSIVE verbs or to 
whole phrases: {ich verbreiten, to spread; {ich tiujdjen, to be disappointed; fic 


 jeben, to take a seat, The reflexive pronouns (unless governed by preposi- 


i 


tions) are generally, but not always, in the accusative. In {ich {dymeideln, to 
flatter one’s self, {ich einbilden, fo imagine, and several others the reflexive 
pronouns are datives: ich {chmeichle mir, etc. 

2. The English compounds with self (myself, thyself, himself, etc.), are 
not to be considered as reflexives if they qualify nouns or pronouns with 
EMPHATICAL force. In this case they are rendered by the German indeclinable 


Yelbjt (or jelber): Sch habe den Mtann jelb ft gefehert, I have seen the man 


himself; ev jel) ft fagte e8, he said so himself; ich werbde felb ft gehen, J shall 
go myself, 
3. Ifthe English compounds with self have both a reflexive and emphat- 


_ ical force (which always is the case when reflexives have the rhetorical accent), 


they are rendered by the German reflexives in connection with jelbft: He has 


~ killed himself (and no other), er hat fic) fel b ft getédtet; you must not praise 


yourselves (but others you may), ihr miigt eud) nidjt felb ft loben. 

_4, The English recrerocats each other, one another are either translated 
by the indeclinable etnander, or, if no ambiguity can arise, by the REFLEXIVE 
PRONOUNS either alone, or in combination with einanbder: fie [dimpfen fid, 
they abuse each other; wir haffen ein ander, we hate each other; fie ftiren fi dh 


 einander, they disturb each other. Often German reciprocal verbs are exz 
pressed by neuter verbs in English: {i ch treffen, to meet (one another); fi & 


(utit einanbder) unterhalten, to converse. 


 Udgehen (abgegangen), toleave (neuter fic) begeqnen, to meet; 


" verb); befchddigen, to damage; 
_ fich amiifiren, to enjoy one’s self; fich biiden, to stoop down; 
andeuten, to intimate; danfen (with dative), to thank; 
aufheben (aufgehoben), to pick up; fich erinnern (with gen.), to remember; 
fic) aufbalten (strong), to stay; fic) erfundigen, to inquire; 
— ausbrennen, to burn out; ~ fich erfalten, to take a cold; 


fic) befinden (befunden), to do, to be fid) ergeben (strong), to surrender 
(of the health); (one’s:self); =. 








fic) einbilben, to imagine; der MusfdjufR, the board; 
fich fiigen, to submit; : ber Veamte, the officer; 
gehordjen (with dative), to obey, das Geldftiic, the piece of money; 
halten (strong), to keep; das Gejes, the law; : 
herausfordern, to challenge; der Himmel, Heaven; ; 
fich nabern, to approach; die Kanonenfugel, the cannon ball; 
regieren, to govern; das Ptitglied (plur. Ntitglieder), the 
fich fetsen, to take a seat; member; | 
treffen (getroffen), to hit; die Obrigfeit, the authorities; 
fic) trennen (to separate (from one der Schaden, the damage; 

another); die Sibung, the session, meeting; 
*fich unterhalten (strong), toconverse; die Unternehnmung, the enterprise; 
*unterridjten, to instruct; der Vorfitende, the chairman; ; 
*ynterftiisen, to support; die, Zuftimmung, the Srp con- — 
fic) verbeugen, to bow (down); sent; 4 
verpflicjten, to pledge; auferft, extreme; 
verfennen, to misjudge; befannt, known (as adj.); 
fic) verjammeln, to assemble; dentlic), distinct; 
verurjaden, to cause; geredjt, just; 
verwicdeln, to implicate; lieb, dear; 
*fich widerfesen (with dative), to op- mebhrere, several; 

pose, to resist; miide, tired; 
wiederjehen (strong), to see again; ftvenge, severe; 
fich wundern, to wonder; tidtlich, fatal; 
zablen, to number; woh{, well; 
zugeben (strong), to concede;? was machen Sie, how is your health? — 
die UAnforderung, the demand; Abjdied nehmen, to take leave; 
die Anordnung, the regulation; fich (dat.) Bewegung (fem. ) madjen, to 
der Anfpruch, the claim; take exercise; 
der Argwohn, the suspicion; Beifall finden, to meet with favor, 


* Guten Tag, lieber Heinrich. Gch freue mich, dich wiedergufehen. 
Wie befindeft du did)? Bh befinde mich jehr wohl, feit ih in New — 
Yorfwohne. Was macht dein Bruder ? Sit er wohl? a, er bee 
findet fich fehr wohl. Was thuft du, Ludwig? Yeh fleide mich an. 
Rieidet ihr euch noch nicht an? Wir werden uns fpater anfleiden. 
WLS die Mitglieder des Wusfehuffes fich verfammelt hatten, wurde das 
Grotofoll (the minutes) der legten Sigung vom Vorjigenden verle- 
jen.+ Wir bitciten uns alle, wm nicht von den Ranonenfugeln getrof- 
fen 3 werden. Warum haft du dich nicht erfundigt, wann der Gifen- 








+ To read, lefen, vorlejen, ablejen, verlefen. The simple verb fejen de-— 
notes reading in general; the compounds denote to read aloud. In the sentendey 
above the simple verb would be improper. 





— 85 — 


bahnzug abgeht? Wir haben uns nod) niemals den Wnordnungen der 


Obrigfeit widerfest. Wir erinnern uns diejes Mlannes fer deutlic). — - 


Grinnert ihr euch nicht, dak ihr euch verpflichtet Hhattet, den Gefegen 
zt gehordjen? Wir haben felbjt nicht geglaubt, dag dice Meitglieder 
fich dicfen Anforderungen fiigen wiirden. Wir freuten uns, als wir 
horten, dak Sie felbft unfere WAnfpritche unterftiigen wiirden. Dein 
Pater felbft ijt in diefe Angelegenheit verwicelt worden. Hhr miift 
jelbft anerfennen, da meine Antriige gerecht find. Helft euch felbjt, 
Daun (then) wird der Hinmmel euch helfen. Ou verurtheilft did) 
jelbjt, wenn du dies gugibjt. Wann werden wir uns wiederjehen? 
G3 war nicht befannt, dak diefe Herren fich fdjon fennen. Die Mtan- 
ner naherten fich einander ohne Argwohn. Karl und Wilhelur fuchen 
jich) ecinander [fchon] feit Linger (for more) als einer Stunde. Karl 
und ich begegneten uns geftern dreimal in der Strage. .Nehmt jest 
“Abfchied von cinander, liebe Kinder, ihr miipt euch-trennen; ihr habt 
feine Beit mehr, euch mit ecinander 3u unterhalten. Sch glaube, daf 
wir uns einander verfannt haben ; wir wollen fiinftig (for the future) 
gute Freunde fein. | 


116. 


Were you not extremely glad when you heard that this 
war had been finished (beenden)? I have staid here for more 
than three months. How did you enjoy yourself in my 
brother’s company? ‘The enemy did not oppose the march of 
our army. Doest thou not remember my older brother? Re- 
member, my son, that our days are numbered! How do you 
do, Charles? Iam not very well, I have taken a cold.. I do 
net wonder; you take too little exercise. Ibowed, when I 
recognized the President. The ambassador bowed, in order 
to intimate his approbation. Why doest thou stoop down? 
In order to pick up a small piece of money that I have 
lost. I imagined that my enterprise would meet with more 
favor; but I was mistaken. Why do you not take a seat? 
You must be tired. I thank-you, I cannot stay [any] longer. 
What damage has been caused by this fire? Several rooms 
are burned out, but the house itself has not been damaged 
much. Have you not conceded yourself that this city must 


surrender soon and cannot keep (itself) much longer? Have 


you heard this of the President or of one of his officers}? Ihave 
seen myself that the accused has beaten the boy. Who has 
‘instructed your brother? Nobody, he has instructed himsel/. 
You must never be more severe with others than with yowrself. 
Those that cannot govern others,-cannot govern themselves. 
Will you not senda servant in order to buy these things? No, 
it is better that I go myself. Do you know if these peoplet 
know each other?. The two soldiers wounded each other; but 


their wounds were not fatal. We have met to-day, but did — 


not recognize one another. Do you know that two members 


of the Senate have challenged each other? Mr. Nollet and I~ 


have conversed (for) two hours (with each other). 


117. 


1, &8 reqnet, it rains; e8 fchneit (jdjneet), it snows; e8 friert, it freezes; e8 


blitt, it lightens; e8 dDonnert, it thunders; e8 tagt, the day breaks; e8 flopft, 
somebody knocks; e8 {autet, the bell rings; e8 ift falt, it is cold; e8 wird talt, 
it begins to be (is getting) cold. 








7 Be a « SR aes me de or e8 frtert ) . cold; 
ie acy ‘a < t we eees yy €8 fh wibt perspiring; 
ic) hungere, id) bin hungrig, Vedeagy 
habe Hunger........... ,, e8 hungert mid), Tam} hungry: 
id) eee id Bit durftig, habe 
|g ee i ged Ck pa weed Pee »» €8 Durftet | thirsty; 
id gi WORE oe eset 5s eaidion ee | warm. 


3. Was ift Shnen ?- what ails you, what is the matter with you? 
Wie ift wee ? how do you feel? 








r alt, , cold; 
. wari, warm; 
&8 ift mir J} wohl, I feel well; 
e8 wird mir unwohl, I begin to feel ” unwell; 
libel, sick in my stomach; 
| {chwindlig, | giddy. 


G3 ift mir, alg ob.. (with subjunctive), I feel (it seems to me) asif..... | 


gear Dag.... “ that. . 
e8 fommt mir vor, alg ob . . (with subj.), it appears (seems) © me as Hit 





+ Officer is translated by Beamte, if a civil officer is meant; an officer of 
the army is translated by Officier. 


This people, diejes Volt; these peoples, dieje Volker; these people (individuals), - 


dieje Mere: 








— 8% — 











4. 08 fivget mich, " [ angry, displeased, 4 
e8 efelt mid), disgusted, 
e8 verdrieft mid) (pert, vexed, irritated, 
line fae ge AO ti si 
e8 roundert mid (i astonished, 
roundre mich), pen) ese , that.. 
e8 freut mich, e8 ift mir glad, pleased, | (if) . 
lieb (ich freue mid), 
e8 betriibt mid), e8 thut | grieved, sorry, 
mir leid, e8 fchmergt 
mid, ' j 
5. id) Grgere mich, id) bin } [ angry, displeased, 
ich et mid, t (vagy | ai Fi 
he fe mtd) wei a isguste 
i bint verdriefilich, rT feel, (am) ] vexed, irritated, r because . 
bin betriibt, id) bin grieved, sorry, 
traurig, : he sad, 











_Oxs,—l. The number of impersonal expressions is considerably larger in 
_ German than in English. Almost every German sentence, not having a 
mere personal pronoun for a subject, may be cast into an impersonal form, 
in which case the subject must be placed after the verb: e3 rollt der Donner, 
_ the thunder rolls; e$ war die$ ein neuer Beweis, dak.. this was a new proof, 
that.. The impersonal form is generally preferred if indefinite substantives 
are the subjects: e8 flopft Semand, somebody knocks; e8 ift Niemand da, 
_ nobody is there; e8 ift et Feuer ausgebrodjen, a fire has broken out. 


2. Those impersonal expressions that are construed with an accusative 
or dative (enumerated No 2, 3, and 4) frequently begin with their accusatives 
_ or datives in which instance the impersonal e8 is generally dropped: mid) 

_ feiert, lam cold; mid) durftet, I am thirsty; mir ift unwobl, I feel unwell. 
Those impersonals enumerated No. 4 always drop the e8, if the dependent 
clause (with Daf} or wenn) is placed at the beginning of the sentence; other- 
wise the e8 is more generally retained: mir thut (e8) leit, daf, etc., I am 
sorry that, etc; but: dba Sie nidjt fommen, thut mir leid, I am sorry that 
you do not come, Those expressions enumerated No. 1 never drop the e8. 


Ausfehen (du fiehft aus), to look (with laufen (strong v.), to run; 


a clause or with an adjective); mitbringen, to bring along; 
beherrfdjen, to rule over; Noth leiden, to suffer; 
bredjen (part. gebrocjen), to break; reicjen, to hand; - 
bellen, to bark; verjaumen (strong), to miss; 


gehen (geqangen), to walk, to step; verftehen, to understand; 
heigen, to warm (heat) the rooms, voriibergehen (strong), to pass; 

build a fire (in the stove); == =~ ‘twiirmen, to warm (a person): 
Jerrjden, to rule, to prevail; bie Ghre, the honor; 


— 8 — 


das Gewwitter, the thunder-storm; das Verfprechen, the promise; 
der Kopf|dmer; (pl. die Ropfid)merzen), die Urjadhe, the cause; 

the headache; der Weftwind, the west-wind; 
die Hausthiir, the street-door; duntel, dark; 
die Kranfheit, the sickness; gewohulic), ordinary, common; 
die Jtacht, the night; : herzlich, sincere; 
der Sclave, the slave; naf, wet; 
die Sicherheit, the safety; untreu, faithless; 
das Schneeiwetter, the snow-storm; Durdhaus nicht, not at all; 
die Summe, the sum; vielleicyt, perhaps; 
(das) Thauwetter, a thaw; heute (Abend), heute (Itadht), to-night; — 
da8 Baterfand, one’s own country, einft, 


fatherland: einmal, f once (upon a time). 


G8 ift {chlechtes Wetter, there is a storm; it is bad weather. 
Gs ijt Oftwind, the wind is east. 
Die Gejchafte gehen jdledt, business is dull. | 
8 betvifft (past. part. betroffen) mich (mic) betrifft) ein + Unfall (m.) — 

I meet with an accident. 


Reguet e$? Es regnet nod) nicht, aber eS wird fogleich anfangen 
zu regnen. 3 hat die ganze Macht ge}dynett. Wir werden morgen 
Schneewetter haben. C8 wird falt, wir mitffen bald einheizen. Wird - 
e8 morgen frieren? Nein, e wird Chauwetter fein. Haben Sie fic) 
[fchon| gewarmt? Nein, ic) branche mich nicht 3u warmen; e8 ift mir 
durchaus nicht falt. Was ijt dir, Karl? Ou fiehft blag aus. Es tft 
mir nur ein wenig itbel; e8 wird bald voritbergeben. Wie ijt dir 
jest? Dtir wird befier, ich Habe nur [noch] ein wenig Ropfichmerzen. 
Es jcheint, daf es Fhnen fhwindlig ijt. Nein, ich will Fhnen offen 
geftehen, dap id) Hunger habe. DOurjtet euch, Kinder? Es thut mir 
fetid, da fein Waffer in unfjerm Hauje ijt. Wie fiehft du aus, Heine 
rid)? du fdpwikeft; du Halt gewig (1 suppose) zu ftarf (much) ge- 
faufen? G38 war mir, al8 ob ich einen Hund bellen hirte, und ide 
hirte nicht auf 3u laufen, bis ich in Sicherheit war. Yas (at what) 
verdrieBt dich? Yeh bin Grgerlich, weil ich heute zweimal in meiner 
Arbeit gejtért worden bin. C8 hat mich nie mehr gehungert, als 
geftern. Wtic) durftet fehr, Mtutter, ich michte (No. 101, Oxs. 3) 
eit Glas Wafjer haben. Wenn ihr hungrig waret, witrdet ihr ener 
Brot gegeffen haben. Cs wundert mich durchaus nicht, dak Sie dies 
nicht verjtehen. Friedrich der Grogke fagte, dak e8 ihn efele, Sclaven 
gu beherrjdjen. €8 argert mid), dag ich geftern die Vorlejung ver- 





















“sgh 


faumt habe. Freut es Sie vielleidht, dak Ghre Freunde Noth leiden 
mitjjen? Mein, eS thut mir herglich leid, aber id) fann ifnen nidt 
helfen; ich habe nichts, was ic) ihnen geben fonnte. CS war uns 
dugerft lieb, dak ihr Papter und Federn mitgebracht hattet. L¥ch bin be- 
tritht, weil ic) meinen ProzeR verloren habe. Warum bijt du traurig? 
Weil die Gejchifte fdlecht gehen. Oak Khre Frau Veutter nicht 
finger bei uns bleiben fann, thut uns fehr fetd (to be transposed in 
English). Daf deinen Vater ein fo groger Unfall betroffen hat, be- 
tritbt nich fehr. Witrde e8 euch nicht fdjmerzen, wenn eure Sohne 
ihrem VBaterlande untren waren ? Rommt es dir nicht vor, als ob es 
geflopft hatte? Sit dein Bruder fletpig? Cr ijt fehr fleipig; es 
-fann Niemand fleipiger fein, als er. 8 fterben jest mehr Meenfchen, 

als gewohulich; was ift die Urfade? @s herrichen jebt mehr Krank 
alg enemas. 


118. 


‘Isitgoingtorain? No, it willsnow. Will there beastorm 
to-night? I believe not, the wind is west. Are you afraidt 
when it lightens and thunders? No, Iam not afraid of (vor 
with a dative) a thunder-storm. Our journey was{ not finished 
till the day broke (anbrecjen). It will soon begin to be dark; you 
- must lock the street-door, John. It begins to storm, Charles; 
we must run if we do not want (wollen) to be thorougly (durd 
und durc)) wet. Why do the bells ring-? There must be a fire in 
the city. I should be very sorry, if that were the case. Iam 
very hungry, let me have (gib mir) a piece of bread. You will 
be thirsty if you take (ejfen) too much salt. Do you (already) 

heat your rooms? It has not been cold enough (in order) to 
heat [them], but we shall build a fire to-night. Do you feel un- 
well, Charles? It appears to me as if you looked sick. You 
are right, I have taken a cold. Ifthis isso, you must walk 
into the room, and warm yourself. No, I thank you, I cannot 
‘stay; 1 feel too warm already. I begin to feel unwell, will 
(wollen) you have the kindness to hand me a glass of water? 





+ Lam afraid, followed by that is translated by id) fiird)te; also, if fiirdjten 
is followed by an accusative, But the neuter verb éo be afraid is rendered by 


fich fiircjten. 
{ Wurde or war ? 


What ails you to-day? You look as if you had met with an 
accident. I have (impersonally) met with no accident; butt 
I feel-angry because I have missed the railroad train. I felt 
vexed because Charles had broken his promise. What is the 
matter with your friend? He feels sorry because he has lost 
a large sum of money. Iam pleased [to hear] that you are 
well again. I was glad that William had not followed your 
advice. Nobody has wished yet (to be expressed impersonally) 
that he should have acted badly (translate: to have acted 
badly). My friend writes me (impersonally) that he is expect- 
ing you. Once upon a time lived a great man (impersonally) 
who owned (bejag) large palaces (SchloR No. 55) and gardens. 


119. 
Infinitive. treffen, to hit. | 
Past Participle. Getroffert. 
Present Indicative. ih treffe, du triffft, er trifft, wir treffen, ihr trefft, fie treffen. 
Present Subjunctive. ich treffe, du treffeft, er treffe, etc. 
Imperfect Indicative. ich traf, du trafft, er traf, wir trafen, ihr traft, fie trafen. 
Imperf. Subjunctive. ih trafe, du trafeft, er trafe, wir trafen, ihr trafet, fte trafen. 
Imperative. triff, trefft. 


~~ ee ee ee eee 


Ozs.—1. The strong verbs, a listt of which is attached to the Second 
Part have the following peculiarities: 
a) The first pers. imperf. indic. takes no indivi: but changes the radi-_ 

cal vowel, The past participle retains either the vowel of the infinitive, or 
takes that of the imperfect, or a vowel different from both: fcjlagen, {dlug, 
gejchlagen; fedjten, focht, gefochten; fterben, ftarb, geftorben. 

b) The imperf. subj, adds the ending e to its indicative, softening the 
radicals a, 0, uw into d, 3, it. 

c) Most strong verbs with the radicals q and 0 soften these vowels in the 
second and third pers, indicative (ich jlage, du fclagft, er fdhlagt); and most 
of those with the radical e change this vowel into i in the same persons, and 
in the singular of-the imperative, dropping at the same time their final e in 
the latter mood, some of them doubling the final consonant: geben, gid; 
nehmen, nimm. Some other strong verbs (for instance laffen, fag), drop like- 
wise the final e of the imperative. If apts) verbs with any of these radicals 
















+ Aber or fondern? Does [feel angry? correct the previous clause ? 
t The stndent should look for every strong verb in the list before at- 
tempting to use it. Since none of the many compounds of strong verbs are 
given in the list, the mode of their conjugation must be ascertained by look- 
ing for the corresponding simple verbs. | 
. 


ge a ee 


end in der or ten (then), they drop the ¢ of their endings in the second and 
third pers. pres. indic,, those in ten and then generally dropping also the t of 
the ending in the third pers.: rathen, vithft, rath; treten, trittft, tritt. 

d) Of irregular formation are: thun, that, gethan; gehen, ging, gegangert; 
- ftehen, ftand, geftanden. 

_ 2, Several German verbs governing an infinitive without 3u, are to- 
gether with their infinitives rendered by single-verbs or various phrases, 
Such verbs are: fpazieren gehen, to take a walk; ftehen bleiben, to stop; fallen 

faffen, to drop; fennen lernen, to become -acquainted with. Only the last of 

_ these infinitives (being the governing verbs) are conjugated, and must in the 

simple tenses of ordinary sentences precede their dependent infinitives: id 
gehe fpazieven, ic) blieb ftehen, etc. 


Munehmen, to accept, to take; der Cigenthiimer, the owner; 

- auffchreiben, to write down; die Freibheit, the liberty; 

_ befeblen, to command; da’ Gebirge, the mountain-chain; 

bitten, to request, to beg; die Gefangennahme, the capture; 

belanjdjen, to watch; die Gewalt, the force; 
" einnebmen, to occupy, to carry; der Gliubiger, the creditor; 

 fich erjchrecfen, to be frightened, to be die Hoffnung, the hope; 
scared; die Clajfifer, the classics; 
 fliehen, to flee; die Ordnung, the order; 

_ gelten, to be esteemed, to be worth; —_der Yeiter, the horseman; 

- etwas gelten, to be for something; die Speije, the food; 

"fahren, to ride (on a vehicle); die Stirfe, the strength; 
 tadjgeben (with dat.), to yield; die Stellung, the position; 
 tathen, to advise; der Teller, the plate; 

. ftatt finden, to take place; die Sruppen, the troops; 

 fterben, to die; | die Unordnung, the disorder; 

_ fcilafen, to sleep; die Unterhaltung, the conversation; 
 fcheinen, to shine; |  . dte Verfdhanzung, the intrenchment; 
bergeffen, to forget; die Verfpredjung, the promise; 
 fich vergleidjen, to make a compromise; *ba8 Verlangen, the demand; 
_bvervathen, to betray;~ die Verwaltung, the administration; 
- verfdjwinden, to disappear; die Zahlung, the payment; 

_ bertreten, to represent; *pa8 Wort, the word; 
~ juftellen, to deliver; fink, left ‘ 

- fich guriicfziehen, to withdraw; tect, right | sides 
a8 Wmofen, the alms; pliglicdh, sudden; 
 da8 ABC, the ABC, the alphabet; villig, fully; _ 

bie Vedeutung, the meaning; zufallig, accidental. 


| die Brieftafde, the Boner Pook 


——s-s Bent Dur WLmrofen gibft, {af deine Linke Hand nicht wiffen, was 
deine rechte thut. Mein Sohn Hilt alle feine Verfprechungen, da er 
miemals mehr verjpricdt, als er halten fann. Nimm meinen Rath 





- 4 


an, und if nicts vom dtefer Speife. tan verrith feine Freunde, 
wenn man fie vergift. Der Wdvocat, der mich in diefem Proceffe 
vertritt, gilt viel in unferer Stadt. Die Feinde flohen in grofer 
Unordnung, nachdem ihre Verjdhangungen von unjern Cruppen eingee 
nomen waren. Die Mtagd Liew die Telfer fallen, weil fie fich er= 
fchrocden hatte. Die Reiter blieben ploglich ftehen, als ob fie unfere 
Stirfe und Stellung fennen lernen wollten. Als wir geftern in der. 
Stadt fpazieren gingen, fanden wir eine Brieftajde, die wir mitnah= 
men, um fie dem Gigenthiimer zuzujftellen. Was that die Regierung, 
als fie die Nachricht von der Gefangennahme des Raifers erhielt 2. 
Sie gab dem Verlangen des Volks nach und 30g fic) von der Verwale 
tung des Staats (state) zuriid. ©s fam uns vor, als ob die Feinde 
fich nach der Stadt zuritczogen. Cr fame gert wieder, went itch ihr 
bate, mich 3u befuchen. Sd) vergife Wes, was thr mir gefagt habt, 
wenn ich e8 nicht aufjchriebe. . ) | 7 

















120. ’ : 

Where force commands, the law is (gelten) [for] nothing. Be- 
fore thou diest, do not forget to put (bringen) thy house in order, 
Read this letter, and see thyself that our last hope has dis- 
appeared. Help me to do my lesson before thou commences 
thine. What did your friend when-he received the news that 
these men had stopped (einftellen) their payments? He wrote 
. me that he had made a compromise with his creditors. When 
Charles arrived in Cologne he found the letters that he had ex- 
pected. While my son began to learn his A BC, thine was already 
reading the classics. When we saw that we were watched, we 
immediately dropped our conversation. When we were riding 
{on the cars] to New York, the railroad-train suddenly stopped 
(jtehen bleiben) before we came to Newark. Where was your 
mother when that accident took place? She was taking a walk 
with my sister. How did you become acquainted with that 
gentleman? I met (treffen) him accidentally at Count Bis 
marck’s house. We conversed more than an hour, and he in- 
vited me to see (befuchen) him at his residence. I advised that 
lady to take lessons of (bet) Mr. Nollet, if she commenced 
(subjunct.) to study French}. If you did not sleep so long, 


7 Uninflected adjective (franjifijd). 








re 5. ees 


you would be healthier. If the moon were shining now, you 
would distinctly see (imperf.) the whole mountain-chain. I 
would gladly die (imperf.), if I could buy (erfaufen) the liberty 
of my country with my death. They said that they did not 
fully understand the meaning of his words. 


121. 
PREPOSITIONS 
with Genitive: with Dative: with Accusative: . 
wahrend, during; . aug, out of (from); durd), through, by; 
wegen, on accountof; nad), after (to); ohne, without; 
yor, from (of, by); um, around, about; 
gu, to; gegen, against. 


with Dative or Accusative: 
an, at; 
auf, upon, on; 
neben (near) by, beside; 
unter, under, below, beneath; 
7 iiber, over, above; 
por, before, ago. 





_ Smt is often used instead of in dem; amt is often used instead of an dem; 


‘ins 2 in das; ans . as a an das; 
betm " ‘s bei Dem; vom ‘ ef pom dem; 
jum ry ff gu dem; unterm  ‘* ‘f unter dem; 
pur & is gu der; aufs ae 1 auf das. 

burs =“ i -Dird) da8; 


Oss.—1. Un, in, auf, neben, unter, iiber, vor govern the accusative, when 

they express a motion or direction towards an object, or a placing of some- 
thing on, before, etc. an object. If this-is not the case, these prepositions 
_ govern the pative, In relations other than those of Piacz, the use of the 
ease is regulated according to an analogy to local relations, which is often 
- difficult to determine. . 
2. The meanings attached above to the prepositions are only approxi- 
_ mative and denote the original conception connected with each preposition, 
Very frequently English prepositions must be rendered by German pre- 
_ positions not expressing their original meanings: 


Wuf der See, at sea; auf die See, to sea; 
auf dem Marfte, at (in) the market; auf den Ntarft, to the market; 





+ For a complete list of prepositions see the Theoretical Course p. 61. 


— 





a Oe 


auf der Poft, at the post-office; auf die Poft (3:1 Poft),to the post-office; 

















auf dem Balle, at the ball; auf den Ball (yum Valle), to the ball; — 
auf dem Yande, in the country (op- aufs Land, to the country; 
posite to city); 

im Concerte, at the concert; in8 Concert, to the concert; 

in Theater, at the theatre; ins Theater, to the theatre; 

zu Haufe, (at) home; ~ nach Hafe, (to) home; 

amt Ufer, on the shore; ans Ufer, to the shore; 

an der Wand, on the wall; an die Wand, to the wall; 

in der Schule, at,school; zur (in die) Sdhule, to school; 

gu der Zeit, at the time; bis gu der Zeit, (up) to the time; 

ant dem Sage, on the day; bis gu dent Tage, (up) to the day: 

amt 16ten Ptai, on the 16th of May; bis gum 3ten Suni, (up) to the 3d of 
June; . 

bei Macht (in der Nacht), at night; ant Dtorgen, in (on) the morning; 

gu Weihnadten, at Christmas; im vorigen Jahre (voriges Sabr), last 

year, 


3. The preposition by cannot be translated by pon if it does not denote 
the agent of a passive verb. It is translated by durd if it denotes by means of. 

4, ois generally not translated by the mere dative if it denotes the 
object of a motion in space, If this motion refers to pLacss, it is generally 
translated by nad), but also by other prepositions (See Obs. 2). Ifa person 
is the object of the motion, it is generally translated by 34: come to me, 
fom 31 mir. 

5. The adverb bis, placed before prepositions denoting direction, means 
as far as, up to, if referring to space. Referring to countries and towns it is 
generally connected with nad), which may also be left out; ich fain bis (nad) 
Berlin, J came as far as Berlin. Referring to other localities it is mostly con- 
nected with gr (bis zum Serge, etc.). But all other prepositions, denoting 
direction may be connected with bis (bi8 an den’ Flug, bis auf den Verg, ete.) 
Referring to timex, big is translated by till, up to, and is generally connected 
with ju, which sometimes is dropped: bis zum 2ten Dtarz; bis (zn) Weihnad 
ten, etc. Not till is rendered by erft. } 


oe 


Abfallen (strong), to fall off; | ervichten, to erect; 

anjehen (strong), to look at; erringen (strong), to obtain; 

auffallen (strong, w. dat.), to strike; fallen (strong), to fall; 

ausbreiten, to extend; hangen (strong), to hang; 
austaujden, to exchange; fiegen (strong), to lie, to be (situated); 
befordern, to forward, fich riihmen (w. gen.), to boast (of); — 
begehren, to demand; fitem (jaf, gefeffen), to sit; 4 
begraben (strong), to bury; ftellen, to place; — 

datiren, todate; fpazieren fahren, to take a ride; 

fic) drehen, to revolve, toturn; - umgeben (strong), to associate; 


ermutbhigen, to encourage; . fitch wagen, to venture; 


die Udchfe, the axis; 
die Ulpen, the Alps; 
die WAusficdht, the prospect; 
die Anftrengung, the effort; 
der Ball, the ball; 
das Vefinden, the health; 
die Semerfung, the remark; 
das Boot, the boat; 
das Concert, the concert; 
die Einladung, the invitation; 
_ der Ginlaf, the admission; 
das Gis, the ice; 
die Cijenbahn, the railroad; 
bas Ende, the end; 
die Erlaubnif, the permission; 
€uropa, Europe; 
der Feldzug, the campaign; 
die Feftung, the fortress; 
der Fluf, the river; 
die Front, the front; 
der Froft, the frost; 
die Gartenthiir, the garden-gate; 
das Gebdude, the building; 
der Geburtstag, the birthday; 
die Gelegenbheit, the occasion; 
der Giebel, the top (of roofs); 
der Gipfel, the top (of trees, etc.) ; 
_ der Graben, the moat, ditch; 
der Himmel, the sky; 
die Hiilfe, the help; 
_ die Snduftrie, the industry; 
die Robie, the coal; 
die Leiche, the corpse; 
die Lifte, the list; 
__ die Madjt, the power; 
Maitland, Milan; 
der Dtangel, the want; 
der Marft, the market; 
die Mauer, the wall (outside); 


der Name (gen. Yamens), the name; 


der Nebel, the fog; — 


72° 


~ ber Preis, the price; 


der Rand, the edge; 

der Rang, the rank; 

der Regen, the rain; 

bie Reihe, the row; 

die MNevolution, the revolution; 

die Schildwadhe, the sentinel ; 

das Schlachtfelb, the field of battle; 
der Schnee, the snow; 


. ber Schub, the shelter, protection; - 


der Sonntag, the sunday; 

die Station, the station; 

der Styl, the style; 

das Theater, the theatre; 

die Thiir(e), the gate, the door; 
das Ufer, the bank (of a river); 
der Umlauf, the revolution (turning); 
das Vieh, the cattle; 

dev Vortheil, the advantage; 

der Wagen, the carriage; 

der Wall, the rampart; 

die Wand, the wall (inside); 

der Zimmermann, the carpenter; 
abtwefend, absent; . 
blau, blue; 

breit, broad, wide; 

didjt, dense; . 


> eigen, own; 


einzig, single; 
entziidend, charming; 
erheblich, considerable; 
gar nicht, not at all; 
gejeqnet, blessed; 
ndchft, next; 

Offentlich, public; 
ftddtijdh, city (adject.); 
tief, deep; 


 unbedeutend, inconsiderable; 


unerhirt, unheard of; 
weit, far; 
wohlfei! cheap. 


Wohin gehen Sie (wo gehen Sie hin)? where (whither) do you go? 
Woher (von wo) fommen Sie (vo fommen Sie her) ? from where (whence) do 


you come? 


Was ift die Ube (wie diel Uhr ift es)? what o’clock is it? 


— 6 — 


Gs ift fechs Uhr, it is six o’clock; halb fiebert lifr, half past six; ein viertel nad 
jechs (auf fieben), a quarter past six; dreiviertel auf fieben (ein viertel vot 
fieben), a quarter of seven, ; 

Um welde Zeit ? at what o’clock? 4 

Um fechs Uhr, at six o’clock. 


ee ee ee 


Wir fonnten wegen de8 ftrengen Froftes (des ftrengen Broftes. 
wegen) nicht aus dem Haufe gehen. Gm vorigen Sahre braden wir 
durdy’s Cis; nach diefer Zeit wagten wir nidjt wieder auf’s Cis 3 
gehen. Durch welche Strafen miiffen wir gehen, um auf den Mearkt 
zu fommen? Die Ginwohner gingen.anf den Wallen der Feftung 
fpazieren. Auf dem Gipfel des Berges hatten wir eine entzitdende 
Ausficht. Wer fteht an der Thiir? CEs ift Herrn Nollet’s Diener, 
der fic) nach Shrem Vefinden erfundigt. Warum fehen Sie [fich] die 
Bilder an, die an den Wanden Hangen? Wir ftanden geftern am 
Ufer des Flujjes, um unfere Freunde zu fehen, dte auf dem Schiffe | 
waren. Klopfen Sie an die Gartenthiir, und begehren Sie Cinlak ! . 
Sit For Bruder zu Haufe? Mein, ich habe ihn auf die Pojt gefdhictt. 
An (to) wen wollen Sie dice Briefe fchicen? Gch habe nach Hanfe - 
an meine Freunde gefdrieben. Joh fak unter dem groken Baum, der 
neben unferm Haufe fteht; unter uns lag die Stadt, und itber mir war 
der blaue Himmel ausgebreitet. Wir gingen unter die Baume, um 
Sedu gegen den Regen gu finden. Wo fommen Sie her? Sind 
Sie im Theater gewefen? Nein, td) fomime aus dem (vom) Concert. — 
Die Feinde waren durch einige unbedeutende Vortheile, die fie fiber | 
unjere Wrmee errungen Hatten, ermuthigt worden. Wohin fcyicken 
Sie $hren Bedienten? Sch fchicte ihn gum Schuhmacher, um meine 
Stiefel absubolen, und zu Karl, um ihm eine Cinladung 3 bringen. 

- Haben Sie eine Cinladung zur Gefellfdhaft béim General? Nein, wit 
gehen nidjt mit einander um. Ohne ihre Hiilfe wire. id) verforen 
gewefen. Die Erde dreht fic) um die Sonne und um (on) ihre eigene 
Ache. Waihrend de8 ganzen Feld3zugs fonnte der Feind fic nicht | | 
eines einzigen Steges riihmen. Bu feiner Beit waren der Fleif und 
die Juduftrie des Landes gefegneter, als in diefem Jahre. Wm nid 
ften torgen nad) der Schlacht begruben unfere Soldaten ihre Lodten 
und die Der Feinde. Diefer Brief ijt vom 10. d. Vi.+ datirt, aber 
erft am 18. gefdjrieben und am 20. zur Poft gefandt worden. Der 
sity | 


+ diejes Dtonats. 





| 


ea 4 game = 


Gijenbahnzug fam bis nad Troy, fornte abert von dort abt nicht 


weiter befordert werden. Der Zug fam bis zur nadhften Station, 
blieb aber dort aus (from, for) Wrangel an (of) Rohlen liegen;+. Bis. 
gum Sahre 1866 galt Breugen nur als eine Weacht (de3) gweiten 


Ranges. Alle ftidtifde(n) Wbgaben miiffen [noch] vor dem erften 


Ganuar bezahlt werden. Wir blieben lange vor dem Gebiude ftehen, 
und tavjdjten unfjere Semerfungen itber (on) den pradtigen Styl 
aus. Der grote Chetl unferer Sruppen fam in diefer Schlacht gar 


nicht vor den Feind. G3 fiel uns anf, dak die Regierung vor. alle 


dffentlichen Gebiude Schilowadhen geftellt hatte. 


122. 


During that whole time not one of our entrenchments was 
carried by the enemy. On account of the dense fog, our boat 
was detained seven hours at (bei) Poughkeepsie. After un- 


heard of efforts the general arrived with his army at six o’clock 


in the (Gen.) evening on the field of battle. By what efforts 
have you made it possible to arrive so soon? Does this name 


stand on your list? No, but I shall place (jegen) it. immediately 


on the list. I sent the carpenter to (auf) the top of the roof 
in order to repair it. I believe that somebody is listening 


‘(horden) at the door? - Go to (an) the window, and look (3u- 
_feben) whether our carriage is at (vor) the gate? I see that 


the plaster (der Ralf) on these walls has (ijt) almost fallen off. 
He has erected a beautiful villa on (an) the edge of the forest. 
Where (whither) do you intend (wollen) to ride? I only intend 
to take a ride through the city. When are you going to re- 
turn home? At half past eight o’clock. Are you going to the 


concert to-night? No, I shall go to the ball at Mr. Nollet’s. 


How long have you been in this country, and where do you 
come from? I come from Metz, and have been here almost 
nine years. How long did you stay [out] in the country? Only 
a couple of days. - How many of your children go to school? 
Only two; the others I am still keeping (befalten) at home. 





+ Aber is fréquently placed after one or more words of the sentence. 
%b is often used to increase the force of von, denoting a starting point. 
Liegen bleiben, to be detained. 


— 98 — ' 


Why do you not place (ftellen) your cattle under shelter (trans- 
late: wnder a roof)? Below the walls of the fortress are broad 
and deep moats. Will you not go to the general, and ask him 
for (um) protection against these soldiers? Jupiter revolves 


in 10 days on his axis, and his revolution about the sun lasts — 


(dauern) almost 12 years. Did you do this without the per- 
mission of your father? This man lived at the time of the 
French revolution. My friend’s birthday fell upon a sunday. 


After many years you will acknowledge that I was right. Be-- 


fore our last war, the prices of (the) victuals were considerably 


cheaper than now. Fiftyf years ago there were no rail- 
roads in the country. During the whole. battle the officers — 


were before the front. The general sent all his officers 
before the front. I have planted a whole row of trees before 


my house. On the morning after the battle, the corpses lay © 


thick (dicht) on the field of battle. On that day we met (treffen) 
but (nur) few of the enemy (translate: few enemies). On (bet) 
that occasion our soldiers took a great number of prisoners. 
My friend returned home on the 10th of March; he will not 


depart again till the 20th of June ({{unt). He will be absent — 


till the 10th of July (S{ult). Will General Sheridan remain in 


Europe till the end of the war? We came on our journey as 


far as Milan; last year we came only up to the Alps. . 


123. 
Wovon, of what; davon, of that, of it; 
womit, with what; damit, with that, with it; 
_ wozu, to (for) what; dazu, to (for) that, to (for) it; 
woran, at what; daran, at that, at it; 
rworin, in what; darin, in that, in it; 
wodurd), by what; . —dadurd, by that, by it. 


Herab, hinab, down; 
herauf, hinauf, up; 
heraus, hinaus, out; 
herein, Hinein, in; 
beritber, hiniiber, over. 





+ See the list of numerals in the Theoretical Course. 


“4 


_—— —_ eet 





ee a = ee 


4 
F 
3 
7 
4 





a. eg 2 


Ops,—1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined with 
the adverbs two, da, her and hin. If, in the formation of these words, two 
vowels meet, an r is inserted. 


2. ‘The prepositions with which these adverbs are combined, are liable 

to the same variation of meaning, as if they were separated: Woratn (not 

‘wovon) denfen Cie, of what do you think ? (the verb denfen being construed 

with an, not with pon); tobvon hangt e3 ab, on what does it depend? (the 
verb abhdngen being construed with von, not with auf). 

3. The adverbs formed by prefixing wo and dq must always be used 
instead of prepositions connected with the interrogative wag or with per- 
sonal and demonstrative pronouns in the neuter gender. They are not ad- 
missible if what, being followed by nouns, must be rendered by weldher, e, e8: 
Of what books, von weldjen Giichern (not wovon Biichern). The adverbs 
combined with da are used if the personal pronoun or demonstrative depend- 
‘ent on a preposition, refers to THincs masculine, feminine or neuterin either 
number, but not in reference to persons. I have made no use of THEM (the 
books), ic) habe feinen Gebraud) davon gemacht. . 

4. Thecompounds with her and hin are mostly used in combination 
with vERBS OF MOTION, forming separable compounds with them, The forms 
with her and hin are distinguished by the standpoint which the spzaxer is 
conceived to occupy. If the motion, expressed by the verb, is represented 
as directed towards the speaker, the compounds with her are used, If the 
motion has a direction away from the speaker, the compounds with hin must 
be employed: I go down, id) gehe hinab; he is walking down the mountain, 
ex geht vont Verge herab (if the speaker is represented as being below). 

5. All TRANSITIVE and REFLEXIVE verbs form their PERFEcTs and ptLv- 
perFects active by means of the auxiliary haben, Nevrer verbs generally 
take the same auxiliary. But the following neuter verbs form these tenses 
_ with the auxiliary fein: 


a) Neuter verbs, expressing a motion. from one place to another, as 
fommen, gehen, reiten (to ride on horseback), fliehen (to flee), zuriicfehren (to 
return); begegnen (to meet); fallen (to fall): Sd) war (not ich hatte) guriicige- 
fehrt, I had returned; id) bin (not ic) habe) gefommen, I have come. 


b) Those neuter verbs, denoting a transition from one state to another, 
as: fterben, to die; erfranfen, to fall sick; wachjen, to grow; verfinfen, to sink, 
getejen, to recover, and a great many others: id) bin (not id) habe) geftorben, 
I have died, | 


ec) Some verbs that cannot be classified, as: bleiben, to remain (stay); 
gelingen, to succeed; miflingen, to fail; folgen, to follow. 


Ubhingen von, to depend on; entweiden (strong), to escape; 
aufwaden, to awake; erfranfen, to fall sick; 
Deftehen (strong) in, to consist in, genejen (strong), to recover; 


— 100 — 


halter (strong), to hold; bas Congrefimitglied, the member of — 


hereinfommen, efREAnG bh Congress; 
hineintommen, emp, BvD Deutidjland, Germany; 


hereintreten (strong), ‘ ce die Kenntnif, the attainment; 
hineintreten, } oeep in; die Mtinute, the minute; 
heviiberjchwimmen.(strong), ) to swim der Paffagier, the passenger; 
hiniiberjdhwimmen, over; der Sdliijjel, the key; 

leiden (strong) an, to suffer of; Die Schwindjucht, the consumption; 
miflingen (strong), to fail; das Vermigen, the property; , 
verfinfen (strong), to sink; die Verurtheilung, the condemnation; 
warten, to wait; ' anfdnglic), in the beginning; 
*widerfahren (strong), to befall; literarijcdh, literary; 

guriidreifen, to go or come back; wenige, few; 

*per Buchhalter, the bookkeeper; einige, a few. 


Wovony ipredhert Sie? Yoh fpreche von demt Ungliic, das 
Shrem Bruder widerfahren ift. Gch habe gleichfalls (likewise) 


davon gefprodjen. Haft du nicht gehirt, womit Karl fich heute beim - 


Lehrer entjduldigt hat? Gch habe nichts davon gehirt. Hat er 


nicht gefagt, daR er zu fpat von fetner Metje guritcégefehrt fet? Nein, — 
damit hat er fich nicht entidhuldigt. Wiffen Sie, worant+ Herr Mollet 
geftorben ijt? Git er vielleicht an der Schwindjucht geftorben? 
Daran ijt er [wohl] fchwerlid) (hardly) geftorben; denn er hat nie 
dDaran (of) gelitten. Warum find Sie nicht geftern auf (into) mein — 


Bimmer gegangen? Gch mare gern Hinaufgegangen, wenn ich den 


Selitijel dazu gehabe hatte. Wo befindet fich jest Shr Herr Bruder? — 
Gr ift nach Deutfhland zuriicgereijt. Wird er nicht bald wieder her- — 


iiberfontmen? $c) glaube nicht, er ift jest Langer hier geblieben, als 
er anfanglic) beabfichtigte. Wodurch hat Shr Freund fein Vermigen 


verloren? Nachdem, faft alle feine Unternehmungen miflungen” 
waren, ift fein Buchhalter mit ciner grofen Gumme entwichen. Sit 


nicht Karl vom Dache gefallen? Cs war nicht Karl, der herabge- 
fallen ijt, fondern fein Bruder. Warum feid thr nicht zu uns Heraus 
aufs Vand gefommen? Wir fonnten nicht hinausfommen; die Wege 
waren zu jdjledt. Treten Sie herein, [meiste] Herren. Wir wiirden 
gern hineintreten, wenn wir Zeit Hatten. <$ch erjude Sie, meinen 





+ Bovon, of what, must be well distinguished from von wo, from where. . 
{ Prepositions cannot be contracted with the article, if a relative clause 


follows, 
Tt To die of a disease, an einer Krantheit fterben. 











— 11 — 


Sohn mit fic) heritbergubringen, wenn Ste von Frantreid) zuriid- 
reijen. Sch wiirde Shren Sohn mit dem. sae Ber gniigen a 
Yhnen heritberbringen, wenn er nicht {don adgéreift wire. eet ik 


> eae 


124. 

On (vot) what will the condemnation of the President de- 
pend? It will depend on the votes of two or three members 
of Congress. Do you know that Charles’s father has come (in 

order) to take his son home? Of that nothing is known (be- 
fannt) to me. With what have you occupied yourself during 
the year? I have occupied myself with: literary labors, but I 
am now done (fertig) with them. Are you invited to (31) the 
President’s party (Gefellfchaft)? No, I have no invitation to it. 
Of (an) what do you think? Iam thinking of the steamboat 
that has sunk in the river. Have [there] been many passengers .- 
init? Their number is not known to me. It is now the highest 
time to begin this work; let us go at it immediately. In what 
dothe attainments of this man consist? Why did you read in 
that book? I did not read at all init. At what o’clock did 
you awake (Perf.) this morning? I did not awake (Perf) till 
nine o’clock, because I had returned very late from my journey. 
Has General Smith died of (an) his wound? No, he has 
not died of it; he has entirely (vollftinbdig) recovered. Why did 
you not remain (Perf.) home yesterday? I was obliged (1miiffen) 
to see my brother, who had suddenly fallen sick. Can you not 
come down for (auf with accus.) a few minutes? I cannot come 
down now, you must wait. Do me the favor to send up your 
servant to me. I cannot send him up; he must hold my horses, 
but I shall come up myself. When we had arrived at (bei) the 
river, I requested my friend to swim over with me. Dear _ 
Charles, come over to us for (auf) a few days, all your friends 
are expecting you. Who is knocking at the door? It is 
William. Tell him to come in. When we found that the 
| street-door was locked, we tried to get in by the garden- 
gate. 


125. | 
"3 5 < € & Diab: ) | 
5 eso"? ST eu . 
sf go cees 6 cs foenst gieidy, - although, though; 
: : m Wwestit-|hon, « 
wenn aud), 
wiewobl, ; ‘ 





aud) wenn (wenn aud) t 

felbjt wenn (wenn jlo, even ff} | 
wenn aud) nod) fo (jehr), however (much); 
denn (conjunction), for (conjunction), 


Oss.—1, The different German conjunctions corresponding to although 
and even if, require the verb to be at the end of the clause. Those connected 
with ob may be separated (ob — gletch, etc.), and often take other words of 
the sentence, especially pronouns, between them, Ob wir gleid) fahen, al- — 
though wesaw. Such words may also be interposed between the different — 
combinations of wenn, if the conjunction wen precedes. : 

2. The principal sentence, if it follows the clause with the equivalents © 
of although, is generally introduced by jo, and after the verb generally is in- — 
serted one of the particles doc), dennod, gleidjwobhl, corresponding to the — 
English still, yet, nevertheless: obgleid) wir friih tamen, fo muften wir dod — 
(dennod), gleidjwohl) lange warten, although we came early, we (still) were 
obliged to wait a long time, 

3. The conjunction wenn, either standing alone (if), or in connection — 
with gleich, fchon, auch (although), may be entirely dropped, and in this case 
the sentence is construed as if it were a QuEsTION, beginning with the verb, 
followed. by the subject. The particle fo is then generally employed as a con- — 
nective: fommft du, fo gebe ich, ifthoucomest,I go. ft dein Vater abgereift, 
fo werde ic) auc) abreijen, if thy father has departed, I shall also depart. 
Wire dein Freund gefund, fo wiirde er hier fein, if thy friend were well (were 
thy friend well) he would be here. War er gleid) entmuthigt (wenn gleich er 
entinuthigt war), fo vergweifelte er dod) nicjt, although he was discouraged, he - 
[still] did not despair. QWarft du auch nod) fo fleifig, fo finnteft du 8 doch 
(deunod)) nicht thun, however diligent thou mightst be, thou couldst [still] 
not do it. | 

4. Diminutives are formed from most German substantives by the end- 
ing den, softening the radical vowel, and being of neuter gender: per oo § 
— das Gibhnchen (the little or dear son). 4 

5. Almost all personal male names form female appellatives by the 
ending in, eliding the endings e and en: der Preuffe— die Preufin (the 
Prussian woman); der Dichter (poet) — die Didjterin (poetess); der Herzog 
(duke) — die Herzogin (duchess). Some soften the radical (Graf — Gréfin). 
In the plural they double their final n (Dichterinuen), 


eS ee 





a ne | - eh 








oa Wo 


Angebert (strong), to state; - ber Grund, the reason; 
fich anftrengen, to exert one’s self; das Gut, the property; ~ 
ausdorren, to parch; die Rlarheit, the clearness; 
blithen, to blossom; bie Rreide, the chalk; 
erreidjen, to obtain; das Mittel, the instrument, the means; 
erzielen, to derive; die Nachfidjt, the indulgence; 
perdorren, to dry up; der Ruhm, the glory; 
wadjjen (strong), to grow; bie Sdhinheit, the beauty; 
perivalten, to administer, to manage; die Tapferfeit, the valor; 
zeidjnen, to draw (make a draft); der Umrif, the sketch; 
die Anmuth, the grace; -Dte Weisheit, the wisdom; 
das Vett, the bed; der Wille, the will; 
die Cigen|daft, the quality; die Xeitung, the (news) paper; 
die Erwartung, the expectation; der Zwed, the purpose; 
die Franzifin, the Frenchwoman; gelehrt, learned; 
der Gebrauch, the use; gewift, certain; 
die Gegend, the landscape, thegrounds; glinjend, brilliant; 
die Gelehriamfeit, the scholarship; graufam, cruel; 
der Geift, the mind; jhwad, weak; 
der Glaube, the faith; uniwahr, untrue, 


Benn ihr aud) nod) fo fleifig feid FE 
So fleifig ihr auch feid, . however diligent you are. 


Gs fehlt (mangelt, gebricht) mir an einer Sache, I am deficient in a thing, 
destitute of a thing, I lack a thing. 


 —- Obwohl eS geblizt Hat, fo habe wir doch feinen Oonner gehirt. 
Obgleich viel Megen gefallen ift, fo find wunfere Wege doch gut; denn 
die Erde war von der Hibe vollftindig (perfectly) ausgedsrrt worden. 
Ob dein Sohn fron ftarf (rapidly) gewachfen ift, fo fcheint e8 mir 
gleichwohl, da er fleiner ijt, als mein Wert. Wenn ich gleich feine 
groge Gelehrjamfcit berwundern mufte, fo glaubte ic) doch, dag ed 
-feinem Geifte an Rlarheit fehle. Wenn ihr auch Alles, was ihr ver- 
— fprochen habt, thitet, fo wiirdet ihr doch enern Bwee nicht erreichen. 
Hutte mein Bruder fein Giitchen felbft verwaltet, fo witrde er mehr 
Ginnahmen daraus erzielt haben., Hirt der Krieg nicht bald auf, fo 
miifjen wir unfer Haushen und Gartdhen verfaufen. Hat dein Vater 
gleich feine Griinde angegeben, jo mut du dich dDennoch feinem Willen 
fiigen. Seid ihr nur fleifig, wird euch der Grfolg nicht feblen. 
Wiiret ihr auch hier, fo fountet ihr in der Sache (matter) doch nichts 
Gndern. Sit gleich die Grafin noch nicht villig genefen, fo ift fie den- 
nod) mit allen ihren Dienerinnen abgereift. Hitte ich nur ein Stites 


f 


— 104 — 


chen Kreide bet (with) mir, fo wiirde ich einen Umrif der Gegend hier — 


an die Thiir zeidnen. Wenn ic) auch gugeben mu, dag das Bud) 
mehrere gute Gigenfdhafter hat, fo fann ich gleichwohl feinen Gebrauch 
Davon machen. Gelbjt wenn der Konig dies gejagt hatte, wiirde 


ich e3 Dennoc) nicht glauben. Much wenn der General jest [noch] jiegen — 
follte (to be victorious), wiirbde er doch feinen fritheren Ruhm mie- — 
mals wieder erlangen (recover). Wenn ihr aud) nod) fo reich waret — 


(wiret ihr auch noch fo reich), fo finntet ihr doch diefe Summe nicht 
zahlen. Wenn ihr auch noch fo lange hier bleibt, fo werdet ihr doch 


vergeblid) warten. Go gelehrt diefer Mann auch ift, fo gebricht 03 — 


‘tht doch an Weisheit. 
} 126. 


Although} these men are deficient in many qualities, they 
- certainly are not destitute of valor. Though we had gone 


very late to bed, we yet rose very early in the morning. Al-: 


though this man is not learned, still he is a very good teacher. 


Although we have no claim to (auf) your indulgence, we never- — 
theless think that you will excuse us in this matter; for we have ~ 


acted in good faith. Although our little trees (dimin.) blos- 
somed in the spring, they (yet) have dried up in the summer, 
Although the news was confirmed in the papers, he still be- 


lieved that it was untrue. However much they exerted them- © 


selves, their efforts were fruitless (vergeblic)). However cruel 


. this king was, he stili was not destitute of good qualities. Al — 


thought the Italian women are renowned for (wegen) their 
beauty, they lack the grace of the French [women]. If this 
little house (dimin.) belonged to me, I should sell it. If your 


friend does not arrive to-day, we must go (reijfen) to him. If 
the king keeps his word, the people will be happy. Although — 
-his instruments were not always well chosen, still his designs — 


were certainly good. Although our hopes are weak, our efforts 
will be great. Had it not rained, we certainly should have 
come. However brilliant this victory was, the results did not 
warrant (recjtfertigen) our expectations. | 





‘+ In translating the sentences with although, all different modes of ex- 


. pression should be employed in succession. 


{t In all the sentences following below, the conjunction wenn must be — 


dropped, the sentences being rearranged accordingly. 








- 127. 


Plur. die, Leute (if used as an indefinite aggregate 
of persons). | 


Plur. die Rauflente (not Kaufmanner). 


Sing. dex Mann 


Sing. der Kaufmann 


7&3 Most of the compounds with Mann form the plural Lente, not 
Miinner. 


Ops.—1,. Participles if used as adjectives, are declined with the same 
endings as adjectives, either after the strong or weak declension: ein getrod- 
neter UWpfel, a dried apple; der getroduete Wpfel, the dried apple. They are 
also subject to comparison with the same endings, as ordinary adjectives: 
gebildet, educated; gebildeter, more educated; ein gebildeterer Dtann, a more 
educated man... 

2. Present participles add the ending end to the stem of the verb: 
lobend, praising; eine blithende Stadt, a flourishing town, 

3. Adjectives and participles, used with the. force of adjectives, are 
generally placed before their nouns, even when they have one or more ad- 
juncts. The adjuncts, in this case, always precede their adjectives, and are’ 
placed between the article or determinative pronoun, and the noun. In 
English, such phrases must be placed after the noun, and hee ey must 
be replaced by relative or other clauses: 


Gin feinem Vaterlande ergebener Viirger, a citizen devoted to his country | 
(who is devoted to his country), : 
Die ihre Eltern liebenden Kinder, the children loving their parents (that 
love their parents). 
: Cine mit Fuhrwerken angefiillte Strafe, a street crowded with vehicles. 


= 4. The German infinitive with the neuter article (or other determina- 
tive) is used with the force of the English participial noun in ing. It is then 
declined like other substantives in en: da8 Loben, the praising; Gen. des 
Lobens, of the praising; Dat. dem tia Ace, das oben. 


 Unfertigen, to compile; | pfliigen, to plow; 


_berauben (with Gen.), to deprive of; 
, dejhranten, to limit; 


betrauen, to entrust; 
betriiben, to afflict; 


_ briiflen, to bellow; 


entblifen, to denude; 
erbittern, to exasperate; _ 
erfahren (strong v.), to experience; 


_ erjchiittern, to move, to affect; 


erftarren, to benumb; 
fiihlen, to feel; 


‘raffiniren, to refine; 
reizent, to charm; 
rufen (strong), to call; _ 
{chiefen (strong), to fire; 
fchreien (strong), to shout; - 
tiufden, to disappoint; 
toben, to rage; 
*jiberfehen (strong), to overlook; 
*unterhalten (strong), to entertain; | 
verftairfen, to increase; 
veriiben, to commit; 


tees 


der Whfall, the defection; die Provin;, the province; 
der Undadhtsplab, the place of worship; die Regung, the emotion; 
der UArbeitgeber, the employer; das Reid), the empire; 
der Urbeitsmann, the workingman; der Sinn, the sense; 
der Uuswanderer, the emigrant; - der Stall, the stable; 
der Anblid, the sight; bas Talent, the talent; 
die Vereitwilligfeit, the poadininay: die That, the exploit; 
die BVeute, the booty; ber Theil, the part; | 
die Bliite, the blossom; die Umfidjt, the circumspection; 
der Cindruc, the impression; das Urtheil, the judgment; 
die Entlaffung, the dismissal; der Weften, the West; 
die Erpreffjung, the extortion; begierig auf, eager for; 
der Exceff, the excess; empfehlensiwerth, commendable; 
die Gemeinde, the congregation; entfeblich, terrific; 
die Gloce, the bell; furdtbar, fearful; 
die Graujamfeit, the cruelty; liiftern nach, greedy of; 
das Her;, the heart; neuerlidh, (adv.), recently; 
*der RKanzler, the chancellor; roh, rude; 
der Kiinftler, the artist; jin, fine; 
der Landmann, the countryman (hus- jdmerzlid, painful; 
bandman); ftolz auf, proud of; 
der Landsman, the countryman (being unfibig (with Gen.), incapable of; 
of the same country); ungerithrt, untouched; 
die Menge, the multitude; vertraut mit, privy to; 
der Plan, the plan; voll, full; 
*pder Bunft, the point; wefentlich fiir, essential to. 


&8 befindet fic) (there is) ein erfahrener Wundarzt auf dem 


Schiffe. Wir arbeiten jest-mit verftirftem Fleife. Ou Haft mir ein 


reizendes Buch gelichen. Wir hatten heute den Befuch mehrerer rei- 


jender RKaufleute. Oas Lefen unterhaltender VBiicher tft nicht immer 
empfehlenswerth. Wir bemerften viele mit Bfliigen befdhaftigqte Land=— 
leute. Das Schreien und Coben der erbitterten Menge war furchtbar. 


Das Leiden diefer von aller Hiilfe entblogten Leute war entfeslich. 


Der Abfall der feinem Meiche fo lange treu gewefenen Provinjzen” 
erfchiitterte den Konig tief. Die neuerlic) von Europa angefom- 


menen Wuswanderer wurden fogleic) nach dem Weften befordert. 
Nichts macht einen betritbenderen Cindruc, als etn wahrend des 


Sommers feiner Blatter beraubter Gaum. Diefe nach Muhm fo 
begierige RKiinjtlerin fiihlte fid) fchmerzlich getiufeht, als da8 Urtheil 
der Menge ihr befannt 3u werden anfing. Die vor (with) Froft faft 


erftarrten Soldaten wurden mit raffinivter Graujamfeit von den nad) 


a va 











a RET 


Beute litjterren Candleuten getddiet. Wir haben immer unjere armen, 
bom Ungliic (distress) betroffenen (involved in) Candsleute mit 
grofer Bereitwilligheit unterftiigt. Die rohen und auf ihre Thaten 
ftolzen Goldaten verithten die gribften (grob, brutal) Cxcejfe. 


128. 

This news was very painful to the afflicted father. This is 
true (gelten) ina more limited sense than you seem to believe, 
I shall not answer (beantworten) these insulting remarks. The 
firing of the troops taking part in this battle, lasted till (the) 
evening. The carpenters, threatened with dismissal from their 
places (die Stelle), submitted to the extortions of their em- 
ployers. The officers (civil), entrusted with the compiling of 
these lists, accomplished their tasks (YUufgabe) in less than 
three months. We heard the bellowing of the cattle (die Itin- 
der, plur.) returning to their stables. The tolling (Yiuten) of 
the bells, calling the congregations to their places of worship, 
made a solemn impression. We were shown (translate by man) 
the works of several [lady] artists, [who are] renowned for 
(wegen) their talents. Although the workingmen, disappointed 
in their hopes, were exasperated at (itber with accus. ) their em- 
ployers, they soon returned to (ju) their work. These points so 
essential to us, have been entirely overlooked by you. There is 
no finer sight than an apple-tree (standing) in full blossom. This 
heart, incapable of all higher emotions, remained untouched. 
The chancellor [who was] privy to all the plans of the king, 
_ prepared this enterprise with great circumspection. 


129. 
. : . Infinitive. ¥ 
 ‘mogen, to like; diirfen, to be at liberty, to be wiffen, to know. 
allowed, | 
Present Indicative. , 
id) mag, I may; ich davf, lam atlibertyetc.; id) weifi, I know; 
du mag{t, thou mayest; du darfft, thou art at liberty; du weift, thou knowest; 
et mag, he may; er darf, he is etc. er Wweif, he knows; 
Wir migen, we may; wir Ddiirfen, we are etc., wir wiffen, we know; 
ihe mogt, you may; _— ir bdiivft, you are etc.; ihr wift, you know; 


fie mdgen, they may; fie diirfen, they are etc.; @ fie wiffen, they know, 


— 108 — 


Present Subjunctive. — ' 
id) mige, etc. ith diirfe, etc. id wiffe, etc. 
Imperfect Indicative, 
id) modjte, Imightetc. id durfte, Iwas at liberty; id) wufte, I knew. 
| Imperfect Subjunctive. 
id) michte, Imight; ich diixfte, I were at liberty, id) wiiftte, I knew. . 
Imperative, ah 

| wifje, wift, wiffen Sie. 
Ozss.—1. tigen in the present and imperfect denotes a possibility, de- — 
pendent on contingency: die’ mag fic) zutragen, this may happen. Witha 
negation it generally expresses, J do not like to, and in the subjunctive im- — 

perfect (with or without negation) often [should wish or like. $d) mag dies nicht 
thun, I do not like to do this; ic) midjte dte3 haben, I should like to have this, ~ 
2. May in questions is generally rendered by bdiirfen: darf ic) eintreten, 
may I enter? In the suBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT it denotes PROBABILITY: Dies — 
diirfte wabr fein, this is probably true, Must with a negation may be generally — 
translated by (nicht) diirfen: wir diivfen die’ nicht thun, we must not do this. — 
3. All modal auxiliaries (mdgen, diirfen, miiffen, fonnen, wollen, follen) 
form past participles (gemodht, gedurft, gemut, gefonnt, gewollt, gefollt), and 
all compound tenses (Fut. ic) werde finnen, I shall be able; ich werbde miiffen, 
I shall be obliged; ich werbde diirfen, I shall be at liberty, etc.). Their past 
participles in the perfect and pluperfect generally take the form of their infinitives ;— 
Perf,: ic) habe nicht fommen £5 nnen,f Ihave not been able to come (I could — 
not come); ic) habe die’ nicjt thun mi gen, I have not liked (did not like or — 
wish) to do this; id) habe nicht fommen diirfen, [have not been at liberty | 
(was not at liberty) to come; td) habe nad) Hauje gehen miiffen (jollen), [have © 
been obliged (was obliged) to go home. The pluperfects are in the same 
way formed by ich hatte. ie 

4. The English potential pluperfects with could, should (ought to) are 
translated by the pluperfect subjunctives of the verb finnen, follent und 
miiffen with the present infinitive of the main verb; id) hatte dies nidjt 
fdreiben finnen, I could not have written this; fieha@tten nicht fo frithe © 
fommen jollen (or miiffen), you should not have come so early; er hatte — 
die Schlacht gewinnen m it} | en (or follen),7+ he ought to have won the battle. — 
_ §. If clauses in which the infinitive of the modal auxiliaries is used with — 
the force of a participle, are introduced by one of the conjunctions daf, 











+ The perfects dnd pluperfects of the modal auxiliaries are only then 
formed with the past participles, if the infinitive, dependent on these verbs 
is understood: ic) habe e 8 nidjt gefount, J have not been able [to do it], etc. 

t Provided that should has not the force of a simple conditional, in 
which case it is rendered by wiirde, with the perfect infinitive, | 

++ The literal translation of these English potential pluperfects, by means 
of finnte etc. with the perfect infinitive has an entirely different meaning. 
They are used only in spétial circumstances. 








— 109 — 


wenn etc., requiring the verb to be at the end, the aumiliaries habe, hatte 
and bitte can never be placed at the end of the clause, but must precede the infini- 
tive of the main verb, as: wenn ihr bhattet fommen fonnen, if you could have 
come (not wenn ifr fommen finnen hattet). 

6. The preposition without before a verbal noun in ing, is rendered by 
ohne and an infinitive with zu: ohne den Dtann zu fennen, without knowing 
the man; ohne ihn gefehen gu haben, without having seen him; ohne e8 thun 
_ gu fonnen, without being able to'do it. 

7. Wiffe is construed with 3 and the infinitive, corresponding to the 
English know how to etc.: er wufte fic) 31 mapigen, he knew how to restrain 
himself. 

| 8. Pflegen with 3u and the infinitive corresponds to the English to be in 
the habit of with the participial noun in ing, or to [am wont with the infinitive. 
In the imperfect it is generally translated by J used to: wir pflegen am Ptorgen 
gu baden, we are in the habit of bathing (we are wont to bathe) in the morn- 
ing; ich pflegte mid) mit meinen Freunden iiber diefen Gegenftand zu unterhal- 
ten, I used to converse with my friends on the subject. 


— Unriihren, to touch; 

aufiejen (strong), to pick up; 

 ausdriicfen, to express; 

ausricjten, to execute; 
Bedenfen tragen (strong), to hesitate; 
beitragen (strong), to contribute; 

' fich benehmen (strong), to behave; 
Henuten (with Acc.), to make use of; 

befucjen (with Acc.), to attend to; 

- fich betheiligen an, to engage in; 

- betreten, to enter; 


die Antwort, the answer; 
der UWuffas, the composition; 
der Wuftrag, the commission; 
der Wuslinder, the foreigner; 
die Wusficht, the chance; 
die Sefannt{dhaft, the acquaintance; 
das Vetragen, the conduct; 
die Bibliothef, the library; 
die Folge, the consequence; 
der Gejchaftsbrief, the business letter, 
das Klavier, the piano; 





 frithftiicfen, to breakfast; 
- gedeiten (strong), to prosper; 
in Kenntnif fesen, to ssa 
_ftrénen, to crown; 
 fich mifdjen, to mingle; 
- ftéren (with Acc.), to intrude on; 
‘ibereinftimmen, to agree; 
*iiberlegen, to consider; 
Unjufrieden fein, to find fault; 
derdffentlicjen, to divulge; 
borherjehen (strong), to foresee; 
bortragen (strong), to deliver (a 
_ speech); 
verfidjern, to assure; 
Wwiederjehen (strong), to see ‘again; 
piehen (strong), to draw; 


die Rirde, the church; 

der Poften, the lot; 

der Redner, the speaker; 

der Schluf, the conclusion; 

der Schuldjdein, the draft; 

die Spradje, the language; 

die Speijen (pl.), the eatables; 
der Uimfang, the extent; 

dev Untergebene, the clerk; 

die Waare, the article (of trade); 
ganz, quite; 

gerechtfertiqt, warranted; 
jedenfalls, at all events; 

mit Unredt, wrongly, unjustly; 


~ perantwortlicd, responsible; 


wahrideinlid), probable. 


—- 110 — 


Dies mag der Fall fein oder nicht; jedenfalls firnen Sie e8 nicht 
wiffen. Mtdgen Sie verfichert fein (rest), [meine] Herren, dak ich 
von der ganzen Sache nichts wef, und mit Unrecht jenes Verbrechens — 
bejdhuldigt worden bin. Nein Bruder mag fich in dieje Sache (affair) — 
nicht mifden. eh mag diefen Mtann nicht wiederfehen. Mtichten — 
Sie [wohl] Ghren Bruder itberrafden, wenn er von feiner Reife gue 
riidfehrt ? Diirfen Sie diefe VBibliothel benugen? a, ich darf fie 
benuben, fo oft (as often as) ich will, Darf ih mich nah Shrem 
Befinden erfundigen? Diirfen Ghre Gohne heute mit mir aufs— 
Land gehen? Ytein, meine Sihne diirfen heute gar nicht ausgehen. 
Die Soldaten durften fich nicht mit einander.unterhalten.  Diefe — 
Herren wifjer ficly nicht 3u benehmen. Diefer Wuslander wufte fid 
fehr gut (well) in unferer Sprache auszudritden. Sch pflege die 
Reitungen zu lejen, jobald (as.soon as) ich gefrithftitcdt habe. Sein 
Bruder pflegte die vou den Baumen Herabgefallenen Wepfel .aufzulee — 
fen, und fie nach der Stadt gu bringen. Konnen Sie Klavier fpielen ? 
Nein, ih habe e$ niemals lernen modgen. dh habe nicht ein eingiges 
Wort diefes Redners verftehen fonnen. Wir RKnaben hatten noch 
niemals diefes Zimmer betreten diirfen. Hatten Sie nicht frither 3u - 
ung heritberfommen finnen ? Gch hatte eS gewik gethan, wenn ich 
gefonnt hatte. Sie Hatten diefen Wufjag nicht bejfer fdretben fonnen; 
aber Sie hitten ihn bejfer vortragen follen. Gch) wiirde den WAuffag- 
beffer gejchrieben haben, wenn ich die Sffentliche Bibliothef hatte be- 
nugen ditrfen. Gch werde Hhren Plan auszufithren verfuchen, aber 
ohne mich fiir deffen (its) Erfolg verantwortlicd) 31 machen. Er fehrte— 
von der Stadt juriic, ohne jeinen WAuftrag ausgerichtet ju haben. — 
Yh war Lange in der Stadt, ohne mit Herrn Mollet Iprecjen gu fone 
nen. Gr mufte im Zimmer bleiben, ole etwas von jenen Speifer 
anrithren gu diirfen. 


















130. ; 

You may be diligent, but you are not attentive enough. 
What is reported in the paper may be quite (ganz) correct, 
but the conclusions which you would like to draw from (aus) 
it, are certainly not warranted. May our country continue 
(fortfahren)+ to prosper, and may our labors be always crowned 





+ To continue is translated by fortjeten, if governing a substantive; if it 
is followed by an infinitive, it must be rendered by fortigret If followe 
by an adverb or adjective, we translate it bleiben. 








— iil — 


by success! Would you like to engage in this enterprise? I 
have often told you that this enterprise does not agree with 
my views, and that I do not like to contribute to (31) it. Since 
my brother was at liberty to divulge the matter (Cache), he did 
not hesitate to make me privy to it. I shall probably (wobf) 
_ be at liberty to make you acquainted with this affair in a few 
days; but Imust not do itnow. May I intrude on you for a 
few minutes? Do you know how to use (gebrauchen) this instru- 
Ment (Ynftrument n.)? I believe, I knew it formerly, but I 
must have forgotten it. We are in the habit of answering (be- 
antworten) all our business letters on the spot (die Stelle). When 
I was living in the city, I used to attend to this church. Iam 
not wont to allow such liberties to my clerk. I did never 
_ like (perf. of migen) to make acquaintances on the street. 
_ Although I made (perf.) several efforts (der Verfuch) I have not 
been able to become acquainted with this gentleman. We 
_ have been often obliged to find fault with your conduct. Have 
you been at liberty to take these books home? ' Why did you 
not notify me directly of (von) your plans? You should (follen) 
have sent me an answer by return mail (imit wumgehen- 
der GBoft). I could not have imagined that your claims against 
(an) me were of (von) such extent. You ought to have better 
considered your probable chances before you came to this 
country. Would you have engaged in this enterprise if you 
could have foreseen its consequences? I engaged in it without 
much thinking of its consequences. I know very well that I 
should (folfen) have taken (to me) more time, when I was 
writing this book. Do you know that you ought to have paid 
your draft yesterday? I shall not leave the city without 
having seen Mr. Nollet. I staid (perf.) three days in the city 
without being able to find (treffen) Mr. Nollet at home. We 
stood several days before the enemy without being at liberty 
to attack them. . Must I take the whole lot if I want to 
purchase this article? "You may purchase as much (foviel) of 
it as you want (wollen), without being obliged to take the 
whole (da8 Ganze). 





— 112. — 


APPENDIX. 


1. The following exercises in German Hand-writing are intended to 
drill the first beginner-in the use of writing characters. The numbers refer 
to the numbers of the exercises in the Method. | 

2. Each number should be carefully copied in connection with the — 
exercises it refers to. The teacher may, in addition, require the sentences to 
be written out in English characters, or to be translated into English. | 

3. In translating the English exercises in the Method into German, 
which should always be done in writing, the student should in the beginning ~ 
of his course use English rather than German characters, till he will have 
had sufficient practise in the use of the German written pee by copying 
the appended sentences. 


Metetaaatte ae 


movie. Laur” wove cenenee” | 

ppd, Beil 

5. Let Dita fl fogs townte 

NE Lael jl denne Lo fou 
a 


ee ~———a- 





-_ oo 


LZZZZ 


Linn fier 


ra 
blow! ib thanil 
ga Ne 





— 13 — 


Wan fonts tf 


Dewive on ee a Oe ee “Lo sos 
:. Bees oo. 
Y Ke Brn peed eA¢ | 
— LD ae a, oe 
| CS. yi 
i ZF ZLEL 

BA 3 Ka Pe3 atone a 
7 a Zt 2 


. * bequem, comfortable, 











YOfh falta 
jaw be Loe 
eet Vaan ti fldcuto 


it. Fake og Coal cates Wo} 
empl” al ve wel lim metil 
Weoflow ~ awuioe pal Fecak 


it pipe 
ot | 






tt Spat Je Yond | 
| Loman, Lil geaba sheen Drofllan wisp 


Seatew Den ebafel Lag 


es 
(A Jl GYlapen pte jlee 


— 41 — 


efi fansfsda Lisp 


pppoe lhe, pabare on vee 


; 3 a oe ee se 
Lowen fal fore Zonal: wingh 


| pois 


(86 Gall Ph mine Cate 
ie Laofow Weceyf bean fal 
DS iavtpeioe 
aes fei YA 6 fal aeaien Pie 

aetna 


29. 2h Lek g oS 

2 os 7 ie 
EN oer EA wo 
Lipari je hm i 


ee rR 


4 bbe gee —_ 





* Der Aufgang, the rising. 


| 








— AT 


i ae vol y bh 
; agygay Yi Lo Mee § 
cA Le Cateye Sk tf 
Layne Li plan" fod 
A ctfn osed wine Ljbell 
po 

mn SS. Lan Gootw een 
a Laeln wenn arose 

cE 2. 


oes 


vee Bio prr? S 


oe FES ee 


PLN, Mi Se Be he 
vce lol 


Pe jm 
Py heey ase Hee floc a 


elizfla SS cuppa LW Lim ee 
Tad Sb Ll Al \ fpleorafle 
bes Loll erates 


Lt GA aes va = Lee 















a Vik: 


OAS 
ae 2 CZ 
bs Aiea pl a a 
aie epee 
a sor nb ho SEE 
aay Ft te 
a oe Ll Re ap Jo 
s Lele a a ae 


B fel Bla bo ws GY 


* Die Ouelle, the souree. 





os 


ase ae 
ee Cie Pon 
hp cilenuill delswinnn Spe 
ys , 
a Alt” Mla 
hast Naf, vin per A 
Afi Cgpeeaian ma 
e e ve a eee oo 


Ge io. SAN, jl 
| shits Ze cree 
ee You Pol ponadpl = Males? 


Sj Git fife 








Pee rz 


121 


VOCABULARY. 





f ben ., but 


abfallen-(strong), v.-n., to-faltoff 
. Ubgabe, f., tax 


A abgehen (strong), v.n., to leave, v. n, 
4 abbdngen (strong), v. n., to depend 
~abhauen (strong), v. a., to cut down 
A abholen, v. a., to call for 







eel ner ittpeiir naira ammat ie 


“Fablehuen, v. a., to decline 
= abreifen, v. n., ‘to depart 
4a eife, f. Y isoattars 

 abidhneiber (strong), *v--a., to cut off 
Boi nehmen, to take leave sg 
~ thidjretbex-(strong), v. a., to copy 
\& AUbfidt, f£., intention, design 
x. abtragen (atrong), w.a., to pull down 


m abiwejend, adj., absent 
J Uchje, f., axis 
Te: ea ee, to take care of 





Latmofen, n., alms 
' Eyen,-plur. f., the Alps 
— af8,-conj., than, as, when 
— olt,adj., old | 
amevifanijd,;adj., American, adj. 
amritfirett, v. a., to amuse; fic) amiift- 


ren, v. refl., to enjoy one’s self 


Md an, prep., at 
, adj., the other 


ander, v. a., to change, v. a. 
nerfenten (strong), v. a., to acknow- 
ledge 
_—Anfangen (strong), v. a, to begin, 


| 





~~ COMMEN CO. 
Deep al aise j 


Anforderung, f., demand 

anfiillen, v. a., pa fill, v. a. x 
angeben (strong), v. a., to state x 
der UAngetlagte, the accused. 
Angelegenhett, f., affair 


| angenehm, adj., pleasant ~~ 


angreifen (strong), v. a., to attack. / 

AWngriff, m., attack 

fic) anfleiben, to dress (one’s self) 

anflopfen, v.n., to knock (at the door) 

an ., to arrive 

| MWrfunft-£., arrival % 

Anlage, f., talent ~ 

Anmuth, f., grace 

anunehmen (strong), v. a., to accept, 
to take 

Anordnung, f., regulation 

anreden, V. a., to address 

anjehen (strong), v. a., to look at 

Anficht, f., view 

Wnjpruch, m., claim 

anftellen, v. a., to appoint 

fich anftrengen, to exert one’s self 

Anfirengung, f., effort 

AWntrag, m., application 


_antworten, v. intr., to answer 


anwenden, v. a., to employ 
anjetgen, v. a., to announce 
anziehen (strong), v. a., to put on 
Upfel, m., apple 

Usbeit. f., work, labor 

acbeiten, v. n., to work, to labor 
fic) drgern, to be angry, displeased 
Argwobhn, m., suspicion 
Att, adj., poor 

Armee, f., army 

Wrt, f., kind 


nee 


. — 2 — | 


MWrgzt, m., physician 
atlantijd, adj., Atlantic, adj. 
aitth, particle, also 
auf, prep., on, upon 
aufbauen, v. a., to build up 
YWfgabe,f., lesson, exercise, task 
-aufgeben, ; 
se ag } to rise. See page 68. 
auffallen (strong), v. intr. with dat., 
to strike 
aufhalten (strong), v. a., to delay; fic 
aufhalten, to stay 
auffeben (strong), v. a., to pick up 
aufhiren, v.n., to cease ~ 
aufmiacen, v. a., to open 
Aufmerfamfeit, f., attention 
anfricdjtig, adj., upright, sincere 
aufjdretben (strong), v. a., to write 
down 
AWuftrag, m., order 
aufwaden, v. n., to awake 
Whige, n., the eye 
aug, prep., out of, from 
ausbreiten, v.n., to extend 
ausbrennen, v. n., to burn out 
ausdorren, v. a., to parch 
Guferft, adj., extreme 
ausfiihren, v. a., to execute, accom- 
plish, carry out 
ausriiften, v. a., to endow 
Aus|dqhug, m., board (of persons) 
ausjehen (strong), v. n., to look, v. n. 
ausjesen, v. a., to expose 
Ausficht, f., prospect 
austaujden, v. a., to exchange 
ausverfaufen, v. a., tosell out. — \ 


%. 
~ Bahnhof, m., railroad-station 
bed bald, adv., s00n 
~Batf; m., ball 
Band; n,, ribbon; m., volume 
Sanfef., bank (moneyed institute) 
t Bale, f., cousin, f. 
bauen, v. a., to build 
soa cine, : m., tree 


—~ 


| bebdedfen, v.a., tocover 4 


| belle, v. n., to bark 





. 
beabfidjtigen, v.a., tointend “~~ 
der Veamte, m., the officer (civil) A- 
bebdaiterit, v. a., iS regret —- 


Bedeutung, f., meaning a 
det Bebienie, man-servant 
Bedingung, f., condition >A" | 
bedrohen, v. a., to threaten ~- 
befeblen (strong), vy. a., to command t 
Befinden, n., health ‘ye 
fic) befinden (strong), to do, to be (of x 
health) 
befolgen, v. a., to follow (an order) van 
befirdern, v. a., to forward . 
fich begeben, to betake one’s self, to J 
proceed 
fic) begegnen, to meet (one another) y 
begehren, v. a., to demand ~\ 
begleiten, v. a., to accompany ~- 
begraben (strong), v. a., to bury ae 
behandelu, v.a., to tréat 
behaupten, v. a., to assert, 
beberrjdjen, V. a, to rule over 4 
1 the house of 
Beifall finden, to theet with favor’ 
betwohnen, intr. v, w. dat., to be 
present at 
befaunt, adj., known in | 
der Befannte (personal noun), the, 
acquaintance 
Befaunt\dhaft (abstr. n.), acquaintance 
belagern, v. a., to besiege 
Velagerung, f, siege 
belaftigen, v. a., to molest 
belaujden, v. a., to watch 
beletdigen, v.a., to insult 


state ig 
: 










befohnen, v. a,, to reward 
bemerfetr; v.a., to perceive, to remark 
Bemerkung, f., remark | 
benadjridjtiqen, v. a., to inform 
benetden, v.-a., to Ln 
Serg,tn.,. mountain : 
berichten, v. a., to report 
berithmt, adj., renowned 
befchadigen, v. a., to damage 


= 


ee aaa 


fic) befchaftigen, to occupy one’s self 
bejdjiefien (strong), v. a., to bombard 
| Befdlug, m., conclusion 
bejdjuldigen, v: a., toaccuse 
— bejeben, v. a., to occupy (take pos- 
session of) 
befiegen, v. a., to defeat 
fich befferu, to improve (one’s self) 
beftaitigen, v.a., to confirm 
Beftedung, f., bribery 
befteber in (strong), to consist in 
to pay a visit 
cbejuchen;-v. a., to visit 
fic) betragen (strong), to behave (one’s 
self) 
| Vetragent, n., conduct 
 betrichtlic), adj., considerable 
betritben, v. a., to afflict; eS betritbt 
mich, I am sorry 
_ fich betriiben, to be grieved, sorry 
Bett; n., bed 
 Veitler, m., beggar 
fic) Sewwegung madjen, to take exercise 
- berwundern, v. a., to admire 
Bier, n., beer 
* Bito, n., (pl. Bilder), picture 
- Viene, f,, pear 
_ bis, prep. and conj,, to, till, until 
bitten (strong), v. a., to request 
Statt (pl. Blatter), n., leaf 
blau, adj., blue 
Bei, n., lead 
., pencil 
; bleiben (strong) ,v. n., to remain 
bfigen, v. n., to lighten 
nicht blof, cbinj.; not only 
bliihen, v. n., to blossom, to flourish 
Shemne; f., flower 
*Boot, n., boat 
Défe, adj., wicked, naughty 
Bote, m., messenger 
Botichaft, f, message 
brauchen, v. a., to need, v. a. 
eecen. (strong), v. a, & n., to break 
breit, adj., broad, wide 
brennen, v.a. & n,, to burn 


128 


a oe 
m., letter 

Brieftafdhe, f., pocket-book 

brivtgen (strong), v. a., to bring 

* Bret, n., bread 

Gruber, m., brother 

Griiffel, n., Brussels 

Barer (pl. Biicher), n., book 
*Suchhaker, m., book- -keeper 

BVuchhindler, m., book-seller 

fich biicfen, to seers 

Biirgidhaft, f., bail 

Butter, f., butter (0 


? G. 
Caricect, n,, concert 
Congref, m., Congress < 
Congrefmitglied, m., member of Con- 

gress 
corrigiren, v. a., to correct » 
€onfin;m., (male) cousin; Coufine, f., 
(female), cousin . 


a. 
§ + 3 


>. 

‘Da, adv., there; conj, since 
damals, ar: then, at that time 
Dame, f., lady 
dante, v- intr., to thank 
BOR RCOD}., that 
datiren, v. a., to date 
Dauern, v.n.,tolast 7 
bein,-pronoun, thy; deiner, der deinige, 

thine 
denfer-(strong), v. n.; to think 
deutlid), adj., distinct »«< 
deut}dh,adj..German (adj. ) 
ber Deutiche, German (noun) 
Deutihland, n., Germany 
dicht, adj., dense G 
dictiret, v. a., to dictate 
Diener, m., man-servant 
diefer,-e, e8, pron., this 
dDonnern, v. n., to thunder A 
Dorf (pl. Dorfer), n., village 
dort, adv., there, at that place x 
dvet-nim., three; dreimal, three times x 


wf 





fic) dvehen, to revolve, to turn, 


— 14 —. 


+ ber dtitte, num., the third 
~ dunfel, adj., dark 
dird,prep., through, by 
dDurdaus nicht, not at all 
* dDurften (diirften), v. n., to be thirsty 
=, dozen 


€. 
~_ Ghe, conj., before (conj.) 
"Tv ebemals, adv., formerly 
1 bre, f., honor 
Gi (pl. Gier), n., egg 
eigen, adj., own 
—~ Cigenjdhaft, f., quality 
4 ~ Cigenthiimer, m., owner 
ettt;-a,;—ene 
ic) einbilden, to imagine 
einige, adj. plur., a few 
ve *€infommen, 2., income 
—leinladen (strong), v. a., to invite 
~' Ginladung, f., invitation 
+ Cinlaf, m., admission 
#£ einmal, May: , once; nod) einmal, once 
more 
» Ginnahme, f., revenue 
. einnehmen (strong), v. a., to occupy, 
/ to carry (a fortress) 
einfehen (strong), v. a., to be aware of 
Ppa adv., once (upon a a time) 
#@inwolmer-m-; tnhabitant 


eingiehen (strong), v. a., to collect 
f einzig, adj., single, only (adj. ) 
Gis, n., ice 
Gtjert-»., iron 
Gijenbahn, f., railroad 
ye Gijenbahnjug, m., railroad-train 
_»-fich efeln, to be disgusted 
~Gife, f., ell, yard 
 &ftern-(plur.), parents 
+ Gnbde,-n., end 
Englinder, m., Englishman 
+—entdecen, v. a., to discover 
_(. entlafjen (strong), v. a., to dismiss 
entmuthigen, v. a., to discourage 
Entidhadigung, f., damages 
5 i Bi Vv. a., to excuse 





Entjduldigung, f., excuse ~~ 
entiwetden (strong), v. intr., to escape 
entgiidend, adj., charming x 

et, pers. pron., he 

Erbitterung, f., animosity ~/ 
€xde, f., earth 


erfreuen, v. a., to delight A 

*€rfolg, m., success, result ~~ 

ft) ergeben (strong), to surrender 
(one’s self) 

erhalten (strong), v. a., to receive 

erheblich, -adj., considerable 

fich erinnern, to remember 

erflairen, v. a., to declare 

fich erfailten, to take.a cold 

erfranfen, vy. n., to fall sick 

erfennen, v. a., to recognize 

fich erfunbdigen, to inquire 

erlauben, v. a., to permit, to allow 

€rlaubnif,, f., permission 

ermuthigen, v.a., to encourage 

erndhren, v. a., to support 

ernten, v. a. & n., to harvest 

erobern, v. a., to conquer 

erreidjen, v. a., to obtain, to reach 

erricjten, v. a., to establish, to erect 


erringen (strong), v. a., to obtain — 


(with effort) 


fic) erjdjrecfen (strong), to be fright- 


ened, scared 
erft, adv., not till 
erftaunen, v. a., to astonish {v. a.) 
der erfte, num., the first 
erjucjen, v. a., to request 
ertwarten, v. a., to expect 
€rwartung, f., expectation 
ertveijen (strong), v. a. to prove 
erzielen, v. a., to derive 
e8, pers. pron., it 
effen (strong), v. a., to eat 


etiva8, indef. pron., something, any- 


thing 


euler, poss. pron., your; ber eure, ber : 


eurige, yours 
€uropa, Europe 


Lone TC 











. ¥. 
Fahren (strong), v. n., toride (ona 
_ vehicle) 
Fall, m., case 
~faltert (strong), v. n., to fall 
faft, particle, almost 
 faul,-adj., idle, lazy 
~ Fever-f., pen 
_ edermeffer, n. , pen-knife 
peind, m., enemy 
feinblidh,-adj., hostile 
Weld-tpl. Felder), n., field 


m., commander 
¥ 3itg, m., campaign 
Seer, n., fire 


,D., indir 
finden (strong), v. a., to find 
Flaldje, f., bottle 
x Fleif, m., diligence 
Slee, n., meat, flesh 


ed 


= fl , adj., diligent 
* (strong), v. n., to flee 
fie. m., wing 
" Fluk,-m., river 


Z jortriumen, v. a., to remove 
‘Hortidritt, m., neti 
ortjeben, v. a., to continue 

_ ftageit, v- a, to ask (a question) 

 $ranfretch,France 

| Sranzoje;-m-; Frenchman 
franyéfifd),-edj-; French (adj.) 
§rau,f.,-woman; wife 
Friulein, n-;-young lady, Miss 
reiheit, f., liberty 

ae freuen, to be glad, to rejoice 

e); Freundinf., 
friend (female) 
Geeundjajayt, f friendship 


wag frost 
N frieren (strong), v. n., to freeze 


~Feucht, f., fruit 
x frudjtbar, adj., fertile 


a Y 


— 125 


frith, adj., early 

Sriihling, m., spring 

fich fiigen, to submit \, 
fiihren, v. a., to conduct » a 
fiiv, prep.. fox 


Fixit, m., prince 
Sup, m. , foot 


G. 
Gabel, f., fork #~ 
@Gans,-f., goose 
gan3,.adj., whole 
gar nicht, eracle.) not at all a 

7 ESS 
Gartenthiir, F, REDS <_ 
yest pRGENE: (male); @éart- 
nerin, f., gardener (female) 

@Gaft, m., guest < 
@Gafthof, m., hotel 
gebent-(strong), v.a., togive 
Gebiude, n., building < 
Gebirge, n., mountain-chain 
Gebrauch, mi, use _ 
gebrauchen, v. a., touse % 
Geburtstag, m. Sesh, a 
Gefabr, f., danger 
*Gefallen, m., the favor Hk 
gefallen (strong), v. intr., to please wx 
gefallig, adj., obliging | 
der Gefangene, the. prisoner Kk 
| gegert, “prep., against 
Gegend, f., landscape, grounds >¢ 
Gegner, m., adversary 
gehen(strong), v. n., 
— tostep 
gehordjen, v. intr. w. dat., to obey a 
gehsrett;-v. intr., to belong 
gehorig, adj., vier ~~ 
Gebhiilfe, m., assistant »_ 
Gcift;m., mind > 
Geld,-n-;-money-~, 


Geldftiid, n., piece of money % 
Gelegenheit, f., occasion s< 
Gelehrfamfeit, f., scholarship 
gelehrt, adj., learned 


to go, to walk, 





St 


fitrehten, v.n.; to be afraid; v.a. » to fear _ | 














— 126 — 

»<-gelten-(strong), v. n., to be esteemed, | Halsbinde, f, cravat a 3 
to be worth; etwas gelten, to be for | halten-(strong), v.a,, to hold, to keep _ 
something —- Hand; f.; hand 

“Gemiije-n-, vegetables | Sandel) m., trade ~{- ; 
*@eneral,m., general (noun) handel, v. n., toact 4 } 
A. genejen (strong), v. n., to recover 

: (neuter) 

7™ geniigend, adj., sufficient 

YK geredjt, adj., just : 

* gern, adv., gladly, willingly Hanptitadt, f., capital 

¥- der Gejandte, the embassador_ _.. Haus_(pl. Sinfer), n. , house, 

n., business Hausthiir, f., street-door a 

Gejdhid, n., ‘ability beilen, v. a, & n., to heal | 
—{ gefdjictt, adj. -, able heivathen, v.a., to marry F 

Gejellichaft, f., company heizen, v. a. & n., to warm the rooms, x 
% Gefets, n., law to build a fire 

gejund, adj., healthy Hefd;m., hero : 

-geftern, adv., yesterday belfen (strong), v. intr. w. dat., tohelp 

geftehen (strong), v.a., toacknowledge | Hemtd, n., shirt 

< Getreide, n., grain berausfordern, v.a., to challenge > 

~£ Gewalt, f., force ; | Serbft, m., autumn ~ 

gewif, adj., certain hereinfommen, )/ i ‘ 
% ¥Gewitter, n., thunderstorm hineinfommen, f to coms m, ge6 im | 
“Gewobhubeit, f., habit hereintreten, ) | ty7: 
gewodhnlid, adt., ordinary, common hineintreten, {to step in A 
@iebel, m., top (of a roof) ‘| Seve, m.. gentleman, Mr. 
@ipfel, m., top (of a mountain etc.) Heriiberichwinemen, 
Glas, n., glass Hiniiberjhwintnen, jt Ngo is . 
glauben, v. a. & n,, to believe Herztich, adj., sincere ~/ 
Glauben, m., faith, belief heute, adv., to-day 
@liubiger, m., creditor fier;adv., dre . 
@liid, n., fortune, success, happiness | Himmel, m., heaven, sky ~. 
ofitttith, adj., happy es Hindernif, n, obstacle + 
Gold,n., gold hort adj. high 
golden;-adj., golden, gold (adj.) hoffen, v. a. & n., to hope 4— 
_ Graben, m., moat, ditch Hoffuung,—f., hope 
\ Graf; m., count hofitt, adj., polite 
{rof-adj., great, large, big hiren,,v. a., to hear 
Grund, m., reason hiibjdhy adj., pretty 
gut-adj., good, kind Hubu,n., chicken - 
Gut;-n., property Hilfe, £, help  <f 
@iite;f., kindness *Hund,-ma,,-dog . 
pa) | hungert;-v-m; to be hungry 4 
a jays: $. Gut,.m., hat Ke 
ets; ve - Ae 
ein balber (e, e8), halfa : wh 





- vy §. (vowel). 


y Shr, pers/ pr., you, to her; poss. pr., 
her, their, your; ber ihvige, hers, 
theirs; der Shrige, yours 

immer, adv., always 

in, prep,, in, into 

 Sndniftrie, ‘ industry 

Stalien, Italy 
— Staliener ( Staltdiner),m., Italian “ 


3. (consonant), \” *. a ¥ 







_Semand, somebody, ansheas 

} -4eder,c,08 (dem. pron. ), that (dem.), 
that one ~ 

- jthtpadvs now \ 

yp j., young 

hung, ad) young 


dat, m., Candidate ~-— 
, f., cannonade 
ute , ) cannon-ball 


TOITGAC 
' . LA AD 


Taufen;-v. a., to buy, to ree 
SKinfer, m., purchaser 
ti Saujmaun, m,, merchant 
Tein, no, adj. nies 
“Yeunen,-(irr. ), v. a., to know 
a Kenninif, f lnuiwladas: attainment 
Kind; n--(pl. Rinder), child 
erry — 
M Rlaiger, m., plaintiff 
LMarbheit, f., clearness 
A Miaffiter, m., classic (noun) 
Riedl. Reider), n., dress ~ 


127 





os 


| Sei, adj., small, little 


*| Ruahe»m., boy 
*Roffer,.m., trunk m4 
RKobhle, f., Leal 
Rilu; Cologne 

men (strong), v. n., to come 
Komimode, f., chest of denis h 
Rinig, m. edie 
Keortig ttt, f , queen 
fone, frei v., to beable A 
Ropficdhmer;, m., head-ache \@ 
‘Rorb,m., basket YY 

adj., sick, ill 

Krantheit, f., disease, sickness 4 . 
Kreide, f., chalk yp 
Krieg, m., war ~ 
Krone, f., crown > 
Kugel f., bullet 
eurz, adj., short, brief 


eed 


Laden, m., shop 

Laxnd-(pl. Lander), n,, country 

| Landgut, n., farm, country-seat ee 
Landhaus, n., villa A 


Jaugradj--leng | 

fange (adv. of — long, for a long X 
time 

laufen (strong), v. n., torun 

e8 ldutet, the bell rings 

febert;-v. n., to live 

Reben, n., life 

ebensmittel, n., victual, eatable 

leer, adj., uate 

Lehrevp-m., teacher 

ehxbuch, n., text-book 

Leidhe, f., corpse —f- 

leicht, adj., light, easy ~L 

e3 thut mir leid, Lam sorry 

leiden (strong), v. n. & a., to suffer >< 

lethen (strong), v. a. to Iend ~f. 

Leimrwarrd;-f., linen 


\ tevnen,v.a., to learn 


befen feleenigy, v. n. & a, to read te 
lengnen, v.a., todeny * 
Leute, pl., people, individuals 


\ literarijd, adj., literary 
Hloben, v. a., \to praise 

Rody n., (pl. \Girher), hole 
FLoffel, m., spdon 


ohn, m. & n,,\ wages 


— 128 — 

~ Yieb, adj., dear; e8 ift mir Lieb, 1am | miglith;adj., possible 7 | 
glad \ > *Qtonat, m., month | 

” Viebeu,. v. a., to love *Mornd, m.,, moon | 
fiegen ~ (trong), v. n., to lie, to be | *Mtorgen, m., morning ‘| 
(situated) Morgen, adv., to-morrow | 

finf, adj., left (side) ntitde, adj., tired | 

x ifte, f, list Mtiihe, f., trouble +. | 

| 


oth, n., half an ounce 
Lowe, m., lion ' 
Luft haben, to have a mind (desire) 
KD hee! 


~  <Machen, v. a., to make 
F Macht, £, power 
Méadchert, n., girl 
Htago,-t., ree: servant 
~~ Mailand, Milan 
ant m., want 
4 erat, m. (ph Manner), man conte: 
a husband 
Markt,m., market 
~~ Marmor, m., marble 
Dtaric, m., ake 
r Mauer, f., wall (outside) 
inelhy, indef. pron,, more 
¥ melrere, indef. pron,, several 
weitt;-my; Der meinige, meiner, mine 
DNewfeh, m., man (human being) 


Dteffer—n., knife ady. of time), , yet : 
*Qetall, n., metal’ Noth leiden, to suffer (be in distress) § 
Pinte; f., minute “uiibig, adj., useful \ 
SLanifitingen (strong), v. n., to fail at Pi i oe 
Riit,-prep., with + ©. Ly J 
 mitbringen (strong), v. a, to bring | 9b, whether, i 
along | Obft--n., fruit, 


4 Mitglied, n., (pl. er), member (person) 
+ mitnehmen {erone v. a., to take 
along 
Mittel, n., means, Piscalak 
mittheiten, vy. a., to communicate, to 
impart 





Nach, prep., | after, to ed 

Nachbar, my (male) neighbor; Nace 
bavin, f. 2 as neighbor 

nadjgeben (strong), v. intr., to yield 


Nachficht, f., er mare 
nachft, adj. & adv tA 
Maeght, f., night % 

p 


, £, needle, 
fich nae, to approach  - 
, name 
na, adj., oe \ 
neben, prep., (near) by 
Nebel, m., fog \n 
- Neffe, m. , nephew. ~¥. 
rreitt, no (particle) \ 
neu, adj., new 
night, not 
nicht etnmal, not even 7 
nits, nothing, not anything; nichts 
was, nothing ot 











ver 


Hie, _iemtals, ne 
Niederlage, f., defeat, 4. 


Obrigfeit, f., the authorities ‘ 


oder, Or ~~ 
offen, adj., open 





Offentlich, adj., p sig 2 
| dffnen, v. a., to open 
Oheim, Onfel, m., uncle 

\ 


\ 











obtte, prep., without {: regnett;-v. n., to rain 
Ordnungq, order (opposed to disorder) | vete}-adj., rich 
Hfireich (Oefterreid)), Austria ~ veidjen, v.a., tohand 4 
| Oo ‘e veidhli, adj., abundant “vf 
peti KK y. ay HT" Reihe,| f., row, series yg 
_ *Bear;zn., pair, couple © ~~ \ Reife, £., journey 
 Partei, f., party | veifert;-v. n.,to travel, to go (travelling) 
/Paffagier, m., passenger ng), v. n., to ride (on 
ieffer, m., pepper horseback) 
Bferd, n., horse Reiter, mh., horse-man 7 
Pflaume, f., plum mye repariver, v. a., to repair KR 
¥ pflaftern, v. a., to pave Repubhe, \f., sepabiic 
£ pilegen, V. a., to nurse republitaniie,-ac}--republiean 
*P$fund, D., pound Revolution;-f--revolution (uprising) 
¢ planiren, v. a., to grade, to level Sher Rhivie 
\ pliglicy, re sudden Richter, m., judge 
*) hder ridjtig, adj., correct 
% Boftamt, n. , post; flice | Ring,m., ring a 
L pradtig, di, magnificent Rod,m., coat 
| Braftbert, m., president -voth,-adj-;-red 
| Spoafibent{eHa, £, presidency Ruhm, m., glory ~. 
| Prets;m., price fich vilhmen (w. gen.), to boast (of) XK 
rene, m., Prussian (noun) Rufland, Russia 
 « Prenpen, russia ba & 
=proteftiren, v. n., to protest S. 
: aprneet m., lawsuit 7 Gade, f., thing —f. : 
3 AK | | faen, v. a. & n., tosow (scatter) A 
2. jagen,-v. a., to say, to tell | 
= via., to torment | *Salg; n. , salt 
| SGchaden, me damage * 
i. jchaden, v. intr., to injure ~ 
a., to avenge | Scharf adj., sharp 
‘ Rand (pl.| Mander), m., edge {cbeinen (strong), v. n., to shine, to 
(Rang, m., rank seem 
/ Kath, m-,| advice ~fdjten, v. a., to send 
wa payer (strong), v. a., to advise *Sdhidjal, n., fate 
ARathgeber) m., adviser Sdhieferdach, n., slate-roof < 
di , robber Schiff, n. , ship > 
ight SGildwache, f., sentinel 
ight SGchindel, f. ahingte Ne. 
tedenu, v. n., to speak, to talk Schinfen, m., ham 
7 Rtegetmagig eit, f., regularity. Sehlacht, f., battle 
in Sdlachtfeld, n., field of battle i. 
m., umbrella + {elafen-(strong), v. n., to sleep 
. a. & n,, to govern jchlagen (strong), v.a., to beat, to strike ¥~ 
Regierung, f,, government Schlecht, bad 


7 4 &4 


7 
- 3 


JA istiefen (strong), v. a., to close 
Sdief-n., (pl. Sejtsffer), toatl 
~~ Seliifel, m., key 
+ Sdmer;, m., pain 
+ e8 jdhmerzt mich, I am grieved, sorry 
abel, m., beak 
“Schnee, m., snow 
SGdneewetter, n., snow-storm 
fcjneiden-(strong), v. a., to cut 
Odneider, m., tailor 
jdjneien, v. n., to snow 
fchon, adv., already 
fcjin,.adj., beautiful, fine 
Sdinbeit,f., beauty 
fchrecflid), adj., terrible 
feyretberr (strong), v. n. & a., to write 
* Sih, m., shoe 
* m., shoemaker 
LK. Seuld, £, debt, guilt 
Sdyule,-£., school 
Sdiiler, m., scholar (pupil) 
Shu, m., shelter, protection 
fdwad), adj., weak 
fchwarz, adj., black 
fcjimer,.adj., heavy, difficult 
Schweffer, f., sister 
fdhwindlig, adj., giddy 
Schwindjudt, f., consumption. 
{dhiwiben, v. n. 546 sweat, to perspire 
Sciave; m.. gave 
Seerainber, m., pirate 
4ehen-(strong), v. a. &n., to see 
feby,adv., very, very much 
Geife,f., soap 
4ein,—his, der feinige, his (without a 
noun) 
feiu,.x.-n., to be 
feit, prep., before, since, ago; conj. 
since, ever since 
*Senat, m., senate 
fendeny=(irr.) v. a., to send 
Senf, m., mustard 
fich feben, to take a seat 
Sicherheit, f., safety 
Sieg, m., victory 
Silber, n., silver 


\.) > 


130 


: 





ee od ad 


—— 4 


—_ 3 


filbern, adj., silver, .adj.) | 

fier (strong), v. n., to sit ! 

Sibkung, f., session, meeting 

fo, adv., so, thus | 

fogleidh, adv. , presently, directly, im-— | 
mediately | 

Sohn, m., son 

folder, e, 8, such 

Soldat, m., soldier 

Sommer, m., summer | g 

jonderbar, adj., odd | 

jondern, but 

Sonne, f., sun 

Sonntag, m., sunday 

Spanien, Spain — | 

fparjam, adj., economical 

ipat, adj., late 

jpazteren fahren, to take a ride 

jpazieren gehen, to take a walk q 

Speije, f., food, eatable, (n.) 

Spiegel, m., mirror, looking-glass 

fpielen, v. n., to play : 

Sprache, f., language 

{prechen (strong), v. n., to speak 

Stadt, f., city, town 

ftabtifch, adj., city, (adj.) 

Stahl, m., steel 

ftarf, adj., strong 

Stirfe, f., strength 

Station, f., station 

Statue, f., statue 

Staub, m,, dust 

Stelle, f., place 

ftellen, v. a., to place 

Stellung, f., position 

fterben (strong) v. n., to die 

Stiefel, m., boot 

Stod, m., cane, stick 

ftéren, v. a., to disturb 

ftrafen, v. a., to punish 

Strafe, f., street 

ftrenge, adj., severe 

Strumpf, m., stocking 

Stiid, n., piece ) 

ftudiren, v. n.; to study 

Stubl, m., chair 








Stunde, f., hour . 

Styl, m., style 

fuchen, v. a., to seek, to look for 
~Summe, f., sum 

Ouppe, f., soup 


fe z. 
% Ladeln, By to blame, to censure 
*Sag,m., day; adjt Tage, a week 
4. tiiglich, adj. daily 
7 €8 tagt, the day breaks # 
Bante, f., aunt 
FTapferteit, f., valor, bravery 
FLoajdentuch, ti , pocket-handkerchief 
a , f., cup 
z anfchen, v. a., to deceive, to disap- 
point 













m., telegraph 
Yer, m., plate 


{: #haterem., dollar 
eeerwettct, n., thaw 


r ches "n., theatre 


BY, jadi, dear 
ter, n., animal, brute 
4her“Strong & irry), v. a., to do 
 Shitrtey, f., door, gate 

‘Shur, m., tower, steeple 
Atief, adj., deep 
- Diger;-m., tiger 
| Pinte; f, ink 
tity, m., table 
. ny joiner 
f.  arrahiier 
Reems. death : ¢ 
Ribtadj.., dead 
todten, v. a., to kill 
pAidtlich, adj., fatal 

, V. a, to transport 

trausig, sad; ich bin traurig, I am sad, 

iam sorry, grieved 

“(strong), v. a., to hit 
;~to separate (from one 

auiother) 

treu, adj., faithful 








-131- 


Truppen, pl. troops 


eT 





trinfen(strong), v. n. & a., to drink 
troften, v. a,, to comfort, to console 


pr loth 
u. 

libel, adj., sick in the stomach + 
debex;-prep., over, above 
iiberall, adv., everywhere © 
*itberhaufen, v. a., overwhelm “f- 
*iiberrajdjen, v.a., to surprise ¥. 
“ibevfonden;-Grr-)--v~-a., to send : 
*iibertragen (strong), y.a., toconfer ~~ 

(upon) 


r diberzeugt, adj., convinced 


Uhr, f, watch, clock 

#bemadherpm., watchmaker 
um, prep., around, about ms 
*umgeben (strong), v. a., to surround » 
umgehen (strong), v. n., tis associate ~f. 
Umlauf,m. ,revolution (tating round) 
*umvingen, to. surround (ina circle) >< 
Umvif, m., sketch > 
uuangenehin, adj., unpleasant 
unartig,adj., naughty | 
umbedeutend, adj., inconsiderable 
unbegriindet, adj., unfounded »£ 

nd, conj., and 
Unfall, m., accident, misfortune 


e | 

ungliidlich, adj., unhappy, unfortungte 

Unordnung, f., disorder 

Unvecht, n., wrong 

unvridjtig, adj., incorrect 

unfer, our; der unfrige, ours - 

unter, prep., under, below, beneath 

untergehen (strong), v. n., to set (of 
the sun etc.) 

*fich untethalten (strong), to converse 

Unterhaltung, f., conversation 

Unternehinung, f., enterprise 

*unterricjten, v. a., to instruct, to in- 
form 

Unterricht nehmen, to take lessons 

*unterftiiben, v. a., to support 

untreu, adj., faithless 


~ 


autvorfidtig, adj., incautious 
univahr, adj., untrue 
Unwiffenbeit, f., ignorance 
unwohl, adj., unwell- 
unjzuliffig, adj., inadmissible 
Urjace, f., cause - 


B. 


<= Bater, m., father 
*Saterland, n., one’s own country, 
fatherland 
\ fich verbeugen, to bow (down) 
Verbreden, n., crime 
PVerdacht, m., suspicion 
“L verdienen, v. a., to deserve 
ef BVerdienft, n., merit 
—pverdrieflich, vexed, irritated 
8 verdrieft mich, 1am vexed, irritated 
verdorren, v. n., to dry up 
verfolgen, v. a. to pursue © 
vergeblich,adv., in vain 
ergeffe (strong), v.a., to forget 
x» fd vergletden (stroug), to make a 
compromise 
x vergniigt, adj., glad 
_+~ Verguiigen, n., pleasure 
vergrofern, v. a., to increase 
erbhaften, v. a., ‘6 arrest 
erfaufen, v. a., to sell 
erfennen, v. a., to.misjudge 
verlangen, v. a., to demand 
Serlangen, n., demand 
verlafjen (strong), v. a., to leave, quit, 
desert . 
verlaumbden, v. a., to slander 
verlejen (strong), v.a., to read 
verlesen, v..a., to hurt 
verlieren (strong), v. a., to lose 
verntiethen, v. a., to rent 
Permigen, n., property 
vermuthen, v. a., to presume 
vernidten, v. a., to annihilate 
verpflidjten, v. a., to pledge 
verrathen (strong), v. a., to betray 
fic) verjammeli, to assemble (¥. n,) 
eee Vv. a,, to miss 


5 


132. — 


: 





Perfhangung, f., entenchment 

ver|djliefen (strong), v. a, tolochk 

verfdjonern, v. a., to embellish 

verichwinden (etrong), v. n., to die] 
appear 

verjehen (strong), v.a., to provide - 

verficjern (v. a.), to assure : 

verfinfen (strong), v.n., to sink 

verforgen, v. a., to supply | 

verfpredjen (strong), v. a., to pro- 
mise ; 

Verjpreden, n., | 

Verjpredhung, f., 

Verftirfung, f., reinforcement 

verftehen (strong), a., to un- 
derstand 

*Verjud, m., attempt 

verjucjen, v. a., to attempt, to endeay- 
or, to try ; 

vertheidigen, v. a,, to defend 

vertreten (strong), v. a., to represent 

verurjaden, v. a., to cause | 

verurthejlen, v. a., to condemn 

Verurtheilung, f., condemnation 

verwalten, v. a., tomanage, to ad- 
minister ‘ 

Verwaltung, f., administration 

verwideln, v. a,, to implicate 

veriwunden, Vv. a,, to wound 

Vetter, m., cousin (male) 

Vieh, n., cattle 

viel, much; viele, many 

vielleidjt, perhaps 

vier, four; viermal, four times; viectel, | 
a quarter; Der vierte, the fourth 

Vogel, m., bird : 

Volk, n., the people (nation) 

voll, adj., full 

vollenden, v. a., to finish 

vollig, adv., fully 

von, prep., of, from, by 

yor, prep., before, ago 

vorberetten, v.a,, to prepare 

vorladen (strong), v.a., tosummon 

vorlegen, v. a, tosubmit (place be 
fore) 


promise 








Porlejung, f., lecture 
Sorrath, m., stock 
Borjdjlag, m., proposition 
‘porfidjtig, adj., cautious 
der Vorfikende, chairman 
voriibergehen (strong), v. n., to pass 
porziehen (strong), v. a., to et 
Vew Ochefien - | we VL 0 Cut 
is 
4 Wadjam, adj., watchful 
_ wearhjerr-{strong);-v- n., to grow 
agen, m., carriage 
%. (fich) wagen, to venture 
Mahl, f., election, choice 
4 Wwablen, v. a., to elect, to choose 
» Wahler, m., voter 
+4 wihnen, v. a., to suppose (wrongly) 
_ s0mhr, adj., feus 
. ae prep., during; conj. while 







KX Wand, f., wall (inside) 

— any hutovios. adv., when? 
warm,adj., warm 

sv a., to warm 

arten, Vv. a., & wait 

‘yearmmtadv., why~ 

> aang pron., ata 

 « * Belfer, n., water 

‘Werhjel, m., note (bill of exchange) 

| Weg;-m-, way, road 

“Wegent, prep., on account of 

ch weigern, to refuse (v. n.) 











| oeit~conj., because 
Wei ine 
m., vine-yard 
Weift;-adj., white | 
ferije--adj., wise 
Weisheit,f., wisdom 
eit, adj., far 


weldjer, which, who, that 
Wenig, little, few; weniger, less (fewer) 
Wer, interr. pron., who? 


133 





Wetter, n., weather 





—— 


wie, interr. adv., how ? der wie vielfte, 
what day of the month, what (in 
order) ? 

*widerfabren (strong), v. intr., to 
befall 


. *fich widerjeben, to resist, to oppose 


wieder, adv., again 


Ewiederfehen (strong), v. a, to see 


again 

wiffen, irr. v. a., to know 

wo, where 

Woe, f., week 

wohl, adv., well 

wobhlfeil, adj., cheap 

wohnen, v. n., to dwell, to live, 
reside 

Wohnung, f., residence 

*Wort (pl. either Worte or Wirter), 
n., word 

Wrundarzt, m., surgeon 

Wiunbde, f., wound 

fic) wundern, to wonder 

Wunjd, nxr., wish, desire 

wiinjdjen, v. a., to wish, to desire 

Wurm, m. (pl. Wiirmer), worm 


3. 


Zabl, f., number A 
zablen, v. a. & n., to pay = 
zahlen, v. a., to number 
th 
getchnent, . a. &n., to draw (make a ~ 
draft) 


Reit,-£., time 
_| Seitung, f., newspaper 


zerftéren, v.a., to destroy 
Sanmeryn., room 
Zimmermann, m., carpenter 
Zoll, m., inch 
der Rollbeamte, 
officer®” “~ 
“gu, prep., to; adv. too 


Buder;m.; sugar 
a adj., accidental * 


~ P 


the custom-house- 


gufriehen, adj., contented, satisfied, 
pleased 
/S3ufubr, f., supply, provisions 
sugeben (strong), vy. a., to concede 
gubiren, v. a., to listen to 
 3umacen, v. a., to shut 
4uriid-adv., back 
< 3uviidfebren, v. n,, to return 
guriidlaffen (strong), to leave behind 
guriidretfen, v. n., to go (travel), 
back © 


134 





—— | 


siriidydjicten,-v. a., to send back 
fich_zuriidziehen (strong), to with- 


draw, to retreat 
sujamumen, adv., together 
zuftellen, v. a., to deliver 


Zuftimmung, f., approbation, ee . 


Zwed, m.. purpose 

skaei, two; “Der 3iveite, the second 
ziweifelhaft, adj., doubtful 
ziveifeln, v. n., to doubt 


gweimal, twice 








o 


o- (5 — 


| READING EXERCISES. 
jes The words not suggested in the Notes are found in the Vocabulary. 


‘1. Die Aexte. (The Axes.) 
Die UAxt eines armen Bimunermanns war? in einen Strom? ge- 
falien®, Gr flehtes den Flufgott> ant, jie ihm wieder zu bringens. 
Da’ ftiegs der Gott aufs und brachte eine goldene Art heraufr. , Das 


tft die meinige nicht," {prac der Simmermann, Der Flupgott 


6 in die Tiefe2, und fone mit einer filbernen WUxrt wieder her- 

3, , Auch dieje gehirt mir nichts, “ fagte der Urme. Und wieder 
heefant der Gott, und brachte eine Art von Cifen mit hdlzernem 
Stieles aus der Tiefe. ,DHas ift die meine,” refs froh der Bint 
merinann aus». ,, Fh fehe, du bijt zwar arnt, aber wahrhaft” und 


ebrlichs,” verfebtes der Gott. ,Nimm- alle dret Werte zur Beloh- 


nung?!“ Gin unehrlichers Menfdh, der von diefem Vorfalle» gehirt 


hatte, wollte verjuchen, ob das Gli iht ebenfo begiinftigen 


werdess, und Lief feine UArt vorfatlidj> in den FlugR fallen. Gr jah 
in der That den Flufgott auffteigen, nacjdem* er ihn angefleht hatte, 


_ thm die AUxt wieder gu bringen. Der Gott hielts eine goldene Art in 
der Hand und fragte ihn, ob e8 die feinige fet. Ga, das ijt die mei- 


nige,” rief der Betvriiger? entzitclt aus, feine Hand ausftredendé. 


 pNichtswiirdiger?!" rief der Gott mit zorniger® Stimme. ,Glaubjt - 


du, du finnteft™ denjenigen taufdhen, der in dein innerftes Herz 
blidts? Zur Strafe folljt du nun auch? dasjenige® verlieren, 
wass bisher dein Cigenthum®> wars,” 

laxe. river. %pluperf. of fallen, I, 99, a. ‘to implore, I, 68. ‘river-god. ‘to 


return, bring back. ‘redundant, II, 72. Simp. of auffteigen, to arise. “heraufbringen, 


to bring up I, 99, 4. .'imperf. of fpreden. to dive, to go down. *the deep. 
Bhervorfommen, to come up. Maud—nidt, neither, nor. II, 77,1. ‘imperf. of 
berfinfen. ‘7wooden. ‘8handle. auérufen, to exclaim. I, 72,4; IL, 68. ?!re- 
dundant, if sentences with aber follow. ~truthful. “honest. *4toreply. *imperat. 
of nefmen, to take. instead of gu der, fora, asa, “reward. “dishonest. *9in- 


cident, 27, 58,3. 311, 74899. 3%in the same manner, IJ, 72,4. future sub- 


junctive (of indirect statement II, 87, 2, note) of besiinitigen, to favor. See II, 39, 


note. imperf. of Iaffen, to let. on purpose. %indeed. after, conjunction. 


8imperf. of halten. impostor. with delight, delighted. ‘to stretch out. 
“wretch, miscreant. “angry. ‘voice. I, 49, 62; IJ, 88,.note. ‘inmost. 
‘heart. 48to look. 4for your punishment. “shall. ‘now. “even. “I, 27, Obs, 
*4till now, hitherto, ‘your own. I, 47, - 


= G86 = 


2. Gin Braver Baer. (A noble Peasant.) 

Beit einer Ueberjchwemmung? der tid? wurde: die Briices von 
Verona durch die Gewalt der Flute hinmeggeriffens. Wber noch’ ftands 
einer? der mittleren? Bogen", auf dem fid> ein Haus befand», wel- — 
hes von dem Zolleinnehmer® mit fener Families bewohnt wurde. 
Has anvs Ufer™ verjammelter Volk fonnte deutlich das Hiilfe- 
gefchrei® der ungliiclichen Familie hiren. Der Graf von. Spolve- 
rini, der fich mitten im Gedrange befand, verjprach?’ demjenigen, 
der die arme Familie mittelfts eines Bootes vom fichern Unter- — 
gage erretten* witrdes, eine Belohnungs von 500 Chalern. ber 
eS fand fid) Niemand, der Yeuth genugs gehabt hatte, jein Yeben 
Dem wiithenden® Strome® anzuvertrauen®. Dat fam? ein junger 
Bauers herbei#, dem die Eritifdhe+ Lage* de$ Zolleinnehmers und 
jeiner Familie von den Umftehenden* mitgetheilt wurde. Obne Zeit- 
verluft fprangs er in einen Rahn, und mit groger Anftrengung ge- 
fang e8 ifm, das Haus zu erreiden. Cr warf* den Bewohnern® 
eit Geils zu, mittelft dejjen fte fic in den Kahn herablteRen*, 
Hieraufss brachte er, nach einem muthigens Rampfe* mit den Cle 
menten™, die Familie unbejdhadigt® an” das ficjeres Ufer. ls nun 
der Graf ihm die Belohnung einhandigen wollte, die er fo wohl ver- 
Dient® hatte, weigerte er fich, fie anjunehimen, und jagte: Sch ver 
faufe mein Leben nicht”, noch bedarf» id) Cures Geldes, da meiner — 
Hande Arbeit mich und die Wreinigen” ernahri. Gebt Wlles der are — 
men Familie, die Gott durd) mic) gerettet Hat, und die aller ihrer 
Habe beraubt ijt.” 

during. *inundation. %Adige. ‘pass. imperf. of binwegreifen, to carry away. — 
Spridge. ‘current. ‘still. Simperf. of fteben, to stand (was left), °%I, 48; II, 26. — 
middle. Uarch. 121, 25. 'fid befinden, to be, to stand. I, 74; Obs. 3. toll-— 
gatherer. ‘family. ‘to inhabit. 151,93. shore. to gather, (past part.) See — 
I, 105, Obs. 3. 711, 58,3.. distinctly. *shrieksfor help. distressed. in the 
midst of, among. crowd. ‘imperf. of verfpreden. *by means of. %sure. 30de- — 
struction. *!to save. *conditional, with the force of a subjunctive of indirect state- — 
ment. See II,87 note 4; II,88 note 6. reward. “redundant, I,87, Obs. 1. 91, 23. 
enough. 711, 89,6. fierce. *%current. ‘entrust, see II, 60, 2. “ladverb of — 
time, at.this moment, II, 72,2. “berbeifommen, to come along. “peasant. 4cri- — 
tical. “situation. bystander, spectator. 47loss of time. ‘4Simperf. of fpringem, — 
to jump. “boat, skiff. ‘*imperf. of gelingen, to succeed in; in German used 
*mpersonally (it succeeded to him). “imperf. of guwerfen, to, throw (something to — 
somebody). inhabitant. “rope. genitive of the relative ber, see II, 16, Rem. 
2; Il, 61. imperf. of fic} berablaffen, to let one’s self down, to descend, see I, 99, 


t. 6then, afterwards, thereupon. ‘imperf. of bringen, to bring, convey, I, 58. 
Svigorous,* struggle. ag Element, the element. ‘“lunharmed. I, 93, Obs. 1, 


POE Pete 


tie", Ps gS = i ee wth be F 


Bibs souls 


ee a aa ee — 


—_s — 












We tae 


2.4. secure. “redundant. “einhdnbigen wollen, to be about to hand, i. e. to 
tender. ®to earn. I, 19, Obs. 3. nor. pres. of bebiirvfen (I, 107), to be in 
need, construed with the genitive, II, 78, a. my family, Il, 25,3. “property. 
pres, pass, of berauben, to deprive, See II, 51, § 75. 


3. Gin Gfterveihifher Baner. (An Austrian Peasant.) 
Mls die Franzofen im Gahre 1809 auf Wien vorriidtens, mar- 
jdirte? eines Whends der Vortrabe einer franzdjtjden Truppenabthet- 
Tung? durch ein am der Heerfirafe7 belegenes Hfterreidhifdjes Oorf. Der 
Befehlshabers, der beabfichtigte, wahrend der Macht einen widhtigens 
— Plane gegen den Feind auszufithren, forderte einen Bauer auf", der 
“Abtheilung» als Wegweifers zu dienen*. WAber der Bauer lehnter 
este abs, fich7 au einent foldjen Wimtes herzugeben. 1S der Officier - 
‘Jeine Uufforderung dringender wiederholte, beharrte? der Bauer 
entidhieden auf feiner Weigerungz. Der Officier beftiirmte ihn mit 
Verfprechungen und bot ihm zulekt” einen fchweren Beutel Goldes 
als Belohming. Uber Wiles war vergeblich. Jngwifchen2 fam dte- 
jenige Truppenabtheiling an, 31 welcher der Vortrab gehirte, und der 
General war dufperft aufgebracdht, dak die Truppen fiche nicht don 
Tange auf dem Marjdje befinden=. Als er erfuhr, daR der ecingige, 
deS Weges fundige™ Mann fich nicht bewegen* lajfe, als Wegwerjer 
git dienen, befahl er, den Bauer vorzufithrenss. ,,Cntweder™," rief* er 
ihm ju, ,zeig{t" du uns ben rechten Weg, oder ich Laffe* dich erjdjie- 
fens!“ — ,Sehr wohl!” erwiedertes der Bauer, ,in diefem Fale 
werde ich als rechtfchaffener Bitrgers fterben und braude nicht Lan- 
dDeSverriither? zu werden.” Dicfe Feftigheit* erfiilltes den General 
“mit Bewunderung». - Die Hand des Mtannes ergreifend#, fprac) er: 
wSehe heim, wacerer Mann! Joh werde wohl zufehen niiffen, 
“Wie ich ohne Fiihrer” ausfommens Fann.“ 
1Vienna: -2to advance. 3to march. - 4evening, IJ, 79, a. 5advanced guard. 
force. an der Heerftrafe belegen, on the road-side. ‘S%commander. ‘important. 
plan. “to order. ‘detachment. guide. “to serve. “to decline. ‘redundant. 
Mto lend himself. ‘office. request. %pringend, urgent, I]. 69, Rem. 2. 2!to repeat. 
*topersist. 2positively. *4refusal. %tooverwhelm. *imperf. of bieten, to offer. "at 
last. purse. reward. **meanwhile. lirritated, angry. °°to be. redundant. 
*“imperf. of erfahren, to learn. *funbdig, with genitive, acquainted with. %*to induce. 
Bee Ii, 81 § 103, b. 3%subjunctive of indirect statement. II, 37. %8to bring up. 
either. “%imperf. of rufen (he said to him). ‘4!toshow. “to have. 4 to shoot 
qi, 81, c). “toreply. “honest. ‘citizen.’ 47traitor. ‘firmness. ‘to fill. °ad- 
miration. ‘Ito seize. ‘2home. brave, excellent. ‘redundant. to look out. 


*the auxiliary id fann is here used redundantly, a construction with the infinitve 
being employed in English. ‘’guide. Sto get along, to do. 


— 138 — 


4. Herzog Alba in Budolftadt. (Duke Alba in Rudolstadt.) 
Wl Kaijer Karl der Fiinfte im Gahre 1547 auf feinem Mtarfdh 
nad) Sranferr dard Thiiringen? fam, erlangtes die verwittwetes 
@Grifin Catharina von Schwarzburg-RMudolftadt vom Rafer einen 
Schubbriefe fitr ihre Unterthanen’. WS bald? daraufs der faiferlides 
General, Herzog" von Alba, mit feinen jpanifcen™ Truppen fich der 
Stadt Rudolftadt naherte, bat er fiche bets der Grafin auf ein Friih- 
ftitces 311 Gaft2. Cine fo befcheidene Bitters, an der Spiker” eines 
Heeres gethan*, fonnte nicht wohl abgefdlagen’ werden. Cin freund= 
licher”? Empfang™ und eine gut befebte? Tafel erwartete* den Her= 
30g auf dent Schlojje. Raum hatte man fich gefjebt, als ein Gilbote?? 
die Grafin aus dem Speifejaaters rief™. © ward ihr gemelDdet, 
daR fpanijce Soldaten in cinigen Dirfern Gewaltthitigfeiten ver- 
ibis? und den Bauern* das Vieh* weggetrieben** hitten. Catharina, 
aufs duferftes? erttritftets, befahl ihrer ganze Dienerjdhaft, fich 
jchleunigit® und insgeheim zu bewaffnen® und die SchloRpfortens gu 
. verfdjlieBen. WS fie nad) dem Speifejaale zuvitcigefehrt war, bee 
Flagtes+ fie fic) itber* das, mags fich zugetragen*, und daritber, dak* 
inan feine Miichjichts auf den faiferlicen Schubbrief genommen® 
habe. Der Herzog erwiederte™ lachend, dak dies Kriegsgebranchs | 
jei4f und DdaR dergleichen® fleines Unfalless auf dent Wtarfche unver=— 
teidlich” waren. ,ODas wollen wir eben," antwortete die Grafin, 
und verlieg* das Zimmer, das fich in wenigen WAugenblicen mit Bee | 
waffneten fitllte, die fic) mit gezogenen® Schwertern® ehrerbietight™ | 
hinters+ den Stiihlen der Gajte aufftelltens, Der Herzog veraindertere 
die Farbe, Whgelchnittens von der Wrmee, blieh™ thm nichts iibrigs, 
alg” die beleidigte Dame, auf welde Bedingungen eS auch fet, zu 
verfohnen™. Heinrid) von Braunfdhweig, einer der Begleiter™ des 
Herz0g8, fapte fich* zuerft= und brach* in ein” lautes Geltchter® 
aus, Gr ergriff’ den verniinftigen®: Wusmeg’, den ganzen Bore 
gang? ins Licherliche gu ziehen®, indem® er der Gréfin itber ihre 
Sorgfalt fitr ihre Unterthanen eine Lobrede hielt. Bulebts 
vermodhte* er den Herzog, auf der Steller den Befehl» zu geben, das 
geftohlene Vieh den Cigenthitmern jzuriichzuftellens. Gobald* die 
Grifin jich itberzeugt™ hatte, dag der Befehl ausgefiihrt werden 
wiirde, danfte fie ihren Gaften aufs verbindlichfte, und te ii 
verabjchiedetens” fiche” mit groRer Hiflichfeitss. 
_ 1Franconia. Thuringia. “*imperf. of fommen, to come, to pass. ‘to obtain, 


ge oP a 











—— SG — 


‘twidowed. ‘letters of protection. ‘subject (weak decl.), ‘later. °%imperial. 
Wduke. "Spanish. lfidh gu Gaft bitten, to invite one’s self. ‘at the residence. 
Mjunch. modest. ‘request. atthe head. ‘made. torefuse. *cordial 
“reception. “furnished. “table. *4to await. scarcely. *61, 54, Obs. *’express 
messenger. dining hall. imperf. of rufen, to call. I, 77, foot-note. %!to 
report. *acts of violence. “to commit. %dative after verbs of taking away, II, 
78, b; tobetranslated as if a genitive dependent on Biehb. cattle. *% hinwegtreiben, 
to carry away. ‘extremely. 3*provoked. **body of servants. “rapidly. 4!in secret. 
to arm. “gates of the castle. 44to complain. “of. 41,26. 27. 4‘to transpire. Supply 
-the. auxiliary hatte. Sof the fact that. *Rtitcfidt nebmen auf, to pay regard to. sub- 
junct. of indirect statement, II, 88, 6, b (foot-note). *!to reply. to laugh. “us- 
age ofwar. lI, 8,6, a (foot-note). “such. “petty annoyances. *7unayoidable. 
ASimperf. of verlaffen. “*moments (masc). armed men II, 77,§101,1.. “to fill, I. 
83, Obs. I; Il, 81,a. “drawn swords. “most respectfully. “behind. “to arrange, 
draw up. “change. “color. past part. of abjdmeiden. ‘was left. II, 66, 5. 
“whatsoever, II, 67, a; 89; 7. -@to reconcile. “companion. “to compose one’s 
self. 7first. 7imperf. of ausbreden, to burst (out). “redundant. ®loud. “laughter. 
®resorted to. SIsensible. ®expedient. “incident. ®4to turn into ridicule. ®°par- 
ticipial construction in English. *solicitude. ‘7 to eulogize. ®at last. “vermigen, 
to induce, I, 108; II, 56. on the spot. order. 9%to return, to restore. ‘as 
soon as, Ii, 66, 4. %iiberzeugen, to convince, to satisfy. in the most obliging 
manner, JI, 69, c.. latter. %7to take leave. politeness, courtesy. 


| 5. Der GdefKuabe. (The Page.) 
* Gin Gdelfrabe hatte im Vorzimmer: Friedrich des Grofen die 
MNachtwacher. Der Konig, der nicht jehlafen fonnte, flingeltes, und 
‘ging!, Da der Knabe nicht erfdjtens, felbjt > ins Vorzimmer. Gr fand" 
Den Gitngling® in tiefem Schlafc vor einem Tijche fiend, auf wel- 
Hem ett angefangener Brief lage. Der Konig nahm™ den Brief, der 
aljor Lautetes: tebe Miutter! Dies ijt mum fchon™ die dvritte 
Nacht, daR ich fitr die anderen Cdelfnaben die Nachtwache thue; aber 
ich fann das Wadhen beinahe* nichts mehr aushaltew. Gndefferws 
Habe ich hierdurd) jeit dret Wodhen zehu Thaler verdient™, welche td) 
Dir™ zur Erquicung” ti deiner traurigen Lage fertdbe —.“ Diefe 
findlicjes Liebe gefiel dent Rinig, und er fteckte> dem2? Rnaber cine 
Rolless Goldjtiices> in die Tafche, Diefer crricth? bei feinem Cr 
wachens fogleid), woher das Geld gefomumen fei. Cr warfs fic) dems 
Konig, fobald* diejer ant nadhften Morgen aufgeftanden war”, zu Fit- 
Kem, und bate wegen feiner Nachlaffigteit um VBerzeihung#. Der Ks- 
nig aber pries die findlidje Liebe feines Cdelfuaben, und beobadhtetes 
Hx vow da an niher®, wodurd) die gute Meimmig, die cr vow ihnt 
Kegtess, vollfonrmen bejtitigt wurde. Diefer Knabe ward im feinen fpia- 
teren Lebengjahren dur) das VBertrauen™ feines Monard)n? zu ctner 
der hichjten* und.verantwortlic)jten+ Stellungen im Staate® berufen. 


140 — 


‘antichamber. *night-watch. “to ring the bell. ‘imperf. of gehen. ‘imperf. of — 


erfdeinen, to appear. ‘I, 83, Obs. 2. 7imperf. of finden. ‘lad, youth. ‘sleep. 
loimperf. of fiegen. “imperf. of nebmen, to take. Jas follows. to read (v. n.). 
Mredundant, ‘watching. “hardly any longer. ‘to endure. ‘however. "by 


it (this), II, 72,2. to earn. “for your relief. distress. “filial. “love, tender- 


ness, *imperf. of gefallen. to put. “possessive dative, 1], 80, b, a. *Sroil. 
*goldpieces, 1,38. pocket. %!the latter (this one), II, 77,1. *imperf. of er 
tathen, to guess. *II, C2 Rem. 2, 3): when he awoke (at hisawakening). 34whence. 
2°], 87, 2 (foot-note), imp. of wmerfen, to throw. 3’possessive dative. 3%as soon 
as. ®°pluperf. of auffteben. 4°to be connected with warf fig. ‘!imperf. of bitten; um 
Verzeihung bitten, to ask pardon. “imperf. of preifen, to praise, to commend. “to 
observe. ‘von da an, since that time. “more closely. ‘4 whereby. ‘opinion. 
held, had. “fully. “life, years of life. ‘confidence. 5’monarch (weak decl., I, 
5, §11, 3). 1,22. “verantwortlid, responsible. state. %berufen, to call. 


- 6. SoffiGReit. (Civility.) 
Jr der Nahe cines italidnijdjen? Oorfs lebte cin Bauer, der einen 


Sohn, Namens Felix, hatte. DOure) die Armuth+ feiner Cltern wars — 


Diejfer Knabe gensthigts, feinen Unterhalts durd) Schweinehiiten? zu 
verdienens. Felix war immer guvorfonmunend® und hoflic) gegen See 
Derimann; die andern Runaben tm Oorfe aber waren unfeeundlicd und 
ro, GCines Tages" fam cin Mtond, der einen Wegweijer™ bee 
gehrtes, ing Dorf. Wahrend die andern Knaben denjelben mit 
Rohheits behandelten, erbot7 jid) Felix aufs freundlichftes zum Weg- 
weijer. Auf dem Wege bemerfte der Monch, day Feliz Talent hatte, 


und eS gelang® ifm fpater, dem Knaben Aufnahme in fein Klofters 


zu verjdjaffen. Hier ftudirte Felix aufs fleigigite, und, obwobhl* er 
bald einer der gelehrtejten von allen Mtouchen wurde, blich er den- 


nods demiithige, Hoflid) und zuvorfommend. Dicje Cigenfdjaften — 
madhten?’ ih Wen, die thn fanntens, lieb2? und werth, und fo fam — 


e&, dag cr bald gu hohen Stellungen befordert? ward. Gr wurde — 
BDijdhof», Cardinal, und, als der Papft* ftarb, ward er am 24. April — 
1585 einjtimmig® zum Bapjt ermahlt. Er regierte unter dem Naz 
met Sixtus der yiinfte, und ¢8 ijt befannt, dag er gu dex gropten — 


aller Bapfte gehorte. 


Inear. “Italian. *by name. ‘poverty. ‘imperf. pass. of niétbigen, to compel. 
See I, 77, Obs. 2. ‘to earn his living. “by tending a herd of swine. 1, 105. Soblig- 
ing. ‘%impolite. rude. "one day, I1,5,a. monk. "guide. ‘to ask for. 


Mperfelbe has often the force of he. ‘-rudeness. '‘imperf. of erbieten. “in the — 
gentlest manner. “he succeeded ia. *admission. *!convent. *to procure,.to ob- — 
tain. 2], 162. %imperf. of bleiSen. 21,102, Obs. 2. *humble. “Sieh und werth z 


maden, to endear, I, 58, Obs.2. “to promote. bishop (II, 74, 75, §'99, 3). 


*Ipope. *imperf. of fterben.. “unanimously. *to elect, to choose, LI, 73, ls. 














-AHN'S METHOD 


OF LEARNING THE 


GERMAN LANGUAGE. 


REVISED 


BY 


GUSTAVUS FISCHER. 


SECOND (THEORETICAL) ‘COURSE. | 


FourtH EDITION. 


NEW YORK: 


HK. Steiger. 


1872. 


eR 
é 


' 


- 
‘ 
- 
s s 
- 
or . - - ue 
é : é ’ * 
. = 7 * 
- SS * . - z ; 
> ; 
- 
i . J é > "% 
a ‘ j * Nd - . 
* i b; » e - 
fl ~ 7 ~ 
b . 
* 4 i 
x ¥ # é 
. . S 2 : 
aoe 
- 
- 


Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, by 
HE. Steiger, 
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


E. Srevese. New Your, st my 
Printer and Electrotyper, it” a ee 


er e® 5 


re ey 











CHAPTER I. 
PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 


§ 1. The German Language is composed of eight parts of 
speech. They are: the Article, the Noun or Substantive, the 
Adjective, the Pronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the Preposi- 
 tion,and the Conjunction. 


§ 2. There are in German two numbers: the Singular and 
the Plural; three genders: the Masculine, the Feminine, and 
the Neuter; four cases: the Nominative, the / Genitive, the 
Dative, and ‘the Accusative. * 


OF THE ARTICLE. 
§ 3. I. Declension of the definite Article. 


Singular. Plural 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. for all genders, ce 
Nom, der, die, das, die the 
Gen. —de8, der, des, der, of the 
Dat. dem, der, dent, den, to the 
Acc. den, Die, das, die, the, 


§ 4. IL. Declension of the indefinite Article: 


Nom. itt, eine, eit, a 
Gen. eines, etter, eile’, of a 
Dat. einem, einer, einent, to a 


Acc,  eitteit, eile, ein, a 





* The nominative answers to the English nominative case, the accusa- 
tive to the objective case without preposition, and the genitive to the pos- 
sessive case, or to the objective case with ef. The dative generally answers 
to the objective with fo. 


3 


YS 


aon: a eee 


CHAPTER II. 


NOUNS (SUBSTANTIVES). 
l. GENDER, 

§ 5. Nouns denoting PERSONS have a NATURAL gender, and 
are masculine or feminine according to their sex: der Ytann, 
the man; die Frau, the woman; der Schneider, the tailor. There 
is no common gender in German.* 

Exceprions.—Das Weib, the woman (wife); das Ptidden, the girl; das 
. eevautein, the young lady, and all other diminutives in den and [ein (as: dag 

Shulein, the little son); da8 Gemabhl, husband or wife; die Scildwade, 
he sentinel; die Waije, the orphan (both male and female); der-DPtiindel, 
‘the ward (male and female); Sind (child) is always neuter, 

§ 6. Designations of persons according to their occupa- 
tions and other qualities, with but few exceptions, are originally 
masculine, referring to the male sex only. From these nouns 
those designating females are derived by attaching to them the 
ending in: Graf (count), Grajin (countess); Rinig (king), Roni- 
gin (queen); Schneider (tailor), Sdhueiderin (dressmaker). The 
radical vowel of these derivatives in i is almost always softened. 


ReMArK,—This method of derivation applies also to some nouns denoting _ 


BRUTES: der Wolf (wolf), die Wilfin (she-wolf). 


§ 7. Nouns denoting THINGS, concrete or abstract, belong — 


J Sto all three genders: Der lei, the diligence; die Ubr, the watch; 


der Miuth, the courage; die Kunjt, the art; das Weer, the sea. 


§ 8. Of DERIVATIVE nouns those with the endings et, heit, 
feit, fdaft and ung are without exception FEMININE: die Sdmeidhe- 


fei (flattery), die Freiheit (liberty), die Vtapigfeit (temiperange), 


bie Freundjchaft (friendship), die Hoffnung (hope). 


§ 9. The DIMINUTIVES (with the endings den and fein) are 


without exception NEUTER: da3 Sofhulein or “Sahndjen (the little 


son); das Rniblein (the little boy). Nouns in thumare likewise 
NEUTER, except der Srrthum (the mistake); der Wetdhthunt 


(wealth).. 


* The noun der Pathe, the pion! die Pathe, the god-daughter may be 
considered as an exception. 





ee ee 


_ The gender of these nouns, some derivatives excepted, cannot — 
be determined by general rules, but must be learned by practice 
' and the lexicon. 


as « 


ee ik oer Be 


» “as: ue - oP a ol ry 





a la 


, — 5 = 


Remarks.—1. Names of countries, cities and villages are NEUTER (a very 
few excepted). 

2. Compound nouns take the gender of their last component, a few 
compounds of the masculine Qtuth excepted: die Armuth, poverty; die 
Grofmuth, generosity; die Sanftmuth, meekness, and a few others. 

3, Some nouns have two genders, but with different meanings: 


Der Band, the volume; das Band, the ribbon; 
der Erbe, the heir; bas Erbe, the inheritance; 
der Schild, the shield; das Schild, the sign (of an inn); 
der Thor, the fool; bas Thor, the gate; 
der Verdienft, the earnings; das Verdtenft, merit; 
der Gee, the lake; Die See, the sea; 
ber Heide, the heathen; die Heide, the heath. Es 


Re aniatatconin 
— 
li, DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
§ 10, There are two declensions, the WEAK and the sTRONG. 


I, WEAK DECLENSION. 


j 
/ aA 
' §11. To the weak declension belong: 1. all masculine 
/ nouns ending ine (except der Rafe), as: der Mnabe (the boy), 
_ der Gebiilfe (the assistant), der Preufe (the Prussian); 2. several 
* masculine nouns which have dropped their former ending e;* 
8. most appellations of males taken from foreign languages, 
provided they have their accent on their ultima,+ as: der 
2yrann (the tyrant); der Lheolog (the theologian); der Pring 
_ (the prince); der Student (the student); 4. most FEMININE 
nouns (for exceptions see § 13. REM. 2), which however are in- 
declinable in the singular number: die Frau (the woman); die 
Schinheit (the beauty). 
§ 12. The weak declension takes in all cases of the sin- 
gular (except in the nominative) and of the plural the ending 
en, and is inflected after the following scheme: 





* ‘The most important of these nouns are: Held (hero), Graf (count), Fiirft 
tee Hirt (herdsman), Mtenfd) (man), Herr (gentleman), Thor and Parr 
fool), Bir (bear), Odjs or Odhfe (ox). ‘To these must be added some few 
national nouns in r, as Ungar (Hungarian), Baier (Bavarian). Many of the 
es have retained their ending e in popular dialects. and often 
in poetry. 
+ Most of these nouns likewise added formerly the ending e, and some 
The he so in poetry and popular dialects, as: ber Syranne (in Schiller), der 
ologe. 


i Fae 


Masculines. i. oe 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom, Der Knabe, the boy Nom. die Rnabert, the boys 
Gen. de3 Kuaben, of the boy (the Gen. der sae of the boys (the 
boy’s) boys’) 
Dat. dent Knaben, tothe boy Dat, den Knaben, to the boys 
Acc. den Knaben, the boy Acc, die Knabent, the boys, 
Feminines. 
Nom. Die Frau, the woman Nom, die Frauen, the women 
Gen. der Frau, of the woman (the Gen. der Frauen, of the women (the 
woman's) women’s) 
Dat. der Frau, to the woman Dat. den Franett, to the women 
Acc. die Frau, the woman Acc, die Frauen, the women. 


Rem.—l, The feminine nouns in er and el add only the ending 1t to the 
nominative, as: die Sdjwefter (sister), plur. die Sdhweftern; die Gabel (fork), 


plur. die Gabel. Herr takes in the singular the ending n, in the plural ett — 
(de8 Herr, die Herren). Feminines in in double the n in the plural (die™ 


Kinigin, plur. die Kdniginmert). 

2. The followingsmasculine nouns in ¢: §riede (peace), Funte (spark), 
Gedante (thought), Gefalle (favor), Glaube (faith), Haufe(heap), Name (name), 
Game (seed), Schade (damage), Wille (will) and the neuter das Herz 
(heart), take in the genitive singular em$ instead of en, but retain in all 


a ee 


ae te 


eee 


other cases the ending en (Her3, being a neuter, makes the accusative like — 


the nominative). All masculine nouns here mentioned, have in the nom. 
sing. a collateral form in en (ver Frieden, Gefatlen etc.). 


II. STRONG DECLENSION. 


§ 13. All NEUTER nouns (except Her;) and those masculines — 
and feminines not following the weak declension, belong to the 


STRONG declension, according to the following 


PARADIGM. 1% 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom, Der Fijd, the fish Nom. die ijcde, the fishes 
Gen, de3 Fildes, of the fish (the fish’s) Gen. der Fifdje, of the fishes 


Dat. dem Fijdhe (dem Fifdh), to the fish Dat. den Fifdjen, to the fishes — 


Acc. den Ftd), the fish Ace, die Fifdhe, the fishes. 


I~ Decline ey der Freund, the friend; der Hund, the dog; der Wein, — 
the wine; der Kreis, the circle; das Verdienft, the merit; das Hindernif*, the 


obstacle. 





* Final] R, when an ending is attached to it, must be vhangea into ff if 
the preceding vowel is SHORT, W hich is always the case with the vowels eandi. 








—s 

Rem.—l. All feminine and most. masculine nouns belonging to the 
strong declension, that have the radical vowels a, 9, u, au,soften them in the 
plural in G, 6, ii, au, as: Der Rabu, the boat, plur. die Kihne; der Gobhn, the 
son, plur. die Sohne; der Fuk, the foot, plur. die Fiife; der Baum, the tree, 
plur. die Baume, The radical vowels in the plural of the weax declension 
are never softened. 


2. The following feminine nouns (being indeclinable in the singular) 
follow this declension: 1. all ending in nif{ (as: die Betriibnif, the affliction, 
plur. die Vetriibniffe; die Kenntnif, the knowledge, plur. die KRenntniffe u. f. w.; 
2. about thirty monosyllabics among which are: die Art (axe), Bank (bench), 
Bruft (breast), Gans (goose), Hand (nand), Kraft (strength), RKunft (art), 
Macht (power), Ptaus (mouse), Nacht (night), Stadt (town), Wand (wall), 
and a few compounds. 


oA 


mgt oe PARADIGM. 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom. Die Stadt, the town Nom. die Stidte, the towns 
_ Gen. der Stadt, of the town Gen. der Stidte, of the towns 
Dat, der Stadt, to the town Dat. den Stidten, tothetowns — 
Acc. die Stadt, the town Acc. dite Stidte, the towns. dhe 


3. The ein the ending e8 of the gen. sing. is often dropped if the word 

can be conveniently pronounced without it, especially if the word consists of 

- more than one syllable, as: Wufruhr (sedition) gen. Aufrubrs (hardly Anf- 

 vubres); Siingling (young man) gen. Siinglings (not Siinglinges) ; but Todes 

(hardly Sods); Fijches (not Fijdhs); WArztes (mot Yrjzt8), The e of the dative 
may always be dropped. 

4, Nouns ending in er, el, en must drop the ¢ of all endings in both 

singular and plural. 


Singular. | Plural. 
Nom. Der Gater, the father Nom. die Biter, the fathers 
Gen. des Saters, Gen. der Biter, 
Dat. dem Vater, | Dat. den Batern, ° 
Acc. den Sater, Acc. die Biter, | 


Here belong the two femine nouns Witter, mother (plur. Miitter) and 
Todter, daughter (plur, Tidjter), Nouns in en do not take another nin ., 
the dative plural, so that their plurals have entirely the appearance of the 4 
WEAK declension: der Garten (the garden), dat, pl. den Garten. et 

er 

§ 14. Many monosyllabic neuters, a few masculines, and 
all nouns ending in thum (as: der Heiehthum, wealth; das iin {tert 


tum, the principality) form their plural by the ending ex, to 


. ye 4 


a 


ine ee 


which they add the ending m in the dative. They always 
soften the radical vowels a, 0, u, au.* 


Singular. Plural. 
Nom. Das Amt, the office Nom. die Aemter, the offices 
Gen. de3 Antes, Gen. der Aemter, 
Dat. dem Wmte, Dat. den Aemterw, 
Acc. das Mmt,- Acc. die Aemter. 


All monosyllabics following this declension (except some 
few not often used) are contained in the following list: 


; 


Der Geift, the mind; der Ort, the place; 

der Gott, the god; der Nand, the border; 

der Leib, the body; der Wald, the forest; | 
— der Mann, the man; der Wurm, the worm. _ 

Das Amt, the office; - ba8 Hubn, the chicken; 

das Bad, the bath; das Kalb, the calf; 

bas Band, the ribbon; das Kind, the child; 

das Bild, the image; das RKleid, the dress; 

das Blatt, the leaf; das Korn, the grain; 

das Brett, the board; das Kraut, the herb; 

das Buch, the book; bas Lamm, the lamb; 

das Dad, the roof; das Land, the country; 

das Dorf, the village; das Lidjt, the light; 

das Gi, the egg; das Lied, the song; 

das Fach, the shelf; das Lod, the hole; 

das Fa, the cask; das Neft, the nest; 

das Feld, the field; das Rad, the wheel; 

das Geld, the money; das Reis, the twig; 

das Glas, the glass; das Rind, the cattle; 

das Glied, the limb; das Schild, the shield; 

bas Grab, the grave; das Sdjlok, the castle; 

das Gras, the grass; das Schwert, the sword; 

das Gut, the good; das Thal, the valley; 

das Haupt, the head; das Tuc, the cloth; 

das Haus, the house; das Volk, the people; 

das Hol;, the wood; bas Weib, the woman; 

das Horn, the horn; das Wort, the word. 





* Neuter nouns forming their plurals in e,do not soften their radical: 
das Jahr (year), die Sabre; das Thor (gate), die Thore etc. 

t Das Wort forms the plural Worte, if words in logical connection with 
each other are designated; but Wirter, if unconnected words are referred to, 


se eS ee 


le a ee ee ee a 


te oe 


§ 15. The following masculine and neuter nouns decline 
STRONG in the singular, and WEAK in the plural: 1. Two neuters 
in e: Quge, eye; Ende, end; 2. those contained in the following 
list: 





Der Fort, the forest; der Gee, the lake; 

der Gau, the district;- dex Sporn (pl. Sporen), the spur; 
der Gevatter, the godfather; der Stachel, the prick; 

der Lorbeer, the laurel; der Strahl, the ray; 

der Mtaft, the mast; der Unterthan, the subject (citizen); 
der Macdbar, the neighbor; der Better, the cousin; 

der Sdymer;, the pain; der Zierath, the ornament. 

da8 Bett, the bed; das Leid, the sorrow; 

das Hemd, the shirt; das Obr, the ear. 


To these must be added several nouns taken from foreign languages, as: 
1. Those ending in or, taken from the Latin (Profeffor, Gen. Brofeffors, plur. 
 Brofefforen, with the accent on the penult). 2.The names of the Roman 
offices: Tribun, Conjul, etc. 3. Several nouns that cannot be classified, as: 
Staat, state (plur. Staaten); Diamant (diamond), Zins (interest), Jnject 
(insect), Bjalim (psalm), and some others, 


§ 16. Jrregular plurals. 1. Masculine and neuter nouns 
borrowed from the French and English languages generally 
form their plurals in 8, if their terminations disagree with those 
of German words, (die Oepartements, die Genices, die Lords, dte 
Stuarts, die Club$.*) 2. Words taken from the Latin in wm 
form their plurals in en: Studium, pl. Studien; Cvangelium; 
(gospel), pl. Gvangelien; Sndividuum (individual), pl. Sudivi- 
duet. 38. The compounds with Ytann generally change this 
word in Yeute (people) in the plural: Raufmann (merchant), pl. 
“Raufleute; Landsmann (countryman), pl. Candsfeute. 


III. DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 


§ 17. Proper nouns (even the names of females) decline 
STRONG, but always drop the e in the ending of the genitive and 
dative sing.: Nom. Rarl, Gen. Rarl8, Dat. Rarl; Nom. Deut} ch. 





* In conversational style this ending 8 is often applied even to German 
nouns (die Rerls, the fellows; die Sungens, the boys). 


De 


land, Gen. Deutidlands (not Deutjdlandes); Dat. Oeutfchland. 
Even female proper names take the ending 8 in the Genitive, 
and those in e take en$ (Nom. Ydelheid, Gen. Wdelhein$; Nom. 
Marie, Gen. Nariens*). 


— en Ee Sie ee 


Rem.—l. Some writers use before the ending $ of proper names an 
apostrophe (arl’8). 

2. Male or female names are often declined with the article or other 
determinative word, and-then take no endings at all in the singular: des 
Karl; der Adelheid; meiner Adelheid. The same is frequently observed with 
other proper names, and always with those ending in 8, r or 3: Der Suni, des 
Suni (or Suni’s); die Ufer des Mtijfiffippi (the banks of the Mississippi). If 
proper names are in apposition to their own appellatives, they never take an 
ending: der Stadt Verlin (of the city (of) Berlin); bes Staates Dainemark (of 
the state (of) Denmark). : 

3. The plural of male names declines stronc; that of female names 
WEAK (die friedridje; die Leonoren Goethes). To names whose terminations — 
disagree with those of German words is applied either the ending 8, or they 
receive no ending at all if declined with the article (die beiden’ Cicero; die — 
Rouffean’s, Pitts, die Stuarts). This is always the ease with nouns in 8, die — 
beiden Plinius (not Pliniuffe). Some Latin family-names decline weak: Die 
Gracden (the Gracchi), die Cajarem (the Cexsars). ‘ 








CHAPTER III. 
THE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 


I, INTERROGATIVE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 





§ 18. They are wer (who?), and was (what?), which are 
thus declined: 


Nom. wer, who? was, what ? 

Gen. wefjett, whose (of whom) ? wefjem (rare), of what? 
Dat. iwemt, to whom? 
Acc, wet, whom ? - was, what? 








_ * Some give to female proper names, and even to males, the ending en ; 
in dative and accusative (Dat. Gophien, to Sophy; Goethen, to Goethe). 
Formerly this method of declining was the rule, now it is coming out of use. 


PT a ee 


Wer ift da? Who is there? 

Wer ift diejer Mann ? Who is this man? 

Wer ijt dieje Frau? Who is this woman ? 
Weffen Haus ift das ? Whose house is this ? 
Wem fchreiben Sie ? To whom do you write? 
Wen juchen Ste ? Whom do you look for? 
Was find wir? What are we? © 

Was fagen Sie? What do you say? 
Wefjen ijt er fahig ? Of what is he capable ? 


_ Rem.—If the interrogative substantive pronoun wag is connected with a 
preposition, it assumes the adverbial form tyo, or tyor if the preposition be- 
gins with a vowel. These forms are prefixed to the prepositions, as: wovon, of 
(from) what (not von tas); worin, in what (not in twas); wofiir, for what 
(less good fiir was). 


Womrit bift di befdhaftigt ? — With what art thou occupied ? 
Worin befteht es? In what does it consist? 
Wofiir leben wir ? For what do we live? 


II. PERSONAL SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 19, The pronouns denoting the grammatical persons are 
thus declined: 


SINGULAR, 
First person. Second person. 
Nom. ich, I;* du, thou; 
Gen, meiner, of me; deiner, of thee; 
Dat. mir, to me; dir, to thee; 
- Acc. mtich, me. ‘ dich, thee. 
PLURAL. 
Nom. wir, we; ihr, you; 
Gen. unjer, of us; eter, of you; 
Dat. ung, to us; . euch, to you; 
Aco. ung, us, eud), you. 
ie Third person, 
SINGULAR, 
Masculine. — Feminine. . Neuter. 
Nom. er, he; fie, she; e8, it; 
Gen. feiter, of him; ihrer, of her; feiner, of it; 
“Dat. ihm, to him; thr, to her; ibm, to it; 
Acc. ifn, him; fie, her; e8, it. s 





*%ch, is also used as a Noun of the neuter gender: da’ Sc) (our own self), 
j and has then the declension of nouns, not of pronouns (Gen. des $8; Dat. 
dem Sch). Itis also used without endings: meines Sch etc, 


et 


PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS, 


Nom. fie, they; 
Gen. ihrer, of them; 
Dat. ithnen, to them; 
Acc. fie, them, 


§ 20. 1. The pronouns of the first and secoud persons are 


also used aS REFLEXIVE pronouns (see Part I, p. 52 and 83), 


corresponding to the English compounds with self (myself, 
thyself, ourselves etc.): {ch befdaftige mid, I occupy mysel/; 
ihr bejchaftigt euch, you occupy yourselves. 

2. The same is the case with the genitive sing. and plur. of 
the third person: er ijt fetner bewuft, he is conscious of him- 
self; fie ijtifrer nicht madtig, she has no control of herself. 

3. But the datives and accusatives of the third person in all 
genders and both numbers take the form jid), which corresponds 
to the forms (to) himself, (to) herself, (to) itself, (to) them- 


selves. 
he has killed himself ; 


fej Sat Fig) getdbtet, cr eitns killed herself 
ie haben fic) getidtet, they have killed themselves. 

§ 21. The Germans employ the pronouns of the second 
person (du and ifr) only in relations of intimacy, and in ad- 
dressing children. In polite conversation persons (in both 
numbers) are addressed by the THIRD PERSON PLURAL, which 
in this case is written with a capital, the reflexive fic, how- 
ever, always keeping its small initial: 

Wer find Sie, who are you? (literally who are they 2) 
Sh will es $h nen geben, I will give it to you (literally to them), 
Haben Sie fich ausgeruht, have you rested yourself? 


III. INDEFINITE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 
They refer either to persons or things. 
§ 22. To PERSONS refer: 1. man (one); 2. Semand (some- 


body, some one, anybody); Ytiemand(nobody, no one, not any- © 


body); 4. Gedermann(everyhbody, every one). 


Rem.—1. Ptan can only be used as subject (in the nominative). If the 
English indefinite one is employed in other relations, it is generally rendered 
by the adjective Pronoun Giner (see Parr I, p. 54), and in reflexive relations 


ee eee ee en aye ee ee ee 


= 72 = 


by fic) (one’s self): mart ift nicht immer mit fid) zufriedet, one is not always 
pleased with one’s seif (himself), Man fann es Cinem nicht immer ret 
madjen, one cannot always please everybody (literally: one cannot always make 
it right to one). 
. 2. Sedermann, Semand and Niemand decline srrone, taking 8 (not ¢8) 
in the genitive, but are used without ending both in dative and accusative: Se- 
 dermannd (Semands, Niemands) Wiinfdje, everybody's (somebody’s) desires. 
Gr hat eS Sedermann (Semand, Niemand) gefagt, he has said it to everybody 
(somebody, nobody). Ytiemand and Semand, however, often take the ending 
¢mt or ¢n in the dative, and en in the accusative. (Niemandem, Niemanden). 
3. Instead of Semand the Pronoun wer is sometimes used in Nom., 
Dat., Acc., as: Gahet ihr wen? Did you see any one? ft wer da gewefen ? 
Has any one been there’? 


§ 23. To THINGS refer etwas (something, anything), and 
nidhtS (nothing, not-anything). They are-used in all cases, 
but take no endings. Instead of etwas the pronoun tag is 
sometimes used, but is not considered elegant: Hat er eud) was 
_ gefagt? Has he told you anything? 

Rem.—Semand, wer and etwas, especially if denoting anybody and any- 
thing, are frequently connected with the adverb irgend: Haft du irgend Semand 


(irgend etwas) gefehen, hast thou seen anybody (anything)? Wenn er mit 
irgend wem gefprodjen haben follte, if he should have spoken with anyone. 





CHAPTER IV. 
ADJECTIVES. 
I. THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN GENFRAL. 


§ 24. Adjectives are used without inflectional endings, if 
they are used aS PREDICATES (predicatively). But if they are 
used as ATTRIBUTES (attributively), that is, if they are followed 
by their nouns, they must be DECLINED, agreeing with their 
nouns in gender, number and case, 


Der Mann ift g ut (predicate), the man is good, 
~ Der gute Mann (attribute), the good man. 


Rem,—Adjectives are also considered as attributes, if their nouns are 
understood > Er unterftiigt die Armen (Mtenfdjen), he assists the poor (men). 
Diefes Buch ift ein gutes (7. e. Buch), this book is a good one, 


hee oe 


§ 25. Inflected adjectives belong either to the STRONG or / 


the WEAK declension. Most PRONOMINAL adjectives follow the 


strong declension only, but every ordinary adjective may be | 


declined according to the method of either declension. 


§ 26. The scheme of the strone declension of adjectives, 
which is essentially different from that of the nouns, and almost 
agrees with the declension of the definite article, is best seen 
from the paradigm of Diefer, this: 


SINGULAR. 


Masculine, Feminine. Neuter. 3 
Nom, Siejer (Mann), this dieje (Frau), this diejes* (Kind), this 
(man); (woman); 6 (child); 
Gen.  diejeS, of this .- diefer diefes 
Dat. diejemt, to this _ Ddiejer diefem 
Acc.  diejen, this diefe diejes 
PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS. 3 
Nom. diefe, these . 


Gen. _ diejer, of these 
Dat. _Ddiejem, to these 
Acc.  Diefe¢, these. 


| ges=- Decline thus: weldjer (which), guter (good), alter (old). 


§ 27. The weak declension is generally used, if an adjec- 
tive is preceded and qualified by the DEFINITE ARTICLE, or an 
other word taking its place. It has the ending e in the nom. 
sing. of all genders, and in the acc. sing. of the feminine and 
neuter, taking the ending en in all other cases of both numbers. 
Hence its masculine forms are exactly the same as those of the 
weak declension of the noun. Its scheme is best seen in the 
paradigm of the ordinal numeral der erjte (the first). 


SINGULAR. 
Masculine. ‘Feminine. Neuter. ; 
Nom, Mer erfte, the first die erfte, the first das erfte, the first 
(man etc.) (woman etc.) (thing etc.) 
Gen.  de8 erftem, of the first der erften Des erftent 
Dat.  demerften,tothefirst der erften dem erftem 
Ace. den erjtemt, the first Die erfte das erjte 


* Diefes in the nom. and acc. is frequently contracted into die’; but not 


in the genitive. 


aes oe 








aie Sui: a eee 


PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS, 


Nom. Sie erften, the first (men, things etc.) 
Gen. der erftem, of the first 

Dat. den erftem, to the first 

Acc. dite erften, the first 


ges Decline thus the adjectives: der 3wette, the second; ber gute, the 
good; der alte, the old. 


II. DECLENSION OF PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ 28. The pronominal adjectives are divided into 1) INTER- 
ROGATIVES; 2) RELATIVES; 3) DEMONSTRATIVES; 4). INDE- 
FINITES; 5) POSSESSIVES. 


1. IJnterrogative Pronominal Adjectives. 


§ 29. They are: welder, which, what; welth ein, what a; 
was fiir, what (what kind of); was fitr ein, what a (what kind 
ofa), Welder declines stRonG (like diefer); was fiir remains 
uninfiected in all cases; weld) eit and was fiir ein decline the 
indefinite article only. (§ 4.) 


Weldhew Hut haben Sie genommen, which hat have you taken? 

Welher Meinung find Sie, of what opinion are you? 

Welchene Laude gehiren Sie an, to what country do you belong? 

~ Mit welders (dat. plur.) Arbeiten befdhaftigen Sie fitch, with what labors 

do you: occupy yourself? 

Weld einent Regimente bift di zugetheilt, to what a regiment art thou 
assigned ? . 

Was fiir Fleijd) haben Sie da (was haben Sie da fiir Fleifd)), what (kind 
of) meat have you there? 

Was fiir Landsleute find fie (was find fie fiir Landsleute), what countrymen | 
are they? 

Was fiir einen Arzt haben Sie, what (a) physician have you (whom have 
you for a physician) ? 

Was fiir ein Winterkleid tragen Sie, what a (style of) winter-dress do you 
wear (what do you wear for a winter-dress) ? 


2. Relative Pronouns. 


 § 80. They are: welder, der and was, About their English 
correspondents see ReM. 1. Welcher declines STRONG, like the 


ate BO ae 


interrogative welder. Yas declines like the interrogative was, 
and der declines like the definite article with this difference 
that it adds the WEAK ending en to the genitive of all genders 
and numbers, and to the dative plural: 


der, die, das (who, which, that). 


SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 
Nom. der, who, which, that die das, 
Gen. deffett, whose, of whom, of which _ derett, deffett, 
Dat. dem, to whom, to which der, dent, 
Acc, den, whom, which die, das. 


PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS, 


Nom, die, who, which, that 
Gen, dere, whose, etc. 
Dat. denen, to whom, etc, 
Acc, die, whom, etc. 


Rem.—l. The German language does not, as the English, employ the 
interrogative substantive pronoun wer (who) asa relative. But both, the 
adjective pronoun welder, and the word der (properly demonstrative) 
- correspond to each of the English relatives* who, which and that. 

2, ‘the genitive of the pronoun jweldjer can generally not be employed 
as arelative. Instead of it must be used the genitives of der (deffen, deren 
in both singular and plural: The boy whose father you know, der Rnabe, def fen 
(not weldjes) Bater Sie fennen, Only if the relative is connected as attribute 
with a noun, the use of der is forbidden in all cases, and in this instance wel 
ches, welder must be used in the genitive: Berlin, weld) e Stadt Sie fennen 
(welder Stadt Cigenthiimlidfeiten Ste fennen), Berlin, which eity youknow 
(the peculiarities of which city you know). 

3. The relative was must be used for the English which or that if a 
relative pronoun is required after indefinite or demonstrative pronouns, used 
without nouns in the neuter gender: Yfles, twas (all that), Gieles, was (much 
that), das or dasjenige, was (that which), not Wlles, das (welded), Vieles, das 
(weldjes) or das (Dasjenige), das or weldjes. But if in this instance the relative 
stands in the genitive, dejjen (not wefjen) must be used (see the examples). 





* There is no difference in the use of welcher and der as relatives. Der 
is far more used in colloquial language, and is generally preferred in 
writing, unless euphonic reasons make its use inelegant. Nobody would 
for instance write: der, der der erfte ift (instead of: der, welder der erfte ift 
(he who is the first). But it. is certainly thus used. in speaking, since the 
pitch of the three der’s is different. After personal and interrogative pro- 
nouns der must always be used in place of weldjer: [who, ich, der etc. 


4 


Pha hae 


EXAMPLES OF RELATIVES. 
Nom. Ser Pann, der or welder (not wer) dir e8 gefagt hat, the man who 
(that) has told you (it). 
Die Kinder, Die or welde mit dir gejpielt haben, the children who 
have played with you. 
Die Biidher, die or welche div gehiren, the books which (that) belong 
to you. 
Wiles, was (not das or weldjes) mir gehirt, all that belongs to me. 
Gen. Der Pann, deffen (not weldjes or weffen) Haus id) gefauft habe, the 
man whose house I have bought. 
Die Kinder, de ren (not weldjer or wefjen) Vater ihr fennt, the children 
whose father you know. 
Das Haus, deffen Gebraud) Sie haben, the house the use of which 
you have. 
Whes, dDeffen (not weffen or weldjes) ihy befdhuldigt fetd, all of which 
you are accused. 
Dat, Der Freund, mit bem or weldjem (not mit wem) td) umgebhe, the 
friend with whom I associate. 
Das Land, dem or weldem id angebhire, the country to which I 
belong. : 
Die Freunde, dbenenor welcen iby treu feid, the friends to whom 
you are faithful. 
Wiles, wo mit* (not mit weldhent) thr befdhaftigt feid, all (everything) 
with which you are occupied. 
Acc. Der Mann, den or welch en (not wen) du fennft, the man whom you 
know. 
Das Pferd, das or weldhes dit reiteft, the horse which (that) you ride. 
Alles, was (not das or weldyes) ich gehirt habe, all (that) I have heard. 


3. Demonstrative Pronouns, 


~§ 81. The demonstratives are: 1. der, that (plur. those); 
2. dicjer, this (plur. these); 3. jener, that; 4. jolder, such; 
5. derjenige (see § 35.), and 6. derfelbe, the same. 


§ 32. The pronouns diefer, jener and foldjer decline sTRONG 
throughout (see the paradigm of Diefer, § 26.). 


ZF Of folcher exists a collateral form fold ein, such a, of which only the 
indefinite article ein is declined: Golch einem Mtanne, to such a man, Such 
ais also rendered ein joldjer, and inflected like eim jeder, § 39. 





* The change of was into wo in connection with prepositions takes also 
place if was is a relative (§ 18, Rem.). Many make vse of the combinations 
with Wo even in the place of the relatives der or welder, as: die Feder, wo mitt 
id) jdjreibe, instead of: die Feder, nut der or welder id) fdjreibe, the pen 
with which I am writing, But others vbject to the usage. 


ee Te 


Examp.es:—This man, diefer taut; of that woman, jener Frau; to this 
child, jenent Kinde; to those men, jenen Ptainnern. 

§ 33. The demonstrative der* is declined like the article if 
it is followed by a noun with which it agrees in gender, number, 
and case. Mtit den Biichern fann ich nichts thun, with those 
books I cannot do anything. But if its noun is understood, it 
has the same declension as the relative der (§ 30). It is thus 
frequently used with the force of an emphasized personal pro- 
noun of the third person: 

Den fenne id) nicht, him I do not know. 

Das fan ich nicht thun, that I cannot do. 


Deren gibt e8 wenige, of those there are few. 
Mit denen fann ic) nichts thun, with those I cannot do anything, 


§ 34. In Derjexige and derjelbe each of the two components — 


der and jenige (felbe) is inflected: der, entirely like the article, 
and jenige (felbe) after the WEAK form (§ 27.): 


SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. All Genders. 
Nom. derijenige Diejenige Dasjenige Diejenigen 
Gen. Desjenigen Derjenigen  desjeniget Derjenigen 
Dat. Demijenigen Derjenigen  Denrjenigen Denjenigen 
Acc, Detjeniges Diejenige Dasjenige Dicjenigen 
Nom. Dderjelbe Diefelbe Dasjelbe (generally Ddtefelben 
Gen. Desielben (gen- written daffelbe) — 
erally defjelben) Derfelbem DdDesjelbem (deffelben) Derjelben 
Dat. Ddemifelben Dericlben  Ddemijelben Denfelbent 
Acc. Denjelben Ddiejelbe Dasjelbe Diefelben.. 


§ 35. Derjenige is used only in a CORRELATIVE connection, 


It corresponds: 1) to the English he or its equivalent the one ~ 
(pl. those, the ones), if these words are determined and com- — 


pleted be a relative clause; 2) to the English that (the one, 
pl. those, the ones), if these words take the place of a noun 


previously mentioned, provided that a relative clause or a bers 
pendent phrase is attached to the demonstrative. 





* The vowel e in the demonstrative der is more strongly is neiaca 
than either in the article or in the relative der. If the word is connected, as — 
demonstrative, with a noun, it is always spaced in print, to distinguish it” 
from the article. 


— yo — . 


Derjenige, der feine Freunde hat, ift gu beflagen, he (the one) who has no 
friends is to be pitied. 


Diejenigen, die nidt denfen, leben nicht, chose (the ones) who do not think, 
do not live. 


Mein Haus ift fehoner, alS dasjenige deines Bruders, my house is more 
beautiful than that (the one) of thy brother, 

Diejes Pferd ift gréfer al dasjenige, das du gefanft haft, this horse is 
larger than the one (that) which you have bought. 


Rem,—l, The masculine sing, derjenige, der if both words are in the 
nominative, may be replaced by the interrogative mer, and the plural DdDie- 
jenigen, die may be replaced by Die alone. Wer feine Freunde hat, ift 31 be- 
flagen, who has no friends etc.; Die nidjt denfen, leben nicht, those who do 
not think etc, . 


2. The neuter dagjenige, if used absolutely, and not referring to a par- 
ticular noun, must be followed by the relative ma (see § 30. Rem. 3). In 
this instance Dagjenige may be dropped, 

Dasjenige, was (not das or weldhes), du fagft ift wahr, or: Was du jagft, 

ift wabr, what (that which) you say is true. 

But if the demonstrative is in the genitive or dative, it cannot be 
dropped: Die Wahrheit desjenigen, was Sie mir gejagt haben (not die Wahr- 
Heit weffen), the truth of what you have told me, 


§ 36. The demonstrative Der (§ 33.) is frequently used 
with the force of derjenige; but in this instance it takes the form 
Derer, instead of deren, in the genitive plural. The demon- 
strative jener is generally not employed in this connection. 


Der, welder (or derjenige, der; or wer; not der, wer) jaet, wird ernten, 
who (he who) sows will reap. 

Geht nur_um mit dDenen, die (denjenigen, die; denen, tweldje) enern 
Geift bilden, associate with those only that benefit your mind, 

Holgt nicht dem Rathe derer (derjenigen, but not deren*), die euch benei- 
den, do not follow the advice of those that envy you. 

Das Leiden Der Cinwohner (or derjenigen, but not derer or deren), die 
durd) den Krieg verarmt waren, the suffering of those inhabitants who 
were impoverished by the war, 

Unfere Literatur ift qrofi, aber die der Deutfchen (or diejenige der Deut- 
jen) ift gréfer, our literature is great, but dhut of the Germans is 
gieater. 





_ ™* There are passages enough, in which we find beret in this connec- 
tion, But it is considered as faulty. 


4. Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives,* 


§ 37. Sing. cin, cine, ein (the indefinite article), a, some, 
any (sing.), one. 
einiger, ¢, eS (STRONG), 
etwas (indeclinable), some, any, a little. 
welcher, ¢, eS (STRONG), 
Plur. einige (STRONG), 
weldje (STRONG), 


1. Gin refers to individual nouns (such as friend, horse, field, etc.) in the 
singular, Referring to nouns previously mentioned, or used with the force 
of Semand or man (see the note), it declines srrona throughvut (einer, eine, 
eine$ or cin$). Its force is often increased by the adverb irgend placed be- 
-fore it. For its declension as indefinite article see § 4. | 


Haben Sie einen Hammer? Hier ifteiner. Have you any hammer? 
Here is one, Sft nicht Ciner an der Thiir? Is not some one at the door? Haft 
du cin Mejjer? Sa, id) habe eins (eines), Have you a knife? Yes, I have 
one, Haft du cine Feder bet der Hand? Have you some (a) pen at hand? 
Kiunen Sie nidjt trgend etn Werkeug finden? Can you not find some tool? 
Wenn Sie irgend ctnen Wunfdh haben, bringen Sie ihn vor! If you have 
any desire, state. it. 

f= 1n this connection the English one or any cannot be rendered by 
etwas or einiger: For the form der eine see § 46. 


' some, any, a few. 


2. €twaé and the sincurar of einigerand welder refer exclusively 
to nouns denoting a Quantity (such as water, grain, gold), and to ABSTRACTS 
(as diligence, courage etc.). Welder in this connection cannot be joined 
to nouns, but may be used in reference to nouns mentioned before. These 
words may also be preceded by irgend, in which case weldjer may be joined to 
nouns, 


Wenn Sie nur einige n Fleif} anwenden wollten, if you would but apply 
some diligence. Haben Sie etwas Geld bei fic)? Ga, id habe wel des. 
Have you any (some, a little) money with you? Yes, I have some, Wenner 
irgend eciniges (etwas, weldes) Selbftvertrauen hatte, if he had any self- 
reliance (at all). | 

j= The English some and any employed in a merely partitive= sense 
are not expressed in German, except if referring to a noun previously men- 





* All these pronominal adjectives may, like all other adjectives, be em- 
ployed ‘substantively’, replacing the substantive indefinite pronouns, men- 
tioned § 22. They are then written with a capital. Thus Giner stands for 
Semand or man; Reiner with the force of Niemand; Seder for Sedermann; 
Giniges for twas. But this does not make these words ‘substantive pro- 
nouns’, as they always keep their adjective inflection. 

+ That the English some or any are employed in a partitive sense will be 
generally evident, if we may not replace these words by a little or a few. 


; — 2 — 
tioned: Srinfen Sie Wein (not einigen or etivas Wein), do you drink any 
wine? Serfaufen Sie 8ucder (not einigen or etwas Zucder), do you sell any 
sugar? Sa, id) verfaufe wefdyen, yes, I sell some, 

3. Ginige and weldje in the pLuRAL answer to the English some or any, if 
they are used in the sense of ‘a few’ before plural nouns. Weldje refers to 
plural nouns which are mentioned before. If irgend is used before plural 
‘nouns, weldje generally takes the place of einige. If some and any cannot be 
replaced by ‘a few’, before plural nouns, they are not expressed in Ger- 
man, except when they are used with emphasis. 


Sc) ging miteinigen Freunden fpazieren, I took a walk with some (a 
few) friends. Wenn dieje Winde einige Bierathen hatten, wiirden fie beffer 
ausjehen, if these walls had some (a few) ornaments, they would look better. 
Wenn er irgend weld e Schwierigteiten erheben follte, if he should raise any 
difficulties (whatever), Was fucdhft du? Bch fuche Nagel. Haft ou welde 
gefunden 2 What are you looking for? I am looking for (some) nails, Have 
you found some (any) ? 

4. Instead of einiger in all its forms the indefinite pronoun etlider 
(srronG) may be used. But it cannot be connected with irgend, nor can it be 
used with abstracts, | 


§ 38. Rei, feine, feitt, no, not—any; plur. feine (STRONG), no. 


Rein before nouns is declined like the indefinite article. But if it refers to 
nouns mentioned before, or if it is used substantively, it declines strona 
throughout (feiner, teine, feineS or fein$), and is translated none or no one 
(nobody). 


Sc habe Fete Nachricht erhalten, I have not received any news. Gr hat 
feine §reunde, he has no friends. Cr hat einige Anjpriidje, aber du haft 
feine, he has some claims, but thou hast none. Sift Ciner hier gewefen ? 
Nein, Reiner ift hier gewejen. Has any one been here? No, no one has 
been. here. 


§ 39. eder, ¢, eS (STRONG), each, every (without plural). 


It may also, without changing its meaning, be preceded by the indefinite 
’ article, and declines then weak, except in those forms in which the indefinite 
article takes no ending: Nom. einjeder; Gen. eines jedett; Dat. einem jeden; 
Neuter : ein jede$. In both forms it are be used substantively with the 
force of Sedermann. 


Er gab jedem (einem jeden) Knaben einen Thaler, he gave to each 
boy a dollar. Seder (ein Seder), dev nicht fiir mid ift, ift wider mid, 
every one that is not for me, is against me, Gib Jedem (einem Feden) 
das Seine, give every one his own. 

§ 40. ~Afler, alle, alles (sTRONG), all; plur. alle, all. 


The neuter singular Alles, used substantively, is rendered by everything, 
and is also used in speaking of persons (all, every one, all the people), 


Willer Fadel frinft, all censure hurts. Mit aller MUufmerffamfecit, with 
all attention; mit allen feinen %reunden, with all his friends, Alles ift 
verloren, al) (everything) is lost. Wlles freut fic), all rejoice. 

je Tf all with the article before singular nouns is equivalent to ‘the 
whole’, it is not yendered by wets but. by the adjective ganj: all the city, 
die ganye Stadt. 


§ 41. Biel, much; plur, many. 

If viel is not preceded by the article or another qualifying word, it is 
either not inflected at all, or it declines srroxe. In nom. and ace. sing the 
uninflected forms are far more usual; in the other cases the inflected forms 
prevail. (Nom. viel Wein; Gen. vieles Weins; Dat. vielemt Wein; Acc. viel 
Wein). In the plural, the nom, and acc, are about as often inflected as not 
(viel or viele €oldaten, many soldiers). In the other cases of the plural the 
inflected forms prevail. If it stands without noun, the singular much answers 
to the neuter Viel or Vieles, thegenitive and dative being almost always 
inflected. The plural ‘ many’, used substantively, is always rendered by the 
inflected form Biele. Er wei} Viel or Viele$*, he knows much (many things). 
Dies ift die Meinung Bieler, this is the opinion of many. 

Biel may be preceded and qualified by the definite article, by demonstra- 
tives or possessives, and inflects then weaky, being translated by ‘great 
amount or quantity of’, dev viele Regen, the great amount of rain, Was willft 
du mit diejem vielem Golde anfangen? What will you do with this great 
amount of gold? QMtit feinem vielem Gelde, with his great amount of money, 


§ 42. Wenig, little; plur. few. 

If little is opposed to great, it is translated by flein; if opposed to much, by 
wenig. Wenig, in respect to its inflection is almost entirely treated like viel: 
Nom. wenig Geld, little money; Gen. weniges (en)t Geldes; Dat. wenigem 
Gelde; Acc. menig Geld. After prepositions the uninflected forms decidedly 
prevail (mit wenig Geld). In the plural the inflected forms are required in 


the genitive, and more frequent in the dative; but in nom, and acc, the ~ 


uninflected forms rather prevail: Er hat wenig Freunde, he has few friends; 
but weniger Sreunde, of few friends, If used substantively in the plural, 
weitig is inflected in all cases: Wenige (not wenig) bezweifeln e8, few doubt it. 
Little, used absolutely in the singular is generally rendered by the uninflected 
wenig, rarely by weniges. Wenig in the singular, like little, may be preceded 
by the indefinite article: etn wenig, a little, which is almost equivalent to 
etwas. It remains in all cases uninflected (mit ein wenig Fleif{, with a little 
diligence), The plural a few is translated by einige or etlidje, not by ein 
wenig. Nota few is rendered by nidjt wenige or by mandje, and not a little by 
nicht wenig. 





* Some make a difference between Viel and Viele’, which is not war- 
ranted by the usage of the best writers. 

7 With possessives it must inflect strong if the . DOsPeeah YS takes no 
ending. See § 55. Rem. 1. 

t See § 55. Rem, 2. 


— 


._.—- ee 


ae 


§ 43. Mancher, e¢, e8; plur. mance (sTRONG),* many a, 
not a few. 

Mander both in the singular and plural corresponds to many a or not a 
few: Er hatte mit manchem Hinderniffe (or manchen Hinderniffem) gu fampfen, 
he had to struggle with many an obstacle (not a few obstacles), 

$ 44. Mehr, more. 


It is indeclinable in all cases: mit mehr Geld, with more money; mehr 
@reunde, more friends. 

Weniger, less, is treated in the same way, but is sometimes, though 
rarely, found with (strong) inflection. 


§ 45. WMebrere (STRONG), several. 

It is used only in the plural: Gr madte mehrere Cinwendungen, he 

made several objections. iad) mehreren Verjudjen, after several attempts, 
§ 46. Der (die,das) eine, the one; der (Die, das) andere, the 

other (both WEAK). 


Both form plurals (die einen, die anderen; the ones, the others). Ander 
_ takes also the indefinite article before it and is then declined like ein jeder, 
(ein anderer, ¢, eS, another), Without an article it is declined strona 
throughout: Bon anderem Stoffe, of other material; die SGitten anderer 
Zeiten, the manners of other times. 


5. Possessive Pronouns, 


§ 47. The simple possessives are: 


Masculine. | Feminine, Neuter, 

1. Singular Person. mein, meine, mein, my; 
7 ip i dein, - deine, dein, thy; 

»» masc, Pers, ( fein, jeine, _ fein, his; 
3 », fem. re thr, thre, ihr, her; 

» neuter ,, fein, feine, ) fein, its; 
1. Plural Person, - unjer, unfere, unjer, our; 
RGR igh nt eller, euere, eller, your; 
3. S e ihr, ihre, thr, their, 


Rem. — The second singular and plural persons (dein, euer) are confined 
to relations of intimacy, like the corresponding substantive personal pro- 
nouns, Among persons less intimately connected the third person plural 
Shr (their) is used in addressing either one or more persons, hr is then 
written with a popliteal. Your brother, Shr Bruder; your sister, Shre Sdjwe- 
fter. Sd) baue auf ‘ Sire Nachfidht, meine Herren, I rely on your indulgence, 
gentlemen. 





* Mandher in connection with an adjective or the indefinite article may 
be used without any inflection: Manch ein Miinftler, many an artist; mand 
Srofer Mann. 


§ 48. The simple possessives inflect STRONG in the plural, 
and in the singular like the indefinite article: 


SINGULAR. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 
Nom. metn Bruder, meine Schwefter, mein Buch, 
Gen, meines Gruders, meiner Sdwefter, memes Buds, 
Dat. meinem Sruder, meiner SGcwefter, meinem Bude, 
Acc. meinem Bruder, meine Schwefter, mein Sud), 


PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS, 
Nom. meine Sriider, 
Gen. meiner QBriider, 
Dat. meinem Sriidern, 
Acc. meine Griider. 


Thus are declined: 


fein his do. fetne..) vr ae 

ibr her or their! 3 ihre her or ther | 2 
unjer 1 ruber, our S unjere Scwefter, our my 
euer | your = 2. sente* ma a 
She J J Shre 





ge In unjer and euer the final letters are not inflectional endings, but 
radical, and cannot be dropped in declining them, as it is the case in Dicjer 
ten. diejes, Unjer and euer form Gen. unjeres (or unfer$), eures (not unjes, 

28). 

§ 49. The possessive pronouns, like ordinary adjectives, 
may be used predicatively, answering to the English possessive 
cases mine, thine, his, hers, its, etc. They are then not 
inflected, the same as other predicative adjectives. 

Diefes Such ift mein, this bcok is mine; diefe VBiider find dein (fein, 
unjer, euery); these books are thine (his, ours, yours). 

§ 50. Aside from this case, the English possessive forms 
mine, thine, etc. are rendered by any of the following three 
forms of the German possessives: 


1) By the ordinary Seana ht with STRONG inflection ever 


in the nominative: 

Sch habe meine Pflicht gethan, thut ihe eure, I have done my duty, de 
ye yours, — Das ift nicht dein Vortheil, aber eS ift meiner, that is not thy 
advantage, but it is mine. — Cuer {ov8 ift leidjt, aber un{ eres ift traurig, 
your lot is easy, but ours is sad. 





* Instead of enere the form eure is preferred. 
7 With the third person plural this form is not used. 


OT ee ee ey a ee er 


mone f 
ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 


< e 


2) By placing the definite article before the possessive, 
which has then wwak inflection throughout (der, die, das meine, 
Gen. deS meinem, etc. ; der, Die, Da unfere, Gen. dc8 unjcrem, etc.). 

Unjer Haus ift alt, das cure ift neu, our house is old, yoursis new. Gr be- 
dient fich meiner Zimmer hier, und ich bedtene mich-der feinew dort; he makes 
_ use of my rooms here, and I make use of his there. 

3) By attaching the termination ige to the possessives, and 
placing the definite article before them. These forms, like- 
wise, decline WEAK (der, Die, das meinige, Gen. de8, Der meinigen; 
Der, die, das jeinige; Gen. deS feinigew; Plur. die feinigen; der, 
Die, Das unfrige*, eurige, ihrige, etc. ). ; 

Wiahrend ihr eure Mitbiirger verfolgtet, befhiigten wir die unfrigem, while 
you persecuted your countrymen, we protected ours. Dies ift mein SGdjidfal, 
was wird aber das deinige-fein? this is my fate, but what will be thine ? 

jez The two forms with the definite article have often conventional 
significations. Das Meinige, Seinige, etc. (substantively) means my, his, 
etc. property; die Meinigen, Deinigen, etc. denote persons who are in some 
particular connection with the person designated by the pronoun, as his 
family, his friends, adherents, etc. 


Ill. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
§ 51. The cardinal numerals are: 


1 eing, 19 neunzehn, 
2 3ivet, 20 zwan3ia, 
3 dret, 21 etnundswanzig, 
4 vier, 22 gweinnd;wanzig, 
5 fiinf, 23 dreiundszwanzig, 
6 fechs, 24 vierund;wanzig, 
7 fieben, 25 fiinfundzwanzig, 
8 adt, 30 dreipig, 
9 nen, 40 vierjzig, 

; 10 3cbhn, 50 fiinfsig, 
11 elf, 60 jechzig 
12 3wilf, 70 fiebzig (fiebenzig) 


13 dretzehit, 
14 vierzehn, 
15 fiinfzehn, 
16 fed)zehn, 


17 fiebzehn (fiebenzehn), 


18. adjtzehn, 





80 adjtzig, | 

90 neinjzig, 

100 hundertt, 

101 hundert und eins, 
102 hundert und grvet, 
103 hundert und dret, 


* In der unfrige, der curige the e of the possessive stem is dropped. 
7 The English a hundred and a thousand are expressed without article in 
German; but one hundred, one thousand take the form € inhundert, € i ntanfend, 


200 3ivei Hintdert, 1,000 31wei taufend, 
1,000 taujend, 10,000 3ehn taufend, 


1871 taujend adjt hundert ein und fiebzig, or adjtzehn Hundert ein und fiebzig; 
a million, eine Dillion. 


Rem.—l. The form Ging is used only in counting, or as a neuter when 
it inflects srrona. Else the numeral one is expressed by the indefinite article 
which has then the emphasis, and is spaced in print, or written with a 
capital; einer rau, to one woman. If the noun is understood, it has the 
sTRONG inflection throughout. te viel Knaben waren dort? Nur einer; 
how many boys were there? Only one. Cr hatte nidjt mehr Giider als eins 
(eine$), he had no more books than one, 

2. Both is expressed by beide. If employed with the definite article, 
which always precedes, it answers the English the two, and declines wraK; 
else strona: Die Biicher beiver Briider, the books of both brothers; die Biicher 
der beiden BSriider, the books of the two brothers. Seide forms a neuter 
singular Seides, corresponding to the English both, referring to THINGS IN 
GENERAL: Beides ijt ridjtig, both is correct. 


3. Zwei and drei, if not preceded. by the article or an adjective pro- — 


noun, take in the genitive the srrona termination er, for instance: Die Wu3- 
jage giveier Zengen, the deposition of two witnesses. ‘The other cardinal 
numbers remain unaltered, except that in the dative they sometimes take 
the termination en, if not followed by nouns. Hundert and taujend, if their 


nouns are understood, decline strona, if referring to an indefinite number of — 
hundred or thousand, corresponding to the English hundreds, thousands. Cr — 
hat oft in einem Lage Taujende verloren, he has often lost thousands in — 


one day. 


§ 52. The ordinal numerals are adjectives, and are de- 


rived from the cardinal numerals by the addition of the syllable — 


te or fte. From two to nineteen is added te, the rest take fig. 


Der erfte, the first; der zwanzigfte, the twentieth; | 
der ziveite, the second; der eit und zwanzigfte, the twenty- 
der dritte, the third; first; 
der vierte, the fourth; ber dreiftigfte, the thirtieth; 

der flinfte, the fifth; . der fiinfzigfte, the fiftieth; 

der adjte, the eight; der hundertfte, the hundredth; 

der zivdlfte, the twelfth; der taufendfte, the thousandth. 


Rem.—1. The ordinals generally decline weak, But they declinesrrona, 
if neither the definite article nor an inflected pronominal adjective stand be- — 


fore them: Erfter Gand, volume first; fein dritter Gobhn, his third son. 


2. To the class of the ordinals belongs the interrogative numeral der 
wievielfte ? (with weak inflection), corresponding to which (in order)? if an~ 


ordinal numeral is expected as answer, It must be generally expressed in 


English by circumlocution: Der wievielfte Band ift dies ? What is the number 


ee Pan 


Pa es ee 








a 


of this volume? It is used substantively to ask for the date: Der wievielfte 
ift heute? What day of the month is to-day? 

3. From the ordinals are formed 1) the orpinat ApveRgs by the ending 
ens: erjtems, firstly, in the first place; 3weitem$, in the second place, 
secondly; bdrittemt$, in the third place, etc. 2) the Fractions by the 
ending ef, being of neuter gender if used substantively : ein Drittel, one 
third; ein Viertel, one fourth; ein 2wanzigftel, one twentieth. The numeral 
zveite does not form a fraction; instead of it the word halb is used, If halb is 
preceded by the indefinite article*, it is declined like ein jeder, but preceded 
by the definite article it declines weax (ein halbes $fund, half a pound; ein 
halber Fup, half afoot; das halbe Megiment, half theregiment), If used as 
an abstract fraction it is not declined (gwanjig und ein halb, twenty and one 
half). Instead of ein und ein halb the expression anderthalb is often used. 
Thus bdrittehalb, two and a half; viertehalb, three and a half, etc, 


-§ 53. The other numerals are: 
1. Multiplicative Numerals. 


Ginfacdh, single; zehnfad), tenfold; 
Doppelt or ziweifad), double; hunbdertfac), a hundredfold; 
‘dveifac), treble; taujendfach, a thousandfold. 


They are ordinary adjectives, and decline like these. 
2. Cardinal Adverbs. 


Cinmal, once; viermal, four times; | 

gweimal, twice; hundertmal, a hundred times; 

dreimal, thrice; taufendmal, a thousand times, 
3. The Indeclinable Numerals in let. 

CGinerlet, of one kind; manderlet, of several kinds; 

aiweierlei, of two kinds; vielerlei, of many kinds; 

dreierlet, of three kinds; allerlei, of all kinds, 


They are formed by adding erlei to the cardinals and indefinite pro- 
nouns, expressing quantity. 


IV. ORDINARY ADJECTIVES. 
§ 54. Ordinary Adjectives,decline WEAK if they are pre- 
ceded and qualified by the DEFINITE article, or any adjective © 
pronoun or numeral that has an inflectional ending: , 
SINGULAR. 
Masculine. 


Nom, der gute Diaun, the good man; 

Gen. de8 guten Pannes, of the good man; 
Dat, dem gute Manne, to the good man; 
Acc. den gutem Diann, the good man, 





* Salb never takes its articles or determinative words after it. 


aa Seen 


Feminine. 
Nom. die gute Frau, the good woman; 
Gen. der guten Frau, of the good woman; 
Dat. der gutem Frau, to the good woman; 
Acc, die gute Frau, the good woman. 


Neuter, 
Nom. a8 gute Rind, the good child; 
* Gen. de8 gutett Rindes, of the good child; 
Dat. dem gutemt inde, to the good child; 
Acc. das gute Rind, the good child. 


PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. 
Nom, die gutet Dinner, Frauen, Kinder; . 
Gen. der guten Ytinner, Frauen, Kinder; 
Dat. den guten Miinnern, Frauen, Kindern; 
Acc, die gutem Danner, Frauen, Kinder. 


Thus are declined adjectives preceded by the interrogative welder, by the 
demonstratives Ddiefer, jener, foldjer, derfelbe, derjenige; by the indefinites jeder, 
aller, einiger, etlicjer, mandher, vieler, by the ordinals (der erfte etc.), the nu- 
meral beide and by those cases of ein, fein and the possessives that have 
inflectional endings, as: meinent gutem Freunde; unjere guten Nadhbarn; 
feiner gutem Manner, etc. 

Rem.—After the plurals of the indefinite viele, alle, mehrere, einige, etlidje, 
mande, andere the following adjective generally declines srrone, although 
these indefinites are themselves inflected by strong endings: Wlle qute Miin- 
ner (Gen. aller quter Mtinner); mebhrere qrofe iinftler; viele beriihmte Feld- 
herren, etc. Sometimes, however, this rule is not observed, and the adjectives 
are found with weak inflection after these words. 

§ 55. Adjectives not qualified by the definite article or an 
adjective pronoun or numeral with strong endings, decline 
STRONG: 

SINGULAR. 
. Masculine. 
Nom. guter Wein, good wine; 
Gen, guteS Weines, of good wine; 
Dat. gutent Weine, to good wine; 
Acc. guten Wein, good wine, 


Feminine. 
Nom. frijche Ptilch, fresh milk; 
Gen. frifcher Mtilch, of fresh milk; 
Dat.  frijdjer Milch, to fresh milk; - 
Ace.  frijehe Milch, fresh milk. 


— ee eee 








psa Pe oa 


Neuter. 


Nom. {dwarzes Fudd, black cloth; 
Gen. jdpwarzes Tudjes, of black cloth; 
Dat. {diwarzent Tuche, to black cloth; 
Ace. fdwarzes Tudj, black cloth, 


PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. 


Nom, jdine Blumen, fine flowers; 
Gen. jdhiner Blumen, of fine flowers; 
Dat. fdinen Blumen, to fine flowers; 
Acc. fine Blumen, fine flowers, 


Rem.—l. Hence adjectives inflect strong, 1) if they are immediately 
preceded by prepositions: Qtit groRent Fleife, with great diligence; 2) if 
they are preceded by those forms of the indefinite article or of the possessives 
_ that have no endings: ein grofer Mtann, a great man; mein lieber Bruder, 
my dear brother; unfer gute$ Rind, our good child; 3) if they are preceded 
by any pronominal adjective or numeral without inflectional endings: mebr 
gute Biider, more good books; viel guter Wein, much good wine; mand) 
junges Kind, many a young child; wei jdjine PBferde, two fine horses; 4) if ~ 
the pronominal adjectives which precede them are not in the same case with 
them: deffem grofer Srrthum, whose great error. 

2. It is now customary to give to the genitive singular of the mas- 
culine and neuter of adjectives the weak ending en, even if the adjective 
should decline srrona according to the general rules: Cine Menge gute 
 Weins (instead of: gutes Weins), a quantity of good wine; guten Piuths, of 
good cheer (instead of: gute3 Dtuths), But some authors reject this rule, and 
genitives with the strong ending e8 can not be considered as faulty, 


3. Those pronominal adjectives that may or may not beinflected, require 
the strong inflection of the following adjective, if they take no inflection; 
but if they are themselves inflected; the following adjective declines weak: 
© Biel guter Wein, or vieler gute Wein; vieles Gute, or viel Gutes (much 
good); mand) junges Rind, or mandhes junge Kind (many a young child), 

' 4, Since the indefinite article, the possessives, and the indefinite fein 
take no endings in the nom. sing, of the masculine and neuter,and the accu- 
sative singular of the neuter, but decline their other cases strona, the follow- 
ing adjective must always decline srrone in the nom, sing. masc., and nom. 
and accus. singular neuter, but weax in all other cases. Some have called 
this the ‘‘mixed declension’’ with the following scheme: 


SINGULAR, 
Masculine, 
Nom. ein qanjer Tag, a whole day; 
Gen. eines ganze Tages, of a whole day; 
Dat, einent gauzem Tage, to a whole day; 
Acc. einem ganjem Zag, a whole day, 


Feminine. 

Nom. eine ganze Jtacht, a whole night; 
Gen. einer ganjem Yadt, of a whole night; 
Dat. einer ganze Nacht, to a whole night; 
Acc, eine ganze Yadjt, a whole night, 

Neuter. 
Nom. ein ganjes Sabr, a whole year; 
Gen. eines ganzeit Sabres, of a whole year; 
Dat, einem ganze Sabre, to a whole year; 
Acc. ett ganzes Sabr, a whole year. 

Plural, 


Nom. meine qutem Freunde, my good friends; 

Gen. meiner gutem Freunde, of my good friends; 
Dat. meinen gute Frempden, to my good friends; 
Ace. meine guten Freunde, my good friends, 


VY. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
§ 56. The comparative of an adjective is formed by adding 
the termination er, and the superlative by adding the ter- 
-Inination jte, as: | 


Reid, rich; ——veicher, richer; der reic)fte, the richest; 
fchin, fine; fcjoner, finer; der jchinfte, the finest; 
mild, mild; milder, milder; . der mildefte*, the mildest. 


The radical vowel of the positive is softened in the com-_ 
parative and superlative: a changes into G, 0 into 6, 11 into it, as: 


Mit, old; alter, older; der altefte, the oldest; 
grok, great; grifer, greater; der qrofte, the greatest; 
jung, young; jiinger, younger; der jiingfte, the youngest, 
The following Adjectives are exceptions: a 
Wabhr, trues facht, soft, slow; 
fchlanf, slender; farg, stingy; 4 
fchlaff, lax; rund, round; 
fanft, soft; bunt, motley; 
matt, faint; ftumpf, blunt; 
flach, flat; frob, joyful; 
faljch, false; hold, gracious; 
blag, pale; roh, raw; 
glatt, slippery; toll, mad; 
gerade, straight; voll, full, 





* Instead of fte, we add efte, when euphony demands it. 





ieee a neat 


and the Adjectives ending in bar, haft, and jam, as: danfbar, 
grateful; danfbarer, more grateful; boshaft, malicious; bos- 
hafter, more malicious; {parjam, economical; {parjamer, more 
economical. 


§ 57. The following Adjectives are irregular: 


Gut, good; befjer, better; der befte, the best; 

nah, near; . — naber, nearer; der nidjjte, the next; 

hod), high; hodher, higher; Der hich{te, the highest; 

viel, much; mehr, more; der mteifte, or mehrfte, the most. 


§ 58. Comparatives and superlatives are declined accord- 
ing to the same rules as the adjectives in the positive, as: der 
fleine Tijch, the small table; der fleinere Tijd), the smaller table; 
der fleinfte Tijch, the smallest table; ein Heiner Tijch, a little 
table; ein ffleinerer Tijch, a smaller table; etn fcines Buch, a 
beautiful book; ein fcjéneres Buch, a more beautiful book. 


§ 59. Superlatives can generally not be used predicatively 
without the definite article. In order to render the English 
predicative superlative without an article, a peculiar adverbial 
form is used in German, consisting of the preposition an, con- 
fracted with the dative neuter of the definite article (aim inst. 
of an dent) ‘and the WEAK form of the superlative: fchin, beau- 
tiful, superl. am fdonjten, most beautiful; cold, falt, superl. am 
falteften, coldest. 


Weldhes Thier ift dem Menfchen am treuften? What beast is most 
faithful to man ? 

Want find die Menfchen am gliid lich ften? When are men happiest ? 

Mein Freund ift amt zufrieden ften, wenn erallein ift, my friend is 
most pleased when he is alone. 


- Rem.—lIf a predicative superlative is connected with the article, itagrees 
in gender, number, and case with the subject, But if the superlative is 


qualified by a partitive noun which is logically the predicate, it agrees only 


in case and number with the subject, but in gender with the partitive noun; 
Dieje Stunde war die fhiufte meines Lebens, this hour was the most 
beautiful of my life, 
Nite Soldaten find nicht immer d1 te tapferften, old soldiers are not 
always the bravest, 
Der Nord ift das grifte aller Serbreden; murder is the greatest of 
all crimes, 





aim. OR es 


CHAPTER YV. 
THE VERB. 
I. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 

§ 60. German verbs have four moods: the Indicative, the 
Subjunctive, the Conditional, and the Imperative. 

The indicative mood has two simple tenses, as: 

Present Tense: ich lobe, 1 praise; 
Imperfect Tense: ich lobte, I praised. 

All other tenses are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs. 

Perfect Tense: ich habe gelobt, I have praised; 

Pluperfect Tense: ich hatte gelobt, I had praised; 

First Future Tense: ich werbde foben, I shall praise; 

Second Future Tense: ich werde gefobt haben, I shall have praised. 

The subjunctive mood has the same tenses as the Indic- 
ative. The conditional mood has two tenses, the Present or 
the First Conditional, and the Past cr Second Conditional. 

§ 61. The infinitive of all German verbs terminates in en 
or n*. By taking off this termination we find the stem of the 
verb, as: fcjreid is the stem of the verb fechreibew, to write; 
jag, the stem of the verb jagen, to say; dnder is the stem of the 
verb ander, to change. 

§ 62. The German verbs are divided into WEAK and 
STRONG verbs. WEAK verbs are those the imperfect of which 
is formed by the ending te, without affecting the stem, as: 
oben, imperf. ich fobte; jfagen, imperf. fagte. STrronG verbs are 


those which form their imperfect without ending by a change of 
the radical vowel, as: geben, to give; imperf. ich gab; fterben, to - 


die; imperf. id) ftarb; {dhlagen, to strike; imperf. ich fchlug. 
II. CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS. 


§ 63. The present tense of weak verbs is formed by the 
following termination, which are attached to the stem: 


Indicative. Sing. 1. —e, Subjunctive. Sing. 1. —e, 
2 —eft, y # —eft, 
Be —et, Ss =f 





* Sein (to be), thun (to do), and verbs with stems in er and el take only 


n as ending, as bettefn, to beg; vermindern, to diminish. 





wen a 





Plur, 1. —en, : Plur. 1. —en, 
2. —et, ° 2. —et, 
3. —en, 3. —en. 


The imperfect has the same endings in both indicative and 


subjunctive: 
Sing. 1. —ete, Plur. 1. —eten, 
2. —eteft, 2. —etet, 
3. —ete, 3. —eten. 


The imperative and the two participles are formed by the 
following endings: 


Imperative, Sing. —e, 
Plur. —et, 
Present Participle. —enbd, | 
Past Participle. —et, (in connection with the prefix ge). 


Rem,—1l. In the PRESENT INDICATIVE, IMPERATIVE and PAST PARTICIPLE 
the vowel e of the ending, when followed by jt or t, is generally dropped, 
except in those verbs that cannot be conveniently pronounced without 
it, These are the verbs with stems ending in bd, t, (th), gu and dn, 
as: redem (redeft, redet); antworter (antworteft, antwortet); begegnen 
(begeqneyt, begeguet); recynem (rechneft, recynet); but loben, lobft, fobt; 
jagen, jagft, fagt; lerne, lernft, lernt. Verbs ending in a sibilant Ai, fs, 
jh, 3) retain e before ft only: reijen, reifeft, reift; mijden, mifcdheft, mifdt; 
verlesen, verleseft, verlest. The dropping of the e does not apply to the 
subjunctive present: fobem, lobeft, lobet; fagem, fageft, faget, except in 
verbs ending in ern and elu, which drop thee of the ending in all forms, un- 
less it be final: ich dnbdere, du duderft, er Gndert, wir dudertt (both for indica- 
tive and subjunctive). © 

2. In the imperfect the e, preceding the final consonants is always kept, 
but initial ¢ of the ending is dropped in all persons, except in verbs with stems 
in d, t, gu and dn (id) lobte; but ich redete). 

3. The prefix ge of the past participle ( qelobt) is generally called the 
AUGMENT. It is used in all verbs, except those that are not accented on the 
first syllable, The verbs which do not take such an accent, and hence drop 
the augment, are these: 1) Verbs with the foreign ending iren or ieren, as: 
regieren (part. regiert, not geregiert); marfcjiren (marfdirt); 2) verbs with 
the prefixes be, ge, emt, emp, er, ver, jer (see § 82), as: befuchen, part. bejucht; 
gehiren, part. gehort; 3erftéren, part. zerftdrt; 3) most compounds with the 
prepositions durch, unter, iiber, um, hinter, wider, and the adverb voll (see 
§ 82), as: unterridjten, part. unterridjtet; umringen, part. umringt; widerlegen, 
part. widerlegt; vollenden, part. vollendet. Verbs compounded with other pre- 
positions or adverbs take their angment between the preposition and the 
simple verb: anflagen, part. angeflagt; ausreichen, part, ausgereidt. (See § 83). 


Indicative Mood. Subjunetive Mood. 
PRESENT TENSE. 
Sing. 1. id lobe, I praise, I do seat ich fobe, I praise* 
lam praising 
2. du lobft, thou praisest, dak ou lobeft, 
praise, etc, 7 
3. er [obt, he praises, se er lobe, | 
praise, etc. 
Plur, 1. wir fobett, we praise, etc. wir lobett, 
2. ihr lobt, you praise, ete. iby lobet, 
3. fie loben, they praise, etc. fie loben. 
IMPERFECT TENSE. “ 
Indicative and Subjunctive. 
Sing. 1. ich) lobte, I praised, I did praise, I was praising, 
2. «bu lobteft, thou praisedst, thou didst praise, etc, 
3. er lobte, he praised, etc. 
Plur. 1. wir lobtem, we praised, ete. 
2. ibr fobtet, you praised, ete. 
; 3. fie lobtem, they praised, etc. 
Imperative, Sing. [ob¢, praise (thou), Pres, Participle, lobed, praising, — 
Plur. fobty, praise (you), Past Participle. gelobt, praised, 
4) retaining the e. 
Infinitive: redem, to speak, 
Indicative, _ Subjunctive. 
PRESENT TENSE, 
Sing. 1. id) rede, I speak, J do speak, id) rede, 
Iam speaking, 
2. dir redeft, thou speakest, etc. du redeft, 
3. er redet, he speaks, etc, er rede, 
Plur. 1. wir redem, we speak, etc. wir redet, 
2. ihr redet, you speak, etc. ihr redet, 
3. fie redei, they speak, etc. fie rede, 


sins RA Gen 


MODEL OF CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS. og 
" a) dropping the e, 
Infinitive: fobem, to praise. 





* The translation of the subjunctive mood is generally not different 
from the indicative, although it must often be rendered by one of the forms 
of the potential. See the syntax §105. In our paradigms the subjunctive is. 
given without translation. 

+ If the third person is used for address, the present subjunctive is used 
with the personal pronoun after the verb: Loben Sie, praise (you), 





sgt MINS [ier 


IMPERFECT TENSE. 
Indicative and Subjunctive. 


Sing. 1, id) redete, I spoke, did speak, was speaking 
2. du redeteft, thou spokest, etc, 
3. er redete, he spoke, etc, 
Plur. 1. wir redetem, we spoke, etc, 
2. ify redetet, you spoke, etc. 
3. fie redeten, they spoke, etc, 
Imperative. Sing. rede, speak (thou) Pres. Participle. redemnd, speaking 
Plur. redet, speak (you) Past Participle. geredet, spoken. 


§&= Verbs, to be conjugated for practice: fagen, to say; glauben, to be- 
lieve; wiinfchen, to wish; fcjerzen, tojest; {chaden, to hurt; dnbdern, to change; 
vereitelu, to frustrate, marjdiren, to march; unterridjten, to instruct, 


§ 64. Irregular weak verbs. The following weak verbs 
deviate more or less from the above scheme: 


1. The auxiliary haben in many of its forms drops the consonant b, or 
changes it into t, and softens the radical vowel in the imperfect subjunctive, 
See the paradigm page 41, 

2. The potential verbs wollen, follen, finnen, migen, miiffen, biirfen, 
wiffen are conjugated by a peculiar intermixture of strung and weak forms, 
(See the paradigms page 55.) _ 

3. The verbs brennen (to burn), fennen (to know), nennen (to name), 
rennen (to run), fendem (to send), wenden (to turn), change their radical 
vowel ¢ into a in the imperfect indicative and past participle (brannte, 
fannte, nannte, etc., gebrannt, getaint, etc.). Senden and wenden drop, 
moreover, the ¢ of the imperfect indicative and past participle (against § 63. 
Rem. 1): jandte, wandte; gefandt, gewandt,* All these verbs restore the 
original vowel ¢ in the imperfect subjunctive (brennte, fennte, etc., fendete, 
wendete ). 

4. Bringen (to bring) and denfen (to think) make the imperfects 
ease dachte; Imperf. subj. seespieta dDachte; Past. part. gebradht, 
gedacht 


III, CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS, 


_ § 65. There are about a hundred and seventy-five strong 
verbs in modern Germant, some of which, however, admit of 





* Senden and wenden sometimes form their imperfects or past participles 
regularly (jendete, gejendet). 

A list of all strong verbs is contained in the Appendix. Verbs not 
occurring in that list are weak. “The present language does not form any 
more strong verbs; but all setts newly introduced in the language are weak 
weebe: by necessity. 


i, we 


both the STRONG and the WEAK conjugation, as for instance — 
rufen, imperfect rufte or rief. Their conjugation varies from ; 
that of the weak verbs in the foll6wing particulars: . 

r 


} 1. Their imperfect indicative in the first pers, sing, takes no ending, and 
always changes the radical vowel of the infinitive (femme, imperf. id) fam). — 
2. Their past participle takes the ending en and a radical vowel differing — 
either from the infinitive, or from the imperfect, or from both (see the formulas 
in the remark), q 

3. The imperfect indicative has the following scheme of eeiue 
endings: 

Sing. 1. — Plur. 1, et 
; = ft (eft) 2. t (et) 
— 3. elt. 

4, The imperfect perce: adds the endings of the present subjunc- 
tive of weak verbs, and svftens the radicals a, 0, u into a, 3, ii (indic. id) 
fam; subj. id) fame, du fameft, etc.). 

5. The second and third pers. sing. of the present indicative soften the 
radical q into G, and sometimes 0 Into 6 (jdhlagen, fclagit, jhlagt), and 
mostly change the radical ¢ into i (ie) jeben, ftebft, jieht. ~ 

6. The singular of the imperative undergoes the same change of ¢intoi, — 
but not the softening of the radical vowel, which never takes place in the 
imperative. It drops the ending e whenever it changes its vowel (fehen, 
imper. fieh; fterben, imper. ftirb). 

7. The remainder of the present indicative, the whole present subjunc- — 
tive and the present participle are always formed as in the weak verbs, 

Rem.— The vowel-changes of the imperfect and participle cannot be 
reduced to a rule, but must be learned by the appended list of strong verbs. © 
the formulas of the vowel-changes are these: 

Present (Infin.). Imperfect. Participle. 


t (ie) a ( idilafen, {chlief, gefchlafer,) 





a 

a u a (tragen, trug, getragen,) 

e a e (jehen, jah, gefehen,) 

e a. 0 (fterben, ftarb, geftorben,) 
e 0 hy) (fechten, focjt, gefodten,) 

i a w (fingen, fang, gefungen,) 

te ") ny (fliegen, flog, geflogen,) 

ei i (ie) i (ie) (fcheinen, fchien, gefchienen.) 


Some few verbs (as fommen, bitten, ftofen, rufen) fit none of these 
formulas. 


§ 66. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE STRONG FoRM. 


These are: 


l. fein and werden, the former of which makes its tenses from — 
several different roots, while the latter has two different forms for the imper- — 
fect ind. sing., (twurde and ward). See the paradigms page 43, 44, 45, 46. 





a er 


2. thu, to do, repeats the initial consonant as final letter of the im- 
perfect (that), a relic of former reduplication. Moreover, it drops the e in the 
endings of the present indicative in all persons but the first singular (thue, 
thuft, thut, thu, thut, thu). 

3. ftehen and gehen form their imperfects and participles from other 
roots (imperf. ftand [ftund], ging; part. geftanden, gegangen). They do not 
change their radical ¢ in the present. ©@tehen generally makes ftiindDe in 
imperf. subj. 

4. Many verbs belonging to the formula e, a, 0 take in the imperf. 
subj. the softened vowels 6 or ii, instead of & (befehlen, befabl, subj. befoble; 
fterben, ftarb, subj. fttirbe), 

Minor irregularities are stated in the list. 


MODEL OF CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS. 


a) Formula qa, ut, a with softening of the radical. 
Infinitive: jdlagem, to strike. 


Indicative, Subjunctive, 
PRESENT. 
Sing. 1. id) jdlage, I strike, do strike, I am striking ich. fchlage 
2. du fcjlagyt, thou strikest, etc. du fcjlageft 
3. er jcjlagt, he strikes, etc. er fdjlage 
Plur. 1. wir fhlagem, we strike, etc. wir jhlagen 
2. ihr {rjlagt, you strike, etc. ihr jchlayet 
3. fie jhlagen, they strike, etc. fie {dylagen. 
IMPERFECT. 
Sing. 1. id) jdjlug, I struck, did strike, was striking id) [lige 
2. du fclugyt, thou struckst, etc, du fchligeft 
3. ev fdj{tg, he struck, etc, er fciltige 
Plur. 1, wir fajlugem, we struck, etc. . wir fliigen 
2. ihr {cjlugt, you struck, etc. ihr fchliget 
3. fie [ehlugen, they struck, ete. fie fchltigen. 


Imperative, Sing. {cjlage, strike (thou) Pres, Participle. fdlagend, striking 
Plur, fcjlagt, strike (you) Past Participle, gejdlagen, struck. 


b) Formula e, a, 0, with change of the vowel in the pres, ind, 
Infinitive Present: fterben, to die. 


4 


Indicative, Subjunctive, 
PRESENT. 
Sing. 1. ich fterbe, I die id) fterbe 
2. du ftirbyt, thou diest du fterbeft 
| 3. er ftirbt, he dies er fterbe 
Plur, 1. wir fterbem, we die wir fterber 
2. iby fterbt, you die ihr fterbet 


3. fie fterbem, they die fie fterber. 


iy 


Indicative, . Subjunctive. 
IMPURFECT. 
Sing, 1. ich ftarb, I died id) ftiirbe 
2. du ftarbyt, thou diedst , bu ftiirbeft 
3. er ftarb, he died ev ftirbe 
Plur, 1. wir ftarbem, we died wir ftirben 
2. ihr ftarbt, you died iby fttirbet 
3. fie ftarben, they died fie jttirbet. 
Imperative. Sing, ftirb, dic (thou) Pres, Participle, fterbemd, dying 


jterbt, die (you) Past Participle, gejtorbem, died, 


IV. FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 


§ 67. Compound tenses are those which are formed by 
means of an auxiliary as finite (conjugated) verb, and with the 
past participle or the infinitive of the verb proper. There are- 
the following compound tenses in German; 1) perfect; 2) pluper- 
fect; 3) first future; 4) second future, all of which have an in- 
dicative and subjunctive mood; 5) and 6) the first and second 
tenses of the conditional mood. Besides these, there is a per- 
fect infinitive. 

§ 68. As auxiliaries of the ACTIVE VOICE are used the 
present and imperfect tenses of the verbs haben, to have, fein, to 
be, and werden, which as an ordinary verb means to become, 
but as an auxiliary has different meanings. 


Rem.— The present and imperfect tenses-of the auxiliaries haben, jein and 
werden are these: 


Present Indicative. Present Subjunctive. 
id) habe, I have id) habe, I have 
id) bin, I am ich fet, I be 
ic) werde, I shall (will) id) werbde, I shall 
Imperfect. Indicative. Imperfect Subjunctive. 
id) hatte, I had id) hatte, 1 had 
id) war, I was ic) ware, I were 
id) wurde, ——* : id) wiirde, I should or would. 


§ 69. The auxiliaries habew or ‘Fein are used for the forma. 
tion of the perfect and pluperfect tenses. The perfect is com- 
bined of the PRESENT tense of fjaben or fei, and:the past participle 
of the verb proper; the pluperfect is composed of the IMPER- 
FECT of Habeu or fet, and the past participle of the verb proper. 





* The indicative imperfect ich wurde does not occur as auxiliary of the 
active voice; but it occurs as auxiliary of the passive (see below). 











so ae ie 


Rem. The-regular auxiliary is haben, which is used to form the perfect and 
pluperfect tenses active of all transitive, almost all intransitive, all reflexive 
and many neuter verbs. But with the auxiliary fein are formed all neuter 
_ verbs that denote a passing either from one place or from one state to another, 
as fontmen, to come; gehen, to go; fallen, to fall; fterben, to die; erfranfen, 
to fall sick; ber{ten, to burst, Besides these the verbs bleiben, to remain, 
fein, to be (see the paradigms), and the intransitives folgeu, to follow, and 
begequen, to mec, are conjugated with fein, 

SYNOPSIS OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. 


a) With the auxiliary haben. 
Perfect Infinitive, gelobt (31) haben, (to) have praised. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. 
PERFECT. 
id) Habe gelobt, I have praised id) Habe gelobt, I have praised. 
| PLUPERFECT. 


id) hatte gelobt, I had praised id hatte gelobt, I had praised. 


; b) With the auxiliary fein. 
Perfect Infinitive, gefommen (ju) jetn, (to) have come. 
Indicative. Subjuncetive, 
PERFECT. 


id) bin gefommen, I have come ic) fei gefommen, I have come. 
PLUPERFECT, 

if) twar gefommen, I had come id) ware gefoimen, I had come. 

§ 70. The auxiliary werden occurs as auxiliary of the two 
- futures,and the two tenses of the conditional mood. The first 
future is formed by the present tense of werden and the PRESENT 
infinitive of the verb proper; the second future by the present 
of werden, and the PERFECT infinitive of the verb proper. 

The first conditional is formed by the imperfect subjunctive 
of werden and the PRESENT infinitive of the verb proper; the 
second conditional is formed by the imperfect subjunctive of 
werden and the PERFECT infinitive of the verb proper. 


SYNOPSIS OF THE TWO FUTURES AND CONDITIONAILS. 
Indicative. Subjunctive*. 
: FIRST FUTURE. : 
id) twerde [oben, I shall praise id) werde loben, (that) Ishould praise 





* The conjugation of the future indicative in some of its persons is the 
same as that of the subjunctive; in other persons it is different from that of 
the subjunctive (see the Paradigms). ‘The subjunctive of these tenses is only 
used in dependent clauses, especially such as are introduced by daf (that). 
It is always translated by the English potential. The conditional which is 
likewise rendered by the English potential may be often substituted for it. 
(See the syntax.) . 


“a —w Se sabes 


ee oe 


2 SECOND FUTURE. 
Indicative. ith twerde gelobt haben, I shall have praised. 

Subjunctive. td) werde gelobt haben, (that) I should have praised. - 

first Conditional. —_ ich wiirde [oben, I should (would) praise. 1 
Second Conditional. ich wiirde gelobt haben, I should (would) have praised. 


Rem. —If the verb is conjugated with jein, the second future and second 
conditional, of course, take perfect infinitives formed with fein: Srconp - u-— 
TURE. id) twerde gefommmen fein, I shall have come. Sxconp ConpiTIONAL, — 


id) wiirde gefommen fein, I should (would) have come. - 


PARADIGMS. 
1) haben, to have. 
Present Infinitive. (31) haben, to have. 


Perfect Infinitive. gehabt (31) haben, to have had. 
Present Participle. bhabend, having. 





Past Participle. gehabt, had. 
Indicative. Subjunctive, 
PRESENT. 
Sing. 1. ich habe, I have id) habe, I have (may have), ete. — 
2. du haft, thou hast du habeft 
3. er hat, he has r -.  @eehabe 
Plur. 1. wir habett, we have wir haber 
2. ihr habt, you have ihr babet 
3. fie haben, they have fie habeat. 
3 IMPERFECT. 
Sing. 1. id) hatte, I had ich hatte, I had (would have),etc, 
2. du hatteft, thou hadst du hatteft 
3. er hatte, he had er hatte 
Plur. 1. wir-batten, we had wir batten 
2. iby hattet, you had iby haittet 
3. fie batten, they had fte bitten. 
; PERFECT. ; 
ing. 1. id) habe gebabt, [have had | id) habe qehabt, I have had, etc, 
2. du haft gebabt, thou hast had du habeft gehabt 
3. er hat gehabt, he has had er habe gehabt 
Plur. 1. wir haben gebabt, we have had __ wir haben gebhabt 
2. ibr habt gebabt, you have had ihc habet gehabt 
3. fie haben gehabt, theyhavehad fie habem gehabt. 
PLUPERFECT. ae 
Sing. 1. id) hatte gehabt, I had had icy) hatte gehabt, I had had, ete 
2. du hatte ft gebabt, thou hadst had du hatte ft gebabt 
3. er hatte gebabt, he had had ex hatte gehabt 
Plur. 1. wir batten gehabt, we had had wir hitten gebabt 
3. ihr hattet gehabt, you had had ihr hattet gehabt 
2. fie Hatten gehabt, they had had _ fie bitten gebabt. 





| 
4 — 4 


Indicative. Subjunetive. 
' : FIRST FUTURE. 
Sing. 1. ic) twerde* haben, I shall have id) werde haben, I should 
i 2. du wirft haben, thou wilt have du werdeft haben [have 
. 3. er wird haben, he will have ; er werde haben 
Plur, 1. wir werden haben, we shall have wir werden haben 
| | 2. iby werdet haben, you will have iby werdet haben 
> «8. fie werdett haben, they will have * — fte werdem haben. 


SECOND FUTURE. 
Sing. 1. id) twerde gehabt haben, I shall have had ic) werde gehabt haben 
2. du wirft gehabt haben, thou wilt havehad du werdeft gehabt haben 
3. er wird gehabt haben, he will have had er werde gehabt haben 
-Plur. 1. wir werden gehabt haben, weshallhave had wir werden gehabt haben 
2. ihr werdet gehabt haben, you will have had ihr werdet gehabt haben 
3. fie werden gehabt haben, they will have had fie werden gehabt haben. 
FIRST CONDITIONAL. 

Sing. 1. id) wiirde haben, I should have 
: . Du wiirdeft haben, thou wouldst have 
. er wiirde haben, he would have 
- wir wiirdem haben, we should have 
. thr wiirdet haben, you would have 
. fie wiirdemt haben, they would have, 


Plur. 


Co bp ke CO bb 


SECOND CONDITIONAL. 
. th wiirde gehabt haben, I should have had 
. du wiirdeft gebabt haben, thou wouldst have had 
. er wiirde gehabt haben, he would have had 
. wir wiirdem gehabt haben, we should have had 
. ihr wiirdet gehabt haben, you would have had 
. fie wiivden gebabt haben, they would have had, 
IMPERATIVE. é. 
Sing. habe (du), have (thou)} 
Plur. habt (ihr), have (you) 
[haben Sie, have (you)]. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


eo be © bw = 





2) jet, to be. 
Present Infinitive. (3u) fein, to be. 
Perfect Infinitive, gemefen (31) fei, to eave been. 
Present Participle. feiend (very rare), being. 
Past Participle. getvefen, been. 





: * See the paradigm of iwerbden, 
f If a command is issued to a third person, the German generally uses 


_ the subjunctive: habe er, may he have, let him have. Thus in the first 
person plural: haben wir, Ict us have. 











- Indicative. Subjunctive, 
PRESENT. 
Sing. 1. ih bin, lam ich fei, I (may) be 
2. du bift, thou art du feieft : 
3. er ift, he is er fet j 
Plur, 1. wir find, we are wir feten 
2. ihr jeid, you are ihr jeret ; 
3. fie find, they are fie feiem. ; 
IMPERFECT. 
Sing. 1. id war, I was id) wire, I were 
2. -du warft, thou wast du wareft q 
3. er war, he was er ware J 
Plur. 1. wir ware, we were wir wirett | 
2. ifr waret (wart), you were iby waret 
3. fie waren, they were fie waren, 
PERFECT. 
Sing. 1. ich bin getwejen, I have been id) jet gewefjen 
2. dubift gewejen, thou hast been du feteft gewefen 
3. er ift gewefen, he has been er jet gemwejen 
Plur. 1. wir find gewejen, we have been wir jetem gervejen 
2. ihrjeid gewefen, you have been iby jetet gewejeit 
3. fie find gewejen, they have been fie fetes gewejen. 
~ PLUPERFECT. 
Sing. 1. ich war getwejen, I had been id) twdre getvejen 
2. du warft gewefen, thon hadst been du wareft gewejer 
‘3. ex war gewejen, he had been er ware gewefent 
Plur. 1, wir ware getvefen, we had been wir waren gevejen 
2. ify waret (wart) gewefen, you had ihr waret gewejen 


been 


. fie ware gewefen they had been 


fie waren gewwefen. 


FIRST FUTURE. 


Sing. 1. id) twerde fein, I shall be 
2. du wirft fein, thou wilt be 
3. ex wird jein, he will, be 


Plur. 1. wir werden fein, we shall be 
2. thr werdet fein, you will be 
3. fte werden fein, they will be 


ic) werde fein, I should be 
du werde ft fein 
ex werde fein 


wir werden fein 
ihr werdet fein 
fie werden fein. 





cola! ae mata 


Indicative. Subjuncetive. 
7 SECOND FUTURE. 
‘fing. 1. ic) werde gewejen fein, Ishall ic) werde gewejen fein, I should have 
have been been 
2. du wirft gewefen fein, thou du werdeft gewefen fein 
wilt have been 
3. er wird gewefen fein, he will er werde gewefen fein 
have been 


Plur. 1. wir werden gervefen fein, we wir werdem geiwefen fein 
shall have been 
2. ihr werdet gewefen fein, you ihr werdet gewefen fein 
will have been 
3. fie werden geiwejen fein, they fie werdem gewefen fein. 
will have been 


FIRST CONDITIONAL. 


Sing. 1. id) wiirde fein, I should be 
2. du wiirdeft fein, thou wouldst be 
3. ex wiirde jet, he would be 


Plur. 1. ‘wir wiirdet jet, we should be 
2. ihr wiirdet jet, you would be 
3. fie wiirden jein, they would be. 


SECOND CONDITIONAL. 


Sing. 1. ich wiirde getefen fein, I should have been 
2, du wiirdeft gewejen fein, thou wouldst have been 
. er iwiirde geiwejen fein, he would have been 


iN) 


Plur, 1, wir twiirdem gevejeit fein, we should have been 
. thr wiirdet gewefen fein, you would have been 
. fie wwiirdem gewejcn fein, they would have been. 


eo bk 


IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. jet (du), be (thou) 

Plur. feid (ir), be (you) 
[jein Sie, be (you)]. 





8. werden, to become. 


Present Infinitive, (31) werden, to become. 

Perfect Infinitive. geworbden (311) fein, to have become. 
Present Participle. werdend, becoming. 

Past Participle. geworbden, become, having become, 


Sing 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing: 


Plur, 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing, 


Plur. 


Poe 


Owe WS pe 


Ww bw On 


Ss a oO 


¥ 
2. 
3. 


1. wir werdem werden, we shall become 


2. 
3. 


Scie. MM ts 


Indicative, 
PRESENT, 
id) twerde, I become 


du wirft, thou becomest 


. ex wird, he vecomes 


. wir werden, we become 
. ifr werdef, you become 
. fie werden, they become 


IMPERFECT. 


. ih wurde (ich ward), I became 
. dit wurdeft (du Wardft), thou becamest 
. er wurde (er ward), he became 


. Wir wurde, we became 
. ihr wurdet, you became 
. fie wurden, they became 


PERFECT. 


. id) bin geworbden, I have become 
. dit bift geworden, thou hast become 
. ex ift geworden, he has become 


. wir find geworden, we have become 
. thy fetid geworden, you have become 
. fie find geworden, they have become 


PLU PERFECT. 


. id) war geworden, I had become 
. Du warft geworden, thou hadst become 
. ev War geworden, he had become 


. wir waren geworden, we had become 
. the waret geworden, you had become 
. fie waren geworden, they had become 


FIRST FUTURE, 
id) werde werden, I shall become 
du wirft werden, thou wilt become 
er wird werden, he will become 


ihy werdet werden, you will become 
fte werdem werden, they will become 


fie werden werden. 


Subj unctive. 


id) werde, I become 
(may become) 

Dit werde ft 

er werde 





wir werden : 
ihr werdet 
fie werden. 


id) wiirde 
du wiirdeft 
er wiirde 
wir wiirdert 
iby wiirdet 
fte wiirden. 


id) fet geworden 
du feteft gewoiden 
er jet geworden 


wir jetem geworden 
ihr fetet geworden — 
fie jetem geworden. 


id) ware geworbden 
du Wwareft geworden 
er ware geworden 


wir waren geworden 
ihr waret geworden 
fie warem geworbden, © 





ich werde werdert 
dit werdeft werden 
er werde werden 


wir twerdeit werden 
ihr werdet werden 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive, 


: SECOND FUTURE, 
Sing. 1. ic) werd? gemorden fein, I 


shall have become 

2. du wirft geworbden fein, thou 
wilt have become 

er wird geworden fein, he 
will have become 


ad 


lar. 1. wir werden geworden fein, 


we shall have become 
2. thy werdet geworbden fein, 
you will have become 
3. fie werdemt geworden fein, 
they will have become 


id) werde geworbden fein 
du werdeft geworden fein 


cr werde geworden fein 


wir werdem geworden fein 


ihy werdet geworbden fein 


‘’ 


fie werdem geworbden jein. 


FIRST CONDITIONAL, 


Sing. 


. th wiirde werden, I should become 


. du wiirdeft werden, thou wouldst become 
. ev Wwiirde werden, he would become 


. ihr wiirdet werden, you would become 
. fie wiirdet werden, they would become, 


1 
2 
3 
Plur, 1. wir wiirdem werden, we should become ker, 
2 
3 


SECOND CONDITIONAL. 


Sing. 


. ih) wiirde geworbden fein, I should have become 


. du wiirdeft geworden fein, thou wouldst have become 


Plur, 


. wir wiirdem geworbden fein, we should have become 


. thr wiitdet geworden fein, you would have become 
. fie wiirden geworden fein, they would have become. 


1 
2 
3. ex wiirde geworden fein, he would have become 
1 
2 
3 


IMPERATIVE. 
Sing. werbde (di), become (thou) 
Plur, werbdet (ihr), become (you) 
[werden Sie, become (you)]. 





4) Active Voice of the Weak Verb. 


Present Infinitive. 
Perfect Infinitive, 
Present Participle. 
Past Participle. 


(31t) foben, to praise. 

gelobt (31) haben, to have praised, . 
fobend, praising. 

gelobt, praised, having been praised, 


Plur, 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing, 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur, 


* Not unfrequently a pluperfect id) hatte gelo cel bya is met with, 
indicate a time happening before an action, expres 


wwe wry 


oo re to bo 


Indicative. 


PRESENT. 


. td) lobe, I praise 

. du lobft, thou praisest 

. er fobt, he praises 

. wir oben, we praise 

. thr lobt, you praise 
fie oben, they praise 


IMPERFECT, 


. th fobte, I praised 
. du lobteft, thou praisedst 
. ev lobte, he praised 


. wir fobten, we praised 
. thr lobtet, you praised 
. fie lobten, they praised 


wonwre Whe 


PERFECT, 
. if habe gelobt, I have praised 


. du haft gelobt 
. er hat gelobt 


. wir haben gelobt 
. iby habt gelobt 
. fie habets gelobt 


PLUPERFECT. 
. th hatte gelobt*, I had praised 


1 

2. du hatteft gefobt 
3. ev hatte gelobt 

1. wir hatten gelobt 
2. ihr hattet gelobt 

3. fie Hatten gelobt 


FIRST FUTURE. 
. id) werbde foben, I shall or will praise 


. Du wirft [oben 


1 
2 
3. er wird Ioben 
1 


. wir werden [ober 
2. ihr werdet loben 
3; fie werden lobe 


perfect. 


Subjunctive, 


id) lobe 
du lobeft 
er lobe 


wir lobe 
ihr fobet 
fie foben. 


id) Iobte 

du lobteft 

er lobte Re ae 
wir [obtent ¥ un 
ihr fobtet- “inp Pl 
fie lobtet. - 


ich habe gelobt 
du habeft gelobt 
er habe gelobt 


wir haben gelobt 
ihr habet gelobt 
fie Habett gelobt. 


id) hatte gelobt 
du hatteft gelobt 
er hatte gelobt 


wir hattem gelobt 
ihr hattet gelobt 
fie hatten gelobt. 


id) werde Toben 
du werdeft loben 
er werde [oben 


wir werden loben 
ihr werdet loben 
fie werden oben. 





by an ordinary plu 7 





Indicative. Subjunctive. 
SECOND FUTURE. 
Sing. 1, ic) werde gelobt haben, I id) werde gelobt haben 
shall or will have praised 
2. du wirft gelobt haben du werdeft gelobt haben 
= 3. ex wird gelobt haben er werde gelobt haben 

Plur. 1. wir werden gelobt haben wir werden gelobt haben 

2. iby werdet gelobt haben thr werdet gelobt haben 

3 


. fie werden gelobt haben fie werden gelobt haben. 


FIRST CONDITIONAL. 


Sing. 1. ic) wiirde foben, I should or would praise, etc. 
. du wiirdeft Ioben 

. ex wiirde loben 

. wir wiirden [oben 

. ibe wiirdet foben 

fie wiirdem loben. 


SECOND CONDITIONAL, 
id) wiirde gelobt haben, Ishould or would have praised, etc. 


ly 

2. du wiirdeft gelobt haben 
3. er wiirde gelobt haben 
1, 
2. 


Plur. 


“to bE 69 bo 


* 


Sing. 


Plur. wir wiirden gelobt haben 


ihe wiirdet gelobt haben 
3. fie wiirden gelobt haben. 
} IMPERATIVE. 


Sing. [obe (du), praise (thou) | 
Plur. lobt (ihr), praise (you) 
[loben Sie, praise (you)]. 


REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB, 


§ 71. The present (sometimes also the perfect) infinitive 

of all verbs may be used with the force of a noun, denoting the 
action, expressed by the verb, as an abstract. Such infinitives 
are of neuter gender, and are declined (in the singular only) 


~ like nouns ending in en (§73. Rem. 4). They must be pre- 


ceded by a neuter article or pronominal adjective in the 
neuter gender and correspond to the English participial 
noun in ing: das Lefen (Gen. des Lefens), the reading; mein 
DHandelu (Gen. meines Handelns), my acting; nac) meinem Dafiir- 
halten, according to my opinion (supposing). Many of these 


ee. eee 


infinitives have assumed the meaning of common nouns: dag 


Schreiben, the writing (a letter); das Dajein, the existence; das 


Leben, life, ete. 


§ 72. Both participles are frequently used with the force : 


of attributive adjectives, and are then declined and generally 
may be compared like ordinary adjectives with weak or strong 
inflection: der bliihende Baum, the blooming tree; ein anziehendes 


Bud, an attracting book; vorbereitende Schritte, preparatory : 


(preparing) steps; ein auffallenderes Creignig, a more striking 
event. Past participles of transitive verbs have always passive 


signification, if used attributively; they are thus more freely — 


used than the English past participles: nach gethaner Arbeit, — 


literally: after done labor (after the labor was done). But 
the past participles of many verbs, conjugated with fein, may 
be used attributively in an active sense: der gewefene Profefjor 
(literally: the been Professor), the ex-professor; mein ver{tor- 
bener Bruder, my ‘died’ brother (my late brother). 


§ 73. The conjugation of the strong verb differs only in 


the simple tenses. In all compound tenses the conjugations of 


weak and strong verbs are entirely the same, aside from the 
deviating form of the past participle. 


VY. THE PASSIVE VOICE, 


§ 74. The conjugation of the PASSIVE VOICE consists in the 
different forms of the auxiliary werden (page 45) in combina- 
tion with the past participle of the verb. The verb werden 


corresponds,in the passive voice, entirely to the English passive — 


auxiliary ‘to be.’ 


Rem.—1. The order in which the auxiliary and the verb are placed in ~ 
the passive voice is the same in English and in German, except that in those ~ 
tenses which are formed from the compound tenses of the auxiliary (perfect, | 
pluperfect, future, etc.) the past participle of the verb proper must always }_ 
precede both the participle and the infinitive of the auxiliary. Thus in} 
the German perfect passive the arrangement is ‘J have praised been,’ ich bin~ 


gelobt worden, 


2. Since werden in its compound tenses takes fein as an auxiliary, it~ 
follows that the verb ‘have,’ wherever it occurs in the English passive,must — 


be expressed by the German ,,fein”. 





OS La Se — a“ Sa lia . a. po 





rian 


49 


The augment of the past participle of werden (getvorden) is always 
iropped if werden is used as auxiliary of the passive, (ich bin gelobt worden, 
not: id) bin gelobt geworden). 


Perfect Infinitive, 


PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
Present Infinitive, gelobt (3) werden, to be praised. 


gefobt worden (31) fein, to have been praised. 


Present Participle, gefobt werdend (extremely rare), being praised. 


Past Participle, 


Sing. 


Plur, 


Sing. 


Plur, 


Sing. 


Plur, 


Sing, 


Plur, 


gelobt, praised, 
PRESENT, 


Indicative. 


. ich werbde gelobt, lam praised 
» du rwirft gelobt 
3. er wird gelobt 


. ihr werdet gelobt 
. fie werden gelobt 


1 
2 
3 
“1. wir werden gelobt 
2 
3 


IMPERFECT. 


id) wurde gelobt, I was 
praised 

2. du wurdeft gelobt 

3. er wurde gelobt 

1. wir wurden gelobt 

2. thy wurdet gelobt 

3. fie wurden gelobt 


PERFECT. - 

1. id) bingelobt worden, I have 
been praised 

2. du bift gelobt worden 
3. er tft gelobt worden 
1. wir find gelobt worden 
2. ihr feid gelobt worden 
3. fie find gelobt worden 


PLUPERFECT. 


1. id) war gelobt worden, I had 
been praised ‘ 

. du wart gelobt worden 

. ev war gelobt worden 

- wir waren gelobt worden 

. the waret gefobt worden 

3. fie waren gelobt worden 


bo woh 


Subjunctive. 


id) werde gelobt 
du werdeft gelobt 
er werde gelobt 
wir werden gelobt 
iby werdet gelobt 
fie werden gelobt. 


id) wiirde gelobt 


du wiirdeft gelobt 
er wiirde gelobt 
wir wiirden gelobt 
thr wiirdet gelobt 
fie wiirden gelobt. 


ich fet gelobt worden 

du feift gelobt worden 
er fet gelobt worden 
wir fete gelobt worden 
ifr feiet gelobt worden 
fie fete gelobt worden. 


id) ware gelobt worden 


dit wdreft gelobt worden 
er wire qelobt worden 
wir waren gelobt worden 
ihr waret gelobt worden 
fie wiiren gelobt worden. 


Sing. 


om asi 


FIRST FUTURE, 


Indicative. 
1. id werde gelobt werden, I 
shall or will be praised 
2. du wirft gefobt werden 
3. ex wird gelobt werden 


Plur. 1. wir werden gelobt werden 


Sing, 


2, ihr mwerdet gelobt werden 
3. fie werden gelobt werden 


Subjunetive. 
id) werde gelobt werden 


du werdeft gelobt werden 
ev werde gelobt werden 
wir werden gelobt werden 
ihr werdet gelobt werden 
fie werden gelobt werden. 


SECOND FUTURE, 


1. ic) werde gelobt worden fein, 
I shall or will have been 
praised 

2. du wirft gelobt worden jein 

3. er wird gelobt worden fein 


Plur. 1. wir werden gelobt worden fein 


2. ihr werdet gelobt worden fein 
3. fie werden gelobt worden fein 


id) werde gelobt worden fein 


du werdeft gelobt worden fein 
er werde gelobt worden fein 
wir werden gelobt worden fein 
ihr werdet gelobt worden fein 
fie werden gelobt worden fein. 


FIRST CONDITIONAL, 


. ih wiirde gelobt werden, I should or would be praised 


Sing. 1 

2, du wiirdeft gelobt werden 

3. er wiirde gelobt werden 
Plor. 1. wir twiirden gelobt werden 

2. thr wiirdet gelobt werden 

3. fie wiirden gelobt werden. 

SECOND CONDITIONAL, 

Sing. 1 


praised 


. ic} i wiirde gelobt worden fein, I should or would have been # 


2. dit wiirdeft gelobt worden fein 
3. er wiirde gelobt worden fein 


. wir iwiirden gelobt worden fet 


2. ihr wiirbdet gelobt worden fein 
3. fie wiirden gefobt worden fein. 


. IMPERATIVE, 
Sing. werbde (fei*) gelobt, be (thou) praised 
Plur. werbdet (jeid) gelobt, be (you) praised 
[fein Gie gelobt, be (you) praised.] 





* The form of the imperative with fein is more frequent than that with ; i 


twerden. 








o~ br = 


§ 75. The German verbs form also a: passive voice by 
means of the auxiliary fein, instead of werden. This is the case 
if the action expressed by the verb, is conceived as accom- 
plished or as a state. The meaning of the English passive is 
- ambiguous, and it can only be decided by its connection with 
the rest of the sentence whether the action at the specified time 
is considered as going on or as accomplished. The present 
passive in ‘the house is sold’ generally means that the sale has 
been accomplished, while the sentence ‘the news is believed 
to be true’, means that the belief is going on. The German 
passive is free from this ambiguity, since the passive with wer- 
det always means the going on of the action at the time spoken 
of, while the passive with fein represents the action as accom- 
plished. Thus the present tense in ,,da8 Haus i ft verfauft“, means 
that the house is. sold in consequence of a former sale, while 
»das Haus wird verfauft’ denotes that the house ‘is being sold’ - 
at present. 


VI. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 


§ 76. Verbs which are conjugated with reflexive pronouns 
as objects (§ 20) are called REFLEXIVE verbs. Their number 
is considerably larger than in English, and the German reflexive 
verb must often be translated by an English neuter or passive 
verb, or by means of a phrase: fic) freuen, to rejoice; fich 
j&hdimen, to be ashamed; fic) erfilten, to take cold. 


Rem, —Ordinary transitive verbs may in both languages become re- 
flexive, if the object of the verb denotes the subject. itself, as: fic) tédten, to 
kill one’s self; ich tédte mic), I kill myself; du tédteft dich, thou killest thy- 
self; er tddtet fic), he kills himself; wir tidten ung, we kill ourselves; ihr 
todtet eud), you kill yourselves (Gie tidten fich, you kill yourself); fie tédten — 
fic), they kill themselves, But even in common transitive verbs the reflexive 
pronoun is often understood in English, and the verb assumes then both a 
transitive and neuter force, Such English neuter verbs must he generally 
rendered by German reflexives, as: to dress (one’s self), fic) anfleiden, to move 
(one’s self), fich bewegen. 


§ 77. Many German verbs occur as reflexives only (PROPER 
REFLEXIVES). In these the reflexive pronoun is almost always 
in the ACCUSATIVE case (see the Paradigm). In verbs that — 
‘may also be used with non-reflexive objects, the case of -the 


oes, A 


reflexive pronoun may be the dative, if the verb as such takes 
its object in that case: ich fcdhmeicle mir, I flatter myself 
(jdmeicheln being construed with the dative); du gibft dir 
Wtihe, thou takest pains (givest trouble to thyself). 

Jz For reciprocal verbs see Practical Part p. 83, Obs.4, For impersonal 


reflexives see §79, Rem. 3. For the translation of the forms with self by felbft, 
see P. P. p. 83, Obs, 2. | : 


~ 


PARADIGM OF A PROPER REFLEXIVE VERB. 


Present Infinitive. fitch freuen, to rejoice. 
Perfect Infinitive, ftch gefreut (31) haben, to have rejoiced, 
Present Participle. fic) freuend, rejoicing, 


Past Participle. wanting,* 
PRESENT. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Sing. 1. ih frene mid), I rejoice id) free mid) © 
2. du freuft dic), thou rejoicest Du freueft did) 
3. er freut fich, he rejoices er freue fic) 
Plur. 1. wir freuen ung, we rejoice wir freuen uns 
2. ibr freut eudj, you rejoice ihr freuet euch 
3. fie freuen fic), they rejoice fie freuen fich. 
IMPERFECT, : 
Sing. 1. ich freute mich, I rejoiced ich freute mich 
2. du freuteft did), thou rejoicedst. du freuteft dic 
3. er freute fic), he rejoiced er freute fic) 
Plur. 1. wir freuten ung, we rejoiced wir freuten uns 
2. ibr freutet euch, you rejoiced ihr freutet euch 
3. fie freuten fich, they rejoiced - fie freuten fich. 
PERFECT. 
Sing. 1. id) babe mid) gefreut, I have id) habe mid) gefreut 
rejoiced ; 
2. du haft dich gefreut du Hhabeft did) gefreut 
3. er hat fid) gefrent er habe fich gefreut 
Plur, 1. wir haben uns gefreut wir haben uns gefreut 
: 2. ihr habt euch gefreut ihr habet euch gefreut 
3. fte haben fich gefreut fie haben fich gefreut. 





* Reflexives cannot form passives, and since the past participle has al- 
ways passive signification (unless the verb be conjugated with fein), a past 
particlple of reflexive verbs cannot exist. In the past participle which is 
used for forming the compound tenses the reflexive pronoun grammatically 
belongs to the auxiliary, not to the participle. ; 


eee se ee 


—— > Le | 


Sing. 


i 


Plur. 
Sing. 
— *~Pilur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


OO be ww bb 


at SE SS 


. PLUPERFECT. 


Indicative, Subjunctive. 
1. icy hatte mich gefrent, I had 


ich hatte mid) gefreut 


rejoiced 


: dit hatteft dich gefreut 

. ev hatte fic) gefreut 

. wir batten uns gefreut 
. thr hattet euch gefreut 
. fie hatten fic) gefreut 


. ich twerde mid) frenen, I shall 


du hatteft dich gefremt 
er hatte fitch gefrent 
wit Hatten uns gefreut 
ihr hattet end) gefreut 
fie hatten fic) gefreut. 
FIRST FUTURE. 

id) werde mid) freuen 


or will rejoice 


. du wirft dich freien 

. er wird fich fremen 

. wir werden uns frerert 
. ihr werdet eudh freuen 
. fie werden fid) freuen 


Dit Wwerdeft dich frewen 
er werde ftch freien 
wir werden uns freien 
ihr werbdet euch freuen 
fie werden fic) freuen. 


SECOND FUTURE. 


. id) werde mid) gefreut haben, icy werde mid) gefrenut haben 


I shall or will have rejoiced 


. du wirft dich gefreut haben dit twerdeft dich gefreut haben 


. er wird fic) gefreut haben er werbde fic) gefreut haben 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 


wnrFownwr 


. wir werden uns gefreut haben wir werden uns gefreut haber 
. ihc werdet euch gefreut haben ihr werbdet ech gefrent haben 
. fie werden fic) gefreut haben fie werden fich gefreut haben. 


First Conditional. 


. id) wiirde mich freuen, I should or would rejoice 
. du wiirdeft dich frenen | 


er wiirde fich freuen 


. wir tiirden uns frenen 
. thr wiirdet eud) freuen 


fie wiirden fic) freuen. 
Second Conditional. 


. ich wiirde mich gefrent haben, Ishould or would have rejoiced 
. Dut wiirdeft dich gefreut haben 

. ev twiirde fich gefreut haben 

. Wir wiirden uns gefreut haben 

. ihe wrirdet ench gefrent haben 


fie wiirden fic) gefreut haben. 
Imperative. 


freue did), rejoice (thou) 
Plur, freuet eud), rejoice (you) 
[freuen Sie fidj, rejoice (you).] 


ee, ee 


VII. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
~-3 78. The impersonal relation of verbs is expressed both 
in German and in English by the neuter singular of the personal 
substantive pronoun of the third person (¢3, it). But many 
impersonal expressions are peculiar to the German language, 
and must be rendered by personal forms in English (see 
Practical Course, pp. 86, 87). 

§ 79. The German IMPERSONAL PASSIVE is a general imper- 
sonal form, applying to all neuter and intransitive verbs if the 
agency of the action is assigned to PERSONS* in GENERAL, without 
any statement of their names or qualities, as: ©3 wird getanst 
(literally: ‘ié is danced’), meaning ‘people dance,’ ‘there is 
dancing’; ¢3 wird viel’ qebaut (literally: ‘it is much built’), 


meaning ‘ people are building much,’ ‘there is much building.’ — 
Rem.— 1. The English equivalents that are applied to rendering this — 


peculiar German form are various, and depend on the idea conveyed by the 
impersonal expression. In general an active expression with some im- 
personal or uncertain subject may be employed (there is, people, one, they). 
Often a phrase may be substituted with a transitive object, in which case the 


passive form may be kept: ©8 wurde fpat 3u Nadht gejpeift, a late supper was — 


taken, €8 wurde fiarf gewettet, bets were made freely. 


2. The impersonal passive form is the only passive form of which nenter 3 
verbs are capable, and the only one that can be applied to those active verbs _ 


which in German require their object to be in the DATIVE or GENITIVE. The 


English language, connecting all active verbs with the objective case, may — 
always use such verbs in @ PERSONAL passive form, which must be rendered — 
by an IMPERSONAL passive, if the German verb requires any other case of the — 
object but the accusative: J am believed, ¢3 wird mir geglaubt (not ich werde 
geglaubt, the verb glauben requiring the dative); 1 am commanded, e8 wird mir — 
befohleu (literally: a is commanded to me); I am obeyed, e3 wird mir gqehordt. 
The impersonal e$ in such transitive verbs is frequently dropped, and the ~ 
dative opens the phrase: Dtir wird geglaubt, mir wird befohlen, mir wird ge — 
hordt. Thus with the genitive: €3 wird meiner gedadht (meiner wird gedadt), — 


I am remembered (gedenfen governing the genitive). 


3, Ifa neuter verb is qualified by an adverb or a clause, a REFLEXIVE — 
IMPERSONAL may often be used instead of an impersonal passive to express facts 
always happening under the circumstances, as: €8 taujt fich hier gut (literally: 
it dances itself well here), one dances well here, here is good dancing. G8 ftirbt 
fic leicht, wenn man ein gutes Gewifjen hat, one dies easily if he has a good — 


conscience. 





* It cannot be applied to those neuter or intransitive -verbs the idea of g 
which apply to things only. Thus we cannot say: e8 wird geblitht; e8 wird 


gejdjienen (of stars for instance); ¢8 wird mifgliidt, etc. 








VIII, THE POTENTIAL VERBS. 


g 80. There are seven POTENTIAL VERBS: fénnen, migen, 
wollen, follen, miijfen, diirfen and wijjen*, the conjugation of which 
is irregular, (See Practical Course pp. 108. 109.) 


Rem, — The POTENTIAL VERBS Cr MODAL AUXILIARIES are in several respects 
treated alike: 

1. They reject the ending ¢ in the first pers. sing, ind, sondii 

2. The third pers. sing, ind. present is like the first. 

3, The radical vowel of the sincuLar ind, pres, is different from that of 
the infinitive, except in follen. 

4. The radical vowel of the pLurAL ind, present and of the whole sub- 
junctive present is the same as that of the infinitive, 

5. The radical vowel of the imperfect indicative is different from that of 
the infinitive, except in wollen and jollen, and also different from that of the 
present, except in miiffen and follen. 

6. The imperfect subjunctive has the same radical vowel as the infin- 
itive, except in wiffen. 

7. The imperfect conjugates WEAK. 

8. The past participle has the weaK form, taking the radical vowel of 
the imperfect. But it has the srrone form without augment (which gives it 
the appearance of the infinitive), whenever another infinitive is dependent 
on it: Sd) habe nicht fommen finnen (instead of ic) habe nicht fonimen ge- 
fonnt), I have not been able to come. Only wiffen forms always the participle 
gewuft. 

9. The present and imperfect tenses of all potential verbs may be rendered 
by one of the English auxiliaries of the potential mood or future tense. 
But the infinitive, the participles and the compound tenses must be rendered 
by English verbs different from the auxiliaries of the potential and future. 


PARADIGMS. 
1) fénnen, migen, wollen, 
Present Infinitive. | 
finnen, to be able mogen, to like wollen, to intend, to be 


willing 
Perfect Infinitive, 


gefonnt (311) haben, to gemodt (zn) haben, to —_getwollt (3) habent, to have 
have been able. have liked intended, to have been 


willing 





* The verb wiffen belongs here in regard to its conjugation, In its 
meaning, too, it often answers to the English potential: Gr wufte e3 nidt 
anders 31 made, he could not do otherwise. 

+ ‘The history of the language distinctly shows that these forms are no 


infinitives, but strong forms of the participles without augment, See Cri S 
German Grammar P. IV p. 168 foll. 





MS eee 


Present Participle (rare). 


fonnend, being able migend, liking wollend, intending. 
} 
! Past Participle,* 

gefonnt (fonnen) gemodt (mogen) gewollt (wollen). 

Present {ndicative. 

id) fann, I can id) mag, I may ich mill, I will, I intend 

du Fannft du macit du willft, thou intendest, etc. 
er fann er mag er will, he intends, etc. 

wir finnen * wir migen wir wollen, we will, we intend, ete. 
iby finnt ifr migt ifr wollt, you intend, ete. 

fie founen fte mogen fie wollen, they intend, etc. 

> Present Subjunctive, 
ih fonne id) mige id) wolle. 


(is conjugated regularly). 


Imperfect Indicative.+ 


id) fonnte, I could id) modte, I might id) wollte, I intended, ete. 
Imperfect Subjunctive. 
id) finnte id) midhte ich wollte. 
Pe fect. 

ich habe gefonnt (finnen), ic) habe gemodht (migen), id) habe getwollt (wollen), 

I have been able I have liked I have intended, etc. 
Pluperfect. 

id) hatte gefount (fin- ich hatte gemocdjt(mbgen), ich hatte gerollt (wollen), 

nen), I had been able I had liked I had intended, ete. 


First Future. 
ic) werbde fonnen, I shall id) werde migen, I shall ic) werde wollen, I shall 


be able _like s intend, etc. 
Second Future. 
id) werbde gefount haben, id) werde gemodjt haben, id) werde gewollt haben, I 
I shall have been able I shall have liked shall have intended, 
etc. 





'* The past participle of the potential verbs is only used to form the 
compound tenses, 
+ The conjugation of all tenses through the different persons is regular, 
except that of the present indicative. | 


— Ve ee 


oe a a ee i pi ee a i _— 








eer. eee 


- First Conditional. 
id) wiirde finnen, I ich wiirde migen, I id) wiirde wollen, I should 
should be able should like intend, etc, 
Second Conditional. 


id) twiirde gefount haben, ich wiirde gemodjt haben, ich wiirde gewollt haben, I 
i should have been  Ishould have liked should have intended j 
able etc, 


Imperative. 
~ wolle, (used redundantly). 


2) mitffen, diirfen, wiffen. 
Present Infinitive. 
miiffen, to be obliged _diirfen, to be at liberty _ wiffen, to know, to be able. 
Perfect Infinitive. 


gemufft haben, to have gedurft haben, to have gewuft haben, to have 
been obliged been at liberty known. 


Present Particuple. 
miiffend (rare), being diirfend (rare), beingat wijfjend, knowing. 
obliged liberty 


f Past Participle, 


gemuft (miiffen) gedurft (diirfen) gewupt. 
| Present Indicative, 

id) mu, I must id) dDarf, I may (am at ich weif, I know 
: liberty) 

du mut bu darfft ” but weift 
 evimug er darf er wef 
— wir miiffen wir diirfer wir wiffen | 

iby miift ihr diivft iby wift 
fie miiffen fie diixfen fie wiffer. 

Present Subjunctive. 
ich miiffe id) diirfe id) wiffe. 


2 Imperfect Indicative. 
id) mufte, I must (was id) durfte, 1 wasat liberty id) wufte, I knew, 
obliged) 3 
Imperfect Subjunctive. 
id) miifte id) diirfte id) wiifte. 
Perfect, 


id) habe gemuft (miiffen), ich habe gedurft (diirfen), id) habe gewuft, I have 
I have been obliged I have been at liberty known. 


ich hatte geimupt fmiiffen), 
I had been obliged 


ic) werbde miifjen, I shall 
be obliged 


id) werde gemuft haben, 
I shall have been ob- 
liged 


ich wwiirde miiffen, I 
should be obliged 


ich wiirde gemut haben, 
I should have been 
obliged 


58 


Pluperfect, 
ich hatte qgedurft (diirfen), 
I had been at liberty 
First Future. 
ic) werbde diirfen, I shall 
be at liberty 
Second Future, 
ich werde gedurft haben, 
I shall have been at 
liberty 
First Conditional. 
id) wiirde Ddiirfen, I 
should be at liberty 
Second Conditional, 
ich wiirde gedurft haben, 
I should have been at 
liberty 


id) hatte gewuft, I had 


known. 


id) werde wiffen, I shall 


know. 


id) werde gewuft haben, — 


I shall have known. 


a ee eg ee 


ic) wiirde wiffen, I should © 


know. 


ich wiirde geiwugt haben, I 
should have known, 


_ Imperative, 3 
master wifje, know. 
jes The verb follen in the present indicative singular is thus conju-— 
gated ich foll, du follft,er foll. In all other forms itis regular, It is trans-_ 
lated by J am to, and sometimes by J shall; also by it is said that, as: ex foll ane 
gefommen jein, it is said that he has arrived, he is said to have arrived. : 





Rem, The Pluperfect of the English potential mood with could have, might 
have and should have is generally rendered by hatte finnen, bitte follen; as: 
he could (might) have praised, er hitte {oben finnen (not migen); he should have 
praised, ex hatte loben follen. But ‘should have’ in the first person generally cor-_ 
responds to the German conditional: I should have praised, if etc., id) witrde- 
gelobt haben, wenn ete. 


7 
: 
a 






IX. COMPOUND VERBS. 


§ 81. COMPOUND VERBS are either SEPARABLE or INSEPAR-— 
ABLE, according as their prefixes or words which enter in com-_ 
position with them, may or may not be separated . in some of — 
their forms. 

§ 82. INSEPARABLE compound verbs are conjugated like 
ordinary verbs, except that they refuse the augment of the past 
participle. See § 63, Rem. 3. They are compounded 1)with one 
of the prefixes ge, be, ent, er, ver, zer and mif; 2) with one of 
the prepositions hinter wider, durc), iiber, um, unter and the ad- 





ae ane 


verbs voll and wieder. But verbs compounded with bdurd, 
iiber, int, unter, volf and wieder are sometimes separable*. 

§ 83. SEPARABLE compound verbs are those which are 
compounded with prepositions or adverbs other than those 
mentioned § 82+. These are the prepositions ab, an, auf, aus, 
bei, in (with accus., always taking the form ein), mit, nad), vor, 
ob, 31, and the adverbs da (generally taking the form dar), 
fort, nieder, weg, 3uritcd, zufammien, Her, hin with the compounds 
of the last two (herab, heran, herauf, hinab, hinauf, einher, umber, 
umbin), and many other adverbs and adjectives as fern, fret, 
lieb, lo8, ete. 

§ 84. Those words which form separable compounds with 
simple verbs, are detached from their verbs in the present 
and imperfect tenses and the imperative mood, and are placed 
after them (generally at the end of the sentence), as anfangen: 
pres. ich fange an; imperf. ich fig an; imper. fauge an. The sign 
3 of the infinitive is placed between the prefix and the simple | 
verb: anzufangen. The augment of the past participle is like- 
wise inserted between the prefix and the verb: angefangen. 

: | PARADIGM, _ 

Pres. Infinitive. anfangen (anjufangen), to begin. 

Perf. Infinitive. angefangen (ju) haben, to have begun, 

Pres, Participle. anfangend, beginning. 

Past Participle, angefangen, begun. 

Pres. Indicative. ich fange an, I begin 

bit fang{t an, thou beginnest 
er faingt an, he begins 

wir fangen an, we begin © 
ihr fangt an, you begin 

fie fangen an, they begin. 

Pres. Subj. ich fange an, dit fangeft an, etc, 

Imperf. Ind. ich fing ai, du fingft an, etc. 

Imperf. Subj. ich) finge an, du fingeft an, ete. 

Perfect. id) habe angefangen, du haft angefangert, etc. 

Pluperfect. ic) hatte angefangen, du hatteft augefangen, etc. 

First Future. —_ ich werde anfangen, du wir{t anfangen, ete. 

Second Future, — ich werde angefangen haben, du wirft angefangen haben, ete, 





* Whether a compound. verb is separable or not, may always be seen 
from the lexicons. 

+ There are some verbs, having the appearance of compound verbs, 
which seem to contradict this rule, as: fiebfofen, luftwandeln, offenbaren. fhe 
treatment of these few exceptional verbs must be learned from the lexicons. 


os ye 


First Conditional. ich wiirde anfangen, du twiirdeft anfangen, etc. 

Second Conditional. id) wiirde angefangen haben, du wiirdeft angefangen 
haben, etc. 

Imperative. fange an, begin (thou); fanget an, begin (you). 

Rem.—1. Ifa separable compound is in aclause, requiring the transpo- 
sition of the finite verb to the end of the clause (see § 106,7.10), no separation 
of the prefix takes place, and the separable compound is treated like an inse- 
parable compound verb, retaining however the augment, and 3u as sign of the 
infinitive between the prefix and the verb: wenn (dag) er anfingt, if (that) 
he begins; welche wir anfangen, which we begin. 

2. Many of the particles entering into composition with verbs, are 
themselves compounp. If they are both separable compounds, both are se- 
parated from the verb: vorangehen, to precede; Pres. ic) gehe voran, If the 
former of the two is inseparable, the latter being separable, the whole verb 
is INSEPARABLE if the compound prefix cannot be used as a word by itself: 
verabfolgen, to hand over; Pres, ic) verabfolge (since a word verab does not 
exist). But bevorftehen, to impend; Pres. ic) ftehe bevor, I impend (the word 
bevor occurring separately as an adverb).— If the former of the two prefixes 
is separable, and the latter inseparable, the verb is sEPARABLE, and only the 
first prefix is separated: porenthalten, to keep away; Pres. ich enthalte vor, I 
keep away*. ‘This last class of verbs does not admit of an augment in the 

‘participle: ic) habe vorenthalten, I have kept away. - 

3. Some verbs have the appearance of separable compounds, but are 
derived from compound nouns, as friibftiiden, to breakfast (from Friihftiic); 
furzweilen, to cause pastime (from Kurzweil); rathjdlagen, to deliberate (from 
Rath{dlag), and many others. Such verbs can never be separated (ich friih- 
ftiicfe, etc.). : 


4. Separable compounds and those verbs derived from compound nouns ~ 
(Rem. 3.) have their principal accent on the prefix (an’fangen; bevor’ftehen; — 


rath‘{dlagen). Inseparable compounds have their main accent on the radical 
syllable of the verB: entwei'den, vollbrin’gen. Those prefixes which may 
belong to an inseparable or to a separable verb (§ 82.) have the main accent 
if the verb is separable, but the accent is on the radical syllable of the verb 


if the latter is inseparable (iiberwin'den, to defeat; but ii’bergehen, to go over). — 
Those exceptional inseparables which are mentioned page 597 have partly their — 
accent on the prefixes, partly on the verbs. - Thus liebfofen and luftwandeln — 
are accented on the prefix; the verb frobloden, to exult, is by some accented 
on froh, by some on fod; the compounds with mif{ are generally, but not — 
always accented on the prefix (mif’braudjen, but also migbrau’den). This — 





* There are some verbs, especially those beginning with aufer and auger, — 
which never occur in those forms, which would require a separation of the ~ 
particle, Thus we may say: alg er anferftand (when he arose) or weldje ev 
auserjah, (which he selected), if the clause requires a transposition of the verb, — 
in which no separation of the prefix takes place. But if the clause does not — 
admit of transposition, such verbs cannot be employed at all (not: Ex erftand 


auf; icy erjah aus; nor can we say: Jd) auferftand, etc. ). 








ee a ce 


class of compounds takes the augment ge in the participle if the accent is on 
_the prefix; if the accent is on the verb, the augment is dropped (gelieb’foft, 
—geluft’wandelt; gefroh'lodt or frohlodt’; geniif braudjt or mifgbraudt’). The 

verb offenbaren, although it has its accent always on the syllable ba, is used 
_ both with or without the augment (offenbart’ or geofjenbart’). 





CHAPTER VI. 
PREPOSITIONS. 


§ 85. Prepositions govern either the genitive, or the da- 
_ tive, or the accusative, or both the dative or accusative. 
§ 86. 1. The prepositions governing the genitive are: 


halber (halben), for the sake of; jenfeit, beyond; 

auferhalb, outside of; ftatt (anftatt), instead of; 
umerhalb, within; ungeadtet, notwithstanding; 
oberhalb, above; unweit (unferi), not far from; 
unterhalb, below; | verimige, by means of; 

fraft, in virtue of; wihrend, during; 

fangs (entlaig), along; wegen, on account of; 

faut, according to; um—tillen, for the sake of; 
mittelft (vermittelft), by means of; tro, in spite of; 

diesjeit, this side of; zufolge, in consequence of. 


je= The prepositions {ings (entlang), tro, zufolge are also connected 
with the dative. alber, z3ufolge (generally) and sometimes ungeadjtet are 
placed after their governing nouns. Wegen mosty follows its noun, 


9. With the dative are construed: 


aus, out of; nad), after; 

auger, outside, except; nddft Qunddft), next to; 
bei — (see Rem. 2); nebft, wt 
binnen, within; famimt, t together with; 
entgegen, against; feit, since; 

~  gegeniiber, opposite; 3 pon, from, of; 
gemiif,, in accordance with; zu, to; 
. mit, with; suivider, contrary to. 


| HE Entgegen, gegeniiber, gemaf are generally placed after their nouns. 
The preposition ob, over, on account of, is now obsolete, except in poetry. 


8. The prepositions requiring the accusative are: 


durd, through, by; ohue, without; 

’ y 

fiir, for; um, about, around; 
gege, against; wider, against. 


_- g&- The preposition fonder, without, is now obsolete, except in some 
phrases and in poetry. 


i 
$5 ty deco 


tee 


4, The prepositions requiring either the dative or the acct 
sative are: § 
an, at; iiber, over, above; 4 

auf, on, upon; unter, under, beneath, among; H 
hinter, behind; yor, before; : 

in, in, into; z1wifdhen, between*. 4 

§ 

3 


neben, beside; 


Rem.—l. The adverb bi8 is frequently connected with, and placed bo- 
fore prepositions expressing motion in space, or progress in time in order to_ 
denote the limit up to which a motion takes place, or to limit the extent of 
time. Such combinations are bis nad), bis zu, bis an, bis auf, bis in, bis bor, 
They are generally rendered as far as, till, up to or to: Bis nad Gerlin, as far 
as Berlin; bi8 an den Flug, up to the river; bis 3u Weihnadjten, (up) to” 
Christmas. Before proper names of places, and in some other phrases the 
preposition connected with big is often omitted: Gis Serlin, as far as Berlin; 
bis heute, till to-day. 3 

2. There is no general equivalent for the preposition bei in English. 
1) In local connections bei means ‘near by’: Gin Dorf bet Berlin, a village” 
near Berlin; die Schladt bei Gadowa, the battle of (at) Sadowa. 2) Before 
names of persons bei denotes the pLace where these persons are or live: Sj 
war bei meinem Bruder, I was with (at the house of) my brother; teh bleibe 
bei Shnen, I remain with you; dies war Gitte bei den Griechen, this was the 
custom among the Greeks (in their country), 3) Before nouns expressing 
Events it denotes their coincidence with the action, (bei jeiner Unfunft, at 
his arrival; bet jener Gelegenheit, at that occasion), or a relation of cause, 
being generally rendered by a participial clause: Bet dent guten Crfolge dice 
fer Maafregel trug er fein Bedenken, noc) weiter 3u gehen, this measure being 
successful (considering the success of this measure), he did not hesitate to go_ 
still farther. i 


3. The preposition feit denotes not only a Trmx-pornt, represented as the 
beginning of actions, but also a periop of time notcompleted, In the former 
signification it corresponds to since or ever since, in the latter to for: Sch bin 
hier feit dem erften diefes Ptonats, I have been here since (ever since) the first 
of this month. Sd bin (jcjon) feit dret Monaten hier, Ihave been here for 
three months. i 



























* The meanings which are here assigned to the different preposition: 
are those by which they are GENERALLY translated. But often German pre 
positions must be rendered by English prepositions different from those whic 
we have assigned to them in the above lists, Such idiomatic difference 
must be learned by practice and the lexicons, as for instance: Unter $e 
mandes WArtgen fein, to be before one’s eyes; an Semanden denfen, to think of 
somebody; fich um etwas drehen, to turn on something; pon etwas abbdm 

en, to depend on something, Furdt vor Semandem, fear of somebody; m1 
Sitandern or an Semanden verheirathet fein, to be married to somebody; reid) 
an Metallen, rich in metals, etc., etc. Z_ 


te GE cada 


4. Those prepositions that govern two cases (No. 4) require the accu- 


_ gative: 1) if they imply a motion towards their object; 2) if they denote the 


placing of something upon an object, or the application of something toa 


_ thing; 3) if they indicate a direction or tendency of the mind towards 


- gomething, 


Examptes: To No, 1: Sc) gee in den Garten, I go into (to) the garden, 
Sch fchice ih in die Stadt, I send him into (to) the city, Er fteigt anf 
das Dad), he ascends the roof (literally: mounts upon the roof). Gin Angriff 


auf den Feind, anattack upon the enemy. Gie fchicfen Gejandte an den 
_ Rinig, they send envoys to the king. Gie jiehen fid) hinter ihre Ger- 
 fchanzungen 3uviid, they withdraw behind their intrenchments. — To No. 2 
) Sch ftecte Geld in die Tafde, I put money into my pocket, ch lege das 


— Such auf den Tijd), I place the book on the table. Qc) Hopfe an die 
 Tphiir, I knock at the door (apply a knock to it). Sch bane ett Haus auf den 
Slag, I build a house on the ground (the house being placed there), Gr ftiitst 
— fi) auf mic), he leans on me (implying the placing of the body). Gin 
SAlag ins Gefidt, auf die Sdyulter, a blow in the face, a tap on the 
shoulder (applied to the face, etc.). Sch feste mid) neben ifu, I seated 


myself beside him. Gr fett fid) unter dem Baum, he takes a seat beneath 


ihe tree.—To No. 3: Gr denft an mid, he thinks of me. Gie fchauten auf 
die Stadt, they looked on the town. An Femanden fdjreiben, to write 


tosomebody. Uber eine Gache fpredjen, to speak of something, 


5. If these prepositions are used in other relations, they require the 


patrve. Thus the dative is required if the governing verb denotes rest or 


Brine: Gr wohnt in der Stadt, he lives in the city. Gr fteht hinter 


dem Hauje, he stands behind the house. Gr fist unter dem Baume, he 
is sitting beneath the tree. Cr iftin grofer Berlegenheit, he is in a great 
embarassment. Der Unterfdicd gwifden diefer und fener Sache ijt 
nidjt grog, the difference (being) between this and that thing is not great. 
When the governing verb expresses motion, but the preposition does not 


_ denote the aim of the motion, the pative, not the accusative, must be used: 


Gr ging an dem BWalde vorbei, he passed by the wood (literally: went past 


at the wood). Gr fam unter der Erde hervor, he came from below the 
- ground, 


6. If these prepositions are used in relations of Tre, they require the 
DATIVE in answer to the question when, but the aAccusATIVE in answer to the 


- question how long: Bor einiqen Tagen, several days ago, am (an dem) 


gweiten Miai, on the second of May. But: Er bejuchte mic) auf einige Tage, 
he visited me for several days. After big they always require the accusative: 


bis anf diejen Tag, up to this day. Weber, in relations of time, requires 


the accusative: Veber vierzehn Sage, in a fortnight. 


- 


7. It is often difficult to determine the correct case to be employed 
after these prepositions when INTERNAL relations are spoken of. All depends 
here on the manner in which such relations are concerveD in the German 
language. This cannot be fully understood unless the different meanings of | 


ate Ri ad 


the governing verbs have been made entirely clear. In such instances the 

use of the correct case must be learned by practice or the lexicons, | 
_ § 87. Prepositions can generally not be used before the in- 
terrogative pronoun wa8 and the neuter e$ of the personal pro-_ 
noun of the third person. Instead of such combinations the 
German language generally employs adverbs compounded with — 
wo (or wor), for was; and adverbs compounded with da (or 
dar), instead of e8: Womit (not mit was*) befchaftigt ihr ench, 
with what do you occupy yourselves? — Sch habe mid) Darin 
(not in ¢8) geirrt, I was mistaken in it. j 

Rem.—1l. These combinations with wo and da are used only with the i 
following prepositions: mit, nebjt, bei, von, nach, aus, 3u, durd), fiir, um, — 
gegen, wider and all prepositions governing both the accusntive and dative. — 
Instead of wegen with e8, we say deswegen (on account of it), and instead ou 
wegen with vas: westwegent (for what reason) ? 

2. The same adverbial combination with wo and the prepositions men- : 
tioned above is frequently used instead of prepositions with relative pro-— 
nouns, as worin, instead of in twelchem, in which; woran, instead of an - 
weldjem, at which; wodurd) instead of durd) weldjen (weldje, weldyes), ete | 
But these combinations are inadmissible if the relative pronoun has a PERSON 
as antecedent, 

§ 88. The dative and neuter accusative of the definite ar- 
ticle is frequently contracted with some prepositions into one ; 
word, taking the form of the letter m for the dative, and $8 for 
the neuter accusative. | 

Thus are especially used: 





am instead of an dem pom instead of von dem 
ang 4 an das Zumt ” gut Dent 
int . in dem durds ss, dDurd) das 
ing F in das fiirs 8 fiir dag 
arfs 3 auf das iiberm liber dem 
beim yj bei dem iibers on iiber das. 


The dative feminine of the article is thus contracted with the prepos- 
ition 31 only (zur instead of 31 der). | 





* Occasionally we meet with the expressions auf twas, von was, mit 
was, durch was, But these combinations are considered as faulty if the pre- 
position governs the dative, and as inelegant if the preposition is connec 
with the accusative. 

+ The spelling defiwegen and weftwegen is very frequently met with; but 
Desivegen and weswegen are more correct. 








CHAPTER VII. 
: CONJUNCTIONS. 


~ § 89. Conjunctions are divided into coordinating and sub- 
_ordinating conjunctions. The coordinating conjunctions are: 


a . 
2 


und, and denn, for 

aber, entiveder....oder, either... .or 

allein, but weder....noc), neither... .nor 
‘| fondern, nicht nur (blog) .... fondern aud, not 
{ dod), yet, still, but only....but also. 
4 oder, or 


A Rem. Gonbdern is only used after sentences or phrases containing a ne- 
_gative: Shr follt nidjt fpielen, fondern fernen, you must not play but 
study. See P. C. page 72. The conjunction but, if it does not correct a 
uy previous clause, but merely restricts it, is rendered by aber, not by jondern: 
Sch fann dir nicht helfen; aber mein Bruder will e8 thun, I cannot help you, 
but my brother will [do it]. ein and aber are used almost synonymously, 
: but allein imparts a stronger emphasis to the sentence than aber: Du magft 
“dies thun, allein erinnere dich deines Verjpredjens, you may do this, but re- 
_ member your promise. 


§ 90. The subordinating conjunctions are: 


da, that nadjdem, after 

damnit, in order that wihrend, ) 

alg, when, than, as inden, while f 

fo....al8*, as....as indeffen, j 

da, since, as wie, as; bis,till 

weil, because feitdem, jeit, since (ever since) 

wen, if, when obgleich, 

ob, whether (if) sliides. (ses P, tame 162) 

alg ob (wie wenn), as if obwobl, etc. es or 8 ; 
i ehe, : je....defto, the.... the ae 
nt bevor, before ungead)tet, although ; 
ta Rem.—I. Clauses introduced by subordinating conjunctions (or by rela. 


_ tive adjectives and adverbs) are called DEPENDENT SENTENCES Or CLAUSES, They 

_ require the finite verb to be at the end of the clause: Gr ift gliidlidh, weil 

er zufrieden ift, he is happy, because he is contented, The sentence to which 
‘the dependent clause is appended, is called the princrpan sentence. 





* Here belongs the combination fowobh{.... al8 (aud), as well... .as, 
both. ...and, which is mostly used to connect single words or phrases with 
the force of coordinating conjunctions: Gowwobl deine, als aud) meine Freunde, 
both your and my friends, Gowwohl! Vergangenes als Zufiinftiges, the past as 
well as the future, 


a ie. Se 


2. For the relation of the words wenn, wann, al8, when, if, see Practi 
Course p. 74. For nadjdem and efje see P. C. p. 81. For obgleich, objdjon and th 
other equivalents of although and even if, see P. C. p. 102. For the ellipsis o 
wenn and ob see P. C. p, 102, Rem. 3, The conjunction ob is sometimes 
omitted in the combination alg ob, as if. In this case the verb must be im- 
mediately placed after als: €r fprad, aig ob er unfchuldig ware, or al 
ware er unfdjuldig, he spoke as if he were innocent. ? 

3. In comparative clauses as is rendered either by al or by wie,- the 
former referring to DEGREE and INTENSITY, and the latter to MANNER: QVir jind 
jo reid) al8 ifr, weare as rich as you, QWir denfen wie ihr, we are eine 
as you do (in the same manner as), 

4. W{$ (not wie) is also used after the combinations of jo with adverbs of 
TIME (jobald alg, as soon as; fo oft alg, as often as; fo lange alg, as long as), 
In these combinations af3 is frequently omitted, and fo with the adverb of 
time is used with the force of a subordinating conjunction: Gobald er nad) der 
Stadt zuriidfehrte, as soon as he returned to the city. Go oft ic) dic) anjehe, 
as often as I look at you. ‘ 

5. The comparative conjunction alg corresponds also to the English than 
after comparatives (P. C., p. 12), and to the conjunction but after the nega- 
tive pronouns: Miemand als ic), nobody but I. Nits als dies wird mir 
geniigen, nothing but this will satisfy me. 


























6. The conjunction da is frequently connected with certain preposition 5 
(ftatt, aufer, ofne) or prepositional adverbs (dadurd), dafiir, darin, daran, etc.) 
being generally rendered by an English preposition followed by a participial 
clause: Gtatt dafi er feinen Wuftrag ausfiihrte, instead of performing his 
charge. Ofpne daff ev eS 3u merfen jdjien, without seeming to notice it, 
Auffer da er feine Gefundheit verlor, except that he lost his health (or besides 
losing his health), Dadurd dafV er ftet3 feine Verfpredungen hielt, by 
always keeping his promises, Daran da fi er hier ift, habe ich nicht geba i. 
of his being here I did not think. 

7. U8 dgf with the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect lendetly of a 
modal auxiliary) is used idiomatically after adjectives or adverbs preceded 
by gut (too), corresponding to a mere English infinitive: Sd) weiff dies 31 
gewif, al8 da f id) mic) ivven fonnte, I know this too certainly to be mistaken, 
Gr war zu hartnadig, als daf er feinen Plan anujfgegeben hatte, he was 
too obstinate fo give up his plan. If the subjects in both clauses are different 
the English sentence must be recast: Die §eftung wurde 3; u hartndadi 
vertheidigt, als dafR wir fie Hitter nehmen finnen, the fortress was toa 
bravely defended to be taken by us. 8 ijt 3u fpdt, als da ff er nod) fomme 
founte, it is too late for him to come (literally: than that he should come). 

8. The adverbs falls (in the case that), and wofern (provided that) ar 
frequently used with the force of the conjunction tenn (if): Fall8 es morg 
reqnen follte, if it should rain to-morrow. Wofern er fein Verfpreden alt, 
(provided that) he keeps his promise, = 








9, The English conjunction unless (except if) is either translated by wenn 
nidjt, wofern nict, auger wenn, or by the circumlocution e8 fet denn dap, or 
by the subjunctive of the verb placed at the beginning of the clause, and 
followed by denn: J shall depart to-morrow unless he should order (it) otherwise, 
id) werbde morgen abreijen, wenn er e8 nidjt anders beftimmt; or e8 fei 
denn, daff er es anders beftimmt; or er beftimme e8 denn anders, 
: 10. The adverb auch in connection with preceding relative adjectives or 
adverbs (vo, wie, twann) or with the adverbs jo fehr or with fo and an adjec- 
) tive, is used with the force of a concessive conjunction, similar to the conjunctions 
 obtwobl, obfdjon, etc. (although). These combinations are rendered in different 
ways: ; 

a) Auch after relatives corresponds to the English combinations with 
ever, soever: Wer es aud fei, whoever he (it) may be. Wo er fich 
aud) befinde, whereever he may stay. Was auch gejdehen mag, 
er wird fein Wort halten, whatsoever may happen, he will keep his 
word. 

b) Auch after fo fehr (wie fehr) corresponds to the adverb however, however 
much: Wir founen e8 nicht thun, jo (wie) fe hr wir e3 au ch wiinjden, 
we cannot do it however much we may desire it. 

c) Auch after jo with an adjective or adverb is rendered by however or 
by as: Go ehrlich feine Gefinnungen a1 dh fet modten, man traute 
ihmt dennod) nidjt, however honest might have been his sentiments, he 
was nevertheless not trusted. Go grofR auch fein Cinflug war, er 
founte feine Wiinfche nicht durdhfesen, great as was his influence, he 
could not carry out his desires. 


§ 91. If a-clause introduced by a subordinating conjunc- 
tion is placed BEFORE the principal sentence, the clause is 
called proTASIS (Yorderjag), and the principal sentence, 
APoposis (Itachjas). The apodosis generally has the INVERTED 
ORDER of arrangement, in which the finite verb has the first 
_ place before the subject of the sentence. If the protasis be 
- introduced by one of the conjunctions wenn, als, da, weil, wie, 
_obgleid) (and its synonyms) and the combinations with fo 
(Rem. 10), the apodosis is frequently introduced by the adverb 
fo, which in this connection is not translated in English: 
3 Examptes: — Daf} fic dies ereiqnen wiirde, hatte ich langft vermuthet, 
that this would happen I had supposed long ago. QWabhrend ic) auf dem Lande 
war, brannte mein Haus in der Stadt ab, while I was in the country, 
my house in the city burned down. Wenn ihr ruhig zubiren wollt, (fo) 
werde id) end) die Griinde auseinanderfeten, if you will listen quietly I shall 


_ explain to you the reasons. Obwohl du Red)t halt, (jo) witrde ft du dod 
wohl thun, dic) gu mafigen, although you are right, you would nevertheless 


Sa BS 


a0 Meinl a 
7 - 


do well to restrain yourself. ©o fehr du auch eilen magft, (jo) werde i | 
doch friiher dort fein, alg du, however much you may hasten, I shall yet be 
sooner there than you, ‘| 


Rem. In periods with the combination je .... defto (the .... the), the’, 
clause introduced by je is the dependent clause (protasis), and that with defto 
the principal sentence (apodosis). Hence the former has the order of del 
pendent clauses (§ 90, Rem. 1), while the latter has the inverted order: $ e 
weniger ibr dariiber fpredt, de fto beffer wird e8 fiir end) fein, the less you 
speak about it, the better will it be for you. a 
~4 


Pid 





CHAPTER VIII. 
ADVERBS. 


Peer ow a pee ee 


§ 92. All adverbs are derived words, being formed 
from any of the other parts of speech. The most import- 
ant class of the adverbs is that which is derived eh 
ADJECTIVES. 


A 
Rem. Adverbs are condensations of speech, representing either prepos- 
itional phrases, containing one of the ideas of SPACE, TIME, MANNER, INTENSITY, | 
CAUSE, or whole clauses. ‘Thus the adverb bier (here) denotes at this place: the 
adverb wann (when), at what time; wie (how), in what manner; leicht (easily), ¢ 
an easy manner; jehv (very, very much), in a high degree; warum (why), for w 
cause. Other adverbs denote whole clauses, as: 3ywar, it is true that; jetonitl 
lid), as you (we) know; hoffentlich, it may be hoped that; wabhrjdheintich (probably), 
it is probable that; jonft (else), if this ts not the case, then .... Thus the adverbs | 
ja (yes) and netn (no) denote the affirmation or denial of the whole preceding | 
interr Camitve sentence. 












§ 93. Adverbs derived from ADJECTIVES imply 1) the —_ 
of a preposition;* 2) the idea of the adjective from which they | 
are derived; 3) one of the ideas of space, time, manner, in- 
tensity or cause. The adjectives from which adverbs are de- 
rived are either ORDINARY or PRONOMINAL adjectives. Ordinary 
adjectives are used as adverbs in their own crude forms with- 





* Thus the adverbs of manner imply the preposition in (jdjin, in a 
beautiful manner); adverbs of time imply the preposition at or on (heute, at 
this day). | 


Seinah MOM che 


out receiving any ending*: Gr fpricdjt gut, he speaks well. Gie 
handeln weife, they act wisely. Dieje Schwierigfeit ift Let dt er- 
flirt, this difficulty is easily explained. 


. Rem.—-1, Some adverbs add the ending {ich (English ly) to the adjec- 
tive: fdwerlicj, hardly; wabrilich, verily; lediglic), only, and several others. 
Other adverbs add the word weife (like the English wise in otherwise) to the 
gen. fem. of the adjective, this word being originally the fem. noun QWeife 
- (manner), as: gliicdlicjerweije, fortunately; merfiwiirdigerweije, peculiarly; 
 fHugerweife (or Ffiiglid)) prudently. A few adjectives add the ending e¢, as: 
ange, long, a long time; ferne or fern, far. The adjective gut forms two ad- 
_ verbs wohl and gut, both corresponding to the English well, 

a: 2. The comparatives of adjectives are used as adverbs without any 
_ further ending, in the same manner as the positives: er lief fdyneller, he 
' ran more quickly. €r wufte das be}jer, he knew that better, 

§ 3. Theadverbs of supertatives are differently formed for absolute super- 
 latives (denoting a very high degree), and relative superlatives (denoting the 
highest degree among compared qualities). 


The adverbs of absolute superlatives are formed: 


a) Without any ending in the manner of positives. Only a few adverbial 
superlatives, thus formed, are in common usage, as: freundlidft, 
most amicably; herzlidjft, most cordially; innigft, most tenderly; ehr- 
-erbietigft, most humbly; ergebenft, (most) respectfully; geborjamft, 
(most) obediently. Several adverbs thus formed cannot be trans- 
lated literally, as: gefalligft or giitigft, if you please; miglidftas much 
as possible; b e ft miglid){t, as well as possible; baldmiglidft, as soon 
as possible; langft, long ago; duferft (hidjft), exceedingly. 
6b) <A few superlative adverbs add the ending eng to the superlative of 
the adjective, as: beften8 (in the best manner), {djinften$ (in the 
handsomest manner), friiheften$ (at the earliest), {pdtfteng (at the 
latest), wenigftens (at least), 
ce) Generally the absolute superlative of adverbs is formed by the pre- 
‘position auf with the accus, neuter of the adjective superlative: auf 
jorgfaltigfte, in the most accurate manner; aufs foftbarfte, most ex- 
pensively. €r unterfagte die’ aufs ftreng{te, ‘he forbade this in the | 
most positive manner’. Very frequently the absolute superlative 
“adverbs are expressed by circumlocution with superlatives of degree. 
and the positives of the adverbs: du fer ft heftig, most (extremely) 
violently. €r tward hichft milde beftraft, he was punished most 
leniently. 





* Hence it is impossible to distinguish formally a predicative adjective 
from an adverb in German, The connection alone must show whether a 
word must be parsed as a predicative adjective or as an adverb. Compare? 
Dies ift Lei dt (this is easy), and dies ift Leid) t gethan (this is easy done), 

Er ift vorficjtig, heis cautious, and er handelt vorfidjtig, he acts cautiously. 


feces A a 


Adverbs of relative superlatives are formed by am with the dative of the 
adjective-superlative, the same as predicative superlatives (§ 59): Cr hat 
dDiefen Bunlt am forgfaltigften behandelt, he has treated this subject most 
accurately (that is: more accurately than the other objects, or: than other persons). 
Dies Regiment hat dem Feinde am langften widerftanden, this regiment has 
withstood the enemy longest (that is: longer than any other regiment). Rarely — 
the preposition ju is used instead of an: zum mindeften, at least. 

§ 94. To the PRONOMINAL adjectives correspond PRONOM- 
INAL adverbs which, accordingly, are called INTERROGATIVE, 
RELATIVE, DEMONSTRATIVE, INDEFINITE and NUMERAL ADVERBS, © 
From possessive pronouns no adverbs are formed, 

To the interrogatives (wer, was, welder) correspond the 
following adverbs: 1) of PLACE: wo, where; wohin, whither; 
woher, whence; 2) of TIME: wann, when; 3) of MANNER and 
INTENSITY: wie, how (in what MANNER or DEGREE); 4) of CAUSE: 
warum, weshalb, wesiwegen, why. ‘ 

Rem. —1. The adverb wie is used in connection with other adverbs to 
form adverbial expressions of TIME, QUANTITY, DEGREE and MANNER: Wie oft, 
how often; wie jehr, how much; wiebald, how soon. Mie is also used, like 
the English how before adjectives as an adverb of intensity (wie qrof, wie 
gut, etc.). Such combinations must often be recast in English: €in tie 


theures Bferd haben Sie, how dear is the horse you have? (literally: A how 
dear horse have you ?) 


2. The adverb wo forms compounds with most prepositions, having the | 
force of the corresponding English preposition with the interrogative pro- 
noun what (1wa8), as womit, wodurd), wonad) (with what, by what, after 
what). With prepositions beginning with a vowel, wo takes its old and_ 
original form wor (worauf, woran, wort). See § 87. 

§ 95. The demonstrative adverbs are mostly formed from 
the demonstrative root da (corresponding to the demonstrative 
adjective der), and the ancient demonstrative root hi (corres- 
ponding to the adjective diefer). They are: 1) adverbs of 
PLACE: hier, here (at this place); da (dort), there (at that 
place); her (toward the place of the speaker); hin (away from 
the place of the speaker), and the combinations daber or dorther 
(thence, from there), dahin or dorthin (thither), hierher and 
hierhin (hither); 2) adverbs of TIME: dann, then, and the com- 
pound damals, at that time; jest, now, at this time; 3) of MANNER 
and INTENSITY: fo, so, his* 4) of CAUSE: Piping deshalb, deg 
wegen, therefore, for that reason. 










said PRN Paiste 


Rem. —1. The adverbs her and hin belong to the most frequent words 
of the German language, without having any precise English equivalents. 
They are used either in composition or in close connection with other words. 
See P. C. p. 99, Obs. 4: 

a) In composition with adverbs they take the last place, hin denoting a 


b) 


¢) 


direction away from the place of the speaker to or towards a place, 
and her a direction from another place toward that of the speaker. 
Thus are used wobhin( whither), dahin or dorthin (thither), fernhin 
to [into] a distance; woher (whence), daher or dorther (thence), 
fernher (from afar). In composition with hier, however, both hin 
and her denote direction toward the speaker, hierher denoting hither 
(not hence*), and hierhin hither or thither, referring to a place near 
the speaker. Gr fommt dort her or dabher, he comes thence (from 
there); er geht Dort hin or dDabhin, he goes thither, But: bringe dies 
hierher, bring this hither (to me); lege da8 Buch Hierhin, place the 
book here (at a spot near the speaker), Qierhin is often used in 
opposition to dorthin, the same as diefer in opposition to jener. 

In composition with verss her has generally the meaning of hierher 
(hither), and hin the meaning of dorthin (thither). Gr eilte her, 
he hastened hither; er etlte him, he hastened thither. 

In composition with prepositions her and hin generally take the first 
place, the accent being on the preposition (heran, hinauf, herein,+ 
hinab,t etc.). In these compounds, which are generally again com- 
posed with verbs, the words her and hin are not distinguished in the 
English translation (see the examples in P. C. p. 100), and merely 
refer to the place of the speaker, or to that place to whichthe . 
speaker imagines himself transferred in his narrative, ‘ He stepped 
into the carriage’ may be rendered: er ftieg in den Wagen herein or . 
hinein. The former translation indicates that the speaker is in the 
carriage or dwells there with his mind; the latter translation in- 
dicates that the speaker is, or imagines himself to be, outside of the 


carriage. 


Ifthe words her and hin follow the preposition with which they 
are compounded, they have mostly conventional meanings. The 
word §er in this combination frequently denotes the absence of 
precise direction: €r jdjritt etn her, he walked along; er ging um- 
her, he walked about. The metaphorical meanings of the different 
compositions of her and hin are very different, and must be learned 
from the lexicon, 





‘* The English hence is rendered by vor hier, not by hierher. 

+ The preposition in with the accusative takes in all compositions the 
form ein. The preposition in with the dative takes the form inne, which in 
the verb utwobhnen is changed into in, but in the noun Ginwobhner into ein. 
Both forms are inorganic, 

. + %b in compositions corresponds to the English off and often to the pre- 
position von. 


“a -, onic natal 


2. Da and hier (like wo) form compounds with most prepositions (see 
§ 87.), corresponding to an English preposition with the pronoun %# or the 
demonstratives this and that, Da (before vowels dar) implies the pronoun it 
or the demonstrative that; hier implies the demonstrative this: Dadurd, by 
that, by it, thereby; hierdurd), by this; darin, in that, in it, therein; Hierin, in this. — 
Both da and pier, but especially the former, are frequently used as adverbs of © 
TIME, with the meaning then, and often serve as loose connectives to denote 
the progress of the narrative: Da fam ihm fein Bruder entgegen, then his 
brother met him. 


dimen seek itin tial Mie 


i _—- i sen 


3. To the adverbs formed: from the demonstrative root hi belong the 
words heute (old German /iutu, contracted from hiutagu, at this day), to-day; — 
and heuer (old German hiuru, contracted from hiujaru, in this year), this year, 
Here belongs also the word beint or hint, to-night (old German hinaht), which — 
occurs only in some local dialects.” 


_ 4, To the demonstrative derfelbe corresponds the adverb eben in ital . 
' different compositions: ebenjo, in the same manner; ebenda (ebendajelbft), at 
the same place; ebendahin, to the same place; ebendaber, from the same 
place; ebenfalls, likewise. C€ben is also connected with derjelbe and the other 
demonstrative adjectives, making them more emphatic: eben derjelbe, eben 
diejer, eben jener, eben der (that very man, etc.). The various idiomatic” 


significations of eben must be learned from the lexicon. 
4 
§ 96. The indefinite adverbs are of very various formation, | 


being either ancient words, or compounds of modern origin. 
They are best classified necurding to their connection with the | 
indefinite adjectives (p. 20, 21, 22). 


a)~ To the indefinites etniger, tweldjer and etwas (§ 37.), or to the idea 
represented by some and any belong the adverbs je (jemals), ever; 

- the compounds of the adverbs two, wann and wie with irgend, irgend=— 
1wo*, somewhere, anywhere; irgend wann, at some time; irgendiwie, 

in some manner, somehow, anyhow), and the adverb etwa (or etwan, 
instead of etivann), denoting indefiniteness in general, and corres- 
ponding to about, perhaps, ‘say’: Gr ift etwa adjt Sabre alt, he is” 
about eight years old. Dabt ihr etwa gefdjlafen? did you sleep 
perhaps? Mehmen Sie einige Pfund....,etwa dret oder bier, take | 
some pounds of...., say three or Hates 

b) To the indefinite fein belong the negative adverbs nie, wiemals, 
nimmer (opposed to je), never; nirgend, nowhere; nit, not; nein Ny 
no; feinesiweg8, by no means; feinenfallg, in no case. j 
c) To jeder and aller belong the adverbs iiberall (allenthalben), every 
where; immer (allezeit, jederzeit, ftets),always, ever; jedenfalls, at any 
rate; jedesmal, allemal, every time, 


ee 

















* Even the simple adverb two is sometimes used as an indefinite adverb, — 
with the meaning somewhere. . 


a aoa 


d) To viel belong the adverbs oft, often; hiufig, frequently; vtelmals, 
many-times; fehr, very, very much, much; 3u, too; 3 jehr, too much. 

e) To wenig belong felten, seldom, rarely, and to mander the adverbs 
mandmal, bisweilen, zuweilen, sometimes. 


Rrm,—1l. The root of the adverb je (old German to) is found in several 
' indefinite adjectives and adverbs, as jeder, nie, immer (instead of iemer), Se 
is used especially in interrogative and conditional sentences: Getd ihr je 

Port aeivejen? were you ever there? Wenn er je wiederfommen follte, if he 
: should ever return. on je or vor jeher denotes ‘from times immemorial’. Se 
has also a distributive meaning: Er gab ihnen je vier Thaler, he gave four 
dollars to each. Se nacjdem means according as; je nad), according to. Seis 
also used asa conjunction. See § 90. 


bg 2. - The indefinite adjectives piel, wentg, mehr are also used as adverbs, 
_ The English adverb much (very much) is generally translated by jehr: Gr be- 
 tritbt fic) fehr (not viel), he is much afflicted. Biel is used as adverb only if 
it does not refer to rnTeNsrry: er geht viel fpazieren, he walks much. The 
adverb mehr with a negative often corresponds to the English longer: Gr ift 
nicht mehr Soldat, he is no longer a soldier, Er hat feine Freunde mehr, 
_ he has no longer any friends (no friends left), The adverbs gar and redjt have 
_ ameaning similar to fehr, as: Cr ift ein gar.rechtlider Diann, he is a very 
_ honest man; er ift recjt qefdjeidt, he is very clever. Gar nidjt means not at 
all, The peculiar idiomatic meanings of gar must be learned from the 
_ lexicon, 


§ 97. The relative adverbs have no peculiar formation of 
their own. The German language borrows either the interro- 
_ gative or the demonstrative adverbs (with da) for the purpose 
of relative clauses. 


%, 


Brem,—1. As relatives of piace serve the adverbs two, wobin, wober, 
and the compounds of wo with prepositions (§ 94, Rem. 2.): der Ort*, wo 
a id ihn fab, the place where (at which) I saw him, Die Gtadt, wobher er 
| fam, the city from which (whence) he came. Gehe, wohin du willft, go 
where (whither) youlike. Das Haus, wo rin er wobnt, the house in which 
_helives. The use of demonstrative adverbs as relatives~of place is only 
“poetical: der Berg, daher (instead of woher) er fam, the mountain from which 
he came. 


2. As relatives of rr1mz the German language borrows either the inter- 
rogative or demonstrative adverbs of piace, as: da8 Sabr, wo (or da) died 
geldah, the year in which this happened. The relative adverbs of MANNER 
are borrowed from the interrogatives (wie): die Art, wie dies gefdah, the 
manner in which this was done. 





* Relative clauses, and clauses introduced by conjunctions are in 
German always separated by commas. 


x 

3. Relative adverbs are also used in correlation to demonstratives: 36 
ftand da, wo er mich erwartete, I stood there where he expected me. Se) han= 
delte fo, wie er e8 bejdjlofjen hatte, I acted so as he had determined it. inl 
such connections the demcnstratives are frequently omitted, and the relative | 
adverbs pass over into consunctions: $d) ftand, to er mid) erwartete; icy —_ 
dDelte, wie er e8 befchloffen hatte. 

§ 98. Many adverbs that formerly were adjectives, are 
now used only as adverbs, as bald, soon, gern, willingly. Other 
adverbs are formed in various ways feom nouns, verbs on 
prepositions. See the lexicons. | 

Rem. Adverbs not derived from adjectives are generally not susceptible 
of comparison. But of some adverbs that formerly were used as adjectives, 
an irregular comparison has been preserved. ald (soon) forms the com- 
paratives eher or friiher (sooner) and the superlatives am ebeften, am friiheften 
(soonest). Gern (willingly) forms the comparative lieber (more willingly, 
rather) and the superlative am liebften (most willingly): Sd) thue e8 gern, 
I do it willingly (I like to do it); ich thue e8 Lieber, 1 rather do it; id) thue 
e8.am liebften, I like most to doit. SOft (often) forms the comparatives 
bfter, Bfterer (oftener) or Sfters (with the force of a positive—rather often). 
The superlative is rare: am (jum) ofteften, ofteften, dfterften (oftenest), 
stead of it am hdufigften is generally used. It is peculiar that the compara- 
tives Ofter and Ofterer, and (very rarely) the superlative are also used as 
adjectives. t 












| 





CHAPTER IX. 


THE MOST IMPORTANT SYNTACTICAL RULES*, i 


§ 99. The DEFINITE ARTICLE is often used in German when the 
English language either uses no article at all, or an indefinite article. T is 
is especially the case 1) before abstract nouns, especially if the case co d 
not be recognized without an article: Die Gorfdjriften der Religion, the 
commands of religion; die Uebel de8 Kriegs, the evils of war; 2) if concrete 
nouns are used to represent a whole genus or species, as: Der Ptenfd) dent, 
Gott fenft, man proposes and God disposes. Die TKhiere find fterblicj, beasts 
are mortal; 3) if an indefinite noun is followed by an attributive geniti ve 
with the indefinite article: Der Gefandte eines auswartigen Hofes fam einft 
in etne Fleine dDeutjdje Stadt, an embassador of some foreign court came one 
to a small German city. 

The article is frequently not used in German, when the English language 
makes use of either the definite or indefinite article: 1) often with nour 






















* Only those syntactical rules are given here, which for the beginner ¢ e 
most necessary to know in order to introduce him in the reading of German 
text, Bs 


AA 
4 : 
ES 





Sins eM eae 


connected by und or oder: Er verfaufte Haus und Garten, he sold the house 


and the garden; 2) often before adjectives after prepusitions: Er antwortete 


mit griftter Rube, he answered with the greatest calmness; 3) often before 
_ predicative nouns: Gr ift Biirger der Vereinigten Staaten, he is a citizen of 
_ the United States, 


§ 100. AGREEMENT. ; 
1. All adjective pronouns, adjectives and participles used adjectively 


_ must agree with their governing nouns in number, gender,and case: Cin qez 


raumiges Haus, a spacious house. Mitt groper Wufmerffamfeit, with great 
attention. Golden Minnern, to such men. Die Sorgen liebender Cltern, 


the cares of loving parents. 


2. If adjectives, without arepetition of the article, are placed after their 
governing nouns*, they are generally left without inflectional endings: Dte 


Baume, griin und frifd), the trees, green and fresh; but die Kinder, die un- 


{duldigen, the children, the innocent ones. 

3. Some adjectives are either altogether INDECLINABLE, or drop occasion- 
ally, or in some of their forms the inflectional endings. Altogether inde- 
clinable are a) adjectives in er, formed from the names of cities, as: der Baz 
tijer Hriede, the Parisian peace, Gen. de3 Parijer Friedens, etc. b) Die ad- 


 jectives fauter and eitel, if used in the signification mere, nothing but: Ex jpricht 


in fauter Mithjelu, he speaks in mere riddles. Sn eitel Luft und Bracht, in mere 
gaiety and splendor. ¢) Numeral adjectives ending in erlet are indeclinable: 
Mit manderlet Bemerfungen, with several remarks, d) Adjectives 
often drop their strong ending ¢8 in the nom. or acc. singular of the neuter 


gender: Gin neu (instead of neues) Gefes, a new law. e) The adjectives gan3 


and halb, if used without an article, are used without inflectional endings 
before names of countries and towns: Golden Glauben habe ich in ganz 
Sfrael nicht gefunden, such a faith I did not find in all Israel. Halb London 
wiirde ruinirt werden, cne half of London would be ruined. f£) For mefr, 
viel, wenig, see § 41, 42, 44. g) The pronominal adjectives mander, welder, 


joldjer, frequently drop their inflectional endings, and always before the inde- 
finite article: mand) ett (many a), weld) ein (what a), fold) ein (such a). 


4. Predicative adjectives are not inflected, except if used with an article 
(see p. 32.). Predicative nouns, and nouns in apposition always agree with 
their subjects or governing nouns in case, and generally in numbe also, 
Er war verwandt mit Wilhelm, dent Prinzen von Oranien, he was related to 
William, the prince of Orange. If the predicative noun (or the noun in ap- 
position) denote a person (§ 6.), it must take the feminine gender in agree- 
ment with a feminine subject, provided the noun be capable of taking that 
ending. Die Gefdidte ijt die Midterim der Kinige, history is the judge of 
kings. 





* The placing of adjectives after their governing nouns is mostly con- 


fined to poetry or higher style. 


ches ymeeeit 









5. If two or more subjects are connected by und, the verb is generally 
in the plural; but if all the subjects are in the singular, the verb is sometim 
found in the singular number. Rarl und Friedric) fi 1d angefommen, Charles 
and Frederick have arrived. Sn jeiner Gewalt war Tod und Leben, in his 
power were life and death. 

6. By two or more attributive adjectives the number of their governing 
noun is not affected: Die deutide und franjdfijde Sprache (not Sprachen), the 
German and French languages, | 


7. Ifa personal or demonstrative pronoun, used substantively, is the 
subject of a sentence with the verb fein and a noun as predicate, the pronoun 
is frequently placed in the neuter singular, even if it refers to persons, or to 
things of different gender and number. The verb {etn agrees in this instance 
in number with the predicative noun: €8 waren unjere Freunde, die ihr | 
jabet, zt was our friends whom you saw, Das (dies, diefes) find meine 
Briider, these are my brothers, Da8 war feine Rede, that was his language, 

8. Relative pronouns, and personal pronouns of the third person agree | 
with their antecedents in gender and number, but not in case: Die Stadt, in : 
der wir wobnen, the city in which we live. Die Befehle, denen wir gehorden 
mute, the orders which we had to obey. Die Sffentliche Meinung rad fidy 
ant Allen, die fie veradjten, public opinion takes revenge on all that despise i. 

9, If the subject of a clause is a relative pronoun, having a personal | 
pronoun of the first or second person as antecedent, the verb of the clause 
is either placed in the third person, or in the person of the pronoun. But in’ 
the latter case the personal pronoun must be repeated after the relative: Wags 
faun ic) thun, der jelber biilflos tft (or der ich felber Hiilflos bin), what can 
I do who am helpless myself? 

10. Possessive pronouns of the third person have a double agreement. — 
They agree as to the gender and number pertaining to their roors, with their 
ANTECEDENTS; but in respect to their ENDINGs they agree in case, gender and — 
number with their Governina nouns. Die Mutter feqnet ihrem Gohn, 
the mother blesses her son. Der PYiond erhalt jetu Licht von der Conne, the 
moon receives her light from the sun. Die Gihne Cduards wurden von 
ijfrem Obeim Ricard ermordet, the sons of Edward were murdered by 
their uncle Richard. 

11. English nouns preceded by the preposition of are frequently rendered — 
by German appositional nouns without inflectional endings. Here belong — 
a) names of countries and places: Da8 RKinigreid) Spanien, the kingdom of — 
Spain, Gen. de8 Kinigreichs Spanien (not Spanien’). Die Stadt Berlin, the — 
city of Berlin, Gen. der Stadt Berlin. Bb) Names of months: Der Ptonat 
Suni, the month of June, Gen. de3 Ptonats Juni. c) Names of families: Das 
Haus Hohenzollern, the house of Hohenzollern, Gen. de$ Haujes Hobhenzolle 
d) Expressions denoting measured, weighed and computed substances. 
these are in apposition to nouns expressing the units of measures and weights — 
or to nouns expressing quantity, they do not generally assume case-endings, — 
but take the sign of the plural when they do this in English; Zebu Cllen — 





















i cee PD en 


 Leinwand, ten yards of linen; fiinf Dubend Nagel, five dozen of nails; 
eine Menge Soldaten, a multitude of soldiers. The nouns denoting the units 
of measure and weight, if they are masculine and neuter, take neither case- 
te endings nor the sign of the plural: Mit drei Pfund Blei, with three pounds 
7 of lead. Gin zehu Fu langes Brett, a board ten feet long. 
§ 101. ABSOLUTE ADJECTIVES. 
5st 1. Adjectives used with the force of substantives are of masculine 
_ gender if they denote persons in GENERAL; but ifthey refereto women they 
_ are feminine. They are used both in the singular and plural, and may refer 
to individuals or to whole classes of persons. In the singular they must be 
connected with the definite or indefinite article, but may be used without 
article in the plural: Gin Armer, a poor man. Die Krantfe, the sick woman. 
- Die Reichen, the rich (persons). Dem Sdhwaden ift fein Stachel aud 
 gegeben, a sting is given even to the weak. Befiegten joll man eine goldne 
Briice bauen, for the vanquished a golden bridge should be built, Of the 
pronominal adjectives the demonstratives and mander may be used absolutely 
in both numbers, in reference to persons: Ginige, Viele and Wenige are thus 
used in the plural only; Giner, Seder and Reiner only in the singular. } 
f 2. The absolute singular neuters Mfle3 and Yas (instead of Wes was, 
Mile die) are often used idiomatically in a plural sense, referring to PERSONS: 
«Alles freut fic), all rejoice. Was von den Cinwohnern dem Gemebel entgan- 
gen war, wurde in die Sclaverct verfauft, all of the inhabitants that had 
escaped the slaughter were sold into slavery. Often absolute adjectives in 
the neuter singular refer to persons in order to indicate that either of the two 
sexes is meant. at nidjt ein Sedes von-euc) (men and women) jdon Aehn- 
 liches erfabren? Has not every one of you already experienced similar 
things? 
‘ 3. Absolute adjectives are placed in the neuter singular to denote TH1Nn@s 
_ or quauities, both in an abstract and concrete sense: Das Erhabene und das 
_ Shine, the sublime and the beautiful. Das Grofe und Unerwartete des 
| Schaujpiels, the greatness of the spectacle and the fact that it was unexpected 
(literally: the great and unexpected of the spectacle). Wenn wir Kleines 
mit Grofgem vergleidjen, if we compare small with great things. Dies (die- 
je) nimumt mid) Wunder, this takes me by surprise. 
; 4. All absolute adjectives are inflected cither srronG or WEAK, according 
_ to the general rules, as if nouns of respectively masculine, feminine or neuter 
gender were added. . 
§ 102. THE THEORY OF THE CASES.* 
1. The Nominative is a) the case of the subject, and of all words that 
must agree with the subject; b) the case of the predicate-noun. <A predicate- 








* The general English equivalents of the German cases (p. 6) denote 
the original ideas connected with them. They are only applied when the 
relations in which the nouns stand to other parts of the sentence are con-— 
ceived in the same way by both languages. Wherever this conception 
differs, the German cases must be expressed by other equivalents. We give 
in § 102. the leading differences in the conceptions of both languages. 


aes! 3 


nominative is required a. by the verbs fein, to be; werden, to become; bleiben, 


to remain; jdjeinen, to seem; heiffen, to be called. 06. By the passive of those — 
verbs that denote the application of a namME to some one (nennen, to call, 
jchelten or fhimpfen, to call abusively; taufen, to give a name by baptism, to 
christen). The English predicate-nominatives after the passives of other 


verbs (as: ¢o consider, elect, etc.) must. with the corresponding German verbs. be 
expressed by the preposition 3u or fiir: Er wurde zum Prajidenten erwabhlt, 
he was elected President. Gr wird fiir einen Gelehrten gebhalten, he is con- 
sidered a scholar, e¢. The nominative is used, as in English, with the force 
of a vocative with or without the interjection 9 (Oh). 


2. The German verss, except those classes mentioned No. 1, are con-— 


strued either with cases other than the nominative, or with nouns in connection 


with prepositions. The cases (without prepositions) required by verbs are the — 


GENITIVE, DATIVE and accusaTIvE, each of which may correspond to a mere 
objective in English or to a prepositional construction, It is pREsumED that a 


verb requiring the mere objective in the English language corresponds to a German verb — 
construed with the accusative: $4) lobe Den SOiiler, I praise the scholar; er — 
tédtet feinen Feind, he kills hisenemy. The noi iheion rules are mostly — 


exceptions to this principle. 


a) The Genitive is required 1) by many REFLEXIVES, as: fic) einer Gade 


anmafen, to usurp a thing; fich einer Gache bedienen, to make use 


of athing; fich einer Sache evinnern, to remember a thing; ftd) Se- 


mandes erbarmen, to take pity on somebody. 2) By many verbs which 
besides an accusative of the direct object require a genitive of the 
indirect object, as: Semanden einer Gade befduldigen, to accuse 
somebody of a thing; Semandem eines Dienftes entlaffen, to remove - 
somebody from an office. 3) The other verbs requiring a genitive are— 
mostly construed also with the accusative: einer (eine) Sache be-: 


diirfen, to need a thing; einer (eine) Sache entbebren, to lack a thing; — 


to English verbs requiring the mere objective: Semandent danfen, © 
to thank somebody; Semandent drohen, to threaten somebody; Je- 


imandent entflichen, to escape somebody. Thus are construed folgen, — 
to follow; gehordjen, to obey; helfen, to help; niigen, to benefit; ent- 


einer (eine) Sache erwihnen, to mention a thing. 
b) The verbs requiring asimple object in the pative mostly correspond 





jagen, to renounce; Iiderftehen, to resist; fcjmeidjeln, to flatter, and 


many others.—Verbs that require two objects generally have one — 
object (the direct) in the accusative, and the other (the indirect) ~ 


in the pative, as: Cinem etwas geben, to give (to) somebody 


something: Ginemt etwas erlauben, to permit somebody some-— 


thing. This construction comprises verbs denoting the taking away 
of something from somebody. After such verbs the person from whom ~ 


something is taken, is almost always placed in the DATIVE, as; _ 


€Einem etwas nehmen, to take something from somebody; Cinenmt 


etwas fteblen or rauben, to steal or rob oi from somebody; x ; 


oie eee ene 


Se ee Tee 


Po ee ee ee ee 


Os elke thy clin de ee 


—_—" 


L —— 











Ge ieee 


GCinem etwas entziehet, to withdraw something from somebody. 
Thus are construed entwenden, to purloin; entreifen, to snatch away; 
~ abpfinbden, to distrain; abnidthigen, to force away, and many other 

verbs expressing similar ideas, 
c) The following verbs, taking two objects, require, both of them, to 
be in the accusative: 1) fragen, to ask, and lehren, to teach;* 
2) those verbs which, in the passive, require a predicate-nominative 
(No. 1, b, 6): Gie nannten ihn den Grofen, they called him the 
Great. Verbs of considering, selecting, etc,, require the prepositions . 

gut or fiir. 

3. German Apsectives govern either the Genitive (as: faibhig, capable; 
{culdig, guilty; verdadjtig, suspected; wiirdig, worthy), or the Dative (as: 


 Gbnlic), similar; gleid), equal; nabe, near; niiplic), useful; gefafrlidj, dan- 


gerous), or they are construed with prepositions (as: giitig gegen, kind to; 
reid) an, rich in; ftol; auf, proud of; zornig itber, angry at, etc.). Those that 
govern the genitive mostly correspond to English adjectives construed with 
of; those that govern the dative mostly answer to English adjectives con- 
strued with to or for. ‘fhe accusative after adjectives is used only after a few 
adjectives in place of the usual genitive, as: Sch bin ihn (feiner) fo8, I am rid 
of him. ch bin e3 miide, I am tired of it. 

4. A noun, dependent on another noun, is placed either in the GENITIVE 


or connected by a preposition.f The English possessive case dependent on 


nouns, is either rendered by a German GeEnitTIvE (which may be placed before 
its noun—the latter losing its article, as in English), or by a compound noun: 


My brother's children, meines Sruders Kinder (meine Bruderfinder) ; my sister's — 


house, meiner Echwefter Haus; a stone’s throw, ein Steinwurf; my night's rest, 
meine Jachtrube. 


5. If the different cases neither complete the idea of a noun, nor that 


of a verb or adjective, they are called ADVERBIAL Cases. 


a. The ADVERBIAL GENITIVE is of very frequent occurrence, but generally 
idiomatically confined to certain phrases, as: Redjter Hand, to the 
right; meines Cradjtens, according tomy opinion; er war feines 





® Fragen, however, is generally construed with an accusative of the 
person and a prepositional object (iiber, nach, wegen). ehren is generally 
construed with two accusatives, but the object denoting the person who is 


taught, is not unfrequantly found in the dative (Lessing, Gutzkow, Immer- 


mann). This is always the case in the passive construction: Pir (not mid) 
wird etwas gelehrt, Lam taught something (not id) werbde etwas gelehrt). In 
poetry, however. the accusative is sometimes found in connection with the 
passive of fehren, as: Das fdlimnifte, was uns widerfihrt, das werden wir 
vom Tag gelehrt (Gsthe). Some grammarians consider the dative after lehren 
to be faulty both in the active and in the passive. 

+ No noun governs a mere dative or accusative. Such constructions as 
mir 3u Liebe (for the love of me) are elliptical, and the dative in these 


18 an ADVERBIAL case (see No. 5, b), 


ha ai 





Reidhens ein Schmied, he was a smith by trade: gehe deiner 
Wege, go away (literally: walk of thy ways); unverridteter Dinge, - | 
without accomplishing anything (literally: of unperformed things); — | 
leichter tithe, without trouble; de3 Tags, by day; d¢3 Nadhts,* by | 
night. | 
b. The ADVERBIAL DATIVE occurs in two relations, 1) as "possessive 

dative; 2) as dative of the interested person. | 


a) The possessive dative takes the place of a possessive adjective or d 
of the genitive (possessive case) of a noun or pronoun. It is used — 
either in place of a possessive, or (rarely) along with it: Mjir 
ftarben 31vei tapfere Sihne, two brave sons of mine died. Sphm fanf — 
das Herz, his heart failed. Cr, Dem fetn Oli jerftirt war, he — 
whose happiness was destroyed. Der Schlag entftellte Dem Kira ben 
das Geficdht, the blow disfigured the boy’s face. 3 


wr 
S2> 


b) The dative of the interested person (mostly a personal pronoun) 
is generally redundant in English, and is used to show that the action — 
has an interest of some kind for the mentioned person (in the — 
dative): Sch nahm mir cins der Schwerter, I took out (for myself) — 
one of the swords. Gr erwarb fich hojen Ruhm, he acquired (for — 
himself) great glory. ch lobe mir. mein eigen Haus, I prefer my 
own house (literally: I praise to myself). Denfe Dix, was er gefagt 
hat, imagine (for yourself) what he has said. Here belong these — 
constructions: G8 jdjeint mir, it seems to me, Dies ift mir zu 
grog, this is too large for me. G8 ift mtr, als ob, I feel as if 
(see P.C. p. 86). The dative inir (sometimes Dir) is frequently used 

. (redundantly) to express a general interest of the speaker in another 
person’s act which is either commanded, advised or wished by him: — 
Gehe mix nidjt 31 weit, do not go too far; the mir implying that it — 
would be unpleasant for the speaker if the addressed person should 
go too far, Du mut mir fobald nicht wiederfontmen, you must not 
come again very soon. This dative is called the ‘ ErHicaL Dative’. 


- SS ee ae 


wre ee 


c. The ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE expresses a) the idea of space in con- 
_nection with adverbs of space (especially the compounds with bin 
and her with the prepositions auf, ab, an, durd), iiber, unter, see § 95.), 
as: hinauf or herauf, up; binab or herab, down; auf und ab, up and 
down, to and fro. These adverbs are often connected with the verb, © 
and the accusatiye of space is made dependent on the compound . 
verb: Gr ging den Berg hinauf, he went up the mountain, Gr 
ritt Die Stra fen hindurc, he rode through the streets (literally: 
he rode the streets through). Wir fuhren Die Brii de hiniiber, we drove 


ee Te ee et ees 











* A very peculiar expression, Qacjt being a feminine. Probably ,,de 
Tags’’ produced this inorganic form, . 3 


a 





PE A Sat 


over the bridge*.—b. The accusative of tmz answers to the question 
‘how long ?’, and stands either alone, or in connection with adverbs 
of time (fang, hindurd), iiber): €8 danerte zwei Minuten (or 
giveit Minuten lang), it lasted two minutes. Gr hielt fic) hier zwei 
YS ocjen iiber auf, he staid here for two wecks. Sch arbeitete cinen 
Ptonat Hindurd) an dem Werke, 1 was busy with this work during 
a mouth}. c. The accusative of MEASURE, WEIGHT and VALUE, 
completes these ideas by a noun expressing the units of measure, 
etc. with numerals, in answer to the questions: ‘how heavy, how long, 
how much’: €8 wog einen Cenutner (c8 war einen Centner 
jcjwer), it weighed a hundred pounds. Der Weg ift vier Mteilen 
lang, the road is four miles long. Das Such foftet einen Dhaler, 
the book costs a dollar. 

§ 103. THE VOICES OF THE VERB. 

1. Equivalents of the Passive: . 

a) Reflexive verbs, many of which must be translated by English 
passives: Das lerut fich (cicht, that is easily learned. Gr irrt fich, 
he is mistaken. Hat fieh dein Hut gefunden,has your hat been found ? 

b) Any reflexive verb in connection with faffen takes a passive mean- 
ing: Das Laft fich thun, that may be done. Der Feind hat fish 
flagen lafjen, the enemy has been beaten. Gr hat fich in der - 
Stadt fehen Laffer, he has been seen in the city. These passive-' 
reflexives are construed with the preposition vot, like ordinary pass- 
ives (No, 2.): Gr hat fic von feinem Freunde itberreden 
lafjet, he has been persuaded by his friend. 

c) The active infinitive (of transitive verbs) connected with laffen, in 
the meaning to cause something to be done has a passive force, and is 
likewise construed with yon or durdj, like ordinary passives: €r 
Ta gt cine Brice bauen, he causes a bridge to be built. Cr lief die 
Hindernijje Durd die Goldaten (von den Soldaten) hinweg=- 
radumen, he caused the obstacles to be removed by the soldiers. 

d) The active infinitive with ju after the verb fein has a passive mean- 

ing: Dies ift nidt 4 glauben, that is not to be believed (cannot be 
believed), Daran tft nidt gu DenFen, that cannot be thought of. 





* Jnstead of the accusative of space, the dative with the preposition ju 
is often used: Gr ging zum Berge hinauf; wir fubren gur Bride hin- 
liber. The accusative may also be replaced by the preposition contained in 
the adverb, placed befure the noun in the proper case: Er ging auf den Derg; 
ritt durch die Strafen; wir fubren iiber die Briide. These different methods 
produce a slight difference in the sense which generally cannot be expressed - 
in English, — 

+ The accusative of time is also used in answer to the question ‘when 2?’ 
But this accusative is found only in a few phrases, and instead of it the re- 
gular form with prepositions (an or in) is mostly used. ‘ When did he arrive? 
A mi dritten Mairz (or den dvitten Mtiirz), (on) the third of March. Sh jah 
ihn den nachften tints usually am nadjften) Tag, I saw him next day. 


e) The indefinite substantive pronoun man (§ 22.) is very frequently 
an equivalent of the passive voice, if the doers of the action | 


Fo 


a) 


b) 


¢) 


d) 


r 


are indefinite persons, or if it is not ‘convenient to mention them: 
MHMiaw dadjte daran, dieje Makregeln anzunehmen, zt was considered tol 
adopt these measures. Wan mufte den Plan aufgeben, the plan” 
had to begiven up. Wan iiberhiufte ibn mit Borwiirfen, he was 
overwhelmed with reproaches. 


the double form of the passive with fein and werden see P. C.74. 77, — 


2. Personal and Impersonal Passives : 
Only verbs governing an accusative as direct object form a complete 
passive voice, by changing the accusative into the nominative as 
passive subject. The active subject in the passive ccnstruction is 


nsdiat 





oe ae es ee 





introduced by the preposition von (by), sometimes by durd) (by): Der — 


Lehrer {obt den Sebiiler, the teacher praises the pupil. Passive: Der 
Sdiiler wird von dem Lehrer gelobt, the pupil is praised by the 
teacher. Verbs, governing theaccusative as direct object are called 
TRANSITIVE, and the passive voice formed from these is called the 
PERSONAL PASSIVE (having the transitive accusative as a subject). 
The existence of a personal passive is a certain evidence of the 
active verb being transitive, and of its governing the accusative. 

Verbs NOT TRANSITIVE form an IMPERSONAL PASSIVE, if their idea ad- 
mits of a PERSON as subject. The impersonal passive exists only in 
the infinitive (the governing verb taking the impersonal form), and 
in the third person singular of all tenses. In its complete form it 


is introduced by e8 (it), which is left out if it does not begin the © 


sentence, It is translated in various ways: 8 twurde iiber diefe 
Bemerfing gelacht (or: Uber dieje Vemerfung wurde gelacht), this 
remark was laughed at. ier darf nidjt geraudt werden, 
smoking is not allowed here. 8 wird wm Antwort gebeten (or: 
Um Antwort wird gebeten), an answer is requested. G8 ift bis zum 


Abend geLampft worden, the battle lasted till evening. (S.§ 79.) _ 


Verbs governing the genitive or dative form an IMPERSONAL passive 
only, in which the genitive or dative object remains unchanged, 
and generally is placed at the beginning of the passive phrase 
(without e8), Such impersonals may generally be translated by 


English ordinary passives: €8 tward meiner nicht mehr bedurft — 


(or meiner ward nidjt mehr bedurft), [ was no longer needed, - €8 
wurde ihm nidt geqlaubt (ihm wurde nidt geglaubt), he was not 
believed, Dent Feldherrn wurde gefcmeidelt, the general was 
flattered. Deinem Freunde fann nidt geholfen werden, your 
friend can not be helped. 


Neuter and intransitive verbs often take a REFLEXIVE form with the © 


force of an impersonal passive (with or without faffen see No. 1): 
Gs ftirbt fich [diver mit bifem Gewiffen, people die hard with a 
bad conscience. €8 geht fich hier gut, here is good walking. Hier 


ee eS ee ees ee ee oe 


— ven we ae 








ae ee es ae ae 
7 . 
, i 


oe SR 


Lafit fich nur mit Miihe jpredjen, it is difficult to speak here (one 
can speak here only with trouble). 
§ 104. TENSES, INFINITIVES, PARTICIPLES. 
1. The present tense has sometimes the force of a future, of a command 
or of the English present perfect: Wann fommft du zuriid, when are you 


going to return? Die Schweden riicen morgen in die Feftung, the Swedes will 


Be Ss, 


enter the fortress to-morrow. Shr {chweigt, bis man euch fragt, be silent till 
you are asked. Du bleibft hier, you must remain. Yh warte jdon lange bier, 
I have waited here for a long time. 

2. In lively narration the present is often used with the force of an 
imperfect, and the perfect with the force of a pluperfect, [8 dies gejdah, 
ftiir;t er aus feinem Verfted hervor, und hat jeinen Gegner bald iber- 
wiltigt, when this happened, he rushed from his lurking place, and had 
soon overpowered his antagonist, 

3. The reerrect is, like the English past, the proper tense of the 
narrative. But in stating detached facts belonging to the past, the perfect 
is oftener used than the imperfect: Wm vergangenen Freitag hat der Genat 
die Berathungen iiber das Finanjzgefes beendigt (or beendigte der Senat), last 
Friday the Senate finished the deliberations on the finance-law. , 

4, The perrect, aside from having the force of the English past tense 
is employed, like the English present perfect, to indicate past events the 
results or effects of which exist at the time of the speaker: Sarl Ritter hat 
burd) jeine Geographie von Aften die Wiffenjdhaft der Erdfunde ganglic) um- 


- geftaltet, Charles Ritter, by his Geography of Asia, has entirely revolutionized 


geographical science. Der Degen hat den RKaijer arm gemadt, the 
sword has impoverished the emperor. | 

5. The ruture (first and second) is often used of probable events, re- 
ferring to the present or past time: Gr wird aenfen, dai du nicht haft fom- 
men wollen, he probably thinks that you did not wish to come. Dein Vater 
wird (jdon) dafiir gejorgt haben, your father has probably taken care for that. 

_ 6. The inrinitive of any verb, in connection with the neuter article, is 
used with the force of a noun, corresponding to English substantives or 
participials in ing: Das Sdjreien und Toben der Ptenge, the shouts (shouting ) 
and raging(s) of the multitude. Such intinitives have no plurals, but are de- 
clined (stronG) in all cases of the singular. 

7. The suBsEcr-INFINITIVE is used either with or without the preposi- 
tion zu: Geine Reigungen befiegen ift jehwer (or feine Neiguugen zu befieger ift 
jhwer, or e8 ift jchwer feine Neigungen yu befiegen), it is difficult to conquer 
one’s inclinations. 

8. The opsect-Inrinitive is generally preceded by the preposition 31, 
and is used aftzr verbs, adjectives or nouns, frequently with the force of the 
English participial in ing with or without prepositions, and of other forms of 
expression: Qir fangen an, den Plats zu rdummen, we commence fo evacu- 
ate the place. Wir fubren fort 3u fptielen, we continued playing. Er war 


unfabig 3u fpredjen, he was unable to speak. Die Gewohnheit jufammen 


wee GE le 


3u fein, the habit of being together. Der Feind verhinderte uns, weiter 
vorjzuriiden, the enemy prevented us from advancing any farther. 4 She 
glaubte, ifu 3u verjftehen, I believed I understood him. Gr wufte fid) — 
aus der Verlegenheit 3 zie hen, he knew how to extricate himself from the 
dilemma. , 
9. Present infinitives of the active voice with 3u, in connection with | 
the verb jein, have a passive meaning, generally with the idea of possibility: — 
Dieje Meinung ift faum zu vertheidiqen, this opinion can hardly be 
defended (is hardly defensible). Daran war nist zu denfen, this was — 
not to be thought of. f 
10. Infinitives with zu after the preposition um denote purpose, being — 
rendered tn order to: Er ihat dies, um mir 3 fchaden, he did this in order to 
hurt me, . 
11. The opsect-rNFINITIVE is used without 31 a) after the modal auxil- — 
jiaries including laffen: Gr darf nidjt in die Stadt fommen, he is not — 
allowed to come to the city: Shr werbdet euren Borjas nist durdfihren — 
fonnen, you will not be able to carry out your purpose. €8 mag fein, wie — 
ihr jagt, it may be as you say; b) after the verbs Hiren, fehen, fiihlen, finden, 
lernen, lebren,. heifen, geben, fahren, bleiben, haben, helfen, machen: Sch hire — 
ibn fommen, I hear him come, Wir fahen den Trupp fid langjam 
nadbern, we saw the troop slowly approaching. Die Noth lehrte ihn ar be ie 
ten, necessity taught him to work, Geht jdlafen! Go to bed (literally: 
tosleep. See P. C. p. 91.). c) The participle in the compound tenses of the 
modal auxiliaries and of the verbs [affen, beifen, madjen, feber,  belfen, 
horen takes in these constructions the form of the present infinitive: €r hat 
nicht fommen wollen (instead of gewollt), he has not wished (did not wish) 
tocome. Shr hiattet friifer aufhoren f offen (instead of gejollt), yon ought to 
have stopped sooner. Sch Habe ihn fpredjen hd ren (instead of gehirt), Ihave — 
heard him talk. See § 80, 9. 3 
12. Those English verbs which require a substantive object along with — 
an infinitive, generally admit a similar construction in German, as: Gr befabl 
mir 3uFommen, he ordered me to come. Sr zwang den Feind, die ; 
Waffen zu ftreden, he compelled the enemy to lay down their arms. Wir 
hirten Semand fpr edjem, we heard somebody talk.— But the verbs of | 
WISHING, EXPECTING, BELIEVING, DECLARING, CONSIDERING do not admit this z 
construction in German, generally requiring a clause with daf: Er wiinfdjte, | 
da wir inder Stadt bleiben mi dten (not: er wiinfdjte uns in der Stadt 
3 bleiben), he wished us to stay in the city. Wir glaubten, da f er unjerer i 
Meinung jet, we believed him to be of our opinion. | 
13. Instead of construing the passives of these verbs (of wishing, etc.) : 
with infinitives, the German language generally employs an IMPERSONAL COn-_ 
struction followed by duf: He was believed to be in danger, e¢8 wurde geglaubt. ¥. 
(man glaubte), da f er in Gefahr fet = 
14. The English infinitives employed in indirect statements after in- — 
terrogative adverbs or.pronouns,.and after so as, must be rendered by com- | 


ds Alo 
an aks yr 


us be rs ie oh 2 peck Boy 


Se eS ey 
eta 


aah Ay, be ase tr rerg Cy 


ee a e—————————eEeEeEeeereer eee 
od EP eth wf hem; 


ee ee ee ee ae 
SI a Pir aaa 


— ooo 


plete sentences, so as, being translated by fo ba: I was doubtful what to do, 
$c) war in Bweifel, was zu thun jei.— We were so near the battery as to be 
exposed to the guns, wit waren der Batterie fo nahe, da} wir den Ranonen 
ausgejeBt waren. 

15. German participles are used in the following instances: 

a) With the force of apsxcrives, as: Anziehende CErzahlungen, 
interesting tales. Yad vol{bradter Arbeit, after the labor had been 
accomplished (literally: after the accomplished labor). Here belongs the 
present participle preceded by 3u, which is often called the ruruRE PARTICIPLE 
OF THE PASSIVE, and is rendered either by a passive infinitive, or by a relative 


_ clause with a passive verb: Gine fpiter ju beantwortende Srage, a 


question to be answered ata later time. Diefe nidtzu iiberfehende That- 


 fadje, this fact which ought not to be overlooked. All these participigs must be 
inflected like attributive adjectives, 


5) Participles are used (without inflection) if an action is represented 
as ACCOMPANYING the action expressed by the main verb, or as being closely 


connected with it, as: Er ging fort, die Worte des Mtannes iiberdenfend, 


he went away reflecting on the words of the man. But itis inadmissible thus 
to employ the participles of any auxiliary (modal or other). English parti- 


‘cipial constructions of this kind are generally changed into complete sen- 


tences: Having spoken thushe went away, na cd)dem et jogejproden hatte, 
ging er hintveg (not; fo gefprodjen habend). English expressions with the 
auxiliary participle ‘being’, and many of those with ‘having’ that correspond to 


German verbs conjugated with jein (§ 69), may be generally rendered by the 
past participle of the main verb, as: Bon diejent Vorhaben unterridtet, 


riiftete ex fic) anf den Kampf, being informed of this design, he prepared for the 
conflict. — $n der Stadt angefommen, erfundigte id) mid) fogleid) nad 
ihm, having arrived at the city, I immediately inquired for him. 

c) Past participles are used to complete the verb fommen with the 


force of English present participles, and verbs of RECEIVING with the force of 


a noun in apposition: Gr fam qelaufen (geritten, etc.), he came running 
(riding, etc.). Sch habe e8 gefdbenft befomimen (erhalten), I received it 
as apresent. Sometimes past participles (even in connection with reflexive 
pronouns) are used with the force of IMPERATIVES: Aufgepaft ! pay attention ! 
Nur fic) brav gewehrt, only defend yourselves bravely ! 

16. Aside from these instances, English participial constructions can 
generally not be expressed by means of German participles, The most usual 
German equivalents of English participial expressions are: a) INFINITIVES, 
either in the form of substantives (No. 6), or preceded by 3u; b) COMPLETE 
ctauses introduced by bdaff, indem,da, nacjdbem; c) FINITE vERBs connected 
with the preceding sentence by means of the conjunction und. 

Clauses with daf, and infinitives with 31 are mostly used to render those 
participial constructions in which a participle in ing is preceded by a prepos- 


ition. In these constructions the English preposition is regularly expressed 
_ by a prepositional adverb compounded with da (§ 95, 2): By giving this advice. 


on: OM mee 


dbadurd, da & (man, id, etc.) diefen Math gab (giebt, etc.) [literally: by 
ihis that he gave]. He insisted upon seeing him, er beftand dDarauf ifn 3u 
jehen (literally: upon this to see him). 

Exampies: By teaching others, we instruct ourselves, dur) das Le hren 
Andrer unterridjten wir uns felbft (or Dadurd, da wir Andere lehren, or 
indem wir WAndere lehrew).—-1 expected no reward for delivering him from 
this condition, id) erwartete feinen ohn dafiir, daf ich ihu anus diefer Lage 
rettete (or gerettet hatte, cr retten wiirde, according to the connection) — I oc- 
cupied myself with reflecting on the inconstancy of fortune, ich bejdhaftigte mich 
Damit, iiber die Unbeftindigfeit des Gliids nadzudenfen (or mit 
Nach denen iiber etc.), — I did not think of his being absent, ic dadte 
nist dara, da er abtwejend f ¢ i— After delivering my message, I returned, 
naddem ic) meine Soticaft abgeftattet hatte, tehrte ich) zuriid. — 
Their conversition turning upon my favorite theme, I soon prrtook in the — 
debates, Da ihre Unterhaltung mein Lieblingsthema betraf, nam ich bald 
Theil an den Verhand{ungen. —I could not lend him those books, needing . 
them for my own use, ic) fonnte ihm dieje Biidher nicht lethen, da (indem) 
id) ihrer zum eigenen Gebraude be durfte.— Knowing that I would have | 
your assistance, I engaged in the work, Da id) wufte,* da ic) Shren 
Beiftand haben wwiirde, iibernahm ic) die Arbeit. — I told him all this, adding 
that he was expected by you, ic) fagte thin das Wlles, und fiigte hingu, ; 
daf} er von dir erwartet Wwerbde. a il 

§ 105. THE SUBIUNCTIVE AND CONDITIONAL. i 

The German subjunctive corresponds either to the English indicative, © 
potential or imperative; rarely to the English subjunctive. ; 

1. The sUBJUNCTIVE OF THE PRESENT is used in independent sentences — 
conveying commands or requests: Der Bote trete ein! let the messenger | 













enter. ©é lebe der Konig, (long) live the king! Bertrauen wir, was wir 
diefe Nacht gejehen, dem jungen Hamlet, let us impart what we have seen to-_ 
night unto young Hamlet. This form is always used with the force of an 
imperative if the third person is used for direct address: Gein Sie vorfidtig, — 
be cautious. Gei Gr fein Thor, be no fool. Instead of this subjunctive, cir-_ 


cumlocutions with the imperative laf}, (plur. faft, fafjen ©ie), or with the 








* It would be grammatically correct tu render this sentence and the © 
next by literally employing German participles of the present: ,, Wiffend, da 
ich etc.”, and ,,bingufiigend daR er etc.”. But in clauses denoting cause, and — 
if the English participle has the force of a mere coordination, the German 
language generally prefers complete sentences introduced by conjunctions. 
This is especiuly the case when the English participle is connected with 
complicated adjuncts. Participial constructions are inadmissible in German, — 
when the English participle has a subject different from that of the principal — 
sentence, or when it is introduced by a preposition. See the examples, RS 

+ The use of laf or fat is only admissible in direct address, 











ei WE 


 gleid) anfangen, let us begin directly. QWir wollem uns entfernen, let us 
_ withdraw. 

2. The subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect is used in exclamatory sen- 
tences expressing a wish of the speaker,- not corresponding to reality. Such 
sentences have the inverted order (see § 106, 9.), and may be introduced by 
the interjection D! The verb is frequently followed by the particle doch. 

Such sentences are also introduced by the conjunction Daf, or D daf, in which 
case the verb stands at the end: (©) Ware doc) dein Bruder hier, would that 
your brother were here! © daf ich ifn nie gejehen hatte, would that I had 
never seen him! 

3. The subjunctive of all tenses is employed in indirect statements to 
represent an action as conceived, asserted, asked, commanded or wished, by 
a person introduced in the text by the author (or speaker). The author may 

_ thus introduce himself (id)) or a person addressed (Du, Gie)*: Er glaubte, 





= ae Rae Dg Ah Seago ge » in 
” Fe) re en On tare ce ; 
. (hie ER 


A ete ale pants tor CaN abn YE pe2 ies | mo< 








* The subjunctive of indirect statement is regularly used when the verb 
of the principal sentence is in the imperfect or pluperfect. If in this 
instance the verb of the stated clause is in the future, the indicative can 
neyer be used. If the principal verb is in the present or future, the sub- 
junctive must likewise be used if the statement is against reality or doubt- 
ful: Gr wabhnt, da ich 3 Haufje fei, he falsely supposes, that Jam at home. 
Gr bebhauptet, dag fein Bruder nich nicht Tenne, he maintains, that his 
brother does not know me (if he really knows the speaker), Else, in indirect 
statements dependent on verbs in the present or future, the in licative is 
generally preferred to the subjunctive. In regard to the use of the sub- 
_ junctive of indirect statement the following specialities should be noticed: 

a 1. The most usual words which may govern a clause of indirect state- 
_ ment are these: a) Verbs of conceiving: denfen, glauben, waihnen, vermuthen, 
-grweifeln, hoffen, erwarten, fiircdten, e3 fceint mir, fommmt mir vor, and the 
nouns Gedanfe, Wahu, Glaube, Wbjicjt, etc. b) Verbs of saying and asserting: 
jagen, bemerfen, behaupten, erflaren, verfichern, antiworten, fchreiben, benadrich- 
_ tigen, and the corresponding nouns Bemerfung, Erfldrung, etc. c) Verbs ex- 
_ pressing or implying a question: fragen, fich erfundigen, nadhforfden, giveifeln, 
nicht wifjet (with ob), and the nouns Frage, 3iweifel, etc. d) Verbs of 
_ commanding: verlangen, fordern, befeblen, verordnen, and the nouns BSefebl, 
 ~Auftrag, etc. e) Verbs of wishing: wiinjcdhen, bitten, wollen, with the nouns 
 Wrnjeh, Bitte, etc. tah | 

2. If the indirect statement is conceived as a QuEsTION, it is introduced 
_ by ob (whether) or by interrogative pronouns and adverbs, Other indirect 
_ statements are introduced by daf. 

: 3. Sentences dependent on the clause introduced by da, ob or inter- 
_ yrogative adjectives or adverbs, have their verbs in the subjunctive, unless 
_ they represent the author’s own conceptions: Gr fagte, da} er nidjt gefom- 
‘men jet, weil Gefchafte ihn verhindert hd tten, he said that he had not come 
_ because engagements had prevented him. But: Gr fagte, dafi die Uhr, die er 
 BHatte, ihm nicht gehire, he said that the watch which he had, did not 
belong to him. 

4, Dependent clauses may be indirectly stated by means of the sub- 
junctive, even if there is no principal sentence introduced by dah: Shr wiinfdt 
eu) einen tugendhaften Sohn, dev eures Hauptes greife Loden ehre, you wish 


Ye Rg Cte ag 








— 


3 


ween le he 


daf fein Vruder frank fei (ware), he believed that his brother was sick. 
Sch antwortete, da ich feinen Vorjdlag annadh me (annehme), I answered 
that I accepted his proposition, Dan jagt, da der Krieg aucgebrodjen fei, it 
is said that war has broken out, -Sc) fragte ihn, ob er mid) verftanden habe, 
T asked him, whether he had understood me. €8 wurde allgemein verfangt, 
dag der General angreifen folle, it was universally demanded that the 


general should make the attack, Gie wiinjdjten, da unfere Abreije aufqefdoben — 


werden nid cd) te, they wished that our departure might be postponed. Pan er- 
wartete, daf der Prafident das Gefets nicht beftatigen werde, it was expected 
that the President would not confirm the law. Die Semerfung, daR er den 
Brief nie gejehen habe, war unwabhr, the remark that he Aad never seen the 
letter was untrue. ; 


4. The subjunctive is used, in clauses introduced by bdaf, if the action — 
is represented as necessary, expedient or desirable: €8 ift erforderlich, dag 
dies gefdjehe, it is necessary that this shouldbe done. G8 ift unfer Snterefje, — 


Da dies Gejets geindert werde, it is our interest that this law should be 


changed. If such and similar sentences contain a fact that has actually — 


happened, the indicative must be used even if in English the potential should 





for a virtuous son, to honor the grey hair of your head. ®Diejer Bore © 


{chlag wurde verivorjen, da er mit dem Vortheile der Stadt unvereinbar fei, 
this proposition was rejected since it was held that it was incompatible with the 
interest of the city, 


5. The conjunction dag may be omitted, which is almost always the © 
case in long QuoraTions. Sentences in which the conjunction da} is thus — 
understood are arranged in the common order (§ 106.5.8). Gr behaups — 
tete, der Brief fet thm nie eingehdindigt worden, he asserted (that) the — 


letter had never been handed to him. 


6. As to the TENsEs of the subjunctive, a distinction must be made 
whether the principal verb is in a past tense or not, If the principal verb is — 
in a past tense, three cases must be distinguished: a) if the stated action has — 
happened at the time of the statement, the present or imperfect is used. The 
imperfect is always used if in the pLuRAL of the present the subjunctive 
could not be distinguished from the indicative. Gr fagte, dak feine Gohne 
nod in Berlin feien (or wéren), but: er fagte, dag feine Gobue fic) in Berlin bee 
fauden (not befinden), he said that his sons were in Berlin. 6) If the stated — 
action has happened Berore the statement, the perfect or pluperfect of the 


subjunctive is used: Gr fagte, da er dein Buch vor zwei Sabhren verioren 
habe or hatte, he said that he had lost your book two years ago. c) If 


the stated action had not yet happened at the,time of the statement, either 4 \ 
the future subjunctive or the conditional is used in the clause; Er hoffte, daB 
du jeinem Wunjdhe geniigen werdeft or wiirdeft, be hoped that you 


would satisfy his wish. See Pr. C. p. 65. 


If the principal verb isin a present tense, the subjunctive of the clause 
is In the preseyt if the stated action is coincident with the time of the prin- = 
cipal verb: Gr wihnt, daff du abiwejend feie ft, he supposes that you are 
absent, If the stated action has happened before the time of the principal 
verb, the subjunctive is in the perrscr: Gr behauptet, da} du den Brief er- 
hatten habeft, he asserts that you received the letter. If the stated action 
lies in the future, the subjunctive is generally not used, After verbs of wish- — | 


ing the subjunctive present of migen (mige) is employed. p 


as 


— _s Le 


eer 


ee 











be employed: J regret that this should have happened, ich bedaure, daft fic) died 
ereignet hat (not habe or haben jollte). The tense of this subjunctive generally 
agrees with the tense of the principal verb. 

5. The subjunctive is required after the conjunctions damit (or daf if it 
has the meaning ‘in order that’), al8 ob (as if), al8 dDaf, if preceded by adjec- 
‘tives with gu (too). See §90, 7. Er eilte nach dem Plage, damit ihm Niemand 3 u- 
vorfomme (or zuvorfime, or 3xvorfommen fonne), he hastened to the place 
in order that nobody might anticipate him. Gr war 3u eifrig, als da fi er die 
Unterbrecdhung bemerft h atte (or hatte bemerfen jollen), he was too zealous to 
notice the interruption (literally: than that he should have noticed the interruption ). 
Dammit has its subjunctive in the present or imperfect; the subjunctive after 
al8 ob is treated according to the rules of the indirect subjunctive (No, 3), 
and al’ dag generally requires the imperfect if the principal verb is a present, 
and the pluperfect if it is a past. 

6. The subjunctive (imperfect or pluperfect) is used (optionally with 
the indicative) in relative clauses if the principal sentence contains a nega- 
tion which is restricted by the relative clause: Sd) fernne Niemanden, der died 
 perfudt hatte (or bat), I do not know anybody that tried this. Gr hat 

— Micdjts ermitteln fornen, was deinen WAnfpriiden entgegenftinde (or ent- 
gegenfteht), he could not ascertain anything contrary to thy claims (that 
might be opposed to thy claims). 

7. The subjunctive (optionally with the indicative) is used after 
general concessive clauses, introduced by was auch, wer auch, wo aud), etc, 
(See § 90, 10). 

8. The subjunctive (in the same tenses as required by the indirect 
subjunctive No. 3) is used in connection with denn in the meaning unless. 
(See § 90, 9). 

9, Conditional sentences corresponding to reality require the indicative: 
Jf this Be so, wenn dies jo ift (not fei), But hypothetical sentences (that is 
those which do not correspond to reality) require the following construction: 

a) The conditional clause (introduced by wenn, i) has its verb in the 

subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect.* 

b) The principal sentence has its verb either in the conditional (which 

is more usual), or in the imperfect or pluperfect of the main verb or 
of a modal auxiliary (finnen, diivfen, miiffen, etc.). See Pr. C. p. 65. 

Wenn ex jo Hawdelte (or handeln wollte), witrde ev angefehener fein 
(or wire er angefehener), if he would act thus, he should be more respected. 
Dies Ditrfte (wiirde) fic) nidjt ereiqnet haben, wenn du hier gewejen 
wareft, this would not have happened if you had been here. 

For the omission of wenn see P. C. p. 102. 

10. The conditional clause is frequently replaced by single words (fonft, 
bald, beinahe, etc.), by phrases or infinitives, and sometimes entirely under- 





* Some writers use here often the conditional. But it is Sotiderst 
faulty. 





Soe EE ts 


stood: Diefe Preife wiiren fon ft fiir woblfeil gehalten worden, these prices 
would have been formerly considered cheap (i. e, if we lived in former times), 
Sch wire beinahe gefallen, I nearly-had fa len (i. e, if | had not been favored 
by fortune or accident). Ueber den Vorzug eines diefer Miuner zu ftreiten, — 
wdre wnangemeffen, to dispute on the preference of either of these men 
would be inexpedient (i, e. if we would dispute), Gute Geifter wiirde id 


_ lieben, good ghosts I would love (i. e. the ghosts if they were good). 


Du follteft Zimmermann werden, you should turn a carpenter (i. i. e. if you 
were wise). 

§ 106. ORDER OF WORDS. 

1. Onrper or Arrrisutes. Adjectives are generally placed before their — 
nouns, even if they are accompanied by adjuncts: Gin mit grofer Mtithe exr- 
rungener Sieg, a victory obtained with great difficulty. 

'  Genitives are placed either before or after their nouns; in the former — 
instance the governing noun drops its article: Meines Bruders Kind, or das — 


Kind meines Bruders. 


2. Adjectives have their adjuncts generally before them: Der Mann ift 
de8 Hafjes wiirdig, the man is worthy of hatred. 

3. Among the adjuncts of verbs the personal pronouns stand first, 
then follow the case-objects, and last the adverbial adjuncts. 

4. The verb is placed differently according to the three orders of ar-— 
rangement: a) common order; b) inverted order; c) dependent order. 

5. ‘The common order takes place if the sentence is not introduced by — 
a subordinating conjunction (§ 90.) or a relative, and begins with the sub- | 
ject or its attributes. 

6. The inverted order takes place if the verb or one of its adjuncts — 
opens the sentence, which is the case in direct questions and for the sake 


_ of emphasis, 


7. The dependent order takes place in sentences introduced by rela-_ 


_ tive adjectives or adverbs,-by subordinating conjunctions, and in indirect — 
_ questions. See the foot-note (No. 2.) on page 87. 


8. In the common order the finite verb (auxiliary, or simple tense of the 
verb) stands immediately after the subject and its adjuncts, and the infini- 
tives and participles occupy the last place, so that all adjuncts of the verb — 
stand between the finite verb and the infinitive or participle. If the finite | 
verb is a separable compound the prefix stands at the end of the sentence. 
But infinitives with 3u may follow the prefix of the finite verb: 


Grofe Begebenheiten ereiqnen fic) oft unerwartet. 

Der VBerbredher ijt aus dem Gefaingnif entfprungen. 

Die Sonne geht unt jechs Uhr anf. 

Die Sonne ijt unt adjt Uhr untergegangen. 

Gr faingt an fich gu fiirdhten, or: er fiingt fic) zu fiixejten ait. 

9. In the inverted order the finite verb is placed before the subject and 

its adjuncts, the arrangement being in all other respects the same as in the 
common order. 








ape OME ee 





Oft ereignen fic) grofe Begebenhetten unerwartet. 
Gs ift cin Berbreder aus dem GefaingnifE entiprungen. 
| Win fechs Ubr geht die Goune auf. 
{ Un acht Ubr tit die Gonne nntergegangen. 
Sadngt er an fic) zu fiirdten? | 
10. In the dependent order the finite verb is placed after all other | 
words of the sentence. 


Weil grofe Beqebenheiten fic) oft unerwartet eretg nen. 

Der Verbrecher, der aus dem Gefingntjje entiprungen t ft. 

Es ift Friihling oder Herbjt, wenn die Sonne um feds Ubr anfgeht. 

Er hat mic) gefragt, wann du zuriidfehren wir ft? 

Exceptions: 

a) ‘The auxiliaryin the dependent order is frequently omitted: — | 
Nadhdem er dies mehrfach wiederholt (hatte), nahm er Abfchied. 

b) Those verbs whose participles take the form of an infinitive, have | 

_ their auxiliaries before the object-infinitive (without 3u): 

Da er unfern Vorjdlag nicht hat annehmen wollen, find wir une ~ 
verridjteter Sache fortgegangen. 





Sa ee 


List of Strong Verbs. 





REMARKS, 


1. Forms in ordinary type are those alone in use, 


1 
2. Forms in full faced type indicate that weak forms are also found, but — 


that the strong form is preferable. 


3. Forms in parenthesis are less usual than the weak or the regular 


strong forms, 


4. Formsin Roman characters are only poetical. 


5. No compounds are given. 


Verbs found in composition only, are 


given under the first letter of the root, with a hyphen prefixed to it. 
JZ The irregular weak verbs are appended in a separate list. 


Infinitive. Present Indic- Imper- Imperfect 
ative Sing. ative. Indicative. 

baden, bake biacfft, bacd&t ...... buf 
ebairen (-bierft, -biert) ..... cbar 

Only gebéren, bear (bring forth). 
ROR, Biber NS ae 8 biff 
bergen, hide birgft, birgt birg barg 
berften, burst (birfteft,birft) (birft) barft 

-(borft) 

biegen, bend beugst,beugt ...... bog 
bieten, offer beutst, beut beut bot 
Binpel, bind oa yee a SS band 
Deitest, eh Se oe ci eet bat 
blajen, blow blajeft, blajet ...... blies 
blewent wee Ss SAR Sa blieb 
Bistiben, Bleach Sos 8 blig 

As transitive only of weak conjugation. 
bratett, roast bratft, brat ...... (briet) 
brecjen, break brichft, bricjt brid) = brah 
eee ee eee -dieh 

Only gedethen, thrive. - 
-derben edirbjt,-dirbt -dirb  -darb 


Only verderben, perish, spoil. 


As transitive (spoil, destroy), WEAK or STRONG, 


Tnperfect 
Subjunetive. 


biife 
-bare 


bifje 
barge 
(biirge) 
(barjte) 
borfte 
bige 
bite 
bande 
bite 
bliefe 
bliebe ° 
blide 


(briete) 
brache 
-diehe 


(-diirbe) 
-Ddiirbe 


Past 


Particrple, 


gebacen 
-boren 


gebifjen 
geborgen 


geboriten 


gebogeit. 
geboten 
gebunden 
gebeten 
geblajen 
gebliebert 


geblichen 


gebratent 
gebrodjen 
-diehen 


-dorben 


oe ee 


ee 


, 
ee ee ee ee 


es alt ee ee ee 








| ' se 
: 


Infinitive. Present Indic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past 
. ative Sing. ative. Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle. 

m dingen, Ongape = flies. 0 Se Dang (diinge)  gedungen 
: (dung) 
 -drefdjen, thrash _rifchft, drifd) = Drafdh drdajde gedrojchen 
4 drift =” (droid) drdiehe 
\_-drieffen -dreussest  ...... -drof adriffe Ddrofjert 
; -dreusst . 
Only verdriefen, vex. 
-bringen, urge Sota AR to Slee drang drange gedrungen 
“effen, eat iffeft, ipt if aff diffe gegeffen 
fahren, drive fabrft, fabrt ....... fubr fiihre gefabren 
fallen, fall ent, fant eae cae fiel fiele gefallen 
Me PAR TUME. | heats fb 5's WEAK WEAK gejaften (in- 
: transitive) 
| fangen, catch fiingft, fingt ...... fing (fieng) finge gefangen 
Thus anfangen, begin; empfangen, receive and other compounds. 
—- fechten, fight (fichteft), fidt fidjt  — forht fochte gefocten 
—-feblen fiehlft, -fiehlt -fiehl -fabl (fable) zfohfen 
7 -fible 
: 


compounds of these. 


—Andeis, Og SR ARES ecg» Oe ea fand fanbde 
— flechten, braid flidtit, flidt ficht flodt flodyte 
RURER ge Sit ieee ia OS ees flip -fliffe 
Only befleigen, take pains. 
~fliegen, fly fleugst,fleugt fleug flog flige 
~~flieben, flee fleuchst, fleuch —floh flibe 
: fleucht 
 flieRen, flow fleussest, fleuss _flof flifje 
€ fleusst 
Fragen, : ask (frdgft, fragt) ...... (frig) (friige) 
q (Fragen is better conjugated weak throughout.) 
~~ freffen, eat (of frifjeft, frigt frig frag frafge 
beasts) 
meer ireeventeere = aii. be eee fror frére 
qdhren,ferment .::... sees. gobhr (gor) gohre 
or giiren (gore) 
‘geben, give giebft (gibft) gich(gib) gab gabe 
giebt (gibt) 
Meeet; feel ~ RIA... oe ging qinge 
ig | (gieng) (qienge) 
 gelten, be valued = giltft, gift gilt galt golte 





(galte) 


Thus befehlen, command; empfehlen, recommend, and several further 
Sehlen, fail, is weak. 


gefunden 
geflochten 
flifjen 


gefloger 
geflohen 


geflofjen 
gefreffen 


gefroren 


gegohren (ge- 


gorem) 
gegeben 


gegangen 


gegolten 


Infinitive. 


egefjen 


deg WS Ba: 


Present Indic- mper- 
ative Sing. ative. 


Only vergefjen, forget. 


giefen, pour 


eginnent 


Only beginnen, begin. 


gleidjen, resemble 
gletten, glide 
glimmen, gleam 
graben, dig 
qreifen, seize 
balten, hold 
hangen, hangen, 
hang (intrans.) 


. hauen, beat 
heben, raise 
heifjen, call, be 
called 
Helfer, help 
feifen, chide 
fiejen or -fiiren 


fimmen, climb 
flingen, sound 
fneifen, fneipen, 
pinch 
fommen, come 


~ Eriechen, creep 


Imperfect Imperfect Past 
Ladicatwe. Subjunctive, 


-giffeft, -gift -gif -gaf 


Participle. 


-gafe -geffert 


geussest,  geuss of goffe gegoffer 

geusst 

Hose... Pomien. gann aqane eqornent 

gone 

ee o> Geeta a glidy glide gegliden 

Spe eeemaagee care glitt glitte geglitten 

ele Oo d3's .» glomm  glomme geglommen 

grabft, qraébt ...... grub qriibe gegraben 

Figg Sa Lane quiff griffe —- geqriffen 

haltft, balt ...... hielt Htelte gebalten 

bdangft, hangt ... .. hing hinge gebangen 

(bieng) — (htenge) 
The transitive hingen, hang, generally conjugates weak. 

Sea tin! -- sa) daatare ayy « hieb hiebe gehauen 

ards ieee aeaie hob (hub) babe (hiibe) gehoben 

YR eS hief hiefe gebeifer 

bilfft, hilft Hilf half hiilfe(halfe) geholfen 

mh a Re (Tiff) (fiffe) (gefiffer) 

See N ion = eae -for =fore -foren 

Only erfiejen or erfiiren, single out, - 

Ray egemeng eeU flomm  $ Flomme geflommen 

Ree a Mata flang flange geFlungen 

te, a a aga, 'e = fniff, fnipp Eniffe, gefniffen, ge- 
fnippe fnippen 

(epee 35. Ses. fam fame gefommen 

fontmt) 

kreuchst, kreuch frod) friche gefrochen 

kreucht 








laden, load lant, fant = ...... {ud fide geladen 
lafjen, let laffeft, W@pt ...... fief TieRe gelafjen 
faufen, run ldufft, (auft .....- lief liefe gelaufen 
iajcetiee = FING. en) THAR... litt litte gelttter — 
fenmiereed | 85GB. on eas lieh liehe geltehen 
fejen, read fiefeft, fieft fies fas life gelefen 
fiegen, lie (down) <,..-5.  - ~ «@--» lag lige gelegen 
Hemeitetin = SAbero. « PBs. <. -lor alire sloren 
Only verfieren, lose. et 
linge. > <i. lang -ldnge elungen 


Only gelingen, succeed, and mifjlingen, fail. 











a a a ne 


3 — Bh = 
Infinitive. 

ative Sing. ative. 

lifdhen, extinguish fifdeft, lift lifd lof) 


liigen, lie (tella leugst,leugt leug fog 


lie) 
mablen, grind 2) Pe eS ae WEAK 
meiden, shun 060 mied 
melfen, milk (milfjt, milft) ...... (moff) 
mefjen, measure miffeft, migt mif maf 
nehmen, take nimim{t, nimm nabhm 
 nimmt = 
Weer ee ef =1ag 
Only genejen, recover one’s health. 
-nieRen -neussest,  -neuss -nof 
-neusst 
Only geniefen, eat, enjoy. 
MR MUIGNO cineca 4 epg oe pfiff 
phegen, cherish _.,..¢.. © sys. (pflog) 


Present Indic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect 
Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle. 


Past 


In transitive meanings always WEAK; in intransitive nearly always sTRoNG. 


In some phrases the strong forms are more usual than the weak ones 
pflegen, be wont, conjugates weak only. 


PeMeeeene eo, pried 
queflen, gush quillft, quillt quill quoll 
_ forth 
i quellen, make swell, conjugates wEAK. 
i PROM TOMEDEO we. a: aey ese roch 
en advise rathft, rath ...... ricth 
REMI O'S Riese gd ss engine 9 rieb 
ee Te rift 
; CE Ge eek vitt 
_-viecher, smell reuchst, reuch rod) 
reucht : 
RE TOMEIO ca FR aes rang 
m rinnen,ran (flowy... ... °°) oy... rant 
SS ot ae eee eee rief 
Me aigempenee tain... L/ Uaitdideess WEAK 
 faufen, drink faiufft, fauft ....... foff 
(of beasts‘and drunkards) r 
ee. ee jog 
Memmanen, Create 2000... Tdutisi..e. {chur 





fol 


fdjolle 


lofdje gelofden 
ldge gelogen 
WEAK gemablen 
miede gemiedent 
(motte)  gemolfen 
mie gemteffen 
name genomnten 
aniife atefent 
snoffe sto ffen 
pfiffe _gebfiffen 
(pflige) — (gepflogen) 
priefe gepriejen 
quolle gequollen, 
(swollen) 

réche gcroden 
ricthe gerathen 
riebe geriebert 
riffe geriffeit 
ritte geritten 
ride gerodjen 
range gerungent 
(riinge) 
ronne geroiment 
(ranne) 
riefe gerufer 

WEAK pC falzen 
Joffe gefoffen 

| foge gcfoger 
{chiife gefdaffer 


{chaffen in verfdjaffen, procure, and in the meaning ‘work’ is wHak. 
So len, sound Pied ss eas some 


gejdotien 


shee: le ace i 


Infinitive. Present Indic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past 
ative Sing, “ ative. Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle. 


sAdjehen Aciehft,  fchich yah —fchitge «= fdjeyen 

Adjieht 

Only gejdjehen, happen. 

jdjeiden, part, sever ...... wee {chied {chiede — gefdjieden = 
eigen SOSA: ade. teen ae jcjient {diene geicienen 


jdjelten, scold fbiltft, jchilt fhilt jcalt — — fdjolte gejdolten 4 
| (jolt) — —(idiilte) 
{deren, shear (jdhierft, (jchier) fdr jdore —gefdoren 











{diert) 
UES ARNE ia ce OS eek {dob jchobe gefdohen 
Wyteneenueb as. didbw ce jdhoR {hoffe gejdoffen 
Snbte. fat oo isas ae fcjand fchiinde gefunden 
(jchund) ({chande) 
{chlafen, sleep fechlafft, fchlaft ...... fchlief fdyliefe gejdblafen 
{ehlagen, strike felagft, jablagt...... {lug fchliige gejdjlagen 
rathjdlagen, deliberate, conjugates wEaxK, ' 
{dileidjen, slink  ...... Ne sed folic) {dhlicje — gefdhliden 
Saar ana eeeAIe fhliff fchliffe gefdliffen ; 
In some senses it conjugates WEAK. | 
Siete aiike 2 idlip —«sfdiliffe. §~—getdiliffen 
{ajliefen, shut schleussest, schleuss fdjlof {hloffe gefchloffer 
schleusst a 
PRON ee Kee > eae fdlang fajliinge gefdlungen 
, ({chliinge) ; 
Vutec EOW eas ae fdhinifg fhmiffe gefdmifien 
fdjmeljen, melt os fhmils fmoly jfdmolzye gefdmoljen 
| mil;t 
Usually a in Pansitive meaning. : 
iciedaay iS. gee jgnob  fhndbe geidgnoben 
SOMDO ON. nckeas ccs fdynitt fdjuitte  gejdnitten — 
fdrauben, screw 6.5... 00 sae eee . frob fhrobe  gefdroben 
Adjrecfen, be |chricfft, Sdhrié -\chraf |chraife  -\chroden 
terrified -fchricdt (Acrad) = (-fcrae) ; 
Only in compounds (erfdjredfen, aujfdjreden, etc.). In transitive” 
meaning WEAK. i ; 
idiremenjwite 249... (PARR... fdjrieb fcjriebe  gefdjrieben 
idycetems crys: chek thee fcjrie fdjriee geidjrieen 
Sycriten, Gide. ioc cee sy | peas fcjritt fepvitte gejd)ritten 
idbroth. asin ce Ee achtiek > oes geidroten 
{hwaren, ulcerate (fdjwierft, ...... fdjwor fhwore gejdworen 
fdywiert) (jdjwour) (fdjrwiire) 


fcweigen, besilent...... «sees jdwieg  jdwiege gejdwiegen | 





Infinitwe. 


- fchwellen, swell 





y 


fcd)winden, vanish 


$ 
{chwingen, swing 


F 
: jchbworen, swear 


7 


- febett, see 
fein, be 

- fieden, boil 
- fingen, sing 


-finfen, sink 
-finnen, meditate 


-figen, sit 
fpalten, split 
- fpeien, spit 
fpinnen, spin 


ST oicifen, slit 
fpredjen, speak 
fpriefen, sprout 


_fpringen, spring 
-ftedjen, prick 
- fleden, stick 











| ftieben, disperse — 
_ ftinten, stink 


: ftofen, thrust 
Sretchen, stroke 


-fdwimimen, swim 


_— 


Present Idic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect 


ative Sing, ative. 
fhwillft, fdrwill 
jh willt 


In transitive meanings WEAK. 


oG.6 A &e = oo) eyed -@:'e Le 


46.646 #—- | |. 8 & 8-0 0 


fiehft, fieht — fieb 
bin, bift, ift fet 


O12 Bee... § O\)) we 7Bie6 @ 


e@erveve 


eeeere80e i #888808 


Ppridhft,fprid)t fprid) 
spreussest, spreuss 
spreusst : 


ftichft, flict — fttdh 


-(ftictft, ftictt) (tice). 


ftiehlft, ftiehtt ftieht 
(ftehle) 


eine; -~ - m= Ads. 2 2:9% 


97 


Past 
Indicative, Subjunctive, Participle, 
jdrwoll  fdwolle  gefcywollen’ 


{dwamm fdywimme gejdwommen 
({chwomm) (jdwamime) 


fdjwand jcwiinde gejdwunden 
(jchwande) 

{Hwang  fdwiinge gefdwungen 
(jd) wange) 

fcjwor or fdjwore or gejdjworen 

fdjronr fchwiire 

jah fabe gefeher 

war wire gewejen 

fott fotte gefotien 

fang fange gejungen 

(sung) (stinge) 

fanf(sunk) fainte(fiinfe)gejunfen 

fann fonne gejounen 

: (jane) 

fafs fafe gejeffen 

WEAK WEAK __ ge fpalien 

{pie ipiee gefpieen 

fpanit fponne gejponnen 
({pare) 

iplig —ipliffe ~—_getpliffen 

fprad) = fpraidje = gefprodjen 

{prof fpriffe gefproffer 

fprang fprdnge geiprungen 

ftad ftidje — geftoden 

ftaf (ftacd) ftafe({tdde) ...... 

ftand ftiinde or — geftanden 

(ftund) fitinde 

ftabl ftdhle geftohlen 
(ftable) 

ftieg ftiege geftiegen 

ftarb ftiirbe gcftorben 
(ftarbe) 

ftob ftdbe geftoben 

ftant ftdnfe geftunften 
(ftiinfe ) 

fiefs ftiefe geftofen 

ftvid) ftridye gefiridjen 


Sa a 


Infinitive. Present Indic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past 
ative Sing. ative. Indicative, Subjunctive. Participle, 














fiveiten, struggle ...... © w..eee ftritt ftritte geftritten 
ON 6 ct agra oh) ees ee that (that) thate gethan 
tragen, carry tragft, tragt ...... trug triige getragen 
treffen, hit triffjt, trifft triff traf trife getroffen 
ey EEG didn You ake trieb triebe getrieben 
treten, step - trittft, tritt tritt trat trite getreten 
triefen. drip treufst,treufttreuf —troff troffe (getroffen) 
WER GOR ...ckseA dy > ems trant trantfe getrunten 
(triinfe) 
triigen, deceive _ treugst, treug _trog trige getrogen 
treugt 7 
wader, grow _—twiichft, Wwaichft ...... wus —wiidhje —gewadhien 
Wah, MRR eae: seen t= wog wage gewogen 
weigh : 4 
rwiigen has transitive meaning and is conjugated either srrone or oa 
wajdjen, wash SEMEN i ncn hoo wujd wiifche gewajden 
waft . 
MONG | Nee tne wob mabe gewoben 
I teas se ee . =wog 2wbge -wogelt 


Only beiwegen, move, which in some senses is conjugated strong, i 
others WEAK, ea or 


wectem,. yield cuss hap es wich wide gewiden- 
MON. - ee. | Oe eees wies wiefe geriejent 
werben, woo | wirbft, wirbt witb warb -wiirbe geworben 
(warbe) 
werden, become  wirft, wird. ...... ward or wiirde geworden 
wurde 
werfen, throw wirfft, wirft wirf warf wiirfe geworfen 
| (warfe) 
Widen Wate = knee; Aakers wand wande gervunden 
AVON FG ree ee a want -winne  -iwonnen 
Only gerinnen, win. . 
SOL OLCUNG 6. eae 5. ae eees zieh ziebe gezteher 
ziehen, draw zeuchst, zeuch 309 Roge gezogen 
zeucht ° 


SEN FOTOS ice | le eee zivang swdinge —geslvungen 





Irregular Weak Verbs. : 





Infinitive. Pres. Ind. Sing. Imperf. Imperf. Past Participle. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 





E brennen, burn reg. brannte brennte  gebrannt 

; bringen, bring reg. bradjte bridhte gebradht 
 Dtiudjten (impers.) e8 daudht e8 Ddudjte e8 ddudjte geddudt 

think 

 bdenfen, think reg. — dbadjte biadjte gedadht 

_ biirfen, be allowed barf, darfft, barf durfte diirfte gedurft (diirfer) 

_ haben, have - haft, hat hatte hatte gehabt 

' fennen, know ~——rreg. Tannte fennte gefannt 

q ; (fannte) 

_ fonnen, be able fann, tannft, fann founte ‘founte gefonnt (founert) 
 ‘mogen, like mag, magft, mag modte § midjte gemodjt (msgen) 
 miiffen, be obliged mug, muft, mug mufte miifte gemuge (miiffer) 
 nennen, call reg. nanite nennte genannt 

; (ndinte) 

_ fenden, send reg. fandte fendete gejandt or gefendet 
4 (fendete) 

_ follen, be obliged fol, follft, fol reg. reg. gefollt (jollen) 
wenden, turn reg. wandte  wwendete  gewandt or geven- 
. (wendete) det | 
 Wwiffen, know weif, weift wei wufte wiifte geruft (1wiffer) 


: wollen, be willing will, willft, will wollte wollte gewollt (wollen) 








-=* 109 = ‘ 


Hee wey 26 A, Ge 








“2a The Roman figures refer to the Courses, I, denoting the Practical, il, 
the Theoretical Course. The English figures refer to the pages. 





*. 


‘Y, pronunciation I, 2; q@ changed in- adt Tage, a week I, 60. 
to @ in strong verbs I, 90. See adjectives II, 13; adjectives and 


ae a oe a ose 


vowels. adj. pronouns agree in gender with 
ab, prepos., used only in compounds their nouns I, 13; I, 13. 75; pre- 
Il, 71. dicative adj. not declined I, 39; I, 


aber, place of I, 97; coord. con- 13; weak declension of adj. I, 39; _ 
junction Il, 65; difference from Il, 14; U1, 27. 28; weak and strong — 
fondern I, 72; Il, 65; difference declension of adj. I, 40; Il, 14; : 
from allein Il, 65. strong declension of adj. I, 41; Il, - 
accentuation I, 7; on which 14. 28. 29; adj. used as adverbs I, 
syllable the accent is placed I, 7; 72; 11, 68. 69; adj. generally pre-4 
in compound words, %#,.; in com- ceded by their adjuncts I, 53; 
pound verbs II, 60. placed before their governing nouns 
accusative, answers to the objec- together with their adjuncts I, 105; 
tive case without preposition II, 3; when their nouns are understood 
case of the direct object I, 15; I, II, 13; placed after their nouns, 
78; when it has the same form as they do not agree with them IT, 75; 
the nominative I, 15; acc. singular indeclinable adj. II, 75; absolute. 
of adjective pronouns formed by the adi. denoting persons are placed 
ending en I. 15; dropping ot the e in the masculine gender, denot- 
in the ending I, 15; acc. of per- ing things in the neuter gender 
sonal pronouns precedes the dative II, 77; what pronominal adjec- 
I, 54; verbs with two accusatives tives may be used absolutely II, 
II, 79; no noun governs an accus- 77; inflection of absolute adjec- 
ative II, 79; accusative of spaceII, tives II, 77; adj. governing the 
80; acc. of time, measure, weight, genitive II, 79; adj. governing the 
and value II, 81; verbs that govern dative mostly correspond to English 
the objective in English may gen- adj. with to or for II, 79; adj. 
erally be rendered by verbs govern- _— generally not construed with the 
ing the accusative II, 78. - accusative II, 79, ; 














SE  ——— ee 





See 
. * 


adverbs, how formed I, 72; II, 
68. 69; their force and function in 
the sentence IT, 68; derived from 
adjectives II, 68; comparison of 
adv. II, 69. 74; pronominal adv. 
II, 70 foll. 

after, conjunction, translated by 
nacddem I, 81. 

agreement, II, 75 foll. 

all, when translated by gan; II, 22, 

allein, coordinating conjunction II, 
65; difference from aber II, 65. 

aller, declined I, 32; II, 21; alles, 
used of persons II, 21. 77. 

alflezeit, indefinite adverb, II, 72. 

als, when, I, 47; I, 74; subordinat- 
ing conjunction II, 65; alg, as II, 
66; al8, than II, 66; it requires the 
verb to be at the end I, 76; al8 ob 
II, 65; stands with the subjunctive 
II, 89; ob omitted in als ob II, 66; 
al8 omitted [I, 66; al8, distin- 
guished from wie II, 66; als dak, 

idiomatically used after 3u II, 66; 
requires the subjunctive in this 
connection IT, 89. 

although, how translated I, 102. 

an, preposition, when it governs the 
accusative, and when the dative |, 
93; II, 62. | 

ander, declines strong or weak I, 
48; II, 23. 

anftatt, preposition with gen. II. 61. 

any, when not translated II, 20. 

apodosis and protasis, I, 59; 
II. 67. 

apposition, nouns in app., how 
they agree II, 75. 


bald, adverb, compared II, 74. 

Sir, declined IT, 5. 

Bediente, difference from Diener 
and Knecht I, 76. 

before, conjunction, translated by 
ehe or Bebor I, 81. 


101 


argerm, personal and impersonal 
use of the verb I, 87. 

arrangement of sentences, op- 
ened by objects, adverbs or preposi- 
tions I, 72; arr. of clauses in which 
the participles of modal auxiliaries 
have the form of infinitives I, 108; 
arr. of sentences which have com- 
pound verbs as predicates II, 60. 
See order of words. 

article, repetition of I, 9, 15; de- 
finite art. I, 9. 14. 19; II, 3; inde- 
finite art. I, 10. 15. 18. 20; II, 3; 
different usage of articles in German 
and English II, 74. 75. 

as, how translated I, 13; II, 66. 

at before nouns of places, how 
rendered I, 29. 

aud) in connection with interrog- 
atives idiomatically used in a con- 
cessive sense II, 67; subjunctive in 
such clauses II, 89. 

augment, when used in the past 
participle I, 71; II, 53; augment 
of compound verbs II, 60. 

aug, preposition governing the da- 
tive IT, 61. 

auffer, preposition with the dative 
II, 61; auger wenn, used as conjunc- 
tion, except if, unless II, 67. 

aufferhalb, preposition with the 
genitive IT, 61. 

auxiliaries of the compound 
tenses I, 99; II, 38; verbs with 
the auxiliary fein II, 39; werden as 
aux. IT, 39; I, 74. 77. 80. 


bei, preposition with dative I, 24; 
II, 61. 62. 

betdes and beide distinguished 
II, 26. 

betriiben, fitch, used personally, 
and impersonally I, 87. 


bevor, subordinating conjunction 
If, 65. 

binnen, preposition with dative 
II, 61. 

bis, dll, prepositional ve: I, 60; 
in connection with prepositions, IT, 
62; how translated and construed 
I, 94; II, 62; subordinating con- 
junction II, 65. 

bisweilen, sometimes, indefinite ad- 
verb II, 73. 

bleiben, construed with a predicate- 


Cc. 


@, consonant, used only in foreign 
words I, 4. 

cases, theory of II, 77 foll; when 
the general equivalents of cases 
can not be employed II, 77, note; 
what is meant by adverbial cases 
II, 79. 

€ h, pronunciation I, 4. 

cities, gender of l, 29. 

clock, rendering of the phrases 
with, I, 95. 96. 

comparatives, formed I, 32; I, 
30; change their radical vowels I, 
32; Il, 30; comparative of adverbs 
Il, 69. 74. 

comparison of adjectives II, 30; 
irregular comp. II, 31; of adverbs 
If, 74. 

compound verbs, see verbs; comp, 
nouns, see nouns. 

conditional mood, conjuga- 
tion of I, 64; formation 2, 39; cond. 
mood in hypothetical clauses I, 65; 
II, 89. 

conditional sentences, gen- 
erally require the indicative II, 


da, adverb I, 23; adverb of time and 
- loose connective IL, 72; relative ad- 
verb II, 73; demonstrative adverb 
II, 74; combined with prepositions 


102 


D. 


nominative II, 78; conjugated with 
fein I, 99. 

e8 blibt, I, 86. 

both, how rendered II, 26. 

brennen, impertfect.of I, 58; IT, 35; 
subjunctive imperfect I, 62; Il, 35._ 

bringen, imperfeot of I, 58; II, 35; 
subjunctive imperfect I, 62; II, 35. 

but, when translated by fondern 
i. 73: 

by, preposition, how translated I, 
21. 74. 94. | 





89; when they must have the verb 
in the subjunctive or conditional, — 
see hypothetical clauses; cond. clauses © 
understood I, 65; II, 89. 90. 
conjugation, strong and weak, 
preface V, note; model of conjuga- 
tion of weak verbs II, 34; of strong 
verbs II, 37. 38; irregular conj. of 
weak verbs I, 58; LI, 35; of strong 
verbs II, 35 foll. 
conjunctions, II, 65 foll.; clauses” 
introduced by subordinate conjunc-— 
tions require the verbto be at the 
end II, 65. 
consonants pronounced I, 4 fol. 
to continue, when translated by 
fortjesen, and when by fortfabren 
I, 110. 
correlative ae bes rota I, 26; cor-_ 
rel. adverbs II, 74. : 
could, translated by fénnte I, 65; 
in clauses introduced by that I, 65; 
English potential pluperfect with — 
could, how translated I, 108. * 
countries, gender of I, 29. 


eet Momo H ey — 


ak 












I, 98; II, 64. 72; when these combin- 
ations must be used I, 99; da, con- 
junction (since) II, 65; da, since, re-— 
quires the verb to be at the end, I, 57. 


bantals, adverb of time, II, 70. 

Dammit, in order that, subordinating 
conjunction II, 65; subjunctive after 
damit IT, 89. 

dbantfen, with dative IT, 78. 


dann, adverb of time, II, 70. 


dDarum, adverb of cause II, 70. 

das ift, that is I, 39; Das find, 
they are I, 40. 

das, was I, 26; II, 19. 

da, subordinating conjunction IT, 
65; clauses introduced by daft re- 
quire the verb at the end I, 54; 
with subjunctive I, 62; II, 88. 89; 
dak omitted J, 63; II, 88; incon- 
nection with prepositions (ftatt, au- 
fier, ohne) and prepositional ad- 
verbs (Dadurd), etc.) II, 66. Clauses 
with daf} preceded by a _preposi- 
tional adverb, compounded with ba, 
are equivalents to English partici- 
pial constructions IT, 86. 

dative, how rendered II, 3; for- 
mation I, 19; when the dative 
drops the ending e I, 7; generally 
precedes the accusative I, 19; dat. 
of personal pronouns generally fol- 
lows the accusative I, 54; verbs 
governing the dative II, 78; verbs 
requiring two oljects generally 
have the direct object in the accu- 
sative, and the indirect in the da- 
tive II, 78; no noun governs a da- 
tive II, 79; adjectives with dative 
II, 79; dative after prepositions II, 
61. 62; adverbial dative is either 
possessive or the dative of the in- 
terested person II, 80; ethical da- 
tive ITI, 80. 

declension, strong and weak, 
preface V, note; decl. of nouns I, 
14. 17. 19. 30. 71; IT, 5; of nouns 
in et, ef, en I, 19/°33;* 1; 7 of 
nouns in e I, 34; II,.6; weak de- 
clension of nouns II, 5; scheme of 
weak declension II, 5; of nouns in 


103 


e with genitives in en8 II, 6; scheme 
of strong declension II, 6; nouns 
that soften the radical vowel in de- | 
clension II, 7. 8; feminine nouns 
of the strong declension II, 7; nouns 
strong in the singular, and weak 
in the plural II, 9; declension of 
proper names I, 28; II, 9 foll.; de- 
clension of the definite article, I, 
19; II, 3; of the indefinite article 
I, 20; II, 3; of possessives I, 20; 
II, 24; of pronominal adjectives 
I, 14. 17. 18. 19. 31; II, 15 foll.; of 
ordinary adjectives I, 39. 40. 44; 
II; 27 foll.; mixed declensicn II, 
29; declension cf comparatives and 
superlatives II, 31; of adjectives 
whose nouns are understood I, 40; 
of cardinal and ordinal numerals 
I, 42; II, 26. 

bein, possessive adjective II, 23. 

deiner, genitive of du II, 23. 

demonstratives I, 9. 12.18.31; 
II, 17; they agree with their nouns 
I, 13; demonstrative adverbs II, 
70; their roots ki and da II, 70. 

dente, formation of imperfect I, 
58; II, 35; subjunctive imperfect I, 
62; II, 35. 

denn, for, coordinating conjunction 
II, 65; idiomatically used with a 
subjunctive (e8 jet denn) in the 
meaning unless, II, 67. 89. 

der, die, da8, article I, 9. 14. 19; II, 
3; relative pronoun'II, 15. 16; its 
difference from welder II, 16, note; 
der as demonstrative II, 17. 18; in 
the plural used instead of Ddiejeni+ 
gen, die II, 19; der instead of der- 
jenige II, 19. 

bere, genitive plural of the demon- 
strative der, used instead of Deren 
II, 19. 

berjenige, der (weldjer); der, wel- 
cher I, 26. 27; IL, 17. 18. 


derjelbe, demonstrative pronoun 
II, 17. 18. 

desShalb, Deswegen, demonstrat- 
ive adverbs of cause II, 70; whether 
to spell def or des IT, 64. ; 

de fto in connection with je IT, 65. 

did, accusative of du II, 11; used 
as reflexive IT, 12. 

dDiejer, demonstrative adjective, de- 
clined I, 14. 17. 19; II, 14.17; die- 
fe contracted into dies II, 14. 

dDieSfeit, preposition with geni- 
tive II, 61. 

diminutives, how formed I, 102. 

diphthongs, pronunciation of 
I, 3. 

Dir, dative of du II, 11; used re- 
flexively IT, 12. 


€, vowel, pronunciation I, 2; when 
dropped in the declension of nouns 
II, 7; when dropped or retained in 
the conjugation of verbs I, 50. 90. 
91; not dropped in the subjunctive 
I, 62; when dropped in the imperat- 
ive of strong verbs I, 90; II, 36; 
changed into 1 inthe present and 
imperative of strong verbs I, 90. 

each other, how translated [, 83. 

eben, adverb, corresponding to the 
adjective derjelbe If, 72; used in 
connection with pronouns II, 72. 

ehe, before, subordinating conjunc- 
tion II, 65; requires the verb to be 
at the end I, 81. 

ein, indefinite article II, 3; declines 
strong or weak I, 48; IT, 20. 23. 26. 
ei, indefinite pronominal adjec- 
tive (some, any), II, 20; used sub- 
stantively II, 20; instead of the 
oblique cases of man II, 12. 13; ein, 
numeral II, 25; when the form ein’ 
must be used IT, 26. 

einasder, each other,-I, 83. 


104 


dod, coordinating conjunction II, 
65; dod), dennod, adverbs, 


equivalents of although I, 102. 

e3 Donnert I, 86. 

drei, cardinal numeral, when in- 
flected IT, 26. 

dDrobhen, with dative II, 78. 

Dit, pers. pronoun, declined II, 11. 

dutd, preposition with accusative 
II, 61; exponent of the passive 
agent I, 74; in compound verbs, 
-Il, 58. 

dDiirfen, modal auxiliary, con- 
jugated I, 107; IL, 57; peculiari- 
ties of diirfen I, 55. 


diirftem, used personally and im-.— 


personally I, 87. 


E. 


einbilden, fic, has the reflexive 
pronoun in the dative I, 83. 

einiger, indefinite adjective II, 20; 
translated by some or any II, 21. 


eitel, meaning nothing but is inde- 


clinable II. 75. 


efelu, fich, personally and imper- — 


sonally used I, 87. 
emphatic form of the English 
verb, how expressed I, 19. 
entgegen, 
II, 61. 


entlang, preposition with dative © 


II, 61. 
entjagen, governs dative II, 78, 


entweder — oder, coordinating — 


conjunction II, 65, 

er, jie, e8, personal pronoun I, 45; 
declined II, 11. 

erjt, not till I, 94. 


e8, impers»nal pronoun, omitted I, — 


34. 87; II, 54. 
etlidjer, instead of einiger II, 21. 
etwa, indefinite adverb, meaning 
of II, 72, 


not 
translated in the apodosis after the 





preposition with dative — 









die 


es Se 


"Ss eo On  e ee ee Se 
os a 


_—— 


ettvag, substantive pronoun I, 23; 
II, 13; used adjectively II, 20. 


105 


eee 


euer, genitive plural of bu II. 11; 
possessive adjective II, 23. 


eu), dative and accusative plural of everything, rendered by Alles 


du II, 11; used reflexively II, 12. 


fall, used as conjunction instead of 


wenn, if (in the case that) II, 66. 
feminine nouns, indeclinable in 
the singular I, 17; feminine per- 
sonal nouns in in I, 102; II, 4; they 
double the mn in the plural II, 6; 
feminine gender of derivatives IT, 4. 
a few, translated by einige or etlide 
II, 22; not a few translated by nidjt 
wenige or mance II, 22. 
folgen, conjugated with fein I, 99; 
governs the dative II, 78. 
fractions I, 46; II, 27; mixed 
fractions, how translated I, 56. 
fragen, construction with double 
accusative II, 79. 


II, 21. 


F. 


erau, Fraulein, as titles, trans- 
lated I, 46. 
freuen, fic, personal and imper- 
sonal use of I, 87. 
frieren, differently translated I, 
86; personally, and impersonally 
used I, 86. 
fiir, preposition with accusative I, 
15; 15,61. 
fiirdten, to be afraid, when used 
with drefexive pronoun, and ney 
without I, 89. 
% iir ft, declension of IT; 5. 
future tense, how formed I, 60; 
subjunctive of the future I, 64; 
both futures used of probable pre- 
sent or past events IT, 83. 


Cc. 


G, letter, different pronunciation of 
13. 

ganz, when act declined II, 75. 

gar, adverb of intensity, its mean- 
sig LE, 76: 

ge, see augment. 

gegen, preposition with the accusa- 
tive II, 61. 


 gegeniiber, preposition with the 


dative IT, 61. 


gehen, irregularly conjugated I, 91; 
MOR) 

gehorden, governs the dative 
II, 78. 


gelingen, conjugated with fein 
I, 99. 

gemdad, preposition with the dative 
II, 61. 

gender of nouns in general II, 4; 
of persons and things I, 9; II, 4; 
of countries and cities I, 29; II, 5; 


gender denoted by the ending in 
several derivatives I, 102; II, 4; 
natural gender of nouns II, 4; no 
common gender in German II, 4; 
gender of diminutives II, 4; gender 
of compound nouns II, 5; nouns 
with two genders IT, 5; pronomi- 
nal subjects followed by a predicate 
noun, generally placed in the neuter 
gender II, 76; the neuters Alles 
and was used of persons II, 77; 
neuter gender applied to indicate 
persons of either sex II, 77. 
genitive, how formed I, 17; how 
translated II, 3; genitive of nouns 
I, 71; when the vowel e in the 
ending e8 is dropped II, 7; genitive 
in en of nouns II, 6; genitive pre- 
ceding its governing noun cor- 
responds to the English possessive 
case I, 73; genitive singular of 


adjectives generally assumes the 
weak inflection II, 29; genitive 
governed by prepositions II, 61; 
genitive after verbs II, 78; after ad- 
jectives II, 79; most of thesimple 
verbs governing a genitive, also 


106 


—_—_— 


construed with an accusative II, 


78; genitive after nouns II, 79; ad 
verbial genitive II, 79. 
gern, adverb, how compared II, 74. 
@ raf, declension of Il, 5. 


H. 


haben, to have, the present conju- 
gated I, 13; imperfect I, 48; is an 
irregular verb II, 35; paradigm of 
II, 40; what verbs require haben as 
an auxiliary I, 99; I, 38. 39. 89; 
Luft haben I, 49. 

balb, numeral II, 27; when not 
declined II, 75. 

halber, preposition with the geni- 
tive II, 61. 

heint, to-night, used in local dialects 
Il, 72. 

het é eat, to be called I, 28; construed 
with a predicate-nominative II, 78. 

Held, declined II, 5. 

belfen, governs the dative II, 78. 

her, particle Il, 71; combined with 
prepositions I, 98; with adverbs II, 
70; meaning of her in these con- 
nections I, 99; difference from bin 
I, 99; II, 70. 


Herr, declined Il, 5; Herr, Frau, - 


Praulein as titles I, 46. 


$, vowel, pronunciation I, 2. : 
id, pers. pronoun, declined II, 11; 
used as noun II, 11. 
if, translated by wenn or ob I, 74; 
even if, how translated I, 102. 
ihm, dative singular of er II, 11. 
if, accusative singular of er II, 11. 
thnen, dative plural of er II, 12. 
ihr, how translated I, 10; dative 
fem. sing. of er (fie, e8) II, 11; poss- 
essive adjective (her, their) II, 23. 


Heuer, adverb of time, in this year, 


Il, 72. 
heute, adverb of time, to-day, II, 72. 
hi, demonstrative root II, 70. 72. 
hier, demonstrative adverb of place 


II, 70; in composition with prepo-_ 


sitions II, 72. 


hin, particle II, 71; combined with 


prepositions and adverbs I, 98; II, 
70; difference from her I, 99; II, 70. 

hinter, preposition with dative and 
accusative II, 61. 

Hirt, declined II, 5. 

however (much), wenn aud nod 
fo I, 103. 


hungern, used pemoonaily and im-_ 


somonaliz I, 86. 


{ 
by polthoticn! clauses require 


the finite verb to be in the sub- 
junctive I, 64. 65; the verb in the 
principal sentence of such clauses 
is in the conditional or the sub- 


junctive imperfect or pluperfect I, 


65; I, 89. 


ihrer, genitive plural of er (fte, e8) 
II, 11. 12. 
immer, indefinite adverb II, 72. 


imperative drops the ending e in 


certain strong verbs I, 90; II, 36; 
imper. passive formed with the 
auxiliary fet IT, 50. 
imperfect of fein I, 47; of haben 
I, 48; of weak verbs I, 58; II, 33; 
when the e¢ in the ending ete is 
dropped or retained I, 58; U, 33; 





ee a) 


_— 


a ee ee: 










irregular imperfect of bringen, den- 
fen, nennen, jenden, etc., of wollen, 
fonnen, miiffen I, 58; IL, 35; im- 
perfect passive 1, 77; the imperfect 


is the tense of the narrative II, 83. 


impersonal expressions, more 
numerous in German than in Eng- 
lish I, 87; impersonal form may be 
given to almost all sentences I, 87; 
when preferred to the personal 
form I, 87; impersonal verbs I, 86; 
II, 54 foll ; impersonal passive II, 
54, 82; reflexive impersonals II, 
54. 55; impersonal passives of verbs 
of believing, saying, etc., followed 
by da, correspond to English per- 
sonal constructions II, 84. 

in, preposition with dative or ac- 
cusative I, 24. 93; II, 62; in com- 
position takes the form ein, ‘if gov- 
erning the accusative IT, 71. 

indefinite pronouns II, 12. 20; 
indefinite adverbs II, 70. 72. 

imdem, indejfen subordinating 
conjunctions II, 65. 

infinitive, termination of I, 50; 
II, 32; with ju I, 50; place of the 
inf. in the sentence I, 50; inf. with 
git in compound verbs J, 72; inf. 
without 31 idiomatically rendered 
I, 91; used as a neuter noun I, 
105; Il, 47. 83; inf. after obne I, 


107 


109 after um I, 72; inf. of transitive 
verbs after {afjen has a passive mean- 
ing Il, 81; active inf, with 3u after 
jein has a passive meaning II, 81. 82. 
83; subject-infinitive is used with or 
without 3u II, 83; object-infinitive is 
generally preceded by the preposi- 
tion zu II, 83.84; verbs requiring the 
object-infinitive without ju II, 84; 
the English construction of the ob- 
ject-infinitive in connection with a 
substantive object after verbs of 
wishing,expecting, believing, declar- 
ing, considering is not used in Ger- 
man II, 84; the English infinitive 
after so as must be rendered by 
finite verbs after fo daff IT, 85. - 

innuerhatb, preposition with gen- 
itive II, 61. 

inseparable compound verbs, see 
verbs. 

interrogative adjectives de- 
clined I, 24. 31; interr. substantive 
pronouns declined I, 23; II, 10 
foll.; interrogative adverbs II, 70. 

inversion of the apodosis I, 
58. 

trgend in combination with in- 
definite pronouns II, 13. 20. 21; 
in combination -with relative ad- 
verbs II, 72. 

it, how rendered I, 23, 


J. (Consonant.) 


ja, affirmative particle I, 45. 

je, j¢ mals, indefinite adverbs of 
time II, 72; indefinite adjectives 
and adverbs derived from the root 
je dl, 73. 

je —Ddefto, subordinating conjunc- 
tions IT, 65. 

jedenfalt 8, indefinite adverb II,72. 

jeder, indefinite adjective I, 39; 
used substantively II, 20. 

jedermann, indefinite substantive 
pronoun II, 12; declined I, 13. 


jederzeit, indefinite adverb of | 
time, synonym of immer II, 72. 

jedeS8mal, indefinite adverb 
time II, 72. 

jentaid, indefinite substantive pro- 
noun I, 23; II, 12; declined IT, 13. 

jener, demonstrative adjective, de- 
clined Ij 18; 11, 17. 21. 

jenfcit, preposition with genitive 
TI, 61. 

jet, demonstrative adverb of time 
II, 70. 


of 


K, 


falt, e8 ift (mir) I, 86. 


fein, indefinite adjective, declined 
I, 40; II, 21; used substantively 
IT, 20. 

feinenfal!$, indefinite adverb 
Il, 72. 

feineSwegs, indefinite adverb 
II, 72. 


fennen, formation of imperfect I, 
58; II, 35; distinguished from 


ia 


lang8, preposition with genitive or 
dative II, 61. 

{afjen, when the active infinitive 
depen dtilie on it has a pope mean- 
ing II, 81. 

laut, preposition with genitive II, 
61. 

tauter, meaning nothing but is inde- 
clinable II, 75. 

eS ldutet I, 86. 


108 — 


wiffen I, 58; ribjenses a. 
I, 62; 11, 35: 
€8 Elopftl, 86. 


fommen, e8 fonunt mir vor, als 
ob I, 86. ; 
fiénnen, modal -auxiliary, con- 


jugated I, 49; II, 55; imperfect I, 58; 
peculiarities of conjugation IT, 55. 

fraft, preposition governing the 
genitive II, 61. 


fe hren, construction of II, 79. 

eid thun, impersonally used I, 87. 

lejen, fo read, how distinguished 
from voriefen, ablefen I, 84. 

letters, use of capitals in German 
i 

Leute, plural of Mann I, 105. 

little, translated I, 37; IL, 22; not 
a litile, nidjt wenig II, 22. 


M. 


maden, how distinguished from 
thun I, 49. 

maf, numerals with mal I, 46; II, 
26. 73. 

man, indefinite substantive pro- 
noun, how to translate I, 54; II, 
12; man, one, they I, 35; man as 
equivalent of the passive voice 
Il, 82. 

mander, mand ein, declined II, 
23; mandymal, indefinite adverb 
ll, 73. 

Manu, different from Penjdh I, 37. 

may, when to be translated by Diir- 
fen I, 108. 

mehr, indeclinable I, 37; II, 23; 
different from mebrere II, 23; used 
as adverb II, 73; corresponding to 
longer II, 73. 


IM e¢iit, possessive adj., see possessives; 


used predicatively Ii, 24. 


meiner, Der meinige, possessive 
adj., substantively used I, 43. 44; 
II, 24; das Meinige, Deinige, etc., 
my, they, etc. property II, 25; die 
Meinigen, Deinigen, etc. my, thy, 
etc. friends II, 25. 

metner, genitive of id II, il. 

Menfd, declined II, 5; distin- 
guished from Diann I, 37. | 

mtid), accusative singular of id II, 
11; reflexively used IT, 12.- 

might, translated by fénnte I, 65; 
by modjte I, 65. 

mine, how to translate I, 43; Il, 
24 foll. 

mir, dative singular of id I, 11; as 
a relive If, 12. 


miflingen, conjugated with fein 


I, 99. 
mitt, preposition governing the dat- 
ive I, 24; II, 61. 








— ee 


a 


immittelft, preposition governing the 
genitive II, 61. 

modjte, how translated I, 65. 

modal auxiliaries II, 54; their 
participles take the forms of infini- 
tives I, 108; II, 35; their peculiar- 
ities in conjugation II, 55. 

migemw, conjugated I, 107; II, 55 
full.; meaning of I, 108; peculiar- 
ities of conjugation IT, 55. 

moods of the verb II, 32. 


109 


Mr., Miss, Mrs., how translated 
I, 46. 

much, many, Il, 22; the adverb 
much generally translated by fehx 
I,’ 73: 

must with negatives translated by 
diirfen I, 108. 

miijfen, conjugated I, 54; II, 57; 
imperfect, how formed and rendered 
I, 58; peculiarities in conjugation 
II, 55; mii f{te, how rendered I, 65. 


N. 


nad), preposition with the dative II, 
61; before names of places I, 29. 

naddem, after, subordinating con- 
junction II, 65; requires the verb to 
be at the end I, 81. 

1a ch ft, preposition with dative II, 
61. 

RMarr, how to decline II, 5. 

neben, preposition with dative or 
accusative I, 93; iI, 62. 

nebft, preposition with dative II, 61. 

neh men, to take, governs thedative 
of the person from whom something 
is taken II, 78. 

tein, adverb I, 45; nature of II, 72. 

ntennen, formation of the imper- 
fect I, 58; II, 35; subjunctive im- 
perfect I, 62; II, 35; in the active 
construed with two accusatives IT, 
79; in the passive requires a predi 
cate-nominative IT, 78. 

wicjt, indefinite adverb II, 72; nidt 
nur—fondernanud, used as 
coordinating conjunctions II, 65. 

widts, indefinite substantive pro- 
noun I, 23; II, 13. 

nie, niemals, indefinite adverbs 
II, 72. 

Niemand, indefinite substantive 


Oo. 


0B, whether, if, subordinating con- 
junction II, 65; with subjunctive © 


pronoun I, 23; II, 12; declined 
a1 p28, 

nirgend, indefinite adverb of place 
Hy, 72. 

nod nidt, not ye I, 14; nod eins 
mal, once more I, 60. 

nominative II, 3; case of the 
subject and predicate II, 77; when 
a predicate-nominative is required 
II, 78; English predicate-nominat- 
ives after verbs of considering, 
electing, etc., generally rendered 
by the preposition 3u or fiir II, 78; 
nominative with the force of a 
vocative II, 78. 

nouns II, 4 foll.; declined I, 14. 
17. 19. 30; plurals of nouns formed 
by the ending er I, 32; by the end- 
ing en I, 34; when nouns denoting 
measurement or weight are not in- 
flected I, 38; II, 76; how predicate- 
nouns, and nouns in apposition 
agree with their governing words 
EE, 7S: 

numerals I, 34; cardinals II, 25; 
when they are inflected II, 26; or- 
dinals I, 42; II, 26; numeral ad- 
verbs II, 26; II, 70. ; 

niigen, governs a dative II, 78, 


I, 63; II, 88; translated by if I, 74; 
separated or dropped in the com- 


pound conjunctions obgleid, ob- 
fcjon, obwobl I, 102. 

oberhalb, preposition with the 
genitive IT, 61. 


obgleic, obfdjon, and the subor- 


dinating conjunctions synonymous 
to it I, 102; II, 65; they require 
the verb to be at the end I, 102. 

objective case, German equiv- 
lent of II, 3; English verbs gov- 
erning the objective case generally 
rendered by German verbs with 
the accusative II, 78; when ren- 
dered by the dative I, 50; II, 78. 

pccupy, t, how translated I, 
76. 

© d 8, inflection of IT, 5. 

poder, coordinating conjunction II, 
65. . 


P, 


participle, present, how formed 
I, 105; past participle, how formed 
I, 70. 71; without augment in in- 
’ separable compounds, and in verbs 
with the ending iren I, 71; II, 33; 
past participles of strong verbs have 
the ending en I, 71; past participles 
of the modal auxiliaries and some 
other verbs (fafjen, hiren, jehen, hel- 
fen, heifen) often take the form of 
infinitives I, 108; II, 55; future par- 
ticiple of the passive with 3u, used 
attributively II, 85; participles de- 
clined and compared I, 105; II, 48. 
85; place of the past participle I, 
14; II, 90; participles and their 
adjuncts placed before their gov- 
erning nouns I, 105; II, 90; past 
participles after fommen with the 
force cf a present participle II, 85; 
past participles with the force of an 
imperative II, 85; participles with 
the force of adjectives II, 85; in- 
stances in which the German lan- 


110 


of, English preposition, translated 
by the genitive II, 3; when trans- 
lated by the preposition von, and 
when by the genitive I, 21. 28; not 
translated after nouns of measure- 
ment and weight I, 38; not trans- 
lated after fractions I, 46; in what 
other instances it is not translated, 
£2425, 1548. 

officer, how to translate I, 86. 

oft, indefinite adverb of time II, 73; 
comparison of II, 74, 

one, preposition with the accusa- 
tive II, 61; followed by an infini- 
tive I, 109. 

one another, how translated I, 
83. 

order of words II, 90,91. See 
Arrangement. 


guage admits of participial con- 
structions II, 85. 86;  participial 
constructions cannot be formed by 
means of auxiliaries II, 85; parti- 
cipial constructions generally used 
to express an accompanying action 
II, 85; German equivalents for 
English participial constructions 
II, 85. 86; past participles after 
verbs of receiving II, 85. 

parts of speech II, 3. 

passive voicell, 48. 81; present 
indicative of the passive conjugated 
I, 74; imperfect indicative and sub- 
junctive I, 77; perfect and pluper- 
fect indicative and subjunctive I, 
80; complete paradigm of the pas- 
sive II, 49 foll. The passive voice 
formed by the auxiliary twerbden or 
fein I, 74. 77; Il, 48; place of the 


participle of the auxiliary in the — 


passive tenses II, 48; the passive 


agent (with by) expressed by vom 
or durd) I; 74; I, 82; impersonal © 











ae 


passive II, 54, 82; German equiv- 
alents of the passive voice II, 81; 
what verbs admit of a complete 
passive voice II, 82. 

people, how translated I, 86. 


_. perfect indicative and subjunctive, 


how formed I, 62; II, 38; of the 
passive I, 80; German perfect tense 
used with the force of the English 
past tense I, 81; especially in de- 
tached statements II, 83; has the 
force of the English present-per- 
fect II, 83. . 

pflegen with the infinitive, how 
translated I, 109. 

pluperfect indicative and sub- 
junctive conjugated I, 62; of the 
passive I, 80; the exceptional plu- 
perfect ,,id) hatte gelobt gehabt” IT, 
46. 

plural of nouns I, 30. 32. 34; of 
feminine nouns I, 59; plurals in er 
I, 32; Il, 7. 8; irregular plurals II, 
9; plurals in 8 II, 9; plurals of 
proper names II, 10; plural of the 
finite verb, when the subject con- 
sists of two nouns connected by 
und II, 75. 

possessive case, English, how 
translated into German I, 73; II, 3; 
the English possessive case rendered 
either by a genitive or by a com- 

_ pound noun II, 79. 

possessive pronominal adjectives 
I, 20. 11. 16; Il, 23. 24. 43; de- 
clined like the indefinite article I, 
18. 20; plural of I, 31; -possessives 
of the third person used for address 
II, 23; possessives used predicat- 

-ively II, 24; substantively I, 43; 
AI, 24. 25; der meine, der meinige, 
meiner II, 25; possessive pronouns 
have a double agreement II, 76. 

potential mood, English, with 
could or might how translated I, 65; 
II, 58; potential with should or would 


lll 


after the conjunction that, how 
translated I, 65; the English poten- 
tial pluperfect with should (ought 
to), could and would, how translated 
I, 80. 108; II, 58. 

potential verbs II, 35. 55. 

prefixes of separable compound 
verbs placed at the end I, 68; II, 

' 59; they are often placed before the 
infinitive with 3u I, 69; when they 
are not separated from the verb I, 
69; II, 60; prefixes partly separable, 
partly inseparable I, 69; II, 59; 
compound prefixes II, 60. 

prepositions II, 61; with genit- 
ive, dative, and accusative I, 93; 
II, 61; requiring the dative or ac- 
cusative II, 62; I, 93; II, 63; con- 
tracted with the article I, 93. 100; 
Il, 64; often translated by preposi- 
tions differing from their original 
meanings I, 93, 94; II, 62; prepo- 
sitions in connection with tne ad- 
verbs two, da, ber, hin, hier I, 98. 99; 
Il, 64. 71. 72. 

present indicative of the regular 
verb in the active voice I, 56; 
present subjunctive I, 62; present 
indic. of the passive I, 74; present 
subjunctive of the passive I, 77; 
present tense with the force of the 
English perfect I, 54; with the 
force of an English past tense II, 
83; with the force of a future II, 
83; with the force of an imperative 
II, 83. ; 

pronouns, personal I, 45. 49. 51; 
II, 10 foll.; place of I, 50; pronouns 
of the second person used only in 
relations of intimacy II, 12; pro- 
nouns of the third person in polite 
conversation used instead of the 
pronouns of the second person I, 
11; II, 12; indefinite substantive 
pronouns IT, 12; indefinite prono-. 
minal adjectives II, 20; used sub- 


stantively II, 20; adjective pro- 
nouns agree with their governing 
words II, 75. See relatives, demon- 
stratives, possessives, reflexives, interro- 
gauives 


redt, adverb of intensity, how to 
translate it II, 73. 

Redt haben, to be right I, 13. 

reciprocal pronouns, rendered 
by reflexives I, 83. 

reflexive pronouns, theirform 
and use I, 52; II, 12. 

reflexive verbs, definition of 
II, 51; paradign:s of I, 83; II, 52; 

-how translated into English I, 83; 

English neuter verbs that have 
also an active meaning, generally 
rendered by German reflexives II, 
51; reflexive verbs have generally 
the reflexive pronoun in the accus- 
ative I, 83; II, 52; ordinary transit- 
ive verbs may become reflexive II, 
51; proper reflexives If, 51 foll.; 
they have no past participles II, 
52; reflexive impersonals II, 54. 
55. 82; reflexive verbs in connect- 
ion with laffen have a passive mean- 
ing II, 81; reflexive verbs with or 
without faffen have often a passive 


Ss. 


S, |, 8, when these characters for the 
German sound of s are used I, 6. 

f} (sz) final, changed into ff after a 
short vowel when an ending is 
added te the wordI, 32 (foot- 
note); IT, 6. 

fammt, preposition with the dative 

II, 61. 
fdeinen, connected with a predi- 
cate-nominative IT, 78. 
fhelten, [a impfen in the pass- 
ive, construed with a predicate- 
nominative II, 78; in the active 


112 


pronunciation I, 2 foll. 

proper names, declension of I, 
28; II, 9 foll. 

protasis and apodosis I, 59; II, 
67. 


R. 


meaning II, 81; reflexive verbs 
governing the genitive II, 78. 

es regnet, I, 86. 

relative pronouns, declined! 
I, 25. 31; agreement with their 
antecedents I, 25. 31; Il, 76; ex- 
amples of relative constructions IT, 
17; clauses introduced by relatives 
have the finite verb at the end I, 25; 
II, 65; if the antecedent of a relative 
is a personal pronoun of the first or 
second person, either the finite verb 
is placed in the third person, or the 
antecedent must be repeated II, 76; 
relative adverbs II, 70. 73; in cor- 
relation to demonstratives II, 74; 
subjunctive in relative clauses II, 
89; clauses introduced by relatives 
must be separated by commas II, 73. 

rennen, imperfect indicative, how 
formed I, 58; IT, 35; imperfect sub- 
junctive I, 62; II, 35. 

to rise, translated by aunfftehen or 
aufgeben I, 68, 


they require two accusatives II, 


79. 

fd)meideln, governs the dative 

' JI, 78; has the reflexive pronoun 
in the dative I, 83. 

fdqjmer3en, impersonally used 
I, 87. : 

es jdneit, I, 86. 

fehr, the adverb of viel II, 73. 

fein, irregular verb Il, 36; para 
digm of II, 41 foll.; present indi- 
cative conjugated I, 8: imperfect I, 
47; perfect I, 46; p'uperfect I, 62; 








ae enh ee eb 7 





en a. PT Se 7 








subjunctive of present and imper- 
fect I, 62; of perfect and pluperfect 
1, 62; used impersonally (e8 ift mir) 
I, 86; used as auxiliary of the ac- 
tive voice instead of haben I, 99; II, 
39; used as auxiliary of the passive 
instead of werden I, 74. 77; II, 48; 
takes fein as an auxiliary in the 
perfect II, 39, 

jein, possessive adjective of the 
third person, see possessive pronomt- 
nal adjectives. 

feiner, genitive of er II, 11; genitive 
and dative feminine of jein I, 18. 20. 

feit, since, preposition with the dat- 


ive I, 34; II, 61; use of feit II, 62; . 


subordinating conjunction II, 65. 

feitdem subordinating conjunction, 
synonym of feit II, 65. 

self, compounds with self correspond 
either to felbft, or to German re- 
flexives I, 83. 

felten, indefinite adverb of time 
1.73. 

jembden, imperfect indicative I, 58; 
II, 35; imperfect subjunctive I, 62; 
II, 35. : 

sentences, dependent, require the 
finite verb to be at the end II, 65. 

separable compound verbs, see 
verbs. 

shall, corresponds to the auxiliary 
werden II, 39; when it must be 
translated by follen I, 60. 

fid), dative and accusative singular 
and plural of the reflexive pronoun 
of the third person I, 52; II, 12. | 

jie, personal pronoun of the third 
person, either nominative or ac- 
cusative singular feminine, or nom- 
inative or accusative of the plural 
of all genders I, 45; IT, 11. 12; if 
spelled with a capital, it has the 
meaning of a pronoun of the second 
person, in singular or plural J, 11. 

fo (so, thus), adverb of manner and 


113 


intensity II, 70; fo in the apodosis 
not translated I, 59; II, 67; I, 102; 
jo, translated by as in the first part 
of a comparison I, 13; fo followed 
by aud, idiomatically used in a 
concessive sense II, 67. 

{0 — al8 (as—as), subordinating con- 
junctions I, 65; the jo often com- 
bined with adverbs of time (fobald, 
fo oft etc.), in which case the fol- 
lowing alg may be omitted II, 66. 

jolder, fold ein, demonstrative 
adjective II, 17. 

jotlen, translated by shall I, 60; 
peculiarities of conjugation II, 55. 
58. | 

some, when not translated II, 20 
foll. 

fonder, obsolete preposition with 
accusative II, 61. 

jondern, coordinating conjunction 
Il, 65; when but must be translated 
by it I, 72; II, 65; nicht nur — jon- 
dern anc II, 65. 

jowohl—al8 and, have the force 
of coordinating conjunctions II, 65. 

ftatt, instead, preposition with gen- 
itive IT, 61. 

fte hen, to stand, irregular strong verb 
E91; 31,37. 

ftet$, indefinite adverb of time, 
synonym to immer II, 72. 

subject, placed in the nominative 
II, 77; when placed after the verb 
I, 72; II, 90; for subject-infinitive | 
see infinitive. 

subjunctive formation of I, 62; 
of the passive I, 77; of the future I, 
64; of fonnen, miiffen, haben, fein I, 
62; subjunctive of indirect state- 
ment II, 87. 88; after daf and damit 
I, 62; II, 87, 88; in relative clauses 
II, 89; in general concessive clauses 
II, 89; tenses of the subjunctive I, 
63, 80; II, 88; subjunctive after 
verbs of asking and doubting fol- 


& 


lowed by ob I, 63.. 64. 65; II, 88; 
subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect 
in hypothetical clauses I, 65; II, 
89; present subjunctive in impera- 
tive sentences II, 87; subjunctive 
imperfect or pluperfect: in exclama- 
tory sentences II, 87. 

substantives, German, written 
with capital initials I, 9. 


114 


cd 


superlative, how formed I, 22; 
II, 30; irregular II, 31; predicative 
superlative with am II, 30; agree- 
ment of the predicative superlative 
in connection with the article I1,30; 
absolute and relative superlatives 
II, 69; adverbial superlative II, 69. 

syllabication I, 7. 


a 


es tagt I, 86. 
taufen, construed with a double 
accusative II, 79; in the passive 
with a predicate-nominative II, 78. 
tenses of the verb, simple and com- 
pound II, 32; formation of com- 
pound tenses II, 38; use of the 
tenses of the subjunctive IT, 88 foll. 
than, how translated II, 66. 
that, rendered by dag or dies I, 56; 
by jener I, 12; by derjenigeI, 26. 27; 
sby bdaff I, 54; Il, 65; by der, die, 
das Il, 16; that which, how 
translated I, 94. 
there is. ¢8 ift; there are, e 
find I, 34; e8 gibt I, 36. 


Zhor, declension of II, 5. 

thun, irregular strong verb I, 91; 
Ii, 57; how distinguished from 
madjen I, 49. 

till, translated I, 60. 94; not till, 
erft I, 94. 


‘time of the dav I, 95. 96. 


titles I, 46. 

to and for before names of places. 
rendered by nadj I, 29; to, how 
translated I, 94. 

transitive verbs are those which 
govern the accusative as direct ob- 
ject II, 82. 

tro, preposition with the genitive 
II, 61. 


U. 


iiber, preposition with the accusat- 
ive or dative I, 93; II, 62. 

iiberall, indefinite adverb of place 
II, 72. 

um, preposition with the accusative 
Ii, 61; with the infinitive and 3u, 
translated in order that I, 72; um — 
willen, compound preposition with 
the genitive II, 61. 

umd, and, coordinating conjunction 
II, 65. 

ungeadtet, in spite of, preposition 
with genitive II,61; ungeadtet, al- 
though, subordinating conjunction 
IT, 65. 


unless, translated by wofern nidt, 
aufer enn, wenn nidt, e8 fet Dent 
dafg II, 67. 

Unredt haben, to be wrong I, 
+3. 

uns, us, dative and accusative plural 
of id: used reflexively TI,.12._ 

unfer, possessive adjective IT, ll; | 
II, 23; genitive plural of id I, 11. 

unter, preposition with dative or 
phat i I, 93; II, 62. 

unter halb, preposition with gen- 
itive II, 61. 

unweit, preposition with dative 
II, 61. 


- 


t 
: 
F 








oem ep 





RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
University of California Library 
or to the 
~ NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
University of California 
Richmond, CA 94804-4698 





ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 

e 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
(510) 642-6753 

e J|-year loans may be recharged by bringing © 
books to NIRLF 

e Renewals and recharges may be made 4 
days prior to due date. 








DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 





7 2004 





=aww sé 








Behrea atsg 























12,000 (11/95) 







































a3 
is 

as to 
tee 
z 8 
t-* 
nectved 
4 
rata ts a" 

+, ot. 
oer ay 
at 
oyftas 
wale eed 
silee: 
cet 









Setiote 
r een 
oy 


Crt? — 
sngeis 
a 
a 


Sire fre 
SiMe aeee 
afte scee sen Ee 
lisritast 
isa: 
: 


rere 
Ss 
viet 
eietticopiessaste-poen 
Sharss spor 
> hisses <i 
rid os * 
te 
as 
ca F<" wt! 
Sas 5 4 












Pee re ae HAS eae eae trai eta ta ny 
Ribera ghee 
ot ey oS , oi 
syagiay of TAA 
432 artis ie % 
i" * wt ; 





















: sree at 
ee steer? 
Soe 


be os} 
if 
- Lhe 
Seetat 
~~ 
+3 S 







sPaoetoe 
pealata esas 







et 

eS are, 
ep 

ae 
= 
iy. 


J eonld Peset 
Poot heigpaks 
rid 


ty 


. P oes 

is RATAN ter ‘f 

NG taiine os 

ee Fe 
Mop vuitinna ty 











enh 
tare a aoe 
°3 . i 
a 


sy! . 

es 3 Starts 
SF ethos o| 

Fz. - 8 


poets 
Ssteey 
Coed trs. 
Besse 
fon A 
6 
4 







t 


7 
+ 
et 


‘ 





5 
otor= 


aa 
sstintagass 
> Prate 5, 





nf: - en 
teas 











r - Talla obs por, 
* wen ae — = 
5 en ected lorie 
S65 el 34 -* 
om Sen ot ee 

































2 reat -} \ 
fase tee Cit: Seeyze rae 
4 ‘: Tats Peat enl She Cede .Y) 
3 Sty} setthags UM es rath 4 
pete NaC RIRD Mn 
a ase peo 
i} oe 


hs 
= 
- tT 


webxranst 
Serie 
peor 

; Sehecaowe 38 
hee 
es 
bs 


* 
be Pas. Tero 
ene 
rae 


3 St > : 
ta aisctare eda: 
ipiertiresesy 
Fenthenersccese 
= a — 
“ 


Letoha, 










= 











* 
he 


ih: SS 
", =e) : 
pps edocs a tines hee retts 
ag ea Cela ty t= acters 2 Nesthewie > yas ss eS 
; erists aris 
ssraeaaseseai Bary itt etree ree meee een rT) 
eter Itelshanset pee ety rls ert ; BS 
retrtesS roll gk met lt bet ri 
* <. .s es 
é tT ae - 
beast biodata! caste ts wha cee teera eee Steet: 
EB 


Aye 

EN . ADH 

{ Fs i Bay : 

AEs HS, 
Sites 
‘ 


. 
a 

















Ay ve apts 
POUR TRA LED RL 
ve oo a 
BO HEADER ERR 
Havin T Cas eatTE 


CONES Mi 
fea 


t Sitths oA 
Biers pet sy ¢ 4 
Ve ay i 


¥ 
q 










ue 

! 
i 

pia iy 





we 
rate 


; erat pietauer: 
PS ats 1h! aby a eiavitt ey 
i een i ai 









fit! Me ALE Way 
eR Ladd Rare ni 
i oF, Au ¢} iy ua) x4 {5 ¥ seht Goatee . 
utes see J Hecate id es ‘ 









yobs) 






BLP d be 
y s ry et ered 
ANE af eae yee 
) * ’ i 


* 
‘a! 
mS 
ae 
oon 
oa SF 
Tatiaetenaay: 
ee 













way 


Nise i 
aos agent 
| 


tf 







“sete 


pants 
oe 
wk “9 * ‘ 
Zar iacmviee . 


















vot 


sects) 
site 


2. 


PNT Bae 

i) Turek Metts 

i Wane dart tH 

4 x 4 Aure they 
iss aed it 


, 
‘s 


























ne Art 
at é xDY) Relea ; yah 
penta poate yee aa Sreaieisien: ; 
Bs this Riapaee Belin haa at ase AC cane ii ia 
a Selenss, + att iris 
ashi td) : Let sey oe 
» 













nit 
' 






ey wae 
é Beer Gu 








wy ada 
ae 
2 q 

4 mar te 











ote 
aot wee 
ae iekeee 








vi 
— 


peasy 
i 
z she > tis {= ites al: 3 te 


* 













Tak 





Pn gt 
ort 






€ 


pare 
5 





Sembee 
Sats 
Sige 





a, Saas 


tt 


au 


’ 
M 
‘ 


* 
eS 
























Any 
: PAA 
st Wey, * 
Sth Rens wet 
Mee Paneer renaean hae ‘ a 
ear SRSA inc ae Nasa 
Dinstints paste. pele AEE, of uh 
Seeeehe aya ve | ae Tee vist. 
tate % x ety He § é 
2 : 
fe tients Ks WATE NATE FOr: 
Pt ate se wh Mi Poet 
: Bis ees rye eee, 
ast 7 See fa! ? : 
2¥ pigs Nf sees <= 4 
hae 
+ 


r, 
sreseeees 
Eos rei 
stasttae aha eae 


apr pey ors 
Bt 
aor 
Fae 
jes 
st 




















i 
- 
art 

Te 

a 
ee, 
aor s 
Ett 
* 
eat 
$s) 


¢ 
* 
os 
“tet¢ 
o 
y aters, 


ieee 
iieiehocsy 














Dato 
sSaetetsies 
E 
3 


eeaksea 
ab 


+ 
~" 


e 7 
ver , 
eC tipte ce 
ayes 


a ; 4 : x Powe nt 
pitti eee met Lg 
Aare hee af Cir teet es : : 
ENS 
4 ee o WP ess ip sane fi . 
UH SOS oy LOA 
Cin Sty ver ay Jatt ae 


Soke Sea ot a ay 

UNE NE Asn Se Se ara 
ee ten pity st 
aA tune eae DE eer a 


oe 









rates 
re 
#4 





6, 


- ¢ . 







# 
barat 
A ahs 


tae 
+ 


ans 
. 
prow 
yo ot 
cae 


eee 







asa oyyies ~ y , : 
abo ia Aaa aay a Sarah Bf 
ants 7 . . 





we. 

~~ 

ot ae 

. tT 
LTS 

rear 
53 ios 





~* 


- oe -* 
mit > 
te 

eee poe 


ey) 
3 tit 
Moe Seen fon tS bes 
SBE Se 
m3 
— retin 
bere ataes 
Sepa ty sss 
335253 


